V8900 - System Manual

To Table of Contents
SYSTEM USER MANUAL

LDS V8900 Vibration Testing System
For
Brüel & Kjær VTS Intranet

At
Jarman Way, Royston, SG8 5BQ
ly
Document No: - 3005290-UM-EN-02
Revision: - 02
On
Issue Date: - 19/07/2017
System Serial Number: - N/A
e This is the English Original Version

nc
Close Manual
re
fe
Re
Brüel & Kjær VTS Ltd

Jarman Way, Royston,
Hertfordshire. SG8 5BQ
England
Web: - www.bksv.com
e-mail: ukinfo@bksv.com
Preface
Revision History
Issue Issue Date Amendment Description Author
01 28/02/2017 Initial Issue of Reference Manual Clive Twinley
02 19/07/2017 Updated to include further changes to the Pedestal Clive Twinley

Control Unit and newly introduced Options.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Brüel & Kjaer VTS Ltd, manufacturers of LDS vibration test systems, have made every effort to ensure the accuracy of the information
contained in this manual.
Re
Brüel & Kjær VTS Ltd disclaims any liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the application or use
of any information contained in this document. The foregoing disclaimer applies to damages or personal injury, property damage, loss of
operation, loss of profits, loss of product or loss of time, whether incurred by the purchaser, the purchaser's employees or third party.
Information in this document does not constitute a warranty, representation or guarantee concerning the suitability or performance of Brüel &
Kjær products. No such warranty, representation or guarantee is expressed or implied.
Furthermore, information contained in this document, does not guarantee or imply any ownership of site specific design. It is therefore the
total responsibility of the installation designer to ensure compliance with any legal or statutory requirements in the country of use.
Additionally, information contained in this document is subject to change without further notice.
LDS is a brand name of Brüel & Kjær. Unless otherwise noted, brands, product names, trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of
their respective holders.
Subject to the right to use its equipment, Brüel & Kjær does not convey any right, title or interest in its intellectual property, including, without
limitation, its patents, copyrights and know-how.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by any means or for any purpose other than the Customer's personal
use, without the express written permission of Brüel & Kjær VTS Ltd.
Document produced and published by the Engineering Department of Brüel & Kjær VTS Ltd., Jarman Way, Royston, Hertfordshire. SG8 5BQ.
England.
0000-3005290-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

Preface
Table of Contents
1. Introduction
2. Health and Safety
3. Operating Procedures
4. Technical Data
5. System Description
6. Maintenance
ly
7. Spare Parts Lists
8. Installation
On
9. Reference Data
10. Schematics
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0000-3005290-UM-EN-02

Preface
ly
On
e
nc
Page Intentionally Blank
re
fe
Re
0000-3005290-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

1. Introduction
Table of Contents
1.1. Purpose of the Manual
1.2. Contact Details
1.3. Symbols Used in the Document
1.4. Declaration of Conformity
ly
1.1. Purpose of the Manual
On
This manual provides the User / Operator with all of the appropriate information for installing,
operating and maintaining the Vibration Testing System supplied.
1.2. Contact Details

Brüel & Kjær VTS
Address:
e
Brüel & Kjær VTS Ltd.,
Jarman Way, Royston,
nc
Herts. SG8 5BQ
England
Tel: - +44 (0) 1223 389 800
Fax: +44 (0) 1223 389 919
re
e-mail: ukinfo@bksv.com
Web: www.bksv.com/en/products/shakers-and-exciters
fe
Local Contact Details

Local Contact: Visit http://www.bksv.com/en/Contact
Service and Repair

Re
Visit http://www.bksv.com/en/Contact
1.3. Symbols Used in the Document

WARNING: WARNINGS
• Advice on seriously hazardous conditions. Possibility of severe/fatal personnel injury
and/or serious equipment damage.
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0100-ALL-UM-EN-01

1. Introduction
CAUTION: CAUTIONS
• Advice on hazardous conditions. Possibility of personnel injury and/or equipment
damage.
WARNING: ELECTRICAL HAZARD
• Advice on electrically hazardous conditions. Possibility of severe/fatal personnel
injury and/or serious equipment damage.
• Recycling information
ly
• Dispose of electrical items in accordance with local environmental regulations
On
WARNING: HIGH TEMPERATURE
• Advice on potentially high surface temperatures
WARNING: HIGH NOISE LEVEL

•
e
Advice on potentially high noise levels
nc
WARNING: MAGNETIC FLUX
• Advice on magnetic fields for medical implants
WARNING: NO ENTRY
re
• Advice on limit of danger zone.
1.4. Declaration of Conformity

fe
Brüel & Kjær VTS equipment is designed specifically for vibration testing and should not be used
for any other purpose except by agreement with Brüel & Kjær VTS.
Re
The equipment complies where applicable with the following European Union (EU) directives:
Machinery directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage directive 2014/35/EU
EMC directive 2014/30/EU
For installation, use and maintenance of this equipment the responsibilities of employer and
employee are specified in EU Work Equipment Directive 89/655/EEC which refers to suitability of
work equipment, maintenance, specific risks, information & instructions and training. The
directive is implemented in the United Kingdom by statutory regulations ‘Provision and Use of
Work Equipment Regulations 1998’ and by similar regulations in other EU countries.
Brüel & Kjær VTS product design provides personal protection in accordance with the applicable
directives listed above, and care has been taken to minimise the risks associated with all
0100-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved
1. Introduction
equipment constituting a vibration test system. Since however the vibrator and other equipment
contains moving parts and can exert large forces on jigs, fixtures and payloads, the area
surrounding such equipment should be declared a Danger Zone and suitable precautions taken by
operators working there.
CAUTION:
• Brüel & Kjaer VTS does not accept responsibility for risks introduced by non-
Brüel & Kjær jigs, fixtures and payloads.
Brüel & Kjær VTS equipment as supplied by Brüel & Kjær meets the essential requirements of all
applicable EU directives. To maintain compliance, the equipment must be maintained and serviced
by personnel certified by Brüel & Kjær as having successfully completed a Brüel & Kjær approved
ly
training course relating to the equipment. Only parts and components supplied under a Brüel &
Kjær part number or otherwise specifically approved by Brüel & Kjær shall be used in the
maintenance and servicing of the equipment.
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

1. Introduction
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

Table of Contents
2.1. Purpose of the Section
2.2. Definitions
2.3. Visual Symbols
2.4. Intended Use of the Machine
ly
2.5. Risks and Hazards
2.5.1. Noise Risks and Hazards
On
2.5.2. Personnel Risks and Hazards
2.5.3. Location and Environment Risks and Hazards
2.5.4. Mechanical Risks and Hazards
2.5.5. Electrical Risks and Hazards
2.5.6. Pneumatic Risks and Hazards
e
2.5.7. Hydraulic Risks and Hazards
2.5.8. Water Risks and Hazards
nc
2.5.9. Temperature Risks and Hazards
2.5.10. Blower Outlet Risks and Hazards (Air-cooled vibrators)
2.5.11. Cables and Hoses Risks and Hazards
2.5.12. Chemicals Risks and Hazards
re
2.5.13. Low Frequency Fields Risks and Hazards

2.5.14. Installation Risks and Hazards
2.5.15. Battery Risks and Hazards
fe
2.5.16. Lifting Hazards

2.5.17. Operational Risks and Hazards
Re
2.6. Emergency Stop

2.7. Remote Control Operation
2.8. Training
2.9. Maintenance
2.10. Customer Responsibilities
2.11. Before-use Checks
2.11.1. General
2.11.2. Vibrator
2.11.3. Head Expander
2.11.4. Slip Table

Table of Contents
2.12. Disposal of the Equipment
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

2.1. Purpose of the Section

The purpose of this section is to provide health and safety advice.
The advice provided is by no means exhaustive.
Refer to local and national regulations where applicable.
2.2. Definitions
For the purpose of this manual:
Acronym or Headline Description

A zone extending 2 metres from the periphery of the vibrator and
ly
cabling.
Danger Zone
Outside this zone noise hazards may still be a risk to health and
safety.
On
Exposed Person Any person either wholly or partially in the danger zone.
Any person transporting, installing, adjusting, operating, cleaning,
Operator
maintaining or repairing the vibration system.
Main control position This is next to the vibration control unit.
The test piece, part or assembly under test including any jigs,
Payload fixtures, accelerometers and fastenings used to mount it to the
e vibrator moving element.
SELV Safe Extra Low Voltage
nc
2.3. Visual Symbols
The following visual symbols may be used on the equipment or in this manual:
re
Symbol Description
Alternating Current
fe
Direct Current
Earth (ground) Termination
Re
Protective Conductor Terminal
WEEE Symbol indicating separate collection for WEEE- Waste of electrical and electronic
equipment
DANGER:
• Advice on crushing hazards

Symbol Description
WARNING: WARNINGS
• Advice on seriously hazardous conditions. Possibility of severe/fatal
personnel injury and/or serious equipment damage.
CAUTION: CAUTIONS
• Advice on hazardous conditions. Possibility of personnel injury and/or
equipment damage.
WARNING: ELECTRICAL HAZARD
• Advice on electrically hazardous conditions. Possibility of severe/fatal
ly
personnel injury and/or serious equipment damage.
WARNING: HOT SURFACE
On
• Advice on potentially high surface temperatures
WARNING: HIGH NOISE LEVEL

• Advice on potentially high noise levels
WARNING: MAGNETIC FLUX

• Advice on magnetic fields for medical implants
e
2.4. Intended Use of the Machine
nc
This machine has been designed for vibration testing of payloads.
WARNING:
• No personnel should be within the Danger Zone, when the system is
re
operating.
WARNING:
• This machine has not been designed to carry a human or animal payload.
fe
The customer is responsible for any such use and any risk assessments
associated with such use.
The machine should not be used for any other purpose.

Re
2.5. Risks and Hazards

When planning, installing, operating or maintaining a vibration test system, careful consideration must
be given to the potential hazards inherent in the use of such equipment.
WARNING: WARNING LABELS AND INSTRUCTIONS
• Take note of all warning labels.
• Read this manual before putting the machine into operation.
• Take note of any installation instructions that may be supplied separately.

2.5.1. Noise Risks and Hazards

WARNING: HIGH NOISE LEVELS
• Exposure of the human body to high noise levels can damage health.
• Electrodynamic vibration test equipment can generate significant noise
levels and ideally should be sited within a soundproof cell.
• The operator control position, together with signal generation, control and
monitoring equipment should be located outside the soundproof cell.
• Power amplifiers, cooling units and other ancillary equipment can also
generate significant noise levels and should be located away from the
ly
operator control position.
• If the ideal situation is impractical, all personnel at risk must be made
aware of the hazards involved and a directive issued that ear defenders
On
should be worn.
Refer to section 4 of this manual for details of the sound levels produced by this machine.
For further details: -
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the ‘Noise at Work Directive’ (currently
2003/10/EC).
•
e
Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local noise at work regulations.
2.5.2. Personnel Risks and Hazards

nc
WARNING: PERSONAL PROTECTION
• Before starting work, inspect the access routes and the area to be worked
in for any potential hazards. E.g. holes in floors, sharp edges of installed
re
equipment, either at normal working levels or at high level, etc.

• When working with electrical equipment, the necessary protective
measures must be taken to ensure maximum safety for the people as well
as property.
fe
• Keep the area tidy and ensure the equipment is protected against damage
and unauthorised intervention during the course of the work.
• Remove all metal bracelets, rings etc. that can cause short circuits when
Re
working on the equipment.

• Use only single-ended, fully insulated tools. Shafts of screwdrivers etc., are
to be insulated.
• Use only isolated test instruments.
• All work at height where there is a risk of a fall liable to cause personal
injury must comply with the Work at Height Regulations 2005. For further
information, contact the Health and Safety Executive (www.hse.gov.uk).
• Observe any markings/labels on this power system relating to the new
European Harmonised wire colours (Amendment No.2 To BS7671:2001)

2.5.2.1 Manual Handling

In the UK, The Manual Handling Operations Regulations, 1992, (as amended in 2002), require that all
persons are familiar with the Regulations, that they take care to minimise risk of injury to themselves
and others, that they are properly trained, and that the correct equipment is used.
1. Before lifting loads, stand as
close as possible to the load.
2. Keep the back straight and as
vertical as possible.
3. Use the leg muscles to lift in
preference to the arms.
4. Minimise twisting, stretching
ly
and stooping.
5. Loads should be lifted,
withdrawn, inserted and
On
lowered evenly, without
jerking, maintaining the load
level and balanced, with Figure 2-1 Manual Lifting Guide
adequate support. The limits Note: The diagram shows recommended limits for men and
on lifting imposed by the women. If twisting is involved, the weights should be
Regulations are shown in the reduced by 20%.
diagram.
•
e
In the UK, refer to the latest issue of the ‘Manual Handling Operations Regulations’ [(1992,
as amended in 2002, at the time of publication) contact the Health and Safety Executive
nc
(www.hse.gov.uk)].
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local manual handling regulations.
2.5.2.2 Working at Height.

re
In general terms, “working at height” means any place of work from where personnel may fall a
distance, likely to cause injury or even death. So this can be at, above or below ground level.
Within the working environments for electrodynamic vibration testing systems, there may be times
when personnel are required to work at height, whether it be to access payloads on the equipment or
fe
when the equipment is mounted on a seismic base in a pit.

Anyone “working at height” should be provided with the necessary means to safely access the working
area, whether that be by ladder (for simple tasks of less than 30 minutes), scaffolding, a tower platform
or a powered work platform.
Re
Personnel working at height, should be sufficiently trained in the use of any equipment provided and
also any personal fall protection systems employed.
• In the UK, refer to the latest issue of ‘The Work at Height Regulations’ [(2005 at the time of
publication) contact the Health and Safety Executive (www.hse.gov.uk)].
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local working at height regulations.
2.5.2.3 Anti-Static Precautions

WARNING: SUPPLY VOLTAGE
• Ensure that the supply voltage indicated on the cabinet identification/data
plate is correct for the installation.

WARNING: SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENTS

• All stages which involve handling of assemblies fitted with any
semiconductor components should contain protection against the
possibility of static induced damage.
WARNING: WRIST STRAPS
• The printed circuit cards should only be removed from their protective
carriers in static-safe handling areas by persons wearing static protection
such as wrist straps.
• Cabinets have anti-static connection points for wrist straps which must be
used when installing/removing printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies.
ly
2.5.3. Location and Environment Risks and Hazards
On
WARNING: LOCATION AND ENVIRONMENT
• This equipment must be located in a restricted access location where
access is through the use of a tool, or lock and key, or other means of
security, and is controlled by the authority responsible for the location.
• This equipment must only be mounted on a concrete or other non-
combustible surface that is capable of supporting the total weight,
including payload if applicable.
•
e
For ease of access and to maintain optimum system cooling, observe the
clearances stated in the appropriate manual or guide. Equipment that has a
nc
rear panel with openings must be spaced away by the distance stated on
the design diagram supplied with the equipment.
• Dust build-up within the system may cause premature failure. In dusty
environments filter the ventilation air entering the equipment room.
re
Ensure regular cleaning of the air filters.

• Do not allow water or any foreign object to enter the system. Do not place
objects containing liquid on top of or near the unit.
• To ensure reliable operation the maximum ambient temperature into
fe
which the equipment is placed must not exceed that stated on the design
diagram supplied with the equipment.
• To enable full performance, this equipment must not be operated at an
altitude exceeding 1000m.
Re
• At altitudes exceeding 1000m, this equipment must be operated at

reduced power levels and will require careful monitoring.
• This equipment must not be operated in an altitude exceeding 2000m
otherwise all safety approvals will be invalidated.
2.5.4. Mechanical Risks and Hazards

It must be remembered that vibrators can be used to test equipment to destruction and that the forces
available can be considerably amplified by local resonances. Precautions must be taken to ensure that
any parts of the payload which may become detached cannot cause injury to personnel.
Payloads must be designed and mounted such that they cannot overturn the vibrator either statically
or under test. Further, they must not exceed the rated load of the vibrator bearings.
In so far as their purpose allows, payloads should have no sharp edges, no sharp angles and no rough
surfaces likely to cause injury. Payloads should also have no trapping points, e.g. where fingers or
hands might be trapped during test.
It is recommended that all persons entering the danger zone, whether the vibrator is energised or not,
are aware of the risks and that appropriate protective clothing is worn. Other risks specific to siting
and operation of the vibrator are identified in the relevant sections of this manual.
Depending on the items supplied, there may be residual risks that cannot be eliminated due to the
nature of the equipment. Where this is the case, warning labels will be affixed adjacent to the hazard,
e.g.:
This label is affixed to the Guided Head Expander Support Frame and to each guidance
assembly.
ly
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the ‘Machinery Directive’ (currently 2006/42/EC).
On
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local machinery safety regulations.
2.5.5. Electrical Risks and Hazards

All equipment constituting a vibration test system may contain voltages above SELV that are potentially
lethal. During normal operation it is not necessary for an operator to access areas containing voltages
above SELV. Access to high voltage can only be gained by removing panels or covers, or by opening
e
doors with the use of a tool (in some cases, this may also include a key). All equipment with hazardous
voltages are labelled accordingly.
nc
To ensure that access to the interior of equipment is restricted to designated personnel, it is strongly
recommended that only authorised, responsible personnel are permitted access to the equipment for
service/maintenance purposes.
With the exception of calibration or fault diagnosis by qualified personnel, equipment should be
completely isolated from the supply before gaining access. Residual hazardous voltages may be
re
present immediately after isolation.

Refer to section 4 of this manual for details of the electrical requirements of this machine.
fe
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the: -

* Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (currently 2014/35/EU).
* Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) (currently 2014/30/EU).
Re
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local electrical and EMC regulations.
2.5.5.1 The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 and The Health and Safety at Work etc. Act
1974
The Electricity at Work Regulations came into force on the 1st April 1990 and is made under The Health
and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974. The regulations apply to all places of work and impose duties on
people in respect of electrical systems, equipment and all work activities on or near electrical
equipment.
All work is to be conducted in accordance with the Regulations.
The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 state principles of electrical safety in a form that can be
applied to any electrical equipment and work activity. They apply to all electrical systems and
equipment whether manufactured, purchased or installed even if this pre-dates the Regulations.
Where this is the case, this does not necessarily mean that it contravenes the Regulations. The
equipment or system need only be replaced when it becomes un-safe or needs to be modified. The
frequency of work on the electrical equipment or installation, the practicality of providing screening
from live conductors and the inconvenience of making the equipment or system dead are key factors
in deciding on replacement.
WARNING:
• A breach of the requirements contained within this directive may be used in
criminal and or civil proceedings as evidence that statutory requirements
have been contravened.
2.5.5.2 BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations
ly
Requirements for Electrical Installations BS7671 are non-statutory. They relate to the design, selection,
erection, inspection and testing of electrical installations. BS7671 is widely recognised and accepted in
the UK and it is the view of the Health and Safety Executive (HSE) that compliance with them is likely
to achieve compliance with relevant aspects of The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989.
On
WARNING: ELECTRICAL SAFETY
• A professional installer must install this apparatus.
• When installed, a protective earth must be provided for safety, refer to the
lEE wiring regulations BS7671 or local wiring regulations. The protective
earth connection must be hard wired.
•
e
The power cabinets operate from a mains voltage power supply. Isolate
supply inputs before removing any covers for maintenance access.
nc
• High leakage current. Earth connection essential before connecting supply.
• While working on this equipment, unsafe voltage and energy sources may
be exposed, and only trained, approved installation and maintenance
engineers should install, test and repair these units. No person other than
those trained to work on live equipment must be present in the working
re
area during installation or maintenance unless under direct supervision of a

competent person.
• Hazardous voltages can be retained on both AC input and DC output parts
after removal of AC line input. Proceed with caution and test parts before
fe
touching. Always prove circuits are “dead” with proprietary equipment

before any attempt is made to touch electrical conductors.
• All voltages should be treated as potentially hazardous.
Re
• Remember that voltage sources from other equipment may be present in

the equipment being worked on, via parallel systems, alarms, etc.
• Hazardous energy levels occur in batteries and capacitors, even when not
charged to hazardous voltages.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS ENERGY LEVELS
• Only personnel trained and experienced in Brüel & Kjær vibration testing
systems are to service this equipment.
• Always use insulated tools.
• Do not short-circuit the live and common bus bars or cables.

WARNING: AC RATING
• Ensure that the ac incoming supply voltage, number of phases and
frequency aligns with that marked adjacent to the equipment ac input
terminals. For three phase input, the rotation can be in any order.
• Refer to the design diagram supplied with the equipment to ensure that
the ac input and DC output earth wiring and termination is dimensioned
correctly.
WARNING: ISOLATION
• There must be an isolator external to the power system to provide
emergency shutdown or isolation of all AC power to the system.
ly
• If the equipment ¡s to be isolated, the following areas must be considered:
* AC inputs from all sources
On
* Output from parallel systems
* Power factor correction and filter capacitors
• “Isolation” in terms of the UK Electricity at Work Regulations means the
methods by which it is assured that hazards such as batteries and power
cannot be re-connected inadvertently by those working on the equipment,
or by others. Such methods include having a switch in view at all times (an
e
external readily accessible isolator), and the use of lock-outs.
WARNING: AC DISCONNECT DEVICE AND EXTERNAL OVERLOAD
nc
DEVICE
• Should the equipment not contain an AC disconnect device then a readily
accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the
equipment.
re
• For those units where the plug on the power supply cord is the disconnect
device then the socket shall be installed near the unit and be easily
accessible.
• It is essential that AC overload protection is provided by an external device,
fe
whose rating is not greater than that stated on the design diagram supplied
with the equipment. This device shall be installed near the unit and be
easily accessible.
Note: AC disconnect and overload may be incorporated in the same device.
Re
WARNING: MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES

• Should the equipment have multiple AC input power sources, then ensure
that the external disconnect devices are clearly labelled to ensure that
there is no ambiguity. All of the devices should make reference to all of the
other devices to ensure that all power is removed before accessing the
equipment.
WARNING: EARTHED-END CONNECTIONS
• During Installation and Decommissioning, always remove earthed-end
connections first, and re-connect them last.
• While servicing the equipment, always ensure that the Earth connection
remains in place.

2.5.6. Pneumatic Risks and Hazards

Some vibrators rely on a compressed air supply for armature and body support. Due care and attention
must be given when fixing loads to the armature and subsequently setting armature and body
positions.
It is recommended that the air supply has a shut-off valve adjacent to the vibrator for use in
emergencies or when the vibration system is not being used e.g. overnight. In such cases the payload
should be supported by other means e.g. armature lock-out plates or overhead crane.
Refer to section 4 of this manual for details of the pneumatic requirements of this machine.
ly
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the Pressure Equipment Directive (currently
2014/68/EU).
On
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local pressure equipment regulations.
2.5.7. Hydraulic Risks and Hazards

Some vibrators and all combos use Shell Tellus oil or equivalent. Whilst this oil does not pose a direct
health and safety hazard, care should be taken to clean up any spillages which may occur during filling,
draining or operating the system. It is also recommended that any oil making skin contact is removed
as soon as possible.
e
Refer to section 4 of this manual for details of the hydraulic requirements of this machine.
nc
2.5.8. Water Risks and Hazards

re
Some vibrators are water-cooled with the cooling system self-contained within the vibrator, hoses and
cooling unit. Although water can only be released (leak) due to a failure in the system, operators should
be made aware of the temperatures attained during normal operation. If the amplifier is positioned in
fe
a position where water may be sprayed onto it, e.g. a fire sprinkler system, then additional protection
is required. Contact Brüel & Kjær for further details.
WARNING: PROTECTIVE EARTH
• Ensure that the Vibration Testing System Protective Earth is connected at
Re
all times.
• Failure to follow this procedure may result in severe/fatal personnel
injury and/or serious equipment damage.
Refer to section 4 of this manual for details of the primary and secondary water requirements of this
machine.

2.5.9. Temperature Risks and Hazards

The heat generated by all equipment in the vibration test system should be considered before siting.
Measures should be taken to ensure that the temperature of the working environment for the system
and operating personnel is within allowable limits. Operators should also be made aware that some
equipment, particularly water cooled vibrators, can attain high surface temperature during normal
operation.
WARNING: TEMPERATURE
• Vibrator, Air Hose and Extraction Fan surface may attain high surface
temperatures, even though they may be within allowable limits.
• Users in the vicinity of these items of equipment, should be aware of this.
ly
Refer to section 4 of this manual for details of the environmental temperature requirements of this
machine and also the maximum operating temperature.
On
2.5.10. Blower Outlet Risks and Hazards (Air-cooled vibrators)

The air outlet port from the cooling blower in air-cooled vibrator systems should be positioned such
e
that an operator cannot stand directly in line with the airflow. This precaution will prevent injury in the
event of small objects, e.g. nuts or screws becoming detached in the vibrator and ejected at high
velocity from the blower.
nc
WARNING:
• On no account must the human body be subjected to compressed or
forced air.
re
• Do not attempt to block exhaust openings of the Fan, Vibrator or Amplifier

as ejected debris may cause serious injury; eyes being particularly
vulnerable.
fe
2.5.11. Cables and Hoses Risks and Hazards

Re
Where practical, all cables and hoses used in the vibration test system should be sited in ducts or
trunking to give clear unimpeded access to the vibrator, power amplifier, cooling unit and other
ancillary equipment.
WARNING:
• Trailing cables and hoses across the floor surface may create a trip hazard.
• Where it is not possible to lay the cables and hoses in subsurface ducts,
adequate provision should be provided to warn personnel of the hazard.
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the: -
* Machinery Directive (currently 2006/42/EC).

* Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (currently 2014/35/EU).

* Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) (currently 2014/30/EU).
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local machinery safety, electrical and EMC regulations.
2.5.12. Chemicals Risks and Hazards

The hazards of chemicals/cleaning agents are dependent not only upon the toxicity of materials but
also upon the degree and nature of exposure. Users should adopt procedures conforming to the
requirements of the European Directive 2004/37/EC, Protection of Workers from the Risks Related to
Exposure to Carcinogenic Substances at Work, which is implemented in the UK by the COSHH
regulations.
ly
CAUTION:
• In special cases where vibrator rolling seals are required to have resistance
to fuel oil, the standard white SILICON vibrator seal may be replaced by a
On
black VITON seal.
• In the event of a fire, anyone handling residues of VITON must wear
Neoprene protective gloves to avoid skin contact with possibly highly
corrosive residues which are likely to include hydrogen fluoride. DISCARD
GLOVES AFTER USE.
Safety Data Sheets for the equipment supplied is located in section 4 of this manual.
e
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the Carcinogens or Mutagens at Work Directive
nc
(currently 2004/37/EC).
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local chemical safety regulations.
2.5.13. Low Frequency Fields Risks and Hazards

re
By virtue of their mode of operation, vibrators and associated power products produce DC and low
frequency magnetic fields. While current medical research is inconclusive as to the effect of low
frequency electromagnetic fields on the human body, Brüel & Kjær recommend that personnel,
particularly those with medical implants, do not enter the danger zone whilst the vibrator is running.
fe
WARNING:
• Brüel & Kjær advise that an exclusion zone be created around the Vibrator
of a minimum distance of 2 metres, this being the Danger Zone.
Re
• Brüel & Kjær cannot accept responsibility for any effects on health of
electromagnetic fields but strongly advise that all precautions as defined in
this notice and product manuals are followed.
• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC)
(currently 2014/30/EU) and the Electromagnetic Fields Directive (EMF) (currently 2013/35/EU)
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local EMC and EMF regulations.
2.5.14. Installation Risks and Hazards

2.5.14.1 Line of Sight
From the main control position, it must be possible to ensure that there are no exposed persons in the
danger zone. For vibration systems in which there is no direct line of sight or video link between the
control position and the vibrator, it is recommended that an audible warning device is fitted at the
vibrator location to give notice of impending operation. This will give personnel in the danger zone
opportunity to vacate the area, or actuate the emergency stop to prevent vibrator operation.
2.5.14.2 Emergency Stop

For most vibration test systems, the vibrator is fitted with a minimum of one locking emergency stop
pushbutton, and includes the facility for additional emergency stop pushbuttons at other locations. It
is recommended that on large systems (with the vibrator in the horizontal mode) or with combos, the
additional emergency stop(s) are located adjacent to the payload position, in easy reach of an operator
working in that area.
Additional emergency stop switches must comply with BS EN ISO 13850:2008. The Emergency Stop
system must be tested in accordance with the Maintenance Schedule in section 6.
ly
2.5.15. Battery Risks and Hazards
Depending on the amplifier supplied, a battery may be fitted in the amplifier control panel, as a backup
On
for the internal clock.
CAUTION: Battery Replacement
• Should the equipment contain batteries then these should be replaced with
the same type and rating.
CAUTION:
•
e
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
CAUTION:
nc
• Observe the polarity when fitting the battery
WARNING: BATTERY DISPOSAL

For the disposal of batteries either:
re
• Contact the battery manufacturer for instructions. The manufacturer’s

address may be printed on each battery, or
• Refer to local legislation regarding disposal.
fe

• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the ‘Battery Directive’ (currently 2013/56/EC).
• Elsewhere, refer to the latest issue of the local battery usage and disposal regulations.
Re
2.5.16. Lifting Hazards

All lifting operations must only be carried out by competent, certified personnel, trained in the use of
lifting equipment (crane, forklift etc.) and lifting accessories (eyebolts, slings, chains, lifting frames
etc.).
Where appropriate, a Lifting Plan Control Form or local equivalent should be completed before
commencement of the lifting operation.
If necessary, refer to the relevant sections of the following: -
Note: This list is not exhaustive
Working at height regulations (currently 2101/45-EC)
Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations 1998 (LOLER).

Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations (PUWER).

Local working at height legislation
2.5.17. Operational Risks and Hazards

Brüel & Kjær systems are designed to provide a controlled vibration testing environment for quality
and reliability testing of components and assemblies, within the limits stated in the specifications. Any
other use, e.g. in an explosive or corrosive environment, unusual loading, etc., may invalidate
contractual agreements. Any doubts regarding the fitness for purpose of the equipment should be
referred to Brüel & Kjær before the equipment is used.
2.6. Emergency Stop
ly
If an emergency arises, the emergency stop should be activated immediately. This will initiate an
immediate controlled shutdown of the system. The Emergency Stop system must be tested in
accordance with the Maintenance Schedule in section 6.
On
2.7. Remote Control Operation
For systems including a Remote Control Panel (RCP), operation is only permitted from one control
position (amplifier or RCP). This protection is provided either by software selection or by key switch
operation, the key being common for both positions. Although Brüel & Kjær provide more than one
key, it is strongly recommended that only one is issued and its use restricted to the authorised
operator. This will provide added protection against system mal-operation or misuse.
e
2.8. Training
nc
Vibration test systems encompass a wide variety of technological disciplines and it is essential that
personnel are properly qualified and trained before being authorized to work on such a system. Access
to areas where vibration test systems are located should be restricted to authorised personnel. Brüel
& Kjær offers short training courses providing a practical introduction for technicians/engineers new
to vibration testing.
re
2.9. Maintenance
A programme of planned maintenance, carried out by fully trained and qualified personnel, is essential
fe
to maintain the safety of the equipment. Safety interlocks must be frequently checked for correct
operation. Under no circumstances should protective earth conductors be left disconnected; these
should be frequently checked to ensure good earth bonding of all equipment. Checks on armature and
field coil insulation will be carried out during the Brüel & Kjær service visits.
Re
2.10. Customer Responsibilities

When specifying, siting, installing and operating a vibration system the customer is responsible for the
following:
1. Off-loading, unpacking and siting the equipment at its designated position.
2. Ensuring that the floor surface where the equipment is to be located is suitable for the equipment.
3. Ensuring that access to the equipment is adequate.
4. Providing all service requirements such as water, air lines, electrical power etc. to the point of entry
to the equipment and ensuring that such supplies conform to company specifications.
5. Supplying all test equipment necessary to complete acceptance testing.
6. Making available consumable materials such as distilled water, oil, cleaning material etc.
7. Any special tools required for commissioning the system such as lifting equipment etc.
8. Completion of pre-installation check list prior to commencement of installation
9. To validate warranty, return to Brüel & Kjær on completion of all installations or commissioning of
the signed commissioning certificate.
10. PAYLOADS AND THEIR EFFECT ON THE VIBRATOR ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CUSTOMER.
2.11. Before-use Checks

2.11.1. General
Before operating the vibration system in any mode, check that:
ly
1. The vibration test area is clear of unnecessary obstructions.
2. All terminal covers are correctly fitted.
On
3. All equipment doors are correctly closed and secure.
4. The supply of cooling medium (water or air as appropriate) is sufficient.
5. The hydraulic oil supply (if applicable) is correctly topped-up.
6. The item under test is correctly secured to the vibrator, head expander or slip table.
7. All personnel are clear of the danger zone
2.11.2. Vibrator
e
nc
Prior to energising the Vibration Testing System equipment, the operator should carry out a pre-test
risk assessment. This should include, (as appropriate):
1. Working at heights – use of harnesses and correct scaffolding
2. Dropped objects
re
3. Falling objects
4. PPE
5. Permit to Work System or similar
fe
CAUTION:
• While the Vibrator may be used with payloads where the centre of
gravity is offset from the centre line; the CG should be properly
Re
calculated before engaging the vibrator system. The figures quoted in the
specification are for guidance only.
• Do not modify the hardware.
• The correct length load mounting screws and washers must always be
used. Over length screws will bottom and cause damage to the head
expander.
2.11.3. Head Expander


2. Dropped objects
3. Falling objects
4. PPE
CAUTION:
• The head expander is suitable for heavy and bulky payloads as limited by
the Technical Specification for Vibration System. With this extended
capability, low acceleration levels are usually involved. Therefore,
acceleration should be limited to avoid severe distortion.
ly
• While the head expander may be used with payloads where the centre of
On
expander.
2.11.4. Slip Table

e
nc
2. Dropped objects
3. Falling objects
re
4. PPE
CAUTION:
fe
• The Slip Table is suitable for heavy and bulky payloads as limited by the
Technical Specification for Vibration System. With this extended
capability, low acceleration levels are usually involved. Therefore,
acceleration should be limited to avoid severe distortion.
Re
• While the Slip Table may be used with payloads where the centre of
expander.

2.12. Disposal of the Equipment

• Even though the equipment as supplied is not subject directly to the
WEEE Regulations (2012/19/EU), the equipment must still be disposed of
in an environmentally friendly manner at the end of its life.
• Contact either local or national bodies for information on recycling the
Vibration Testing System, or parts thereof or Brüel & Kjær.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

Table of Contents
3.1. Essential Precautions to be Observed
3.2. Switch-UP Procedure
3.3. Switch-DOWN and Emergency Stop Procedures
3.4. Operating the System Amplifier Control System
3.5. Setting-up for Product Testing
ly
3.6. Preparing the System for Vertical Testing
3.7. Preparing the System for Horizontal Testing
3.8. Operating with an LDS Head Expander
On
3.9. Operating with an LDS Slip Table
3.10. Guidance for the Attachment of a Payload
3.11. Operating with the LDS Supplementary Features fitted to this Vibration Testing System
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.1. Essential Precautions to be Observed

This section consists of: -
3.1.1. General
3.1.2. Operating Conditions
3.1.3. Payloads and Fixtures
3.1.4. Recovering After an Electrical Power Failure
3.1.1. General
ly
Vibration generators and amplifiers form a system which handles large amounts of power. Incorrect
application of power can have devastating effects both on the vibrator and the load being tested.
On
WARNING:
• This equipment uses Electrical, Hydraulic and Pneumatic energy, which are all
hazardous if used incorrectly.
• It is the responsibility of the User to ensure that all energy systems are in a safe
condition (whether that be on or off), before proceeding.
CAUTION:
•
e
This equipment should be operated by persons who are trained in the techniques of
vibration testing.
nc
• Operators must be conversant with the safety precautions detailed in the preface to
this publication.
The instructions provided within this manual provide for safe and correct operation of the equipment.
re
General advice on vibration testing is given in Engineering Information Note EIN138, ‘Dos and don’ts’
in Vibration Testing”, included in section 9.2 of this manual. For advice on specific test situations
contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre.
Entry into the Danger Zone (see Section 2, ‘Health & Safety’) should be restricted to authorised
fe
personnel only.
Before any use of the machine, it is advisable that local risk assessments be performed for any task
that is to be undertaken, including entry into the ‘Danger Zone’. These assessments can form the basis
of local safe working practices.
Re
WARNING:
• Whenever options allowing the vibrator to be moved, raised or lowered are fitted
(including Air Isolation and Airglide Transportation), it is essential that all personnel
keep their feet well clear of the vibrator base at all times. Failure to comply with this
instruction could lead to serious personal injury.
• No attempt should be made to put hands, feet or any other part of the body
underneath the vibrator, for whatever reason, unless the vibrator base is securely
supported on rigid blocks of adequate height and strength.
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær. All Rights Reserved 0301-ALL-UM-EN-02

3.1.2. Operating Conditions

The service life of the vibrator will be reduced if it is operated for long periods under any of the
following conditions:
• at high ‘g’ levels, velocities or displacements
• at fixed frequency
• horizontally
• vertically with an offset payload (see section 3.1.3. below)
• in ambient conditions of high humidity and/or high temperature
• in an adverse atmosphere such as solvent vapour
ly
• high altitude
3.1.3. Payloads and Fixtures
On
WARNING:
• Do not drill additional mounting holes in the armature table. Doing so will weaken the
armature and can permanently damage the equipment.
Before performing any vibration test for the first time, its maximum cross-axial acceleration should be
calculated as described in section 9.3 Calculating Overturning Moments.
WARNING:
e
• Excessive cross-axial acceleration will cause permanent damage to the vibrator.
nc
3.1.4. Recovering After an Electrical Power Failure
An electrical power failure may occur for many reasons, but typically may be due to a power cut, a
local fuse failure or other unforeseen reason.
re
WARNING:
• Investigate the cause of the electrical power failure and rectify any faults before trying
to restart the system.
fe
Depending on the type of AC Mains Isolators provided for the equipment, the AC power to the
equipment may be either on or off after AC power is restored.
To ensure a controlled start-up procedure: -
Re
1. Switch off the AC Mains supplies to: -

a. The Amplifier
b. The Vibrator Cooling Fan
c. The Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit
d. The Slip Table Hydraulic Power Supply Unit (if fitted)
e. The Pedestal Control Unit
2. After electrical power has been restored and the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit has been
switched on, compressed air may escape from the Load Support Exhaust Valve if it has been left
open. Close the Load Support Regulator, to stop the compressed air leaking. This will enable the
Armature or any Payload attached, either directly or via the Slip Plate (on a Combo) to be controlled
correctly.
0301-ALL-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær. All Rights Reserved

3.2. Switch-UP Procedure
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 LDS XPA-K Amplifier and Control Panel
This section covers the Switch-UP Procedure using the LDS XPA-K Amplifier and consists of: -
re
3.2.1. Pre-use Checks

3.2.2. Starting Locally from the Amplifier
3.2.3. Applying Power to the Amplifier
fe
3.2.4. Setting the Load Support

3.2.4.1 Payload Mass vs Load Support Pressure Guide - Vertical
3.2.5. Checking the Configuration
Re
3.2.6. Switching Up the Amplifier
3.2.1. Pre-use Checks

If the Vibration Testing System has been shut down and isolated from the AC mains supply, then follow
the procedures in section 3.5 for Setting-up for Product Testing.
If the Vibration Testing System has been left energised, i.e. AC mains and pneumatic power still on for
all equipment, then follow the procedures below: -
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0302-B-XPAK-UM-EN-03

1. Check that all fans on the rear of the Amplifier are running and that air is being drawn through the
Amplifier.
Note: Additional fans in the power modules within the Amplifier will operate once the Amplifier is Switched-
UP.
Pressure
2. Check that the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Gauge
is running; fluid pressure will be shown on the
ly
pressure gauge.
On
Figure 2 LDS Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply
e
3. For a Combo only, check that the Slip Table Pressure
Hydraulic Power Supply is running; fluid Gauge
nc
pressure will be shown on the pressure gauge.
Figure 3 LDS Slip Table Hydraulic Power Supply

re
4. Check to see if the Pedestal Control Unit is

energised: -
a. If the Internal Load Support System is
fe
pressurised: - Load Support

ICS Display Regulator &
i. Check that the ICS Display is lit
ii. Check that the Load Support Pressure Pressure Gauge
Gauge is displaying a value.
Re
b. If the Internal Load Support System is not

pressurised: -
i. Check that the Load Support Exhaust Valve
is closed.
ii. Slowly turn the Load Support Regulator
clockwise until the ICS Display and Load
Support Pressure Gauge display values.
iii. Now slowly turn the Load Support Figure 4 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
Regulator anticlockwise until the ICS
Display and Load Support Pressure Gauge
display zero values.
0302-B-XPAK-UM-EN-03 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

3.2.2. Starting Locally from the Amplifier

The start-up procedure is as follows:
1. Prepare the Vibrator for operation, carrying out the checks described in section 3.2.1. above.
2. Check that the Vibrator is ready to have power applied and all other equipment is ready for operation.
3.2.3. Applying Power to the Amplifier

1. Switch on the power to the Cooling Fan at the 3 phase isolator (if not already on).
2. Switch on the power to the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply at the 3 phase isolator (if not already on).
3. If using the Combo Slip Table, switch on the power to the Slip Table Hydraulic Power Supply at the 3
ly
phase isolator (if not already on).
4. Switch on the power to the Pedestal Control Unit at the single phase isolator (if not already on).
5. Switch on the compressed air to the Pedestal Control Unit (if not already on).
On
6. Switch on the power to the Amplifier at the 3-phase isolator (if not already on).
7. Check that the Touchscreen Panel is illuminated

e
and that the Main Menu is displayed. (See
Figure 5 on the right).
8. Check that all amplifier cabinet cooling fans are
nc
operating.
re
Figure 5 Main Menu Page

fe
9. Touch the System Data field in the SETUP group

(see Figure 5) and check that the correct
Re
amplifier/vibrator combination is displayed. (See

Figure 6 on the right).
Figure 6 System Data Page

3.2.4. Setting the Load Support
Load Support
1. Turn the Load Support Regulator, gradually Pressure Gauge
clockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit (see
Figure 1) until the armature begins to
move 1.(See section 3.2.4.1 below for further
details, regarding Payload Mass vs Load Support
Pressure Guide - Vertical).
ly
Note: The Armature Load Support Seal will provide
some resistance to movement, so turn the
Load Support Regulator, very slowly.
On
2. When the armature starts to move back off the Figure 7 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
regulator slightly (approx. ¼ turn), to prevent
the armature overshooting.
3. Now adjust the Load Support Regulator until the
indicator on the ILS display is lit between ¼ and
¾, but as close as possible to ½ as shown in
Figure 2.
e
4. The ICS 2 will fully centralise the armature when
the amplifier gain is enabled.
Figure 8 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS Display,
nc
Load Support Pressure Gauge and Regulator

re
fe
Re
Figure 9 Graph of Payload Mass vs Load Support Pressure (as a guide)
1
The pressure required to move the armature will depend on the payload fitted – as a guide the pressure will be
approx. 0.0077bar/kg (0.055psi/lb), when the vibrator is vertical.
2
ICS = Inductive Centring System

Payload Mass Pressure Payload Mass Pressure

kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
100 1.4 220 20
200 2.1 441 31
300 2.9 661 42
400 3.7 882 53
500 4.4 1102 64
600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
800 6.8 1764 98
ly
Table 1 Payload Mass vs Load Support Pressure Values
Note: The figures in Table 1 above are notional and are supplied as a guide to initially set the air
pressure.
On
As already noted, the pressure required to move the armature will depend on the payload fitted – as
a guide approx. 0.0077bar/kg (0.055psi/lb).
The table above, can be used to allow the user to quickly adjust the regulator until just below the
calculated pressure required and then gradually increase until the armature moves.
e.g with 150kg payload you would expect [150kg+77.5kg (armature mass)] x 0.0077 bar/kg = 1.75 bar.
e
3.2.5. Checking the Configuration
nc
1. Touch the Configuration field on the System Data
page and check the following:
a. Control Mode
b. Input Path
re
c. Position
d. Default Gain
fe
Re
Figure 10 Configuration Page 1

2. Touch the Interlocks field on the Configuration

page and check that interlocks are
enabled/disabled as required.
ly
Figure 11 Interlocks Page
On
3.2.6. Switching Up the Amplifier
Emergency Stop Switch-DOWN
Pushbutton Pushbutton
1. Press the Green Amplifier Switch-UP Pushbutton:
USB Port
the vibrator field coils will be energised and the
Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) will start.
Note: If the Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) fails to start
e
or there is insufficient airflow through the
Vibrator, an interlock will be generated.
nc
2. Check that the Switch-UP Pushbutton indicator is Touchscreen Master Gain Switch-UP
illuminated Panel Control Pushbutton
Figure 12 LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
re
fe
3. The Main Output page shows ‘Module Disabled’

and ‘Gain 0%’.
Re
Figure 13 Main Output Page

Emergency Stop Load Support

Pushbutton Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
4. To avoid any possible transient movement of the

armature when the modules are enabled,
readjust the Load Support Regulator on the
Pedestal Control Unit as necessary to return the
vibrator armature to mid-position. Refer to
section 3.2.4. .
ly
ICS Display Air Isolation
Regulator
Figure 14 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
On
USB Port
5. Turn the Master Gain Control clockwise.

e
Touchscreen Master Gain Switch-UP
nc
Panel Control Pushbutton
6. The Main Output page should display Modules

‘Enabled’. Continue to turn the control until the
re
gain displayed reaches the required level.

fe
Re
Figure 16 Main Output Page

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.3. Switch-DOWN and Emergency Stop Procedures
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 LDS XPA-K Amplifier and Control Panel
This section covers the Switch-DOWN Procedure using the LDS XPA-K Amplifier and consists of: -
re
3.3.1. Switching-DOWN the Amplifier

3.3.2. Switching Off the Amplifier
3.3.3. Emergency Stop Procedure
fe
3.3.1. Switching-DOWN the Amplifier

Re
At the end of a test:

1. Turn the Master Gain Control anti-clockwise until
USB Port
the Main Output page displays a gain of 0% and
Modules ‘Disabled’.
2. Press the red Switch-DOWN pushbutton: the
vibrator field coils will be de-energised.
3. The vibrator cooling fan will run-on for the time
pre-set on the Modes / Cooling page of the Touchscreen Master Gain Switch-UP
Amplifier Control System. Panel Control Pushbutton


Pressure Gauge
4. If necessary re-adjust the Load Support Regulator

on the Pedestal Control Unit to return the
vibrator armature to mid-position.
ly
Regulator
On
3.3.2. Switching Off the Amplifier

USB Port
e
1. Check that the vibrator cooling fan has stopped.
nc
Note: This will be denoted on the display by the
cooling icon being greyed out.
Touchscreen Master Gain Switch-UP

Panel Control Pushbutton
re
2. Ensure that the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Emergency Stop Load Support
Unit is running. Pushbutton Regulator &
fe
Note: This is for the protection of the Vibrator Pressure Gauge

Hydrostatic Bearing and seals. If the Vibrator
Hydraulic Power Supply Unit is not running,
the Load Support Regulator will not operate.
Re
3. Turn the Load Support Regulator fully anti-

clockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit to allow
the Armature to rest on the bump stops.
4. Ensure that the Load Support Pressure Gauge is
showing 0 (zero) and that the ICS Display is
showing 0 (zero). ICS Display Air Isolation
5. Turn the Air Isolation control fully anti-clockwise Regulator
on the Pedestal Control Unit to allow the
trunnions to settle to the lower position.


6. Switch off and isolate the Amplifier at the 3 phase Pushbutton Pushbutton
isolator. USB Port
7. Switch off and isolate the Vibrator Cooling Unit at
the 3 phase isolator.
8. Switch off and isolate the Vibrator Hydraulic
Power supply
9. Switch off and isolate the Combo Hydraulic Power Touchscreen Master Gain Switch-UP
supply (if used) Panel Control Pushbutton
10. Switch off and isolate the Pedestal Control Unit
ly
WARNING:
• Do not disconnect the AC mains supply plug from beneath the Pedestal Control Unit
On
when under load or live, as it is not designed for that purpose. Depending on the
installation, either switch off the Pedestal Control Unit at the building wall isolator or
disconnect the plug from the building wall outlet.
3.3.3. Emergency Stop Procedure

e
In the event of an emergency, simply press one of the Emergency Stop pushbuttons located: -
• On the left-hand side of the Vibrator
nc
• On the right-hand side of the Vibrator
• On the Pedestal Control Unit
• On the Amplifier Control Panel
re
Note: Once depressed, the Emergency Stop pushbuttons are locked and the system will not operate.
They are released by turning the knob in a clockwise direction.
On releasing the Emergency Stop pushbutton, the system will need to be switched-UP to continue
testing. See section 3.2 for details.
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.4. Operating the System Amplifier Control System

The Amplifier fitted to this VTS System is the Brüel & Kjær LDS XPA-K.
All operational settings are performed using the LDS XPA-K Control Panel Touchscreen.
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 1 A Typical LDS XPA-K Amplifier
Section No Title
3.4.1. Overview of the LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
fe
3.4.2. What Happens After Applying Mains Power to the System

3.4.3. How to Operate the LDS XPA-K Touchscreen Panel
3.4.3.1 What are the Software Access Levels and What do They Permit?
Re
3.4.3.2 How to Access Other Pages Connected to the Currently Viewed Page
3.4.3.3 Other On-Screen icons and What They Do
3.4.4. How to Access the Main Menu
3.4.5. How to View the System Information
3.4.5.1 How to View the Amplifier and Vibrator Types, the System Date and Time, the System
Version and Client User Firmware Version
3.4.5.2 How to View the System MAC Address, the System IP Address and Touchscreen Brightness
and Timeout Values.
3.4.6. How to View the Status of Operating Settings and Values
3.4.6.1 How to View the Armature Current, Voltage and Gain

Section No Title
3.4.6.2 How to View the Field Current and Voltage
3.4.6.3 How to View the Active Interlocks
3.4.6.4 How to View the Runtime Info
3.4.6.4.1 How to View the Maximum V & I and Usage Values
3.4.7. How to View the Historical Data
3.4.7.1 How to View the Service Data Page
3.4.7.2 How to View the Interlock Events
3.4.7.3 How to View the Usage Bands
ly
3.4.8. Which Settings can be Modified in the Control System?
3.4.9. What Happens During an Emergency Stop Event?
3.4.10. What Happens During an Interlock Event?
On
3.4.11. How to Proceed After an Interlock Event has Occurred
3.4.12. What do the Licence Verify Fail Messages Mean?
3.4.12.1 Licence Verify Fail, Period Expired Message
3.4.12.2 Licence Verify Fail, Future Period Message
3.4.12.3 Licence Verify Fail, File Not Found or Not Valid Message
e
3.4.12.4 Licence Verify Failed. File Contents Tampered
3.4.13. What do the Configuration Error Warnings Mean?
nc
3.4.13.1 Initial Configuration Failure
3.4.13.2 Amplifier Module Configuration Error
3.4.13.3 Field Supply Module Configuration Error
3.4.14. How to Know if a USB Key is Installed?
re
3.4.15. How to Set the Control System

3.4.15.1 How to View the Amplifier Type
3.4.15.2 How to View the Vibrator Type
fe
3.4.15.3 How to View / Set the Touchscreen B/L (Backlit) Brightness

3.4.15.4 How to View / Set the Touchscreen B/L (Backlit) Timeout
3.4.15.5 How to View / Set the Control Mode
Re
3.4.15.6 How to View / Set the Input Path

3.4.15.7 How to View / Set the Armature Vertical Position
3.4.15.8 How to View / Set the Default Gain
3.4.15.9 How to Set the Interlocks
3.4.15.9.1 How to Access the Interlocks
3.4.15.9.2 Common Procedures for Setting Interlocks
3.4.15.9.3 How to View / Set the User Interlocks
3.4.15.9.4 How to View / Set the System Interlocks
3.4.15.10 How to View / Set the DHCP Mode
3.4.15.11 How to View / Set the IP Address Manually
0304-B-XPAK-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær. All Rights Reserved

Section No Title
3.4.15.12 How to View / Set the Subnet Mask
3.4.15.13 How to View / Set the Default Gateway
3.4.16. How to Set the System Modes
3.4.17. How to Set the Standard Run Mode Settings
3.4.17.1 How to Select the Standard Operating Run Mode Pre-set Field Setting
3.4.17.1.1 How to Set the Standard Operating Run Mode Preset1 Field Setting
3.4.17.2 How to Enable / Disable the System for Low Noise (SNR) Mode in Standard Operating
Run Mode
ly
3.4.17.2.1 How to Select the Quantity of Modules to be Used for the Low Noise (SNR) Mode
3.4.17.2.2 How to Change the Auto Gain for Low Noise (SNR) Mode
3.4.18. How to Set the Cooling Unit Run On Features
On
3.4.18.1 How to Enable / Disable the Cooling Fan Run On
3.4.18.2 How to View the Cooling Fan Run On Period Remaining in Standard Operating Run Mode
3.4.18.3 How to Set the Cooling Fan Run On Time
The background of the Touchscreen Panel is normally black, which is an energy saving feature of the
system.
e
However, the colours of the Touchscreen pages in this manual have generally been inverted, e.g. black
nc
to white or white to black, in order to provide a clearer view within this document.
re
fe
Re
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær. All Rights Reserved 0304-B-XPAK-UM-EN-02

3.4.1. Overview of the LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel

USB Port
ly
Touchscreen Panel Master Gain Control Switch-UP
Pushbutton
On
Figure 2 The LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
Control Description
A USB Key is inserted into this port when system settings need to be modified.
USB Port System Settings can only be modified by authorised personnel with access
permission provided on a USB key.
Pressing the emergency stop pushbutton initiates an emergency shutdown. The
Emergency Stop
Pushbutton
e
control panel will display an Emergency Stop page and the amplifier will shut down
in a controlled manner.
nc
The Touchscreen Panel provides all of the features required to set up and display
Touchscreen Panel
the system data.
Master Gain Control Adjusts the level of gain between the amplifier input and the amplifier output.
This button is used to Switch-UP the Amplifier from an idle state to an operating
re
Switch-UP state.
Pushbutton Note: This pushbutton does not apply power or switch on the amplifier. It is only to
change the operating state.
fe
This button is used to Switch-DOWN the Amplifier from an operating state to an

Switch-DOWN idle state
Pushbutton Note: This pushbutton does not switch off the power or switch off the amplifier. It
is only to change the operating state.
Re
When the XPA-K Amplifier is ready to perform a test, the Switch-Up Pushbutton will glow continuously.
After pressing the Switch-Up Pushbutton, the Switch-Down Pushbutton will flash on and off until the
amplifier has settled and is all set. At this time the Switch-Down Pushbutton will glow continuously.
At the end of a test and the Switch-Down Pushbutton is pressed, the Switch-Up Pushbutton will
eventually glow continuously again, unless there is an interlock, in which case it will flash on and off.
Depending on the type of interlock, the amplifier may be Switched-Up again, but it is recommended
to clear the fault in order to preserve the equipment.

3.4.2. What Happens After Applying Mains Power to the System
After applying mains power to the VTS System, the

LDS XPA-K Touchscreen Panel will show the Start
Page with the Brüel & Kjær logo,
ly
Figure 3. Start Page
followed by the LDS XPA-K Splash loader page.
On
e
nc
Figure 4. LDS XPA-K Splash Loader Page
re
fe
After loading the services, the Main menu will be

displayed.
Re
Figure 5. Main Menu Page

3.4.3. How to Operate the LDS XPA-K Touchscreen Panel

The LDS XPA-K Touchscreen Panel is operated by
simply ‘tapping’ the icon on the page and the action
will be completed, e.g.
1. By tapping the ‘Configuration’ field in the Setup
group on the Main Menu page, the Setup-
Configuration page will be displayed.
2. With the correct software access level, by
tapping the value on the ‘Position [mm] field, a
numeric keyboard will be displayed, from which
ly
the required value can be ‘tapped’ in.
Note: This procedure is described in detail further
in this section.
On
3.4.3.1 What are the Software Access Levels and What do They Permit?
There are three access levels available for the XPA-K operating system software, which provide
permission to change or not change parameters within the software for testing purposes.
The access levels are: - e
Access Level Description of Permission
This is the basic access level and is available to anyone after applying power to the
nc
Operator amplifier. This access level permits viewing of the main pages of data and the setting
of some interlocks.
This is the next access level and requires a licenced USB Key. This access level permits
Setup all that the Operator access level can perform, along with some of the fundamental
testing parameters required for testing.
re
This is the highest access level and also requires a licenced USB key. This access level
Brüel & Kjær permits access to all of the parameters that can be edited in the software. This access
level is reserved exclusively for Brüel & Kjær.
fe
3.4.3.2 How to Access Other Pages Connected to the Currently Viewed Page
Some of the groups have more than one page.
Where this is the case, Page Arrows (when displayed)
Re
change colour from Grey (inactive) to White (active).

E.g.
Inactive Page Arrows Active Page Arrows

In Figure 7, the left-hand page arrow is inactive, but
the right-hand page arrow is active, denoting
additional pages are available.
Figure 7. Setup-System Data Page 1

In Figure 8, both the left-hand and right-hand page

arrows are active, denoting additional pages are
available.
ly
On
3.4.3.3 Other On-Screen icons and What They Do
1 2 3 4 5 6
e
8
nc
9
7
re
10
11
fe
Re
12 12 12 12
Ref Designation Description

This icon is available on all Pages and when tapped, will display the Main
1. Home Page Icon
Menu page.
Tapping this icon will display the Service Info page from the History Menu.
2. Service Indicator Icon The colour of the icon will change to amber and then to red, as the service
interval approaches.


Tapping this icon will display the Main Output page from the Status Menu. It
will show in a graphical form, the up-to-date levels of current, voltage and
3. Main Output Icon gain for the armature in green bars, plus the quantity of enabled SMPS
modules. When the amplifier is switched down or after an emergency stop,
the bars will be grey, showing no values are available.
Tapping this icon will display the Field Metering page from the Status Menu.
It will show in a graphical form, the up-to-date levels of current, voltage and
4. Field Metering Icon
gain for the field in green bars. When the amplifier is switched down or after
an emergency stop, the bars will be grey, showing no values are available.
Tapping this icon will display the Modes Menu. It will also show in graphical
ly
5. Switch Modes Icon
form, the quantity of Power Modules enabled.
This icon will show when the Cooling Fan is running, by being green when
6. Cooling Icon active and grey when inactive. Tapping this icon will display the Main Menu
On
and is for future use.
7. Main Display In this area will be displayed the various elements of the system pages.
This icon is active when white and inactive when grey.
8. List Arrows Tapping this icon when active or the value, will access an additional
selection screen
9. Subtraction Icon
e
Tapping this icon when active, will access reduce the value to the right of it
by one.
nc
When the Subtraction and Addition icons are active, tapping the numeric
10. Numeric Values value will display a numeric keyboard from which the existing value can be
changed.
re
11. Addition Icon Tapping this icon when active, will access increase the value to the left of it
by one.
When available, tapping in any of these areas will display that sub-section
12. Sub-Section Pages
page
fe
3.4.4. How to Access the Main Menu

Re
You can access the Main Menu from any page on

the touchscreen.
1. Tap the Home Page Icon at the top left-

hand corner of the page.
Figure 10.Setup-Device Page 1

Note: The Main Menu will be displayed
ly
On
3.4.5. How to View the System Information
3.4.5.1 How to View the Amplifier and Vibrator Types, the System Date and
Time, the System Version and Client User Firmware Version
1. From the Main Menu page, tap System Data or
from any other page in the Setup group, tap the
e
System Data field at the bottom of the page.
Note: One of the System Data pages will be
displayed.
nc
2. If the page (as shown in Figure 12) is not
displayed, tap either the Next Page Arrow or
Previous Page Arrow until it is.
re
The Amplifier and Vibrator Type, along with the

System Date and Time cannot be changed by either
the Operator or the Authorised Setup personnel.
These are set by Brüel & Kjær Service during
fe
installation and can only be changed by

Brüel & Kjær Service. Figure 12. Setup-System Data Page 1
The system software and firmware versions are
shown at the bottom of the page.
Re

3.4.5.2 How to View the System MAC Address, the System IP Address and
Touchscreen Brightness and Timeout Values.
displayed.
ly
The MAC address of the system is not editable and
is displayed on the top line of the page.
The System IP Address, Touch Screen Brightness and
On
Timeout cannot be changed by the Operator.
These are set by authorised Setup personnel or Figure 13. Setup-System Data Page 2
Brüel & Kjær Service.
3.4.6. How to View the Status of Operating Settings and Values

3.4.6.1 How to View the Armature Current, Voltage and Gain
e
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Main Output,
nc
from any other page in the Status group tap the
Main Output field at the bottom of the page or
from any other page tap the Main Output icon
at the top of the page.

re
Note: The Main Output page will be displayed.

Note: This page is also displayed when the amplifier
modules are energised, by pressing the
Switch-up button on the XPA-K Amplifier
fe
Control Panel.
The Armature Current, Voltage and Gain are
displayed and additionally the status of Auxiliaries,
Input Type and Modules is also displayed.
Re
For auto operation, the Default Gain is pre-set in the Figure 14. Status-Main Output Page (A)
system, by following the procedure in section
3.4.15.8 below.

After setting the Default Gain to 100% the Main

Output page will be displayed as shown in Figure 15
ly
Figure 15. Status-Main Output Page (B)
On
3.4.6.2 How to View the Field Current and Voltage
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Field Metering,

Field Metering field at the bottom of the page
or from any other page tap the Field Metering
icon
e
at the top of the page.
Note: The Field Metering page will be displayed.
nc
The Field Current and Voltage are displayed and
additionally the Field and Cooling status plus Field
Power Level and the Run Mode status are also
displayed.
re
Figure 16. Status-Field Metering Page
3.4.6.3 How to View the Active Interlocks

fe
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Active Interlocks

or from any other page in the Status group tap
the Active Interlocks field at the bottom of the
Re
page.
Note: The Active Interlocks page will be displayed.
The last 7 Active Interlocks are displayed.
Note: This page is automatically displayed if the
system detects an interlock as it is switching
on.
Figure 17. Status-Active Interlocks Page

3.4.6.4 How to View the Runtime Info
3.4.6.4.1 How to View the Maximum V & I and Usage Values
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Runtime Info or

Runtime Info field at the bottom of the page.
Note: The Runtime Info page will be displayed.
The display shows: -
• The maximum current (Peak & RMS) since the
ly
Amplifier was last switched-UP.
• The maximum voltage (Peak & RMS) since the
Amplifier was last switched -UP.
• The Runtime (both Amplifier and Slip Table) is
On
for the total usage time of the equipment.
Figure 18. Status-Runtime Info Page
3.4.7. How to View the Historical Data

3.4.7.1 How to View the Service Data Page
e
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Service Info in
nc
the History group or from any other page in the
History group tap the Service Info field at the
bottom of the page.
Note: The Service Info page will be displayed.
The Next Service Due counter will increase based
re
upon the date of the last service.

The Service Icon in Figure 19 is showing as
green, reflecting the status of the counter and
denoting that a service is not due as it is below the
fe
70% threshold.
Figure 19. History-Service Data A
Re
As the equipment is used, so the counter will

increase.
Once 70% of the Service Interval counter is used,
the Service Icon will change to amber to reflect
this.
Once 90% of the Service Interval counter is used,
the Service Icon will change to red to reflect this.
Figure 20. History-Service Data B

In Figure 21, the Service Interval counter is below

the 70% Threshold and the Service Icon is green .
ly
Figure 21. History-Service Data C
On
In Figure 22, the Service Interval counter is now over
the 70% threshold but below the 90% threshold and
the Service Icon is now amber .
e
This means that a system service is due soon.
nc
Figure 22. History-Service Data D
re
In Figure 23, the Service Interval counter is over the

fe
90% threshold and the Service Icon is now red .

This means that an armature change is due
imminently.
Re
Figure 23. History-Service Data E

In the event that the system is not serviced by the

due date or even becomes overdue, the Service Icon
will remain red .
This red service icon can only be rectified by a
Brüel & Kjær Service Engineer.
ly
Figure 24. History-Service Data F
WARNING:
On
• Failure to service the VTS System may result in unexpected faults occurring and
potentially damage to the equipment.
3.4.7.2 How to View the Interlock Events

1. From the Main Menu page tap Interlock Events
or from any other page in the History group tap
e
the Interlock Events field at the bottom of the
page.
nc
Note: The Interlock Events page will be displayed.
From this page, you can view the last 7 interlocks in
the order that they occurred.
Alongside the Interlock Name, are recorded details
of the Main Output at the time of the occurrence
re
plus the time of occurrence into the test run, i.e.

since the On button was pressed.
Further diagnostic information can be gained by
using the data captured by the amplifier (see
fe
Figure 25. History-Interlock Events

Diagnostics - Graphs).
Re

3.4.7.3 How to View the Usage Bands
1. From the Main Menu page tap Usage Bands or

from any other page in the History group tap
the Usage Bands field at the bottom of the
page.
Note: The Usage Bands page will be displayed.
From this page, you can view the time that the
system has been running at the various power
outputs, being based on a percentage of the
maximum current output.
ly
This information is automatically stored by the
amplifier.
Figure 26. History-Usage Bands
On
3.4.8. Which Settings can be Modified in the Control System?
Legend: -
OP = Operator VO = View Only
SE = Authorised Setup personnel FC = Full Control
e PC = Partial Control
NA = Not Available
nc
Note: The items shown in blue in the table below are the actual parameters that will be shown on the
pages.
Setting and Description OP SE See Section

Amplifier Type VO VO 3.4.15.1 below
re
This is the actual amplifier type supplied including the power rating, e.g.
XPAX-88K
Vibrator Type VO VO 3.4.15.2 below
fe
This is the actual vibrator type supplied, e.g. V8900

System IP Address VO VO 3.4.15.11 below
This is either the IP Address assigned by the Local DHCP Server, or is the
static IP Address typed in to this system
Re
Touchscreen B/L Brightness VO FC 3.4.15.3 below

This is the actual brightness of the display screen
Touchscreen B/L Timeout VO FC 3.4.15.4 below
This is the time that the screen will remain ON after the last touch of the
panel.
When the time period has elapsed, the screen will go black.
Touching the screen will re-activate it.


Control Mode VO FC 3.4.15.5 below
The Control Mode is basically the location from where the Amplifier is
controlled.
1. In Manual, the Amplifier is controlled locally from the Amplifier
Control Panel
2. In Automatic, the Amplifier can be controlled locally, but is usually
from a remote location.
Input Path VO FC 3.4.15.6 below
The amplifier provides the following inputs (for connection details see
ly
section 8.6):
• Differential – Via a 3-pin XLR connection where the input
signal is the voltage difference between pins 2 and 3 with the
On
amplifier internal ground and screen of standard balanced
cable connected to pin 1. This is optimised for use with a
balanced signal, but can also be connected to a single-ended
signal using a suitable adaptor. This connection is suitable for
most applications.
• Single-Ended via BNC connector with the screen of the BNC
connected to amplifier internal ground and the input signal on
the centre conductor.
e
Inputs can be configured as follows:
nc
• AC – only AC signal component accepted, suitable for most
applications
• DC – AC and DC components accepted
Thus for most applications the preferred option will be Differential AC.
re
Armature Vertical Position VO FC 3.4.15.7 below

This allows an offset of the vibrator armature relative to the central
position.
Default Gain VO FC 3.4.15.8 below
fe
This is used in Automatic mode. The Master Gain Control Knob on the
Amplifier Control Panel is inoperative in Automatic mode; this value sets
the gain that is ramped to after an automatic switch-on.
Re
User Interlocks VO FC 3.4.15.9.3 below

Interlocks are devices used to interrupt the operation of the machine in
the event of a fault. The User Interlocks are devices that are external to
the supplied equipment and are connected into the control system. The
operating states and Attenuation Rates are all configurable, but the
names can only be changed by Brüel & Kjær.
System Interlocks NA VO 3.4.15.9.4 below
Interlocks are devices used to interrupt the operation of the machine in
the event of a fault. The System Interlocks are devices that are supplied
with the equipment and are used for the safe operation of the machine.
These interlocks are visible to a Authorised Setup personnel and Brüel &
Kjær Service. The operating states and Attenuation Rates are all
configurable, but the names can only be changed by Brüel & Kjær.


DHCP Mode VO FC 3.4.15.10 below
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client/server protocol
that automatically provides an (Internet Protocol) IP address and other
related configuration information such as the Subnet Mask and Default
Gateway.
With the DHCP Mode set to Enabled, the IP Address etc., are
automatically assigned.
With the DHCP Mode set to Disabled, the IP Address etc., will need to be
entered manually.
ly
IP Address VO VO 3.4.15.11 below
An IP Address (Internet Protocol Address) is a numerical label assigned
to each device participating in a computer network that uses the
Internet Protocol for communication.
On
This Amplifier requires an IP Address to communicate.
With the DHCP Mode set to Enabled, the IP Address is automatically
assigned.
With the DHCP Mode set to Disabled, the IP Address will need to be
entered manually.
Subnet Mask VO VO 3.4.15.12 below
e
A Subnet Mask is used to identify the network address of an IP address.
With the DHCP Mode set to Enabled, the Subnet Mask is automatically
nc
assigned.
With the DHCP Mode set to Disabled, the Subnet Mask will need to be
entered manually.
Default Gateway VO VO 3.4.15.13 below
re
A Default Gateway is the node on the computer network that the

network software uses when an IP Address does not match any other
routes in the routing table.
With the DHCP Mode set to Enabled, the Default Gateway is
fe
automatically assigned.
With the DHCP Mode set to Disabled, the Default Gateway will need to
be entered manually.
Field Setting VO FC 3.4.17.1 below
Re
This is the actual values of the programmed selections (which are a and 3.4.17.1.1
percentage of the current level available for the Vibrator) are: - below
Maximum = 100%
Medium = 70%
Minimum = 20%
Preset1 = User defined
Low Noise (SNR) VO FC 3.4.17.2 below
Low Noise (SNR) Mode reduces the Signal to Noise Ratio of the system
by limiting the number of modules that can be used and also reduces
the Field Setting and Gain in Auto mode.


Cooling Run On VO FC 3.4.18. below
After using the Vibration Testing System, especially after running in Low
Noise (SNR) mode where the fan is usually off or after high loading
testing, the Vibrator needs to be cooled after the system has been
switched down. This setting will enable or disable the fan for this
purpose.
Cooling Fan Run On Remaining VO VO 3.4.18.2 below
After using the Vibration Testing System, especially after running in Low
Noise (SNR) mode where the fan is usually off or after high loading
testing, the Vibrator needs to be cooled after the system has been
ly
switched down. This area on the page will show a countdown of the
time remaining for the fan to be on.
Field Level NA FC 3.4.17.1.1 below
On
This setting is used to set maximum field level for use during Standard
mode.
Select SNR Modules NA FC 3.4.17.2.1 below
This setting limits the number of power modules that can be used
during Low Noise [SNR] mode.
Auto SNR Gain NA FC 3.4.17.2.2 below
e
This is used in Automatic mode when Low Noise (SNR) Mode is enabled.
Run On Time NA FC 3.4.18.3 below
nc
This setting will determine the number minutes that the fan will run on
for after enabling the setting (see Cooling Run On above).
Quiet Mode Enable / Disable VO FC 3.6.11 below
This setting will determine whether Quiet Mode is enabled or disabled.
re
Be aware that the equipment will not run in Standard mode, if this
setting is enabled.
Select Modules (Quiet Mode) VO FC 3.6.11 below
fe
This setting limits the number of power modules that can be used
during Quiet Mode.
Field Level (Quiet Mode) VO FC 3.6.11 below
This setting is used to set maximum field level for use during Quiet
Re
Mode.

3.4.9. What Happens During an Emergency Stop Event?

Whenever an Emergency Stop Switch is activated
the test in progress will be brought to a stop in a
maximum of 50ms.
By their very action, the Emergency Stop Switch
remains activated until physically released.
Additionally, the Emergency Stop screen (see
Figure 27) is displayed and remains in place until
the Emergency stop is released. No other action
can be taken or performed on the Touch Screen,
until the Emergency stop is released.
ly
Figure 27. Emergency Stop Page
On
WARNING:
• Do not release an Emergency Stop button until the reason for pressing the button
has been determined and the cause rectified.
• Failure to follow this Warning may result in serious personnel injury or fatality
occurring and potentially damage to the equipment and payload.
e
nc
After the Emergency Stop Pushbutton has been
released, the Main Output page of the Status group
will be displayed and the system will be in a
switched-DOWN state. To resume a test, the
re
amplifier will need to be switched-UP, see section

3.2.
fe
Figure 28 Status-Main Output Page

Re

3.4.10. What Happens During an Interlock Event?

If the amplifier detects a shutdown is required to
protect either the amplifier or its payload, a page
is displayed (see Figure 29) showing:
• The cause of the Interlock
• The Voltage and Current at time of interlock.
• The Time since the Switch-Up button was
pressed.
The time for the test to be brought to a stop will
either be a maximum of 50ms or 100ms
depending upon the Actual Interlock
ly
Configuration (see setup interlocks).
Tapping the button will display additional
help information. Figure 29. Sample Interlock Page
This information can be used to assist to either
On
diagnose or improve the test.
e
nc
Figure 30. Additional Interlock Information
re
fe
Re

3.4.11. How to Proceed After an Interlock Event has Occurred

To avoid duplication, this topic is detailed in the Fault Finding section of section 6 Maintenance.
3.4.12. What do the Licence Verify Fail Messages Mean?

3.4.12.1 Licence Verify Fail, Period Expired Message
ly
If this message appears on the display, it means that
the licence on the USB Key has expired.
On
Contact Brüel & Kjær Service for assistance.
e Figure 31. Licence Verify Fail-Period Expired
3.4.12.2 Licence Verify Fail, Future Period Message

nc
the licence on the USB Key is set to begin at a future
re
date or that the system time is incorrectly set in the

past.
fe
Figure 32. Licence Verify Fail-Future Period

Re

3.4.12.3 Licence Verify Fail, File Not Found or Not Valid Message

the licence on the USB Key is either missing, or has
become corrupt.
ly
Figure 33. Licence Verify Failed-File Not Found Or
On
Not Valid
3.4.12.4 Licence Verify Failed. File Contents Tampered
e
If this message appears on the display, it means
nc
that the licence on the USB Key has been
tampered with and is no longer valid.
re
Figure 34. Licence Verify Failed-File Contents

Tampered
fe
Re

3.4.13. What do the Configuration Error Warnings Mean?

3.4.13.1 Initial Configuration Failure
In the event that the control system fails to

complete initialisation, the page shown in Figure 35
will be displayed.
This means that there is a problem with initialisation
ly
and requires Brüel & Kjær Service to resolve it.
On
Figure 35. Initial Configuration Failure
3.4.13.2 Amplifier Module Configuration Error

e
When the amplifier is first powered on and when
the amplifier is energised for a test, it performs a
power on self-test to check the number of amplifier
nc
modules it is configured for are actually installed. If
a difference is detected the result is displayed as
shown in Figure 36.
This means that there is a problem between the
quantity of amplifier modules required for the test
re
and the quantity available in the system.

Figure 36. Module Configuration Error
fe
3.4.13.3 Field Supply Module Configuration Error

Re
When the amplifier is first powered on and when

the amplifier is energised for a test, it performs a
power on self-test to check the number of field
supply modules it is configured for are actually
installed. If a difference is detected the result is
displayed as shown in Figure 37.
This means that there is a problem between the
quantity of field supply modules required for the
test and the quantity available in the system.
Figure 37. Field Supply Configuration Error

3.4.14. How to Know if a USB Key is Installed?
A USB Key is required to be inserted into the system

for various purposes: -
• By the Authorised Setup personnel for Position
offset, user interlocks etc.
and also
• By Brüel & Kjær Service for Advanced Setup
and Diagnostics.
ly
Both use a standard USB key configured via the
Brüel & Kjær web portal for individual amplifiers.
Figure 38. Typical Brüel & Kjær USB Key
When a USB Key is inserted, the Service Icon
On
e
changes to a USB Icon, as shown in Figure 39. After
a short period, it reverts back to the Service Icon
nc
Figure 39. Icon Showing USB Key is Inserted
re
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the USB Key whilst this icon is displayed. Data is being transferred and
the USB device could become corrupt.
fe
Re

3.4.15. How to Set the Control System

3.4.15.1 How to View the Amplifier Type
Note: This page can be viewed by the Operator and
authorised Setup personnel, but can only be
changed by Brüel & Kjær. Contact
Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for assistance.
1. From the Main menu page, tap System Data or
ly
displayed.
On
Previous Page Arrow until it is. Figure 40. Setup-System Data Page 1
3.4.15.2 How to View the Vibrator Type

Note: This page can be viewed by the Operator and
Authorised Setup personnel, but can only be
e
changed by Brüel & Kjær. Contact
nc
1. From the Main menu page, tap System Data or
Note: One of the Configuration pages will be
displayed.
re

Previous Page Arrow until it is. Figure 41. Setup-System Data Page 1
fe
Re

3.4.15.3 How to View / Set the Touchscreen B/L (Backlit) Brightness

Note: This page can be viewed by the Operator, but
can only be changed by authorised Setup
personnel or Brüel & Kjær. Contact authorised
Setup personnel or Brüel & Kjær Service
Centre for assistance.
displayed.
ly
On
3. To the right of BL Brightness [%] is displayed a
value as a percentage of the total available
brightness of the screen. Figure 42. Setup-System Data Page 2
4. For authorised Setup personnel only, tap either
or to decrease or increase the brightness.
Alternatively tap the number and the Numeric
e
Entry Keypad will be displayed.
Note: This page cannot be viewed by the Operator,
but can be viewed and changed by authorised
nc
Setup personnel or Brüel & Kjær. Contact
authorised Setup personnel or Brüel & Kjær
Service Centre for assistance.
5. On the Numeric Entry Keypad, enter the
re
required number, by tapping the number.

Note: If an error is made, simply tap the X button to
delete it.
6. When complete, tap OK.
fe
Figure 43. Setup-Numeric Entry Keypad

Re

3.4.15.4 How to View / Set the Touchscreen B/L (Backlit) Timeout

Note: One of the Configuration pages will be
displayed.
ly
On
3. To the right of BL Timeout [min] is displayed the
present value.
– or + to decrease or increase the time.
e
nc
re

delete it.
fe

Re

3.4.15.5 How to View / Set the Control Mode

1. From the Main Menu page, tap Configuration or
Configuration field at the bottom of the page.
2. To the right of Control Mode is displayed the
present value.
ly
the value or the up and down scroll arrows
to display the Control Mode Selection Page. Figure 46. Setup-Configuration Page 1
On
Note: As all associated items are displayed on the
Control Mode Selection page, the up and
down
e
scroll arrows are not used.
4. Tap the required Control Mode to highlight it in
nc
the dotted box, as shown in Figure 47 and then
tap OK.
Figure 47. Setup-Control Mode Selection Page

re
fe
Re

3.4.15.6 How to View / Set the Input Path

The correct selection of the Input Path is determined by the output from the Vibration Controller and
has 4 factors: -
Factor Description
Utilises a screened twisted pair cable and XLR Connectors, which reduces or eliminates
Differential
signal ‘noise’ and is suitable for most applications
Utilises a co-ax cable and BNC Connectors and has a useable length up to 9.1m (30ft),
Single Ended
where ‘noise’ is not a consideration.
AC An AC only signal component is passed through
ly
DC AC and DC (offset) components are passed through
Note: The default and recommended setting for the Input Path is Differential AC.
On
e
2. To the right of Input Path is displayed the
nc
present value.
3. For an Authorised Setup personnel only, tap
either the value or the up and down scroll
arrows to display the Input Path Selection Figure 48. Setup-Configuration Page 1
Page.
re

fe

Input Path Selection page, the up and
down scroll arrows are not used.
Re
4. Make a note of the type of input connection that

is being used on the back of the Amplifier
Control Unit and whether the signal is
configured AC or DC.
5. Tap the required Input Path to highlight it in the Figure 49. Setup-Selecting the Input Path
dotted box, as shown in Figure 49 and then tap
OK.

3.4.15.7 How to View / Set the Armature Vertical Position

2. To the right of Position [mm] is displayed the
present value.
ly
3. For Authorised Setup personnel only, tap either
or to decrease or increase the value.
Alternatively tap the number and the Numeric Figure 50. Setup-Configuration Page 1
On

but can be viewed and changed by
authorised Setup personnel or Brüel & Kjær.
Contact authorised Setup personnel or Brüel
& Kjær Service Centre for assistance.
e
nc
Note: If an error is made, simply tap the X button
to delete it.
re
3.4.15.8 How to View / Set the Default Gain

fe
can only be changed by Authorised Setup

Re

2. To the right of Default Gain [%] is displayed the
present value.
or to decrease or increase the value.
Alternatively tap the number and the Numeric Figure 52. Setup-Configuration Page 1


but can be viewed and changed by a
Authorised Setup personnel or Brüel & Kjær.
to delete it.
ly
On
3.4.15.9 How to Set the Interlocks
3.4.15.9.1 How to Access the Interlocks

e
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Interlocks or
Interlocks field at the bottom of the page.
nc
Note: One of the Interlocks pages will be displayed.
re
Figure 54. Setup-An Interlock Page

fe
Re

3.4.15.9.2 Common Procedures for Setting Interlocks
3.4.15.9.2.1 How to Enable or Disable an Interlock
Note: This procedure can only be performed by

authorised Setup personnel and Brüel &
Kjær. Contact authorised Setup personnel or
When an Interlock is enabled, the name, details and
button are revealed in white, as shown in Field
Supply Min in Figure 55
ly
When an Interlock is disabled, the name, details and
Figure 55. Setup-Enabled/Disabled Interlocks
button are revealed greyed out, as shown in Field
Supply Max in Figure 55 Note: Field Supply Min shown as Enabled
On
Note: Field Supply Max shown as Disabled
1. To change the state of the Interlock, simply tap

the button to the left of the name.
Note: The state will change from Enabled to Interlock Interlock
e
Disabled and vice-versa. Enabled Disabled
Figure 56. Interlock States
nc
3.4.15.9.2.2 How to Rename an Interlock
re
Note: Interlock Names can only be changed by

fe
Brüel & Kjær, with a bespoke application.

Contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for
assistance.
Re
Figure 57. Setup-Renaming an Interlock
3.4.15.9.2.3 How to Change the Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate

What is the Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate?
The Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate is the speed at which the amplifier will shut down in the
event of an Interlock. It can be SLOW or FAST, when in both cases, the amplifier performs a controlled
shutdown of all services.

1. Tap the Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate

(Slow or Fast, as shown in Figure 58) and the
Attenuation Rate Selection page will be
displayed, as shown in Figure 59
ly
Figure 58. Setup-An Interlock Page
On
2. Select the appropriate speed for the type of
Interlock: -
• Selecting Slow will perform a controlled
shutdown within 100ms
• Selecting Fast will perform a controlled
shutdown within 50ms
e
3. Tap OK
nc
Figure 59. Setup-Attenuation Rate Selection Page
3.4.15.9.2.4 How to Set the Limit Values of Interlocks

re

fe

4. To the right of Interlock Name is displayed the
Re
present value.
5. For a Authorised Setup personnel only, tap
either or to decrease or increase the
value. Alternatively tap the number and the
Numeric Entry Keypad will be displayed.
Figure 60. Setup-Interlocks Page 1


required number, by tapping the number keys.
to delete it.
ly
On
3.4.15.9.2.5 What Happens to an Interlock during a Power Cycle?
During a power cycle, where the AC mains is disconnected from the Amplifier, some of the Interlocks
that may have been renamed, enabled or disabled or their attenuation rate changed, will revert back
to their default settings. The following table shows the effect a power cycle will have on the Interlocks,
along with the initial defaults and the access level required to edit the settings.
Access Reset to default
Initial Defaults level to edit following a power
Interlock Name
e settings cycle
Interlock Description
Attenuation
Attenuation
nc Enabled or
Enabled or
on Screen
Disabled
Disabled
Service
Name
Setup
Rate
Rate
3-Phase Failure 3 Phase Power Failure Enabled Fast No Yes Yes Yes Yes
re
Amp Amplifier Armature Drive

Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overcurrent [A] Output Overcurrent
Amp Amplifier Armature Drive
Overvoltage [V] Output Overvoltage
fe
Amplifier Transformer or
Amplifier
Rectifiers Above Maximum Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cooling
Temperature
Vib Oil Vibrator Armature Low or No
Enabled Slow Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Re
Pressure Oil Pressure

Vibrator Extraction Air Flow
Blower Flow Enabled Slow No Yes Yes No No
Failure
Vibrator Extraction Air Motor
Blower Motor Enabled Slow No Yes Yes No No
Fault
External CAN Bus
CAN External Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Communication Error
Internal CAN Bus
CAN Internal Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Communication Error
Ctrl Comms Amplifier Internal System
Fault Communications Failure
External 1 User Configurable Interlock 1 Enabled Slow Yes Yes No No No


settings cycle
Interlock Name
Attenuation
Attenuation
Enabled or
Enabled or
on Screen
Disabled
Disabled
Service
Name
Setup
Rate
Rate
External 2 User Configurable Interlock 2 Enabled Slow Yes Yes No No No
Field Supply Field Current Above
Max [A] Maximum
ly
Field Supply
Field Current Below Minimum Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Min [A]
Field Unit 1 Field SMPS Unit 1 Fault Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
On
Field Unit 2 Field SMPS Unit 2 Fault Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Input Signal Drive High
Input Overdrive Enabled Fast No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Interlock
Active Bay Main 3 Phase
Main Contactor Enabled Fast No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Contactor feedback
Power Module MK4a Power Module Interlock
Enabled Fast No Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 - Module Number 1
Power Module
2
e
MK4a Power Module Interlock
- Module Number 2
nc
3 - Module Number 3
4 - Module Number 4
re
5 - Module Number 5
6 - Module Number 6
fe
7 - Module Number 7
8 - Module Number 8
Re
9 - Module Number 9
10 - Module Number 10
11 - Module Number 11
Power Module MK4a Power Module Interlock Disable
Fast No Yes Yes No Yes
12 - Module Number 12 d


settings cycle
Interlock Name
Attenuation
Attenuation
Enabled or
Enabled or
on Screen
Disabled
Disabled
Service
Name
Setup
Rate
Rate
Module Supply Output
Module supply
Voltage Above Maximum Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
ly
Max [V]
(Internal Rectifier)
Module Supply Output
Module supply
Voltage Below Minimum Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Min [V]
On
(Internal Rectifier)
Slip Oil Slip Table Low or No Oil
Enabled Slow Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pressure Pressure
Slip Table Travelled Beyond
Slip Overtravel Enabled Fast Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum Stroke
Step start contactor feedback
Step Contactor Enabled Fast No Yes Yes Yes Yes
fault
Internal
Supplies
e
Control Board Internal
Supplies Fault
nc
Vibrator has exceeded
Vib Overtravel Enabled Fast Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum Travel
VPS Control VPS General Interlock Enabled Slow No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Armature Coil Armature Coil temperature Enabled
1 Slow Yes Yes Yes No No
Max [°C] has exceeded maximum
re
Field Coil Max Field Coil temperature has Enabled

1 Slow Yes Yes Yes No No
[°C] exceeded maximum
fe
Re
1
The Initial Default for this interlock is Disabled. If Quiet Mode has been installed and Enabled, the Initial Default will
change to Enabled, as shown.

3.4.15.9.3 How to View / Set the User Interlocks

The User Interlocks are interlocks that can be configured by the Operator
Note: This page is a sample of the User Interlock
pages that may be available on the system.
The User Pages can be viewed by the
Operator, but can only be changed by
authorised Setup personnel or Brüel & Kjær.
ly
Note: The Interlocks pages will be displayed.
2. For authorised Setup personnel, if the page (as
On
shown in Figure 62) is not displayed, tap either
the Next Page Arrow or Previous Page Arrow
until it is shown.
3. If the Interlock needs to be Enabled or disabled,
follow the procedure in section 3.4.15.9.2.1
How to Enable or Disable an Interlock above.
e
4. If the Interlock Name (e.g. External 1) needs to
be changed, contact Brüel & Kjær Service
Centre for assistance, as this can only be Figure 62. Setup- User Interlocks Page 1
nc
performed by Brüel & Kjær Service.
5. If the Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate
needs to be changed, follow the procedure in
section 3.4.15.9.2.3 How to Change the
Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate above.
re
6. Repeat paragraphs 3 to 5 above for the

remaining User Interlocks.
7. Tap the Next Page Arrow

fe
Re

3.4.15.9.4 How to View / Set the System Interlocks

Note: These are a sample of the other Interlock
pages that may be available on the system.
They cannot be viewed by the Operator, but
can be viewed by authorised Setup personnel.
These pages can only be changed by Brüel &
Kjær.
Note: The Interlocks pages will be displayed.
ly
2. If the page (as shown in the figures) is not
On
Previous Page Arrow until it is shown.
3. If the Interlock needs to be Enabled or disabled,
follow the procedure in section 3.4.15.9.2.1
How to Enable or Disable an Interlock above.
4. If the Interlock Name (e.g. External 1) needs to
be changed, contact Brüel & Kjær Service
Centre for assistance, as this can only be
e
performed by Brüel & Kjær Service.
5. If the Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate
Figure 63. Setup-Sample System Interlocks Page
needs to be changed, follow the procedure in

nc
section 3.4.15.9.2.3 How to Change the
Amplifier Shutdown Attenuation Rate above.
6. Repeat paragraphs 3 to 5 for the remaining
Interlocks if required.
re
Tap the Next Page Arrow to complete the

remaining Interlock pages.
fe
Re

3.4.15.10 How to View / Set the DHCP Mode

personnel or Brüel & Kjær. Contact
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Device or from
any other page in the Setup group, tap the
Device field at the bottom of the page.
Note: The Device page will be displayed.
ly
On
3. To the right of DHCP is displayed the present
value. Tap either the value or the up and down Figure 64. Setup-Device Page 1
arrows to display the DHCP Mode Selection
Page.
e
nc
DHCP Mode Selection page, the up and
down scroll arrows are not used.
4. Tap the required DHCP Mode to highlight it in
tap OK.
re
Figure 65. Setup-Mode Selection List

fe
When the DHCP Mode is changed from Disabled to

Re
Enabled, the IP Address needs to be assigned by the

server. In order to do this the network adaptor
needs to be reset to perform this.
5. When asked to Rebind the Network, tap Yes.
Note: The IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default
Gateway will automatically be assigned.
Figure 66. Setup-Rebinding the Network

3.4.15.11 How to View / Set the IP Address Manually

Note: The Device pages will be displayed.
ly
displayed, tap either the next page arrow or
previous page arrow until it is.
On
If the DHCP is set to Enabled, (see section 3.4.15.10
above), the IP Address is set automatically, along
with the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.
If the DHCP is set to Disabled, (See Section 3.4.15.10
above), the address will be a Static IP Address which
is entered manually. Figure 67. Setup-Device Page 1
The IP Address will need to be obtained from the
local IT department.
e
3. To the right of IP Address is displayed the
present value. Tap either the value or the up
nc
and down arrows to display the Numeric
Keypad.
re
4. On the Numeric Entry Keypad, enter the IP

Address obtained, e.g. 10.100.106.209, by
fe
tapping the number and period keys.

to delete it.
Re

3.4.15.12 How to View / Set the Subnet Mask

ly
On
above), the Subnet Mask Address is set
automatically, along with the IP Address and Default
Gateway.
If the DHCP is set to Disabled, (see section 3.4.15.10
Figure 69. Setup-Device Page 1
above), the Subnet Mask is assigned by the local IT
department and entered manually.
e
3. To the right of Subnet Mask is displayed the
present value. Tap either the value or the up
nc
and down arrows to display the Numeric
Keypad.
re
4. On the Numeric Entry Keypad, enter the Subnet

Mask obtained, e.g. 255.255.252.0, by tapping
the number and period keys.
fe

to delete it.
Re

3.4.15.13 How to View / Set the Default Gateway

ly
On
above), the Default Gateway Address is set
automatically, along with the IP Address and Subnet
Mask.
If the DHCP is set to Disabled, (see section 3.4.15.10
Figure 71. Setup-Device Page 1
above), the Default Gateway is assigned by the local
IT department and entered manually.
e
3. To the right of Default Gateway Address is
displayed the present value. Tap either the
nc
value or the up and down arrows to display
the Numeric Keypad.
re
4. On the Numeric Entry Keypad, enter the Default

Gateway obtained, e.g. 10.100.104.1, by
tapping the number and period keys.
fe

to delete it.
Re

3.4.16. How to Set the System Modes
The LDS XPA-K Amplifier has two system operating

run modes: -
a. Standard Mode
and
b. Quiet Mode
as can be seen in Figure 73.
For details of How to Set the Standard Run Mode
Settings, see section 3.4.17. below.
ly
For details of How to Set the Quiet Operating Run
Mode Settings, see section 3.11.6. below.
On
3.4.17. How to Set the Standard Run Mode Settings
CAUTION:
• For any changes made to the settings described in this section for Standard
Operating Run Mode to apply, Quiet Run Mode must be disabled. See How to Enable
e
/ Disable Quiet Run Mode in section 3.11.6. below.
For example: -
nc
Note: If Quiet Mode has been activated and
enabled, it is not possible to change some of
re
the settings for Standard Mode.

e.g. the scroll arrows for Field Setting in
Figure 74 are shown ‘greyed out’ denoting
that they and the associated parameter are
fe
not available for change. This is because the

Operating Run Mode is set to Quiet Mode.
To correct this Quiet Mode must be disabled.
Re
Figure 74. Modes-Selection Page in Quiet Mode

3.4.17.1 How to Select the Standard Operating Run Mode Pre-set Field Setting
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Standard in the
Modes group or from any other screen, tap the
Modules icon .
Note: The Modes-Selection page will be displayed.
ly
2. To the right of Field Setting is displayed the
present value.
3. For authorised Setup personnel only, tap the Figure 75. Modes-Selection Page
On
value or the up and down arrows to display
the Field Setting Selection List
Setup personnel and Brüel & Kjær. Contact
e
Field Setting Selection List page, the up
nc
and down scroll arrows are not used.
The actual values of the programmed selections
(which are a percentage of the level available for the
Vibrator) are: -
Maximum = 100%
re
Medium = 70% Figure 76. Modes-Field Setting Selection List

Minimum = 20%
Preset1 = User defined, see section 3.4.17.1.1 for
fe
details.
4. Tap the required Field Setting to highlight it in
tap OK.
Re

3.4.17.1.1 How to Set the Standard Operating Run Mode Preset1 Field Setting
personnel and Brüel & Kjær. Contact
Modules icon .
ly
Figure 77. Modes-Selection Page
to display the Mode Level Settings page.
On
3. To the right of Field Level [%] is displayed the
e
present value of the Field Setting shown in
Figure 78.
4. Tap either or to decrease or increase the
nc
Field Level. Alternatively tap the number and
the Numeric Entry Keypad will be displayed.
Figure 78. Modes- Settings Page

re

fe

Re
delete it.
This setting is now saved as Preset1. If the
Minimum, medium or Maximum values are changed
following this procedure, this then becomes the Figure 79. Modes-Keypad
new Preset1 value, overwriting the old value.
3.4.17.2 How to Enable / Disable the System for Low Noise (SNR) Mode in
Standard Operating Run Mode
Low Noise (SNR) Mode reduces the Signal to Noise Ratio of the system by limiting the number of
modules that can be used and also reduces the Field Setting and Gain in auto mode.


Modules icon .
2. To the right of Low Noise (SNR) is displayed the
ly
present value. For a Authorised Setup personnel
only, tap the value or the up and down arrows Figure 80. Modes-Selection Page
to display the Field Setting Selection List
On
and down
e
scroll arrows are not used.
nc
3. Tap the required Field Setting to highlight it in
tap OK.
Figure 81. Modes-Mode Selection List
re
3.4.17.2.1 How to Select the Quantity of Modules to be Used for the Low Noise
(SNR) Mode
fe

Re

Modules icon .
to display the Mode Enable / Disable page.


3. To the right of Select SNR Modules is displayed
the present value of modules selected for the
Low Noise (SNR) Mode, as shown in Figure 83.
quantity. Alternatively tap the number and the
ly
Figure 83. Modes- Module Selection
On
e
to delete it.
nc
Figure 84. Modes-Keypad
3.4.17.2.2 How to Change the Auto Gain for Low Noise (SNR) Mode
re

fe

Re
Modules icon .


3. To the right of Auto SNR Gain [%] is displayed
the present value of the Gain when in Auto for
the Low Noise (SNR) Mode, as shown in Figure
86.
value. Alternatively tap the number and the
ly
Figure 86. Modes- Module Selection
On
authorised Setup personnel and Brüel & Kjær
Service. Contact authorised Setup personnel
or Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for assistance.
e
to delete it.
nc
3.4.18. How to Set the Cooling Unit Run On Features

re
3.4.18.1 How to Enable / Disable the Cooling Fan Run On

After using the Vibration Testing System, especially after running in Low Noise (SNR) Mode or Quiet
fe
Mode where the fan is usually off or after high loading testing, the Vibrator needs to be cooled after
the system has been switched down. This setting will enable or disable the Cooling Unit (fan) for this
purpose.
Re

personnel and Brüel & Kjær Service. Contact
Modules icon .
2. To the right of Cooling Run On is displayed the
present value. Tap the value or the up and

down arrows to display the Cooling Run On

Selection List
3. Tap either Enabled or Disabled to highlight it in
ly
tap OK.
On
3.4.18.2 How to View the Cooling Fan Run On Period Remaining in Standard
Operating Run Mode
This Cooling Fan Run On period is common to both the Standard and Quiet Modes and is enabled or
disabled by following the procedure in section 3.4.18.1 above.
Note:
e
To view the Cooling Fan Run On period in Quiet Mode, see section 3.6.11 below.
nc
Modules icon .
re
Note: The Modes-Standard page will be displayed.

2. To the right Run On Remaining is displayed a
counter that counts down the time remaining,
after enabling Cooling Run On as described in
fe
section 3.4.18. above.

3. For authorised Setup personnel only, to set the
Run On time, see section 3.4.18.3 below.
Re

3.4.18.3 How to Set the Cooling Fan Run On Time

Modules icon .
ly
On
e
3. To the right of Run On Time [min] is displayed
the number of minutes currently set for the
run-on period, as shown in Figure 92.
nc
Figure 92. Modes- Mode Settings Page
re

fe

Re

to delete it.

3.5. Setting-up for Product Testing

This procedure consists of: -
3.5.1. Setting the Vibrator Axis (If Required)
3.5.2. Fitting the Head Expander (If Required)
3.5.3. Vibrator Pre-Use Checks
3.5.4. Head Expander Pre-Use Checks
3.5.5. Slip Table Pre-Use Checks
3.5.6. Amplifier Pre-Use Checks
ly
3.5.7. Pneumatics Pre-Use Checks
3.5.8. Instrumentation Pre-Use Checks
3.5.9. Electrical Earth Pre-Use Checks
On
3.5.10. Pre-Operation Settings
3.5.11. Final Check
3.5.12. Attaching the Payload
e
3.5.1. Setting the Vibrator Axis (If Required)
nc
1. Prepare the system for the type of testing to be
performed, by following the procedures in: -
re
fe
a. Section 3.6 Preparing the System for Vertical

Testing
Re
Figure 1 Vibrator Set for Vertical Testing

Or

b. Section 3.7 Preparing the System for

Horizontal Testing
ly
Figure 2 Combo Vibrator Set for Horizontal Testing
3.5.2. Fitting the Head Expander (If Required)
On
e
1. If required, fit the Head Expander, by following
the procedure for fitting the Head Expander in
nc
Section 3.8 Operating with the LDS Head
Expander
re
Figure 3 Combo Vibrator Set for Vertical Testing

with a Head Expander
fe
3.5.3. Vibrator Pre-Use Checks

Re
1. Inspect the Vibrator interconnecting cables for

damage.
Figure 4 Examples of Cable Damage

2. Ensure area around the Vibrator is clear and no

objects other than the payload are on the
Armature.
3. Check the top seal of the Vibrator is undamaged.
Figure 5 Vibrator Top Seal
ly
4. Check the Vibrator Cooling Unit Hose is not
damaged or crushed and is coupled to the Fan
On
and Vibrator and that the AC supply cable is
connected to the Fan.
Figure 6 A Crushed Hose
5. Check all Emergency Stop Pushbuttons are

e
operational, by pressing and releasing the push-
button.
nc
Figure 7 Emergency Stop Pushbutton
re
6. Check the Oil Level in the Hydraulic Power Unit.

Note: A sight glass is fitted to the side of the tank.
fe
7. Check the Hydraulic Oil Condition:

Note: The oil should be changed every year or
sooner if it changes colour from a golden
Re
brown to black. The correct level needs to be

checked on the sight glass located on the
Hydraulic Oil Power Pack to ensure that the
level is above the minimum required.
8. Check the Hydraulic Oil Power Unit oil filters.
Figure 8 Vibrator Hydraulic Power Unit

9. Check the hydraulic oil hoses for damage
Figure 9 Checking for Damage to Hydraulic Hoses
10. Switch on the Hydraulic Power Unit and allow
ly
the unit to run for approximately 30 minutes to
stabilise the lubricating oil temperature and
operating pressure as detailed in section 4
Technical Data.
On
11. Check the hydraulic system for leaks. Repair as
required.
12. Switch off the Hydraulic Power Unit.
13. Check the pneumatic hoses for damage and
leaks. e
3.5.4. Head Expander Pre-Use Checks
nc
1. Ensure area around and on top is free from
foreign objects.
re
2. Check, using an engineer’s level, that the Head

Expander Plate is perfectly level.
3. Check that the head expander bolts are torqued
up to the correct value.
fe
Figure 10 Checking Head Expander is Level

Re
If the Head Expander is supplied with a Hydraulic

Power supply: -
5. Check the Hydraulic Oil Power Pack oil filters.

7. Switch on the Hydraulic Power Unit (if fitted) and
ly
allow the unit to run for approximately 30
minutes to stabilise the lubricating oil
temperature and operating pressure as detailed
in section 4 Technical Data.
On
required.
9. Switch off the Hydraulic Power Unit.
10. Check that any interlock cables that may be
fitted are free from any damage.
e
3.5.5. Slip Table Pre-Use Checks
1. Inspect hoses, filters and interlock cables for
nc
damage / replacement.
re
2. Check, using an engineer’s level, that the slip

plate is perfectly level.
fe
Re
Figure 12 Checking Slip Table is Level

4. Check the Hydraulic Oil Power Pack oil filters.

ly
On
6. Switch on the Slip Table Hydraulic Power Unit and
allow the unit to run for approximately 30
minutes to stabilise the lubricating oil
temperature and operating pressure as detailed
in section 4 Technical Data.
required.
e
nc
Figure 14 Slip Table Hydraulic Power Unit
re
8. Check that the gap between the Slip Plate and the
fe
Granite Base, at the four corners and along the

four edges of the Slip Plate, is within the values
shown in Table 1 below and that the Slip Plate
moves freely under hand pressure only.
Re
Note: Slip Table Hydraulic Power Unit must be on

for this to be performed.
Figure 15 Checking the Gap Between the Slip Plate

and the Granite Base
Slip Table Size Minimum Maximum

750 x 750 0.08 mm (0.0030in) 0.30 mm (0.0120 in)
900 x 900 0.10 mm (0.0040 in) 0.40 mm (0.0150 in)
1220 x 1220 0.13 mm (0.0050 in) 0.50 mm (0.0200 in)
Table 1 100 mm (4 in) HBT Slip Table Oil Film Thickness

CAUTION:
• If the gap measured between the Slip Plate and the Granite Base is above or below
the values shown, contact Brüel & Kjær Service for advice.
9. With the driver bar detached from the slip plate,

check that slip plate slides freely with only hand
pressure applied.
CAUTION:
• If the slip plate does not move freely, the cause should be investigated and cured
before operation commences.
ly
10. Mount the payload to the slip plate and secure
the fixings only hand tight at this stage. Leave the
payload on the slip plate in this condition for 30
On
minutes, to allow the payload / slip plate
interface temperature to stabilise.
WARNING:
• Do not torque tighten the fixings until the 30 minute period has elapsed.
11. Torque tighten the payload to slip plate fixings

and with the driver bar still detached from the
e
slip plate, check that the slip plate slides freely
with only light hand pressure.
nc
WARNING:
• If the slip plate does not move freely, the cause should be investigated and cured
before operation commences.
12. Fit the Driver Bar. (See section 3.7 Preparing for
re
Horizontal Testing).
13. Check the pneumatic hoses for damage and
leaks.
fe
Re

3.5.6. Amplifier Pre-Use Checks

1. Ensure that no objects or obstruction are blocking the air flow through the Amplifier. Unobstructed air
flow into the power module intake grills is very important
2. Check all Amplifier panels are fixed and locked correctly
3. Switch on the 3-phase supply for the Cooling Fan at the mains isolator.
4. Switch on the 3-phase supply for the Amplifier at the mains isolator.
5. Switch on the single phase supply for the Pedestal Control Unit at the mains isolator.
6. Switch on the power to the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply at the 3 phase isolator (if not already on).
7. If using the Combo Slip Table, switch on the power to the Slip Table Hydraulic Power Supply at the 3
phase isolator (if not already on).
ly
8. Check that the Amplifier Control Panel is on and
On
displaying the Main Menu.
9. Check that all Amplifier Cooling Fans are
operating.
10. Check that the Vibrator Cooling Fan starts up
and runs in the correct direction of rotation.
Note: The Cooling icon on the top right-hand side
of the control panel display will be green.
e
Figure 16 Main Menu
nc
re
11. Check the function of all emergency stops in the

system by confirming that when tripped they
appear on the Amplifier display. Reset the stops.
fe
Re
Figure 17 Screen showing Emergency Stop Event

12. From the Main Menu or any other page in the

Status group, select Active Interlocks.
13. Check to see if there are any active interlocks.
E.g. a typical interlock would be ‘Vib Overtravel’,
where the Internal Load Support system has not
yet been pressurised.
ly
Figure 18 Status Menu-Active Interlocks Page
On
3.5.7. Pneumatics Pre-Use Checks
1. Apply compressed air to the Pedestal Control Emergency Stop Load Support
Unit. Pushbutton Regulator &
2. Switch on the single phase supply for the Pressure Gauge
Pedestal Control Unit at the mains isolator (if
not already on).
3. Check that the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply
e
is already running and at a pressure of 172 bar
(2500 lbf/in²).
nc
Note: If the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply is not
operating at 172 bar (2500 lbf/in²), then the
Internal Load Support system will not
operate.
re
4. If using the Combo Slip Table, check that the Slip Regulator
Table Hydraulic Power Supply is already running
and at a pressure of 172 bar (2500 lbf/in²). Figure 19 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
fe
Re

ly
Figure 20 View on LH Side Lin-E-Air Arrangement Figure 21 View on RH Side Lin-E-Air Arrangement
showing Lin-E-Air Setting heights for Trunnion showing Lin-E- Air Setting heights for Trunnion
Guide Shafts in Vertical Mode Guide Shafts in Vertical Mode
On
5. To check the Lin-E-Air system, turn the Air Emergency Stop
Isolation Regulator slowly clockwise on the Pushbutton
Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 22) until the
Vibrator body centralises within the Trunnions
(see Figure 20 and Figure 21 above), i.e. the
amount of trunnion shaft extending beyond the
frame, is equal at both ends as shown by the =
sign dimensions.
e
Note: Springs mounted within the trunnions provide
an opposing force, to permit the trunnions to
nc
be stabilised.
6. Check the Lin-E-Air Air Bags and associated
pipework for leaks. ICS Display Air Isolation
Regulator
7. Turn the Air Isolation Regulator fully
re
anticlockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 22 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
Figure 22) to depressurise the system.
fe
8. To check the Load Support System, turn the Load Load Support
Support Regulator, gradually clockwise on the ICS Display Regulator &
Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 1) until the Pressure Gauge
armature begins to move 1.
Re

9. When the armature starts to move back off the
10. Now adjust the Load Support Regulator until
the indicator on the ILS display is lit between ¼ Figure 23 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
1

and ¾, but as close as possible to ½ as shown in

Figure 2.
11. Turn the Load Support Regulator anticlockwise
to depressurise the system. The ICS display will
register ‘0’ and the Load Support Pressure
Gauge will also display ‘0’.
Figure 24 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS

Display, Load Support Pressure Gauge and
Regulator
ly
12. To check the Combo Isolation Control system,
turn the Slip Plate and Vibrator Air Isolation
On
Regulators slowly clockwise on the Combo
Isolation Control Panel (see Figure 25) until the
correct inflation height of the Air Isolation
Mounts (see Figure 26) as defined in section 4
Technical Data, has been achieved.
Note: The Vibrator Air Isolation control is separate
from the Slip Plate Air Isolation control, as the
e
Vibrator end of the combo has more mass and
will therefore require more air pressure.
13. Check the Air Isolation Mount Air Bags and
nc
associated pipework for leaks.
14. Turn the Slip Plate and Vibrator Air Isolation
Regulators fully anticlockwise on the Combo
Isolation Control Panel (see Figure 25) to
re
depressurise the systems.

fe
Figure 25 Combo Isolation Control Panel

DIM “A”
Re
Figure 26 Air Isolation Mount
3.5.8. Instrumentation Pre-Use Checks

1. Visual inspection of the cables and units for
damage.

3.5.9. Electrical Earth Pre-Use Checks

The equipment is fitted with 2 types of electrical earth: -
1. Safety Earth
The Safety Earth is connected to the equipment via
the incoming mains supply and terminated in the
cabinets.
WARNING:
• Before using any of any part of the Vibration Testing System, check that the safety
earth is connected.
ly
2. EMC/RFI Earth.
The amplifier cabinet has an EMC/RFI earth
connection on the bottom steel cabinet
On
plinth in the left-hand rear.
The EMC/RFI Earth is connected from the
cabinet plinth via a thick copper cable to a
conductive mesh buried underground.
WARNING:
• Before using any part of the Vibration Testing System, check the connection of the
e
outgoing multi-strand earth cable to the termination point, ensuring that the fixings
have been tightened.
nc
Please refer to section 9 “Earthing Advice” for more details
3.5.10. Pre-Operation Settings

re
1. Check that a compressed air supply as specified in

Section 4 is available at the Pedestal Control Unit.
2. Pressurise the Air Isolation mounts/Lin-E-Air
suspension using the Air Isolation control on the
fe
Pedestal Control Unit. Correct positioning is

achieved when: -
a. Air Isolation mounts – the inflation height is as
specified in Section 4, ‘Air Isolation Mounts’
Re
b. Lin-E-Air suspension – the guide shafts project

equally above and below the trunnions
Note: Some vibrators have 2 guide shafts each side.
3.5.11. Final Check

At this stage, perform a simple Bare Table Test.

3.5.12. Attaching the Payload

1. Using suitable attachment screws secure the
payload to the Vibrator Armature, the Head
Expander or the Slip Table, following the procedure
in section 3.10.
2. Secure control accelerometers as required and
connect to the appropriate control equipment.
Guidance on positioning of accelerometers is given
in the Best Practice segment of Section 9 Reference
Data.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.6. Preparing the System for Vertical Testing

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 1 The LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator

fe
This procedure is for the preparation of the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator for
operation in the vertical plane.
If the Vibrator is already set for Vertical Testing, follow the procedure in section 3.6.5. Final
Preparations below only.
Re
If the Vibrator is set for Horizontal Testing, follow the procedures from section 3.6.1. Locking-out the
Vibrator below.
This section includes the following: -
3.6.1. Locking-out the Vibrator 3.6.5. Final Preparations
3.6.2. Rotating the Vibrator to the Vertical 3.6.5.1 Payload Mass vs Load Support
3.6.3. Securing the Trunnions after Rotating Pressure Guide - Vertical
the Vibrator 3.6.6. Torque Values
3.6.4. Removing the Trunnion Lock-out
Screws
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0306-F-V8900-L-UM-EN-02

WARNING:
• Failure to follow this procedure, exactly, in full, may result in serious personnel injury
and equipment damage.
3.6.1. Locking-out the Vibrator

1. Switch on Vibrator Hydraulic Unit (if not already Load Support
on) Emergency Stop
Regulator &
2. Allow 5 to 10 minutes for the oil to flow through Pressure Gauge
the system and the oil pressure to stabilise at
172 bar (2500 psi).
ly
Note: The Compressed Air does not need to be on at
this stage.
On
Figure 2).
Note: This will allow the Armature to rest on the
lower bump stops as it is rotated.
Air Isolation
4. Turn the Lin-E-Air Isolation Regulator fully anti- ICS Display Regulator
Figure 2 Pedestal Control Unit
Figure 2).
e
Note: This will allow the Trunnion Lock-out Screws
to be fitted.
nc
re
5. Insert an M24 Trunnion Lock-out Screw into the

Trunnion on the left-hand side of the Vibrator Trunnion Lock-out
and hand-tighten only. (See Figure 3).
fe
Screw LH
Note: Screws only partially inserted in graphic, for
clarity
Re
Figure 3 LH Trunnion Lock-out Screw Location
0306-F-V8900-L-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved


Trunnion on the right-hand side of the Vibrator Trunnion Lock-out
and hand-tighten only. (See Figure 4). Screw RH
Note: Screws only partially inserted in graphic, for
clarity
ly
On
Figure 4 RH Trunnion Lock-out Screw Location
3.6.2. Rotating the Vibrator to the Vertical

WARNING:
e
• Failure to follow this procedure exactly may result in serious personnel injury and
nc
equipment damage.
re
fe
1. Unscrew and remove the Trunnion Securing

Screws on both sides of the Vibrator.
Note: Additional Trunnion Securing Screws are
fitted to the other side of the Vibrator.
Re
Trunnion Securing
Screws (removed)
Figure 5 Removing the Trunnion Securing Screws
CAUTION:
• The upper section of the Vibrator body is heavier than the lower section. Ensure that
control of the hand-wheel is maintained at all times.

2. Carefully rotate the Vibrator, using the hand-

wheel, until the rotation stop prevents further
movement.
Note: The Trunnion Securing Screws are still not
ly
fitted at this stage
On
Horizontal Rotation Stop Rotation
Hand-wheel
Vertical Rotation Stop
Figure 6 Rotation Hand-wheel
CAUTION:
•
e
Take care that hoses and cables do not become snagged or damaged during rotation
of the Vibrator.
nc
re
fe
Re

3.6.3. Securing the Trunnions after Rotating the Vibrator
1. Insert the Trunnion Securing Screw on both

sides of the Vibrator, hand tight, to secure it
ly
in the vertical position.
On
Trunnion Securing
Screws
e Figure 7 Refitting the Trunnion Securing Screws
nc
re
fe
Re

4 3
2
2. Tighten the LH Trunnion Securing Screws in
the order shown in Figure 8 to a torque of
150 Nm – 110 lbf ft.
ly
Note: The LH Trunnion is on the left-hand side
of the vibrator, as viewed from the Figure 8 LH Trunnion. Securing Screw Torque
Terminal Box Tightening Sequence
On
3. Tighten the RH Trunnion Securing Screws in
the order shown in Figure 9 to a torque of 5
150 Nm – 110 lbf ft.
Note: The RH Trunnion is on the right-hand side 8
of the vibrator, as viewed from the 7
Terminal Box
e 6
nc
Figure 9 RH Trunnion. Securing Screw Torque
Tightening Sequence
re
CAUTION: TORQUE TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

• The torque tightening sequence shown above, must be followed exactly, every
time that the vibrator is rotated. Failure to follow this procedure, may result in
fe
misalignment between the Driver Bar and the Slip Table (if fitted).
Re

3.6.4. Removing the Trunnion Lock-out Screws
1. Unscrew and remove the M24 Trunnion Lock-out

Screw from the Trunnion on the left-hand side
of the Vibrator. (See Figure 10) and put in a safe
place, ready to re-use.
ly
On
Trunnion Lock-out
Screw LH
e
nc
Screw from the Trunnion on the right-hand side
re
Trunnion Lock-out
Screw RH
fe

Re

3.6.5. Final Preparations

Load Support
1. Ensure that Vibrator Hydraulic Power Unit is Emergency Stop
Regulator &
still running. Pressure Gauge
2. Switch on the single phase power to the
Pedestal Control Unit
3. Compressed Air Supply
a. If the compressed air supply is already on,
continue with paragraph 4 below.
b. If the compressed air supply is off, ensure
ly
that the Load Support and Air Isolation
Regulators are turned fully anti-clockwise
(off) to avoid any unexpected movement
Air Isolation
On
of the Armature or Vibrator Body and ICS Display Regulator
then turn on the compressed air supply.
4. Switch on the 3 phase power to the
Amplifier at the isolator, but do not “Switch
up” the Amplifier at this stage.
Note: This is to provide power for the Vibration
e
Testing System, Control System.
nc
CAUTION:
• At this stage, the Amplifier must not be “Switched Up”, as inadvertent Armature
movement may occur.
re
fe
Re

ly
On
Emergency Stop
5. Turn the Air Isolation Regulator slowly clockwise

on the Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 15
Pedestal Control Unit) until the Vibrator body
centralises within the Trunnions (see Figure 13
and Figure 14 above), i.e. the amount of
e
trunnion shaft extending beyond the frame, is
equal at both ends as shown by the = sign
dimensions.
nc
Note: Springs mounted within the trunnions
provide an opposing force, to permit the
trunnions to be stabilised. Air Isolation
ICS Display Regulator
re
Load Support
ICS Display
fe
6. Turn the Load Support Regulator, gradually Regulator &

clockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit (see Pressure Gauge
Re
details, regarding Payload Mass vs Load

Support Pressure Guide - Vertical).
Note: The Armature Load Support Seal will
provide some resistance to movement, so
turn the Load Support Regulator, very
slowly.
1

7. When the armature starts to move back off

the regulator slightly (approx. ¼ turn), to
prevent the armature overshooting.
the indicator on the ILS display is lit between
¼ and ¾, but as close as possible to ½ as
shown in Figure 2.
9. The ICS 2 will fully centralise the armature Figure 17 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS
when the amplifier gain is enabled. Display, Load Support Pressure Gauge and
Regulator
ly
On
e
nc
re

kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
fe
100 1.4 220 20

200 2.1 441 31
300 2.9 661 42
400 3.7 882 53
Re
500 4.4 1102 64

600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
800 6.8 1764 98
pressure.
2

3.6.6. Torque Values

Ref Fixing Location Fixing Details Torque Value
1. Trunnion Securing Fixings M16 150 Nm – 110 lbf ft
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.7. Preparing the System for Horizontal Testing
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 1 The LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator

fe
This procedure is for the preparation of the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator for
operation in the horizontal plane.
The LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator can be used in the horizontal orientation, but is
limited by the maximum overturning moment of the Vibrator and is generally used for smaller
Re
payloads. (See section 4 for the maximum overturning moment value for the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air
Trunnion Mounted Vibrator and section 9 for details of overturning moment calculations).
This section includes the following: -
3.7.1. Locking-out the Vibrator 3.7.5. Applying Power to the Vibration
3.7.2. Rotating the Vibrator Testing System
3.7.3. Securing the Trunnions after Rotating 3.7.6. Setting Up the Vibrator Air Isolation
the Vibrator and Load Support Regulators
3.7.4. Removing the Trunnion Lock-out 3.7.6.1 Payload Mass vs Load Support
Screws Pressure Guide - Vertical

WARNING:
• Failure to follow this procedure, exactly, in full, may result in serious personnel injury
and equipment damage.
3.7.1. Locking-out the Vibrator

1. Switch on Vibrator Hydraulic Unit (if not already on)
2. Allow 5 to 10 minutes for the oil to flow through the system and the oil pressure to stabilise at 172 bar
(2500 psi).
Note: The Compressed Air does not need to be on at this stage.
ly
3. Turn the Load Support Regulator fully anti- Load Support
clockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit (see Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Figure 2). Pressure Gauge
On
Note: The Armature will now rest on the lower
bump stops.
4. Turn the Lin-E-Air Isolation Regulator fully anti-
Figure 2).
Note: The Vibrator Body will now come to rest on
the trunnions.
e
nc
Regulator

re
Trunnion on the left-hand side of the Vibrator

fe
Re
Trunnion Lock-out
Screw LH


Trunnion on the right-hand side of the Vibrator
ly
On
Trunnion Lock-out
Screw RH
e Figure 4 RH Trunnion Lock-out Screw Location
nc
re
fe
Re

3.7.2. Rotating the Vibrator

WARNING:
• Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious personnel injury and equipment
damage.
1. Unscrew and remove the Trunnion Securing

Screws on both sides of the Vibrator.
Note: An additional 4 x Trunnion Securing Screws
are fitted to the other side of the Vibrator.
ly
On
e Trunnion Securing
Screws
nc
Figure 5 Trunnion Securing Screws
CAUTION:
• The upper section of the Vibrator body is heavier than the lower section. Ensure that
re
control of the hand-wheel is maintained at all times.

CAUTION:
• Take care that hoses and cables do not become snagged or damaged during the
fe
following rotation of the Vibrator.

Re

2. Using the Rotation Hand-wheel, rotate the

Vibrator, until the rotation stop prevents further
movement.
Note: The Trunnion Securing Screws are still not
fitted at this stage.
ly
On
Rotation Hand-wheel
Figure 6 Rotation Hand-wheel
CAUTION:
• Take care that hoses and cables do not become snagged or damaged during rotation
of the Vibrator.
e
3.7.3. Securing the Trunnions after Rotating the Vibrator
nc
1. Fit the Trunnion Securing Screws to both sides of
the Vibrator and hand tighten only at this stage.
re
fe
Re
Trunnion Securing
Screws
Figure 7 Trunnion Securing Screws

2. Tighten the LH Trunnion Securing Screws in the

order shown in Figure 8 to a torque of 150 Nm – 1
110 lbf ft.
Note: The LH Trunnion is on the left-hand side of the
vibrator, as viewed from the Terminal Box 4 3
3. Tighten the RH Trunnion Securing Screws in the
order shown in Figure 9 to a torque of 150 Nm –
110 lbf ft. 2
Note: The RH Trunnion is on the right-hand side of
the vibrator, as viewed from the Terminal Box
ly
Figure 8 LH Trunnion. Securing Screw Torque
Tightening Sequence
On
5
8
7
e 6
nc
Figure 9 RH Trunnion. Securing Screw Torque
Tightening Sequence
re
CAUTION: TORQUE TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

• The torque tightening sequence shown above, must be followed exactly, every time
that the vibrator is rotated. Failure to follow this procedure, may result in
fe
misalignment between the Driver Bar and the Slip Table (if fitted).
Re

3.7.4. Removing the Trunnion Lock-out Screws

Screw from the Trunnion on the left-hand side
Trunnion Lock-out
Screw LH
ly
On

Screw from the Trunnion on the right-hand side
e
nc
Trunnion Lock-out
Screw RH
re
fe

Re

3.7.5. Applying Power to the Vibration Testing System

1. Switch on the single phase power to the Pedestal Load Support
Control Unit Emergency Stop
Regulator &
2. Compressed Air Supply Pressure Gauge
a. If the compressed air supply is already on,
continue with paragraph 3 below.
b. If the compressed air supply is off, ensure
that the Load Support and Air Isolation
Regulators are turned fully anti-clockwise
(off) to avoid any unexpected movement of
the Armature or Vibrator Body and then turn
ly
on the compressed air supply.
Air Isolation
On
3. Switch on the 3 phase power to the Amplifier at

the isolator, but do not “Switch up” the
Amplifier at this stage.
e
Note: This is to provide power for the Vibration
Testing System, Control System.
nc
CAUTION:
• At this stage, the Amplifier must not be “Switched Up”, as inadvertent Armature
movement may occur.
re
4. Switch on the 3 phase power to the Vibrator

Cooling Unit.
fe
Re

3.7.6. Setting Up the Vibrator Air Isolation and Load Support

Regulators
ly
On
Figure 13 View on LH Side Lin-E-Air Arrangement
Figure 14 View on RH Side Lin-E-Air Arrangement
showing Lin-E-Air Setting heights for Trunnion
showing Lin-E- Air Setting heights for Trunnion
Guide Shafts in Horizontal Mode
Guide Shafts in Horizontal Mode
1. Turn the Air Isolation Regulator clockwise on the

Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 15) until the Emergency Stop
e
(see Figure 13 and Figure 14 above), i.e. the
nc
amount of trunnion shaft extending beyond the
frame, is equal at both ends.
Note: Springs mounted within the trunnions provide
an opposing force, to permit the trunnions to
be stabilised.
re
Air Isolation
fe

Re

Load Support
Pressure Gauge
2. Turn the Load Support Regulator, gradually
ly
On
Figure 2.
Figure 17 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS
e Regulator
nc
re
fe
Re

kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
1
2


kg bar lb lb / in²
100 1.4 220 20
200 2.1 441 31
300 2.9 661 42
400 3.7 882 53
500 4.4 1102 64
600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
800 6.8 1764 98
ly
pressure.
On

e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.8. Operating with an LDS Head Expander

The Head Expander supplied with this Vibrator is a n LDS Unguided Head Expander
If not already fitted, follow the procedure in section 8.7 for Installing the LDS Head Expander.
If not already fitted, attach the payload to the expander table using the inserts provided following the
procedure in section 3.10 Guidance for the Attachment of a Payload.
3.8.1. Operating with an LDS Unguided Head Expander
ly
3.8.2. Dynamic Performance of Head Expander
3.8.3. Accelerometer Mounting
3.8.4. Cross-axial Acceleration Limitation
On
3.8.5. Cross-axial Resonance
3.8.1. Operating with an LDS Unguided Head Expander

To operate the vibration test system with the Head Expander, the following procedure should be
followed.
e
nc
re
1. Remove any Trunnion Lock-out Screws fitted.

2. Switch on the 3 phase power to the Amplifier,
but do not power up the Amplifier at this stage.
3. Switch on the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply
fe
Unit.
4. Allow 5 to 10 minutes for the oil to flow through
the system and the oil pressure to stabilise at
172 bar (2500 psi).
Re
Figure 1 Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit
Copyright © 2015 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0308-A1-SHX-UM-EN-02

Emergency Stop

Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 2) until the
Vibrator body centralises within the Trunnions.
ly
Air Isolation
On
Load Support
e
nc
re

fe

Figure 2.
Re

1
2
0308-A1-SHX-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

ly
On
kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
e
100
200
1.4
2.1
220
441
20
31
300 2.9 661 42
nc
400 3.7 882 53
500 4.4 1102 64
600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
re
800 6.8 1764 98

pressure.
fe
Re
3.8.2. Dynamic Performance of Head Expander

The following considerations should be borne in mind when designing tests using the head expander.
a. The nominal frequency given for the expander in section 4.7 is defined for unloaded
conditions.

b. The useable frequency range (defined as the range in which a sine sweep can be performed
without abort) may be up to 2000 Hz depending on the control strategy (e.g. multipoint),
payload characteristics and test profile; with optimal setup even higher frequencies may be
achievable.
c. All vibration test systems have resonances where one portion of the structure has a higher
acceleration than another. These may be outside the test frequency range and yet still
influence the uniformity of the test.
d. A highly resonant payload, particularly one of large mass, may limit the useable frequency
range and introduce new resonances into the system.
e. If uniformity of acceleration on the expander top surface is required, consult Bruel & Kjaer VTS
for further advice.
ly
3.8.3. Accelerometer Mounting
The position of control accelerometers (not supplied) must always be selected with care.
On
Figure 4 shows a typical first mode shape for
an unguided head expander. The corners of
the expander are generally the liveliest
therefore as a minimum one corner should be
e
fitted with a control accelerometer. At higher
frequencies other mode shapes will occur and
nc
other areas of the expander may become more
lively. Therefore, it is recommended to
characterise the expander at lower
acceleration levels before progressing to full
level tests.
re
Figure 6 FE analysis of standard head expander

(1st vertical resonance)
CAUTION:
fe
• Nodal points must be avoided, otherwise the control system, when sweeping
through resonant frequencies, would demand more thrust from the vibrator than
required and hence subject parts of the payload to undesirably high levels of
vibration.
Re
In all cases an accelerometer should be attached to the payload to monitor actual vibration levels.
3.8.4. Cross-axial Acceleration Limitation

It is important to avoid overloading the armature guidance system with excessive cross-axial loads.
An electrodynamic vibrator is designed to produce sinusoidal (or random) movement in one axis only.
The armature assembly is the moving part of the vibrator and is restrained by a guidance system which
maintains the armature coil in the centre of the magnetic air gap. The armature guidance system is
designed to have low stiffness along the vibration axis, and high stiffness at right angles (cross-axially)
to the vibration axis.
The guidance system however does have limitations in the cross-axial direction.

Any excessive cross-axial loading can cause the armature to rub against the pole pieces and cause
destructive forces to be exerted on the guidance system.
Ideally, the centre of gravity of the head expander, payload and any balance weights should be on the
vertical axis of the vibrator.
3.8.5. Cross-axial Resonance

The Offset Load Calculations in this manual do not take into account the possibility of Cross-axial
Resonances occurring. For example the natural frequencies of the head expander, loaded or unloaded,
might coincide with those of the vibrator.
ly
Such possibilities can only be evaluated by effective monitoring of cross-axial acceleration.
The risk of damage to the specimen can be reduced by preliminary monitoring of
a. the unloaded head expander.
On
b. the head expander with a dummy load representing the payload.
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.9. Operating with an LDS Slip Table

This Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Combined (Combo) or Standalone Slip Table
ly
On
Figure 3 A Typical LDS Slip Table Figure 4 A Typical LDS Combo
The LDS® range of oil‐film slip tables are designed for ease of installation while providing maximum
flexibility.
For testing applications requiring three individual axes, we recommend a LDS trunnion‐mounted
electrodynamic shaker and slip table. This is available combined in one fabricated frame, or as a stand‐
e
alone trunnion‐mounted shaker with a separate slip table on a seismic base.
For testing very large or complex payloads, we also offer larger slip tables with multiple bearing
nc
positions to suit customers' applications.
LDS Slip Table Series

All LDS slip tables use a custom‐designed, rugged steel chassis – allowing for maximum stiffness for the
re
greatest payload. Two types of slip tables are available: Hydrostatic Bearing Table (HBT) series for use
with exceptional payloads, and Low Pressure Table (LPT) series for general payload testing.
Combo Systems
fe
The largest of the LDS V700 series and all V800 and V900 series electrodynamic shakers can be supplied
as a combo system. All feature the LDS Lin‐E‐Air body isolation and guidance system, which ensures the
body of the electrodynamic shaker is maintained on the central line, minimizing distortion and
maximizing low‐frequency and payload capabilities.
Re
General Slip Table Features

§ Available as stand‐alone or combined with a shaker as a complete combo system
§ Standard size range: 60 – 1500 mm (24 – 59 in)
§ Tool‐grade magnesium slip plates
§ Space‐efficient design – minimizes floor real estate
§ Patented shear pin and tension bolt driver bars
§ High‐quality composite, high‐stability granite base
§ Oil film for load support – minimizes table rippling
§ Body and base isolation suspension for body of shaker

§ Air‐glide and castor mobility available
Applications
§ Individual testing in three axes
§ Avionics and military hardware testing
§ Space flight simulation
§ Automotive component testing
§ Electronic assembly testing
Contact your local Brüel & Kjær representative for more details.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.10. Guidance for the Attachment of a Payload

3.10.1. Payload Fixture Precautions
3.10.1.1 Vibrator Armature, Head Expander and Slip Plate Mounting Surfaces
3.10.1.2 Flatness of Payload Fixture
3.10.1.3 Payload Fixture Design – Thermal Expansion
3.10.2. Attaching the Payload to and Removing the Payload from the Vibrator Armature
3.10.2.1 Attaching the Payload to the Vibrator Armature
ly
3.10.2.2 Setting Up the Load Support System
3.10.2.4 Removing the Payload from the Vibrator Armature
On
3.10.3. Attaching the Payload to and Removing the Payload from the Head Expander
3.10.3.1 Attaching the Payload to the Head Expander
3.10.3.4 Removing the Payload from the Head Expander
e
3.10.4. Attaching the Payload to and Removing the Payload from the Slip Plate
3.10.4.1 Attaching the Payload to the Slip Plate
nc
3.10.4.2 Payload Mass vs Load Support Pressure Guide – Horizontal
3.10.4.3 Removing the Payload from the Slip Plate
re
3.10.1. Payload Fixture Precautions

3.10.1.1 Vibrator Armature, Head Expander and Slip Plate Mounting Surfaces
fe
We supply the Vibrator Armature, Slip Plate and Head Expander mounting surfaces, drilled and fitted
with inserts as specified at the time of ordering.
WARNING:
Re
• Do not attempt to drill additional holes in any of the mounting surfaces. The integrity
of the Armature may be severely impaired and the flatness of the Head Expander and
Slip Plate surfaces may be affected.
Note: If additional load securing inserts are essential for operation, seek advice from Bruel & Kjaer VTS.
The surface of magnesium is prone to rapid oxidisation, particularly in the presence of moisture. We
recommend avoiding water or moisture around the table.
Note: Slip Plate and Head Expander covers are outside of the scope of supply of the Brüel & Kjær VTS
contract.

3.10.1.2 Flatness of Payload Fixture

In order to avoid distortion of the Slip Plate and Head Expander, the payload fixture must be flat to
within 0.06 mm/m in accordance with the Specification in Section 4.
3.10.1.3 Payload Fixture Design – Thermal Expansion

It is important that consideration is given to fixture design to avoid distortion of the Slip Plate or Head
Expander under conditions of wide temperature variations, especially when interfacing with an
environmental chamber.
Large fixtures that span a significant area of the Head Expander or Slip Plate, which are manufactured
from dissimilar metals to those of the Head Expander Upper Plate or Slip Table will act as bi-metal
strips if the system is subjected to wide temperature variations. This means that either the fixture or
ly
their mating plates will expand differently.
The design of the Slip Plate and Head Expander provide some allowance for this movement but a large
one-piece fixture of dissimilar metal could cause distortion.
On
CAUTION:
• In order to prevent any deformation of the payload and/or payload fixtures and the
Head Expander Upper Plate and Slip Table and their associated fixings, they MUST all
be at the same ambient temperature. To achieve this, it is recommended that all
components being attached are within the same room as the Vibration Testing System
for at least 24 hours before being secured to the shaker.
e
When attaching a payload to the Slip Table, it is advisable to allow the slip table and payload
nc
temperature to stabilise before securing. You can achieve this by leaving the payload on the Slip Table
for at least 30 minutes, while the oil is circulating beneath the table, before torqueing the bolts. Torque
set the bolts in stages to the maximum value, using a star pattern in order to minimise distortion.
3.10.2. Attaching the Payload to and Removing the Payload from the
re
Vibrator Armature
We recommend that before attaching the Payload, you perform a reference, low level, Bare Table Sine
Sweep Test.
fe
3.10.2.1 Attaching the Payload to the Vibrator Armature

1. Set the following: -
a. Amplifier Off
Re
b. Pedestal Control Unit On

c. Compressed Air On
d. Vibrator Hydraulic Unit On

Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
2. Reduce the air pressure in the armature Load

Support to zero.
Note: It may be necessary to increase the Load
Support and Air Isolation pressures, once the
payload is fitted, to compensate for the
additional mass.
ly
Air Isolation
On
3. If using a payload fixture, lift it using suitable
lifting equipment and attach to the Armature at
the required position. Position the fixture to
keep the combined centre of gravity of the
fixture and payload as close to the centre of the
Vibrator as possible.
CAUTION:
e
• You must keep the payload in balance during lifting and attachment to avoid damage
nc
to the Vibrator and Payload and/or fixture.
• When attaching a payload and fixture, ensure that the combined unit is within the
overturning capacity of the Vibrator. (See section 4 for details).
4. Using suitable lifting equipment, carefully lower

re
the payload onto the Armature or fixture and

secure as required, also taking note of the
caution in section 3.10.1.2 above and section
3.10.1.3 above.
fe
Maximum Permissible Torque

5. Tighten the payload fixing screws to the torque Size Value for Threaded Holes in
recommended for the type and grade of screw Armature Payload Inserts
used.
M8 34 Nm – 25 lbf ft
Re
Note: The torque values provided in Table 1 are the

maximum permissible torque values for the M10 47 Nm – 35 lbf ft
threaded holes in the equipment and may not M14 50 Nm – 36.8 lbf ft
be the maximum value for the fixings being
3/8” -16 UNC 34 Nm – 25 lbf ft
used to secure the payload. If in doubt, contact
Brüel & Kjær Service for advice. Table 1 Maximum Permissible Torque Value for
Threaded Holes in Armature Payload Inserts
WARNING:
• Do not exceed the maximum torque value specified in Table 1 above, for each size of
threaded hole provided in the Payload Inserts.
6. Fit accelerometers in suitable locations.


1. Ensure all pneumatic and hydraulic lines are
correctly connected and that oil is flowing to
and from the vibrator guidance system.
ly
On
Emergency Stop
e
2. If necessary, turn the Air Isolation Regulator
nc
slowly clockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit
(see Figure 4) until the Vibrator body centralises
within the Trunnions (see Figure 2 and Figure 3
above), i.e. the amount of trunnion shaft
extending beyond the frame, is equal at both
re
ends as shown by the = sign dimensions.
Air Isolation
fe
Load Support
Re

Pressure Gauge



regulator slightly (approx. ¼ turn), to prevent Figure 6 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS Display,
the armature overshooting. Load Support Pressure Gauge and Regulator
ly
Figure 2.
On
e
nc
re
fe

kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
Re
100 1.4 220 20

200 2.1 441 31
300 2.9 661 42
400 3.7 882 53
500 4.4 1102 64
600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
800 6.8 1764 98
1
2


pressure.
CAUTION:
ly
• You must take care when operating the Vibrator with a payload, to ensure that the
dynamic response of the payload does not exceed the over-turning moment rating of
the system.
On
3.10.2.4 Removing the Payload from the Vibrator Armature
a. Amplifier Off
c. Compressed Air
e On
nc
Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
re

Figure 8).
fe

lower bump stops.
Re
Air Isolation
3. Remove Payload Accelerometer cables.

4. Unscrew and remove the Payload.
CAUTION:
• Keep the payload in balance during lifting and removal to avoid damage to the
Vibrator and Payload.

ly
On
Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge

(see Figure 11) until the Vibrator body
e
centralises within the Trunnions (see Figure
9and Figure 10 above), i.e. the amount of
nc
dimensions.
Air Isolation
re
fe
Head Expander
To use the Head Expander on the shaker, follow the procedure in section 8.6. for Installing the Head
Expander.
Re
We recommend that before attaching the Payload to the Head Expander, you perform a reference,
low level, Bare Table Head Expander Sine Sweep Test.
3.10.3.1 Attaching the Payload to the Head Expander

a. Amplifier Off

Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
2. Reduce the air pressure in the armature Load

Support to zero.
Note: It may be necessary to increase the Load
Support and Air Isolation pressures, once the
payload is fitted, to compensate for the
additional mass.
ly
Air Isolation
On
lifting equipment and attach to the Head
Expander at the required position. Position the
fixture to keep the combined centre of gravity of
the fixture and payload as close to the centre of
the Head Expander as possible.
CAUTION:
e
• Keep the payload in balance during lifting and attachment to avoid damage to the
nc
Head Expander and Payload and or fixture.
overturning capacity of the Vibrator. (See section 4 for details).

re
the payload onto the Head Expander or fixture

and secure as required, also taking note of the
caution in section 3.10.1.2 above and section
3.10.1.3 above.
fe

5. Tighten the payload fixing screws to the torque Size Value for Threaded Holes in
recommended for the type and grade of screw Head Expander
used.
Re

threaded holes in the equipment and may not M14 50 Nm – 36.8 lbf ft
be the maximum value for the fixings being
3/8” -16 UNC 34 Nm – 25 lbf ft
used to secure the payload. If in doubt, contact
Brüel & Kjær Service for advice. Table 3 Maximum Permissible Torque Value for
Threaded Holes in Head Expander
WARNING:
threaded hole provided in the Head Expander.


1. Ensure all pneumatic and hydraulic lines are
correctly connected and that oil is flowing to and
from the vibrator guidance system.
ly
On
Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
e Pressure Gauge

nc
re

dimensions.
Air Isolation
fe

Re
Load Support
Pressure Gauge


move 3.(See section 3.10.2.3 above for further

regulator slightly (approx. ¼ turn), to prevent Figure 17 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS
the armature overshooting. Display, Load Support Pressure Gauge and
5. Now adjust the Load Support Regulator until the Regulator
ly
Figure 6.
On
e
nc
re
fe

kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
Re
100 1.4 220 20

200 2.1 441 31
300 2.9 661 42
400 3.7 882 53
500 4.4 1102 64
600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
800 6.8 1764 98
3
4


pressure.
ly
CAUTION:
On
• When operating the Head Expander with a payload, take care to ensure that the
dynamic response of the payload does not exceed the over-turning moment rating of
the system.
3.10.3.4 Removing the Payload from the Head Expander

e
nc
a. Amplifier Off
re
Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
fe

Figure 19).
Re

lower bump stops.
Air Isolation
3. Remove Payload Accelerometer cables.

4. Unscrew and remove the Payload.

CAUTION:
• You must keep the payload in balance during lifting and removal to avoid damage to
the Head Expander and Payload.
ly
On
Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
e
nc
re

dimensions.
Air Isolation
fe
Re
Slip Plate
3.10.4.1 Attaching the Payload to the Slip Plate
1. Follow the procedure for Preparing for
Horizontal Testing in section 3.7.
2. We recommend that before attaching the
Payload to the Slip Table, you perform a
reference, low level, Bare Table Slip Plate Sine
Sweep Test.
a. Amplifier Off

e. Slip Plate Hydraulic Unit On

lifting equipment and attach to the slip table at
the required position. The fixture should be
positioned to cover as many bearings as
possible and also to keep the combined centre
of gravity of the fixture and payload as close to
ly
the centre of the Slip Plate as possible.
CAUTION:
• You must keep the payload in balance during lifting and attachment to avoid damage
On
to the Slip Table and Payload.
overturning capacity of the Slip Table. (See section 4 for details).

the payload onto the Slip Plate and secure as
required, also taking note of the caution in
e
section 3.10.1.2 above and section 3.10.1.3
above.
nc
6. Tighten the payload fixing screws to the torque Size Value for Threaded Holes in Slip
recommended for the type and grade of screw Plate
used.
re

threaded holes in the equipment and may M14 50 Nm – 36.8 lbf ft
not be the maximum value for the fixings
3/8” -16 UNC 34 Nm – 25 lbf ft
being used to secure the payload. If in doubt,
contact Brüel & Kjær Service for advice.
fe
Table 5 Maximum Permissible Torque Value for

Threaded Holes in Slip Plate
WARNING:
Re
threaded hole provided in the Slip Plate.
7. Push the end of the Slip Plate to check that it is

still free to move with only hand pressure being
applied.
CAUTION:
• You must perform this, to ensure that the Slip Table still moves freely after attaching
the Payload.

ly
On
Figure 23 LH & RH Side Trunnions Showing Settings for Trunnion Guide Shafts
Load Support
Emergency Stop
Regulator &
Pressure Gauge
e
Pneumatic Control Unit (see Figure 24) until the
nc
(see Figure 23), i.e. the amount of trunnion shaft
extending beyond the frame, is equal at both
ends.
Note: Springs mounted within the trunnions
provide an opposing force, to permit the
re
trunnions to be stabilised.
Air Isolation
fe
Load Support
Re
Pressure Gauge

Figure 5) until the Armature and Slip Table begin

to move 5.(See section 3.10.2.3 above for further

11. When the Armature and Slip Table start to
move back off the regulator slightly (approx. ¼ Figure 26 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS
turn), to prevent the armature overshooting. Display, Load Support Pressure Gauge and
12. Now adjust the Load Support Regulator until Regulator
the indicator on the ILS display is lit between ¼
ly
and ¾, but as close as possible to ½ as shown in
Figure 6.
13. The ICS 6 will fully centralise the Armature and
Slip Table when the amplifier gain is enabled.
On
e
Note: The ICS Display on the Pneumatic Control
nc
Panel is used to show the position of the
Armature only. Use the Indicators on either
side of the Slip Table for the actual centre
position of the Slip Table.
re
fe
Figure 27 View of Slip Table Showing Centre

Positioning Indicator
Re
3.10.4.2 Payload Mass vs Load Support Pressure Guide – Horizontal

During vertical operation of the Vibrator, the Load Support system supports the full weight (mass x
gravity) of the payload, armature, head expander, if fitted.
However, during horizontal operation of the Vibrator the Load Support is only required to overcome
any frictional forces in the system in order to move and centralise the armature.
5
approx. 0.0077bar/kg (0.055psi/lb), when the vibrator is horizontal.
6

Therefore, the payload mass will have much less effect on the Load Support air pressure required. The
only effect that will need to be taken account of is the frictional resistance of the vibrator armature
guidance bearings and load support seal along with the slip table bearings and oil film, when used.
As the air pressure required to overcome the friction is relatively low it is not practical to provide an
accurate Payload Mass vs Load Support pressure guide.
So, when operating the Load Support System Regulator with the vibrator horizontal, take care when
adjusting it.
ly
3.10.4.3 Removing the Payload from the Slip Plate
On
a. Amplifier Off
2. Remove all payload accelerometers and cables
away from the payload.
e
3. Unscrew and remove all payload fixings and
ensure that any other attachments are no longer
nc
secured so that the payload can be lifted freely
without pulling on the Slip Plate.
4. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift away the
payload.
CAUTION:
re
• The payload must be kept in balance during lifting and removal to avoid damage to
the Slip Plate and Payload.
• Lifting equipment should be ready to take the weight of the payload before removing
fe
the attachments.
Re

3.11. Operating the LDS Supplementary Features fitted to this

Vibration Testing System
Details of the LDS Supplementary Features fitted to this Vibration Testing System are in section 5.
To operate the various LDS Supplementary Features, refer to the sections below: -
3.11.1. Operating with the LDS Airglide Transportation System
3.11.2. Operating with the LDS Thermal Barrier
3.11.3. Operating with the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
3.11.4. Operating with the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
ly
3.11.5. Operating with the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
3.11.6. Operating with LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.11.1. Operating with the LDS Airglide Transportation System
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Airglide Transportation System

WARNING:
• Before coupling the compressed air supply to the pallet, ’blow through’ the air
Re
supply lines to remove any dirt or obstructions.

• When blowing through an airline wear appropriate eye and ear protection.
• Never direct an air blast towards a person
The following procedure should be used to move the vibrator mounted on the pallet:
1. Check the floor over which the vibrator is to be moved is free from debris, dirt and puddles. Refer
to section 4 for the floor specification required for the LDS Airglide Transportation System.
Note: If the castors come into contact with any dirt or contaminating liquids, clean the diaphragm
fabric as soon as possible using warm soapy water; rinse and wipe dry.
2. Fit any necessary restraints to prevent uncontrolled movement of the vibrator.
3. Blow through the air supply lines to remove any dirt or obstructions. Connect supply to the pallet.
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 031101-A-ALL-UM-EN-01

4. Depress the button on the dead-man’s handle to allow air flow to the castors. A fully floating
condition will quickly be achieved. Air flow may be adjusted if required by means of the screw on
the ball valve on the side of the Airglide control box, or by adjusting the individual ball valves fiited
to each Airglise assembly (normally on combos).
Releasing the button at any time will shut off the air supply and exhaust the remaining air, causing the
vibrator to settle quickly.
Note: A little water poured around the caster will bubble when a floating condition is achieved. Excess
air flow may cause an oscillating motion; this condition must be avoided.
5. Gently push the vibrator to the required location.
6. Release the button on the dead-man’s handle. Take steps to ensure the air supply cannot be turned
ly
on inadvertently (disconnect supply line/use warning notices/ inhibit the use of the pallet’s control
valve).
WARNING:
On
• Never force a load.
• Less than 5N (0.5 kgf / 1.12 lbf) {1 lbf (4.48N)} will move a 500kg (1100 lb) load when
correctly floating.
• If the modules tend to ’turn under’, the air supply is insufficient, or there are leaks in
the pipes.
WARNING:
•
e
Whenever options allowing the vibrator to be moved, raised or lowered are fitted
(including the air isolation and/or Airglide options), it is essential that all personnel
nc
WARNING:
re
fe
Re
031101-A-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

3.11.2. Operating with the LDS Thermal Barrier

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Thermal Barrier
ly
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Figure 2 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS
On
Head Expander Slip Plate
e
nc
Figure 3 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Vibrator Armature
re
The LDS Thermal Barrier may be fitted to an Armature, a Head Expander or a Slip Plate.
Each type is fitted in a different way. For details of fitting theLDS Thermal Barrier, refer to section 8.8.
fe
When setting up to use the Thermal Barrier, take into account the mass of the Thermal Barrier, as well
as the Head Expander and / or Slip Table, as part of the moving mass. See section 4 for details of the
individual masses.
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.11.3. Operating with the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
ly
On
e
Figure 1 LDS Cooling Unit Silencer fitted on an LDS Cooling Unit
When using an LDS Cooling Unit Silencer, there are no specific operating procedures to follow, just
nc
check that the unit is securely fastened to the LDS Cooling Unit and any discharge hose or ductwork (if
fitted).
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.11.4. Operating with the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

This vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Plinth Cover Kit
ly
On
Figure 1 The LDS Plinth Cover Kit
There are no parts in the LDS Plinth Cover Kit that require any operational procedures, apart from
checking that the filters are clean.
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.11.5. Operating with the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
This LDS Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System.
Normal Filling Point PRES Filling Point Slip Plate Connections
ly
On
e
nc
re
Grant Thermal Control Unit Supply Hose Return Hose

Manifold Block
Figure 7 A Typical LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
fe
LDS Slip Plates have been designed to operate within a temperature range between +7°C and +30°C
(+45°F to +86°F).
In order to operate the Slip Plate outside of these temperature limits, e.g. when using an
environmental chamber, the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System, permits a wider operating
Re
temperature range, dependent upon the overall system configuration.


ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.11.6. Operating with the LDS Quiet Mode

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with the LDS Quiet Mode
With LDS Quiet Mode enabled, the fan interlock is disabled and the power levels reduced, allowing the
vibrator to be operated for limited periods without the Cooling Unit in operation.
3.11.6.1 Noise Reduction
3.11.6.2 How to Set the Quiet Operating Mode Settings
3.11.6.2.1 How to Select /Deselect Quiet Operating Mode
ly
3.11.6.2.2 How to Enable / Disable Quiet Mode
3.11.6.2.3 How to Select the Quantity of Modules to be Used for Quiet Mode
3.11.6.2.4 How to Set the Quiet Operating Mode Field Setting
On
3.11.6.2.5 How to Automatically Operate Cooling Control in Quiet Mode
3.11.6.2.6 How to Manually Operate Cooling Control in Quiet Mode
3.11.6.3 How to View the Armature and Field Coil Temperatures
3.11.6.4 How to View the Cooling Run On Status in Quiet Mode
3.11.6.5 How to Set the Cooling Unit Run On Features
e
3.11.6.5.1 How to Enable / Disable the Cooling Fan Run On
3.11.6.5.2 How to View the Cooling Fan Run On Period Remaining in Standard Operating Mode
nc
3.11.6.5.3 How to Set the Cooling Fan Run On Time
re
3.11.6.1 Noise Reduction

One of the characteristics of Quiet Mode is that the Cooling Unit does not run, thereby reducing noise
in the vicinity of the vibrator.
To reduce the noise levels even further, the Amplifier, the Vibrator Hydraulic Unit (and where fitted,
fe
the Slip Table Hydraulic Unit) could be moved out of the test cell.
Typically, as a result of both of these measures, the system acoustic noise will be significantly reduced
from >100dBA down to <70dBA.
Re
3.11.6.2 How to Set the Quiet Operating Mode Settings

CAUTION:
• Quiet Operating Mode requires that the Cooling Unit is not operating. With the
Cooling Unit not running, the Vibrator Armature and Field Coils will naturally heat up.
• Care should be taken to ensure that during a long duration test in Quiet Mode, the
test is suitably characterised to ensure that the maximum temperatures of Vibrator
Armature and Field Coils are not exceeded, otherwise there is a risk that the test will
abort on an overtemperature interlock prior to completion. The maximum test
duration with the Cooling Unit off depends on test levels and other factors.
• For advice on specific tests, contact Brüel & Kjær VTS.

Note: The temperature of the Vibrator Armature and Field Coils can be viewed on the XPAK Control
Panel and the appropriate page is shown in Figure 25.
WARNING:
• If the temperature of the Vibrator Armature Coil exceeds 110 °C, then an interlock
will be generated and the amplifier will shut down stopping the current test.
• If the temperature of the Vibrator Field Coil exceeds 140 °C, then an interlock will be
generated and the amplifier will shut down stopping the current test.
3.11.6.2.1 How to Select /Deselect Quiet Operating Mode
ly
On
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Quiet
or
e
nc
re
2. From any other page in the Modes group,

tap the Quiet field at the bottom of the
page.
fe
Re
Figure 2. Modes- Example Modes Page

Note: One of the Quiet Operating Mode pages

will be displayed.
displayed, tap either the Next Page Arrow
or Previous Page Arrow until it is.
ly
Figure 3. Modes- Quiet Mode Page 1
On
Note: If Quiet Mode is not installed and
activated, a pop-up screen is displayed
stating that it is not installed.
e
4. Tap OK and Quiet Mode Page 1 will be
displayed. See Figure 5.
nc
Figure 4 Modes- Quiet Mode Not Installed
re
Note: After tapping the OK button, as shown in

Figure 4, Quiet Mode Page 1 will be
displayed with the commands ‘greyed
fe
out’, denoting that the commands are not

available.
5. Tap any of the other commands on the
screen to continue.
Re
Note: If quiet Mode is required, and not

installed, contact Brüel & Kjær VTS for
advice.
Figure 5 Modes- Quiet Mode Page 1 ‘Greyed
Out’

3.11.6.2.2 How to Enable / Disable Quiet Mode

Note: This page can be viewed by the Operator,
but can only be changed by authorised
Setup personnel and Brüel & Kjær.
Contact authorised Setup personnel or
Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for
assistance.
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Quiet or
from any other page in the Modes group,
tap the Quiet field at the bottom of the
page.
ly
Note: One of the Quiet Operating Mode pages
will be displayed.
On
displayed, tap either the Next Page Arrow
or Previous Page Arrow until it is.
3. To the right of Quiet Mode is displayed the
present value. For authorised Setup
personnel only, insert the Setup USB Key Figure 6 Modes- Quiet Mode Page 1
e
into the LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
USB Port and wait a few minutes for the
Service icon to be re-displayed.
nc
4. Tap either the value or the up and down
scroll arrows to display the Quiet Mode
Selection List.
re
Note: This page cannot be viewed by the

Operator, but can be viewed and
changed by authorised Setup personnel
and Brüel & Kjær. Contact authorised
fe

Note: As all associated items are displayed on
the Field Setting Selection List page, the
Re
up and down scroll arrows are not

used.
5. Tap the required Field Setting to highlight it
in the dotted box, as shown in Figure 7 and
then tap OK.

6. Quiet Mode will be Enabled, as shown in

Figure 8.
Note: Cooling Control will be available for all
users after enabling Quiet Mode. See
section 3.11.6.2.5 below for details.
7. If no further settings need to be changed,
remove the USB Key from the LDS XPA-K
Amplifier Control Panel USB Port.
ly
Figure 8 Modes- Quiet Mode Page 1
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

3.11.6.2.3 How to Select the Quantity of Modules to be Used for Quiet Mode
CAUTION:
• Take care when selecting the quantity of modules to be used for Quiet Mode. Too
many modules will increase the available power for the armature, but will reduce the
available operating time in Quiet Mode, as the equipment will heat up more quickly.

ly
1. From the Main Menu page, tap Quiet or from
any other page in the Modes group, tap the
Quiet field at the bottom of the page.
On
Note: One of the Quiet Operating Mode pages will
be displayed.
e
Note: The present quantity of modules to be used
for Quiet Mode is displayed to the right of
Select Modules.
nc
3. For authorised Setup personnel only, insert the
Setup USB Key into the LDS XPA-K Amplifier
Control Panel USB Port and wait a few minutes
for the Service icon to be re-displayed.
re

or to the right of Select Modules to
decrease or increase the quantity of modules.
fe

Re

5. On the Numeric Entry Keypad, enter the required
number, by tapping the number keys.
to delete it.
Amplifier Control Panel USB Port. Figure 10. Modes-Keypad

3.11.6.2.4 How to Set the Quiet Operating Mode Field Setting

be displayed.
ly
On
Note: The present Field Level to be used for Quiet
Mode is displayed to the right of Field Level
[%].
3. For authorised Setup personnel only, insert the
Setup USB Key into the LDS XPA-K Amplifier
Control Panel USB Port and wait a few minutes
for the Service icon
e
to be re-displayed.
nc
or to the right of Field Level [%] to
decrease or increase the Field Level.
re

fe

to delete it.
Re

Amplifier Control Panel USB Port. Figure 12. Modes-Keypad

3.11.6.2.5 How to Automatically Operate Cooling Control in Quiet Mode

Note: After running the equipment in Quiet Mode,
the Vibrator Armature and Field Coils must be
cooled. This procedure describes how to start
and automatically stop the Cooling Unit even
if Cooling Run On has been enabled.
Quiet Mode Cooling Control is available to all
personnel after enabling Quiet Mode, see
section 3.11.6.2.2 above for details.
& Kjær Service Centre for further assistance.
ly
Note: For the Cooling Unit to stop automatically,
Cooling Run On needs to be set to Enabled.
1. Follow the procedure in section 3.11.6.4 below
On
to enable Cooling Run On and to set the time for Figure 13 Modes- Quiet Mode Page 2
the Cooling Unit to run before stopping
automatically.
be displayed.
e
nc
Note: During a Quiet Mode test, the Cooling Unit
(fan) is off as shown by the icon in the top
re
right-hand corner of the screen being ‘greyed

out’.
4. Tap the Cooling Control button labelled Start to Figure 14 Modes- Quiet Mode Page 1
start the Cooling Unit.
fe
Re
Note: The label on the Cooling Control button will

change to Starting for a short period and the
icon in the top right-hand corner of the
screen will remain ‘greyed out’.

Note: Once the Cooling Unit is running, the label on

the Cooling Control button will change to
Stop and the icon in the top right-hand
corner of the screen will change to green,
denoting that the Cooling Unit is running.
5. Tap either the Next Page Arrow or Previous

Page Arrow to access Quiet Mode Page 2.
ly
Cooling Run On will be shown Enabled and the Run
On
On Remaining time set earlier will be counting
down, second by second.
It will also be seen that with the Cooling Unit
running, the temperature values for both the
Armature Coil and Field Coil will lower.
6. The Cooling Unit will continue to run until the
time on Run On Remaining reaches 00:00, at
e
which time the Cooling Unit will automatically
stop.
nc
7. If it is necessary to stop the Cooling Unit before it
is stopped automatically, tap either the Next
Page Arrow or Previous Page Arrow to
access Quiet Mode Page 1 and tap the Cooling Figure 17 Modes- Quiet Mode Page 2
Control button labelled Stop. (See Figure 16).
re
fe

change to Stopping for a short period and the
Re
screen will remain green.

Note: Once the Cooling Unit has stopped, the label

on the Cooling Control button will change to
Start and the icon in the top right-hand
corner of the screen will change to being
‘greyed out’, denoting that the Cooling Unit is
not running.
ly
On
3.11.6.2.6 How to Manually Operate Cooling Control in Quiet Mode
Note: After running the equipment in Quiet Mode,
the Vibrator Armature and Field Coils must be
cooled. This procedure describes how to
manually start and stop the Cooling Unit even
if Cooling Run On has been enabled.
e
nc
personnel and Brüel & Kjær.
However, Quiet Mode Cooling Control is
available to all personnel after enabling Quiet
Mode, see section 3.11.6.2.2 above for
details.
re

& Kjær Service Centre for further assistance.
fe

be displayed.
Re

Note: During a Quiet Mode test, the Cooling Unit
(fan) is off as shown by the icon in the top
right-hand corner of the screen being ‘greyed
out’.
3. Tap the Cooling Control button labelled Start to
start the Cooling Unit.


change to Starting for a short period and the
screen will remain ‘greyed out’.
ly
On
Note: Once the Cooling Unit is running, the label on
the Cooling Control button will change to
Stop and the icon in the top right-hand
corner of the screen will change to green,
denoting that the Cooling Unit is running.
e
4. When it is time to stop the Cooling Unit, tap the
Cooling Control button labelled Stop to stop the
Cooling Unit.
nc
re

fe
change to Stopping for a short period and

the icon in the top right-hand corner of
the screen will remain green.
Re

Note: Once the Cooling Unit has stopped, the label

on the Cooling Control button will change to
Start and the icon in the top right-hand
corner of the screen will change to being
‘greyed out’, denoting that the Cooling Unit
is not running.
ly
On
3.11.6.3 How to View the Armature and Field Coil Temperatures
As soon as Quiet Mode has been installed and enabled by a Brüel & Kjær VTS Service Engineer, the
Armature and Field Coil Temperatures are available to be viewed in any operating mode (e.g. Standard
Mode, Quiet Mode, etc.)
CAUTION:
e
nc
re
WARNING:
fe
Re

Note: This page can be viewed by all personnel.

However, this is an information only page
and there are no fields to be changed.
be displayed.
ly
The middle two fields provide the following information: -
On
a. The temperature of the Armature Coil in °C.
b. The temperature of Field Coil (Upper Field Coil) in °C.
3.11.6.4 How to View the Cooling Run On Status in Quiet Mode

Note: To view the Cooling Run On Status in Standard Mode, see section 3.11.6.5.2 below
CAUTION:
•
e
Quiet Operating Mode requires that the Cooling Unit is not operating. With the
nc
re
WARNING:
fe
Re

Note: This page can be viewed by all personnel.

However, the bottom two fields are for
information only and cannot be changed.
be displayed.
ly
The bottom two fields provide the following information: -
On
a. The status of Cooling Run On, Enabled or Disabled.
b. The Run On time remaining.
Cooling Run On time, is the time where the Cooling Unit continues to operate to further cool the
equipment, even though a request to stop the unit has been made. If Cooling Run On is required, it must be
set to Enabled. See section 3.11.6.4 for details.
The Run On time Remaining will be displayed when Cooling Run On is enabled and a run on time has been
e
pre-set. See section 3.11.6.4 for details.
nc
3.11.6.5 How to Set the Cooling Unit Run On Features
3.11.6.5.1 How to Enable / Disable the Cooling Fan Run On

After using the Vibration Testing System, especially after running in Low Noise (SNR) Mode or Quiet
re
Mode where the fan is usually off or after high loading testing, the Vibrator needs to be cooled after
the system has been switched down. This setting will enable or disable the Cooling Unit (fan) for this
purpose.
fe

personnel and Brüel & Kjær Service. Contact
Re

Modules icon .
2. To the right of Cooling Run On is displayed the
present value. Tap the value or the up and down
arrows to display the Cooling Run On Figure 27. Modes-Selection Page
Selection List


3. Tap either Enabled or Disabled to highlight it in
tap OK.
ly
On
3.11.6.5.2 How to View the Cooling Fan Run On Period Remaining in Standard
Operating Mode
This Cooling Fan Run On period is common to both the Standard and Quiet Modes and is enabled or
disabled by following the procedure in section 3.11.6.5.1 above.
Note: To view the Cooling Fan Run On period in Quiet Mode, see section 3.11.6.3 above.
e
nc
Modules icon .
Note: The Modes-Standard page will be displayed.
2. To the right Run On Remaining is displayed a
counter that counts down the time remaining,
re
after enabling Cooling Run On as described in

section 3.11.6.5.1 above.
3. For authorised Setup personnel only, to set the
Run On time, see section 3.11.6.5.3 below.
fe

Re

3.11.6.5.3 How to Set the Cooling Fan Run On Time

Modules icon .
ly
On
e
3. To the right of Run On Time [min] is displayed
the number of minutes currently set for the run-
on period, as shown in Figure 31.
nc
Figure 31. Modes- Mode Settings Page
re

fe

Re

to delete it.

4. Technical Data
Table of Contents
4.1. Quick Reference to the Environmental and Service Requirements for the LDS Vibration Testing
System
4.2. Technical Data for the LDS Vibration Testing System
4.3. Technical Data for the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
4.4. Technical Data for the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
ly
4.5. Technical Data for the LDS Amplifier
4.6. Technical Data for the LDS Head Expander
4.7. Technical Data for the LDS Supplementary Features
On
4.8. Safety Data Sheets (SDS’s)
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.1. Quick Reference to the Environmental and Service

Requirements for the LDS Vibration Testing System
These Environmental and Service Requirements are for the LDS V8900 Vibration Testing System
4.1.1. Environmental Requirements for the LDS V8900 Vibration Testing System
4.1.1.1 Vibrator
4.1.1.2 Amplifier
4.1.2. Service Requirements for the LDS V8900 Vibration Testing System
ly
4.1.2.1 Electrical Supply
4.1.2.2 Compressed Air Supply
On
4.1.3. How the Equipment Noise Levels Were Determined
4.1.1. Environmental Requirements for the LDS V8900 Vibration

Testing System
4.1.1.1 Vibrator
Subject Matter
e Requirement
nc
Working ambient temperature +7ºC to +30ºC (+45ºF to +86ºF)
Working ambient pressure 900 to 1100 mbar (27 to 33 in Hg)
Maximum working altitude 1 2000 m (see footnote 1 below)
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 0% to 90%
re
Maximum Cooling Airflow Requirement 1.75m³/s

Airflow inlet temperature range 0º to +30º C (+32º to +86º F)
Maximum heat rejected to air
fe
Vibrator via Body 3.4 kW

Vibrator via Cooling Fan 80kW
Maximum acoustic noise2
Re
Vibrator 110 dBA

Cooling Fan 106 dBA
1 If the equipment is to be used above an altitude of 2000 m, contact Brüel & Kjær VTS for advice. Additionally, refer to section 2 Health
and Safety for supplementary guidance.
2 The maximum acoustic noise levels, do not take into account the noise generated by any payload attached to the Vibration Testing
System.
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0401-F-V8900-UM-EN-02

4. Technical Data
4.1.1.2 Amplifier
Requirement
Subject Matter
XPA-88K XPA-128K
Working ambient temperature +5ºC to +30ºC (+45ºF to +86ºF)
Maximum working altitude 2000 m (see footnote 1 above)
Maximum Cooling Airflow Requirement 2.5 m³/s (5297 ft³/min) 2.9 m³/s (6145 ft³/min)
ly
Maximum heat rejected to air 10.5 kW 12.36 kW
Maximum acoustic noise 78 dBA 78 dBA
On
4.1.2. Service Requirements for the LDS V8900 Vibration Testing
System
4.1.2.1 Electrical Supply
Subject Matter Requirement
Maximum Input kVA
e
Amplifier 76.36 kVA
nc
Cooling Fan (during startup) 75.0 kVA
Cooling Fan (steady state) 47.28 kVA
Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit 1.83 kVA
re
Pedestal Control Unit 32 VA

Voltage 3-phase – standard 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Maximum Line Current For details see section 9.5
fe
Earth cable size 50 mm² (See also section 9.0)
4.1.2.2 Compressed Air Supply

Re

Airline supply 6.9 bar (100 lbf/in²)
4.1.2.2.1 Compressed Air Specification

ISO8573-1:2010, Class 1.7.1, where: -
Item Limits
Solid Particulate (1.7.1) (0.1 – 0.5 micron) ≤20,000
Liquid Water (1.7.1.) (g/m³) ≤0.5
Oil (1.7.1.) (mg/m³) ≤0.01
0401-F-V8900-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

4. Technical Data
4.1.3. How the Equipment Noise Levels Were Determined
ly
On
e
Figure 1 Test Chamber used for Noise Measurement
The determination of noise levels is a varied and complex procedure. Figure 1 above shows the
nc
conditions under which the values given in the tables in the Technical Data for the individual items
were obtained.
See the Technical Data for each item of equipment for the Noise Declarations.
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.2. Technical Data for the LDS Vibration Testing System

This section is the Technical Data for the LDS V8900 Vibrator, for vibration and mechanical shock
testing using sinusoidal, random or transient excitation in both the vertical and horizontal planes. For
a detailed description of the LDS V8900 Vibrator, refer to section 5.3.
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1. A Typical LDS V8900 Vibrator
This section includes: -
4.2.1. LDS V8900 Vibrator Variants 4.2.5.1 Operating the Vibrator at Extreme
re
4.2.2. LDS V8900 Vibrator Dimensions, Mass Temperatures

and Floor Loading 4.2.6. Environmental
4.2.2.1 Vibrator Dimensions 4.2.6.1 Notes
4.2.2.2 Vibrator Total Mass and Floor 4.2.6.2 LDS V8900 Vibrator Environmental
fe
Loading Details
4.2.3. LDS V8900 Vibrator Specifications 4.2.6.3 Compressed Air Specification
4.2.3.1 Performance Parameters 4.2.7. LDS V8900 Vibrator Noise Declaration
Re
4.2.3.2 Characteristics 4.2.8. LDS Vibrator Armature Insert Patterns

4.2.3.3 Other LDS V8900 Vibrator 4.2.9. Compatibility with Thermal Chamber
Specifications 4.2.10. LDS V8900 Vibrator Lifting
4.2.3.4 Fuses Instructions
4.2.3.5 Offset Load Values 4.2.11. Typical LDS V8900 Vibrator Torque
4.2.4. System Moving Masses Values
4.2.5. Vibrator Hydraulic Supply Unit 4.2.12. LDS V8900 Vibrator Labelling

4. Technical Data
4.2.1. LDS V8900 Vibrator Variants

The LDS V8900 Vibrator is available in the following variants: -
Designation Armature Diameter Body Mass

LDS V8900-440-L 440mm 4100 kg (9039 lb)
4.2.2. LDS V8900 Vibrator Dimensions, Mass and Floor Loading

4.2.2.1 Vibrator Dimensions
Feature Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted
ly
Height FFL to top of Vibrator, mm
1
1524 mm (52.0 in)
Width 1930 mm (76.0 in)
On
Depth 1320 mm (52.0 in)
Note: Dimensions may vary according to options fitted.
4.2.2.2 Vibrator Total Mass and Floor Loading

Vibrator Designation V8900-L
Total Mass 2
5900 kg 13007 lb
Floor Loading
e UDL 3 27.6 kN/m2 576 lbf/ft2
Point Loading 1.92 MN/m2 278 lbf/in2
nc
4.2.3. LDS V8900 Vibrator Specifications
4.2.3.1 Performance Parameters
re
Performance Parameters
Armature diameter 440 mm (17.3 in)
Sine force, peak 4 80.0 kN (17984 lbf)
fe
Max. Acceleration4 (sine peak) 980.7 m/s² (100 gn)

Random force5, rms 76.2 kN (17130 lbf)
Max. Acceleration (random, rms) 686.5 m/s² (70 gn)
Re
Max. Half sine peak shock force5 160.0 kN (35969 lbf)

Velocity (sine peak) - full-field4 1.8 m/s (70. 8 in/s)
Displacement 101.6 mm (4 in)
Useable frequency range 6 5 to 3000 Hz
1
FFL = Finished Floor Level
2
The mass of the Vibrator given is the baseline mass. The actual value will depend on supplementary features fitted.
3
Uniformly Distributed Load
4
Force, velocity and acceleration ratings depend on the amplifier driving the vibrator. The table above details ratings
when driven by the XPA-K amplifier.
5
Random and shock ratings assume an m40 payload as specified by ISO 5344; shock pulse 2 ms. For advice on specific
test requirements, contact Brüel & Kjær.
6
Force will be reduced above 2200Hz dependant on payload and payload fixture dynamic response.

4. Technical Data
Performance Parameters
Internal Load Support Capacity 800 kg (176 3 lb)
Working Ambient Temperature +7 to 3 0°C (+45 to 86°F)
Recommended Amplifier LDS XPA88K or LDS XPA128K
4.2.3.2 Characteristics
Characteristics
Armature resonance (fn), (nominal) 1800 Hz
Lin-E-Air Body Resonance <5 Hz
ly
Suspension Axial Stiffness Nil
Suspension Cross-axial Stiffness 28.6 kN/mm (6 429 lbf/in)
On
Suspension Rotational Stiffness 94.5 kN m/rad (69699 lbf ft/rad)
Effective mass of moving element –
17 raised (hex) inserts 77.5 kg (170.9 lb)
29 raised (hex) inserts 79.0 kg (174.2 lb)
<10.0 mT (100 gauss) no degauss coil
Stray magnetic field7
≤1.5mT (15 gauss) with degauss coil
e
4.2.3.3 Other LDS V8900 Vibrator Specifications
nc
Specification
Vibrator body mass (Mb) (trunnion-mounted) 4100 kg (9039 lb)
Internal load support capability 800 kg (1764 lb)
re
Field power requirement (d.c), field and

degauss coils:
Maximum Voltage (hot) 160 V
Nominal Voltage (hot) 146 V
fe
Nominal Current 116 A

Nominal Economy Current 81 A
Nominal Economy Voltage(hot) 8 102 V
Re
Vibrator compressed air supply:

Internal load support 6.9 bar (100 lbf/in²)
Lin-E-Air /air isolation 6.9 bar (100 lbf/in²)
Cooling fan:
Motor rating 37kW 50/60 Hz (50 HP)
Cooling air flow 1.75 m³/s (3708 ft³/min)
7
Theoretical maximum, measured 150 mm (6 in) above table, full field at normal operating temperature.
8
When the Amplifier is switched-UP, the field coils are energised to this economy value (0.7 x Full Field). Then when
the gain knob is rotated off the detent, the field power rises to the full field values.

4. Technical Data
4.2.3.4 Fuses
Item Location Type
Fuse FS1 Vibrator Terminal Panel 8A, T, 250V
Fuse FS2 Vibrator Terminal Panel 8A, T, 250V
4.2.3.5 Offset Load Values

The following values for the LDS V8900 Vibrator should be used when using the offset load formula
described in section 9 Reference Data, Offset Load Calculations:
ly
Item 440 mm armature
Maximum turning moment of armature guidance system (‘A’) 3000 Nm (26552 lbf in)
On
Distance from defined null point to armature mounting face (‘B’) 0.168 m (6.2 in)
4.2.4. System Moving Masses

The system moving mass comprises the combined masses of the vibrator armature and any
supplementary features added, a thermal barrier, a head expander etc.
To determine the moving mass for any particular arrangement, a sample calculation is given in Table
e
1. Sample System Moving Masses for the LDS V8900 Vibrator with a 440mm Diameter Vibrator
Armature below.
nc
Vibrator V8900-440-L
Armature diameter, mm 440 (17.3 in)
Armature, kg 77.5 (170.9 lb)
Head Expander, kg (e.g. 1000 mm square) 135.4 (298.5 lb)
re
Thermal Barrier, kg (e.g. 1000 mm square) 37.5 (82.7 lb)

Payload Fixture, kg 25 (55.1 lb)
Payload, kg 125 (275.6 lb)
fe
TOTAL, kg 400.4 (882.8 lb)

Table 1. Sample System Moving Masses for the LDS V8900 Vibrator with a 440mm Diameter Vibrator
Armature
Re

4. Technical Data
4.2.5. Vibrator Hydraulic Supply Unit
ly
On
e
Figure 2 Vibrator Hydraulic Supply Unit
Feature
nc
Dimensions
Height 840 mm (33.0 in)
Width 545 mm (21.5 in)
re
Depth 445 mm (17.5 in)

Mass (approx) 50 kg (110 lb) empty
Mains supply The following 3-phase supply ratings are available:
fe
380-480 V 50/60 Hz
The working voltage range is marked on the motor serial number
plate.
Motor Totally enclosed, fan-cooled
Re
Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz
Input Power 1.83 kVA 2.19 kVA
Motor Speed 1450 rev/min
1740 rev/min (60 Hz)
(50 Hz)
Motor Isolator with Overload Protection. Rating dependant on
Motor Protection
incoming supply.
Pressure pump
Type Gear
Operating
172 bar (2500 lbf/in²)
pressure

4. Technical Data
Feature
2.2 l/min @172 bar (50 Hz)
Delivery Rate
2.6 l/min @172 bar (60 Hz)
Filtration
Pressure 10 micron
Oil tank capacity 45 litres
Oil Type Vibrator Oil Temperature Limits
Recommended oil
Shell Tellus S2 M 68 +20⁰C to +55⁰C
ly
4.2.5.1 Operating the Vibrator at Extreme Temperatures
When testing payloads at high or low temperatures, measures must be taken to ensure that excessive
heat is not transmitted to the vibrator.
On
For operation outside the temperature range of the Shell Tellus S2 M 68 oil (+20⁰C to +55⁰C), a thermal
barrier should be fitted.
4.2.6. Environmental
4.2.6.1 Notes
e
1. The customer is responsible for: mains supply, mains input cables, mains isolation switch, mains
fuses, earth cable, all trunking or conduit, air conditioning, ventilation and soundproofing, air supply
nc
with water trap. Customer responsibilities are shown in dotted detail on interconnection diagrams.
2. Line current A = Input kVA x 1000
√3 x line voltage
3. For earthing requirements see section 9 Reference Data, Earthing, Supply and Cabling’. The vibrator
re
is earthed via the armature drive cable.

fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.2.6.2 LDS V8900 Vibrator Environmental Details

Item Value
Environmental
Working ambient temperature +7º to +30º C (+45º to +86º F)
Maximum Heat Rejected
ly
to air (via body) 3.4 kW
via cooling fan 80 kW
Compressed Air line supply (see section 4.2.6.3
6.9 bar (100 lbf/in²)
On
below)
Maximum acoustic noise (see section 4.2.7.
below)
4.2.6.3 Compressed Air Specification

ISO8573-1:2010, Class 1.7.1, where: -
Item
e Limits

nc
Liquid Water (1.7.1.) (g/m³) ≤0.5
Oil (1.7.1.) (mg/m³) ≤0.01

re
4.2.7. LDS V8900 Vibrator Noise Declaration

See section 4.1 for detail of how the values given in the table were obtained.
Parameter Vibrator
fe
LpA.: -
110 dBA
The A-weighted emission sound pressure level.
LpCpeak: -
Re
The peak C-weighted instantaneous sound pressure value, also known as the C- 120 dBC
weighted peak sound pressure level (if applicable).
LWA: -
121 dBA
The A-weighted sound power level (if applicable).

4. Technical Data
4.2.8. LDS Vibrator Armature Insert Patterns

For details of the LDS Vibrator Armature and Slip Table Insert Patterns, refer to section 10 Schematics
4.2.9. Compatibility with Thermal Chamber

The vibrator is compatible with AGREE/CERT standard thermal chambers and has optional equipment
for chamber floor support. Overall heights will not exceed those shown in outline drawings.
4.2.10. LDS V8900 Vibrator Lifting Instructions

Eyebolts Eyebolts
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 3. A Typical LDS V8900 Vibrator

Four eyebolts are provided on the top of the trunnion supports as shown in in Figure 3 above. No other
method of lifting the combo must be attempted.
fe
Two pairs of chains are required: the effective lengths of the chains should be such that the unit
remains horizontal when the crane takes the weight. The chains should, if necessary, be used with a
spreader to ensure that they remain vertical.
Re
WARNING:
• The total mass of the vibrator may be up to 15000 kg. for the actual value of the
equipment supplied, refer to section 4 Technical Data
• Failure to comply with these lifting instructions may cause death or serious personal
injury.
4.2.11. Typical LDS V8900 Vibrator Torque Values


4. Technical Data
4.2.12. LDS V8900 Vibrator Labelling

The following labels are affixed to the equipment:
Label Description
a. Warning; electrical hazard
ly
On
b. Caution; vibrator rotation
e
nc
c. Warning; crush hazard
re
d. Warning; finger trap

fe
Re
e. Warning; hot surface

4. Technical Data
f. Warning; moving parts can crush
ly
g. Prohibition; No access for unauthorised persons
On
e h. Prohibition; No access for persons with medical implants
nc
i. Mandatory; Ear protection must be worn while operating this machinery
re
fe
j. Caution; refer to manual for lifting instructions

Re
k. CE mark
l. Product; model; serial no; date of manufacture

4. Technical Data
4.3. Technical Data for the LDS Pedestal Control Unit

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit.
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 LDS Pedestal Control Unit
re

4.3.1. LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Dimensions and Mass
4.3.1.1 LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Dimensions
fe
4.3.1.2 LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Mass

4.3.2. Views of the LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Panel, Connections and Internals
4.3.3. Power Requirements
Re
4.3.4. Fuses
4.3.5. Compressed Air Requirements
4.3.6. LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Labelling
The LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit is a free-standing enclosure housing the following
functions:
• Air Isolation Control for Lin-E-Air
• Internal Load Support (ILS) Control
• Internal Load Support (ILS) Pressure Display

4. Technical Data
• Internal Load Support Exhaust Valve

• Inductive Centring System (ICS) Display
• E-Stop
• Interlock connections from Vibrator/Combo and CANbus Communications to Amplifier.
• Air Cooling Pressure Switch
Access to the inside of the cabinet is by keyed access, for safety.
4.3.1. LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Dimensions and

Mass
ly
4.3.1.1 LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Dimensions
Feature Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted
On
Height FFL 1 to top of Emergency Stop Switch 1066 mm (42.0 in)
Height to top of Support Frame 1026 mm (40.4 in)
Width 510 mm (20.1 in)
Depth of Cabinet 218 mm (8.6 in)
Depth of Support Frame Feet 410 mm (16.1 in)
e
4.3.1.2 LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Mass
nc
Vibrator Designation V8900-L
Total Mass 28 kg 62 lb
4.3.2. Views of the LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Panel,
re
Connections and Internals

Pushbutton Regulator & Electrical Connections Load Support
fe
Pressure Gauge Exhaust Valve

Re

Regulator Pneumatic Connections
and PE Earth Cable Port
Figure 2 LDS Pedestal Control Unit Panel Figure 3 Bottom of LDS Pedestal Control Unit
1
FFL = Finished Floor Level

4. Technical Data
ly
On
Figure 4 Internal View of the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
(wiring omitted for clarity)
4.3.3. Power Requirements

Item Requirement
Electrical
e 100V to 240V, 1 phase, 50/60Hz Auto-sensing,
32VA
nc
4.3.4. Fuses
Item Location Requirement
re
Fuse FS1 Internal DIN Rail 500mA, T, 250V
4.3.5. Compressed Air Requirements

fe
Item Requirement
Compressed Air Line Supply (see section 4.3.5.1

6.9 bar (100 lbf/in²)
below)
Re

ISO8573-1:2010, Class 1.7.1, where: -
Item Limits
Liquid Water (1.7.1.) (g/m³) ≤0.5
Oil (1.7.1.) (mg/m³) ≤0.01

4. Technical Data
4.3.6. LDS V8900 Vibrator Pedestal Control Unit Labelling

The following labels are affixed to the equipment:
Label Description
a.Warning; electrical hazard
ly
b. E-Stop Input Label ‘A’
On
c.E-Stop Input Label ‘B’
d. Fuse Label FS1
e. Port Identification Label

e
nc
f.Product; model; serial no; supply voltage rating; supply voltage tap
setting; maximum input; date of manufacture
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.4. Technical Data for the LDS Cooling Unit

The Cooling Unit supplied with the LDS V8900 Vibrator is a Centrifugal Extraction Fan
ly
On
e
Figure 1. The LDS V8900 Vibrator Cooling Fan
nc
4.4.1. LDS Cooling Fan Specification
4.4.2. LDS Cooling Fan Dimensions and Mass
4.4.3. LDS Cooling Fan Mass and Floor Loading
4.4.4. LDS Cooling Fan Noise Declaration
re
4.4.5. LDS Cooling Unit Labelling
4.4.1. LDS Cooling Fan Specification

fe
Cooling Fan:
Fan Type Centrifugal Extraction Fan
Re
Motor rating 37 kW 50/60 Hz (49.6 HP)

3 phase AC. 50 Hz 3 phase AC. 60 Hz
380 – 415 V 380 – 415 V
AC Input
440 – 460 V
480 V
Maximum input requirement During Startup Steady State

75 kVA 47.28 kVA
Cooling air flow 1.75 m³/s (3700 ft³/min)

4. Technical Data
Cooling Fan:
Maximum Acoustic Noise See the Noise Declaration in section 4.4.4. below
4.4.2. LDS Cooling Fan Dimensions and Mass

Feature 50 Hz Fan 60 Hz Fan
Weight
458 kg (1010 lb) 400 kg (882 lb)
(approx)
Height 1169 mm (46 in) 1118 mm (44 in)
Width 979 mm (38.5 in) 979 mm (38.5 in)
ly
Depth 996 mm (39.2 in) 946 mm (37.2 in)
Note: The 60Hz fan has a smaller impeller as it runs at a faster speed to give the same airflow as the
50Hz fan, therefore the overall dimensions are different.
On
4.4.3. LDS Cooling Fan Mass and Floor Loading
Vibrator
50 Hz Fan 60 Hz Fan
Designation
Total Mass 458 kg 1010 lb 400 kg 882 lb
UDL 1 11.8 kN/m2 246 lbf/ft2 10.3 kN/m2 215 lbf/ft2
Floor Loading
e
Point Loading 0.0828 MN/m2 12.0 lbf/in2 0.0723 MN/m2 10.5 lbf/in2
nc
4.4.4. LDS Cooling Fan Noise Declaration
See section 4.1 for details as to how the values given in the table were obtained.
re
Parameter Fan
LpA.: - 106
The A-weighted emission sound pressure level. dBA
LpCpeak: -
fe
110
The peak C-weighted instantaneous sound pressure value, also known as the C- dBC
weighted peak sound pressure level (if applicable).
LWA: - 117
Re
The A-weighted sound power level (if applicable). dBA
1 UDL = Uniformly Distributed Load

4. Technical Data
4.4.5. LDS Cooling Unit Labelling

The following labels are affixed to the Cooling Unit:
Label Description
a. Warning – high temperature
ly
b. OEM Label
On
c. Warning – electrical hazard; Manual Handling Hazard - be aware of mass
of unit; Warning - General Warning; Caution – Wear ear protection;
Warning – high temperature surface
e
d. Product; model; serial no; supply voltage rating; supply voltage tap
nc
setting; maximum input; date of manufacture
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.5. Technical Data of the LDS Amplifier

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS XPA-K Amplifier
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 1 The LDS XPA-K Amplifier

fe
4.5.4.1 Amplifier Characteristics

4.5.1. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Variants 4.5.4.2 Amplifier Total Harmonic
4.5.2. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Dimensions, Mass Distortion
and Floor Loading 4.5.5. LDS XPA-K Amplifier System Data
Re
4.5.2.1 Amplifier Dimensions 4.5.5.1 Amplifier Maximum Output

4.5.2.1 Amplifier Total Mass and Floor 4.5.5.2 Amplifier Maximum Input
Loading Requirement
4.5.3. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Features 4.5.5.2.1 Electrical Supply
4.5.3.1 Local Controls 4.5.5.2.2 kVA Input
4.5.3.2 Interlocks 4.5.5.2.3 Fuses and MCB’s
4.5.3.3 External Interfaces 4.5.5.3 Amplifier Environmental Data
4.5.3.4 Automatic control facilities 4.5.5.4 Amplifier Operating Environment
4.5.3.5 Safety 4.5.5.5 Noise Declaration
4.5.4. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Specifications 4.5.6. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Labelling
English Original Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0405-B-XPAK-UM-EN-01
4.5.1. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Variants
The LDS XPA-K Amplifier is available in the following variants: -
Designation Description
LDS XPA-88K Contains 11 x 8kVA Power Modules
LDS XPA-128K Contains 16 x 8kVA Power Modules
4.5.2. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Dimensions, Mass and Floor Loading
ly
4.5.2.1 Amplifier Dimensions
Feature LDS XPA-88K LDS XPA-128K
On
Height 1905 mm (75.0 in) 1905 mm (75.0 in)
Width 1200 mm (47.2 in) 1200 mm (47.2 in)
Depth 824 mm (32.44 in) 824 mm (32.44 in)
4.5.2.1 Amplifier Total Mass and Floor Loading

e Mass (without 8 Floor Loading
Mass (with full
complement of
Floor Loading
Designation kVA Power with 6 Jacking with 6 Jacking
8 kVA Power
nc
Modules) Feet Feet
Modules)
9.81 kN/m2 UDL 1 10.9 kN/m2 UDL1

LDS XPA-88K 990 2.29 MN/m2 1100 2.5 MN/m2 point
re
point loading loading
9.9 kN/m2 UDL1 11.5 kN/m2 UDL1

LDS XPA-128K 1000 2.3 MN/m2 point 1160 2.7 MN/m2 point
loading loading
fe
Re
1
UDL = Uniformly Distributed Load
English Original Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0405-B-XPAK-UM-EN-01
4. Technical Data
4.5.3. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Features

4.5.3.1 Local Controls
USB Port
ly
On
Pushbutton
Figure 2 The LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
Control Description
A USB Key is inserted into this port when system settings need to be
USB Port modified. System Settings can only be modified by authorised personnel
e with access permission provided on a USB key.
Pressing the emergency stop pushbutton initiates an emergency
Emergency Stop
nc
shutdown. The control panel will display an Emergency Stop page and the
Pushbutton
amplifier will shut down in a controlled manner.
The Touchscreen Panel provides all of the features required to set up and
Touchscreen Panel
display the system data.
re
Master Gain Adjusts the level of gain between the amplifier input and the amplifier
Control output.
This button is used to Switch-UP the Amplifier from an idle state to an
Switch-UP operating state.
fe
Pushbutton Note: This pushbutton does not apply power or switch on the amplifier. It
is only to change the operating state.
This button is used to Switch-DOWN the Amplifier from an operating state

Re
Switch-DOWN to an idle state

Pushbutton Note: This pushbutton does not switch off the power or switch off the
amplifier. It is only to change the operating state.
4.5.3.2 Interlocks
Interlock Name Access level to edit settings
on Screen Setup Brüel & Kjær
3-Phase Failure 3 Phase Power Failure No Yes
Amp Amplifier Armature Drive Output
No Yes
Overcurrent [A] Overcurrent

4. Technical Data

Amp Amplifier Armature Drive Output
No Yes
Overvoltage [V] Overvoltage
Amplifier Amplifier Transformer or Rectifiers Above
No Yes
Cooling Maximum Temperature
Vib Oil Pressure Vibrator Armature Low or No Oil Pressure Yes Yes
Blower Flow Vibrator Extraction Air Flow Failure No Yes
Blower Motor Vibrator Extraction Air Motor Fault No Yes
ly
CAN External External CAN Bus Communication Error No Yes
CAN Internal Internal CAN Bus Communication Error No Yes
Ctrl Comms Amplifier Internal System Communications
On
No Yes
Fault Failure
External 1 User Configurable Interlock 1 Yes Yes
External 2 User Configurable Interlock 2 Yes Yes
Field Supply
Field Current Above Maximum No Yes
Max [A]
Field Supply Min
[A]
e
Field Current Below Minimum No Yes
nc
Field Unit 1 Field SMPS Unit 1 Fault No Yes
Field Unit 2 Field SMPS Unit 2 Fault No Yes
Input Overdrive Input Signal Drive High Interlock No Yes
Main Contactor Active Bay Main 3 Phase Contactor feedback No Yes
re
MK4a Power Module Interlock - Module

Power Module 1 No Yes
Number 1
Number 2
fe

Number 3
Re

Number 4
Number 5
Number 6
Number 7
Number 8
Number 9

4. Technical Data

Power Module MK4a Power Module Interlock - Module
No Yes
10 Number 10
No Yes
11 Number 11
No Yes
12 Number 12
No Yes
13 Number 13
ly
No Yes
14 Number 14
On
No Yes
15 Number 15
No Yes
16 Number 16
Module supply Power Module Supply Voltage Above
No Yes
Max [V] Maximum
Module supply Power Module Supply Voltage Below
Min [V]
e
Minimum
No Yes
Slip Oil Pressure Slip Table Low or No Oil Pressure Yes Yes
nc
Slip Table Travelled Beyond Maximum
Slip Overtravel Yes Yes
Stroke
Step Contactor Step start contactor feedback fault No Yes
re
Internal
Control Board Internal Supplies Fault No Yes
Supplies
Vib Overtravel Vibrator has exceeded Maximum Travel Yes Yes
VPS Control VPS General Interlock No Yes
fe
Integral protection prevents output devices from working outside their specified limits.
4.5.3.3 External Interfaces

Re
• Dual circuit external emergency stop

• Two external interlocks
4.5.3.4 Automatic control facilities

• Automatic stop/start
• Signal clamp
• ‘Amplifier ready’ signal
• ‘Interlock activated’ signal
• Automatic reset

4. Technical Data
4.5.3.5 Safety
Designed in accordance with EN 61010-1:2010.
4.5.4. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Specifications

4.5.4.1 Amplifier Characteristics
Feature LDS XPA-88K LDS XPA-128K
Classification Class D switching amplifier
Cooling Air cooled
ly
Power Range 88 kVA (nominal) 128 kVA (shock)
>68 dB wrt 100 V rms output, 10 kΩ input termination and rated

Signal-to-Noise Ratio
resistive load connected
On
Input Impedance 100 kΩ nominal
Total Harmonic Distortion 0.5 to 0.8% at rated output into rated resistive load
Input Sensitivity Nominal Nominal 1.0 V for 100 V rms output
Switching Frequency 150 kHz
Rated Output Voltage

e 100 V rms (sine)
80 A rms (sine and random per 8 kVA increment

nc
Continuous Output Current
(128 kVA chassis limited to 800 Amps rms)
Full Power Bandwidth 20 Hz to 3000 Hz
240 A peak per 8 kVA increment for 100 ms

re
Transient Output Current (128 kVA chassis limited to 3840 Amps peak for short transient
tests)
Module Efficiency 93%

fe
Integral protection to prevent output devices from working

Protection
outside their specification limit
Field power supply voltage 160 V DC (maximum)

Re
Maximum no-load voltage 110 V (sine)

Frequency response ± 1.5 dB 20 Hz to 3000 Hz
Voltage regulation <55% (0 to 100% of rated power into a resistive load at 400 Hz)
Output offset voltage ±100 mV (5º to 40º C)
Total harmonic distortion See section 4.5.4.2 below
Modulation range d.c. to 10 kHz
Power factor 0.95

4. Technical Data
4.5.4.2 Amplifier Total Harmonic Distortion

Note: at rated output into rated resistive load
Output
20 Hz 40 Hz 400 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 3 kHz
voltage
100 V 0.85% 0.85% 0.5% 0.5% 0.8% 0.8%
50 V 0.6% 0.6% 0.6% 0.6% 0.8% 0.8%
10 V 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2%
4.5.5. LDS XPA-K Amplifier System Data
ly
4.5.5.1 Amplifier Maximum Output
Maximum Maximum
Sinusoidal Sinusoidal Peak
On
output sinusoidal
Amplifier/vibrator/modules output overload current
into power
installed current A current A (random)
reactive output
rms rms A
load kVA kVA
XPA-88K and XPA-128K
88 kVA 800 840 2400 88 80
128 kVA (shock)
e 800 840 2400 88 80
4.5.5.2 Amplifier Maximum Input Requirement

nc
4.5.5.2.1 Electrical Supply
re
Voltage 3-phase – standard 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz

50 mm2
Earth cable size
(See also section 9.0)
fe
4.5.5.2.2 kVA Input

Amplifier/vibrator/modules
Amplifier, FPS and degauss kVA
installed
Re

/V8900
88 kVA 76.36
128 kVA (shock) 76.36

4. Technical Data
4.5.5.2.3 Fuses and MCB’s

Note: The fuses quoted in the following table are included in 4068760. LDS Fuse Kit, V8900
Fuse/MCB Location Type

Fuse FS1, FS2, FS3 AC Input Panel Line 1 125A, 660V, Semiconductor
Fuse FS7, FS8, FS9 Supply Transformer 630A, 240V
Fuse FS40, FS42 Mk4A Power Modules 125A, 240V
Fuse FS41 Mk4A Power Modules 63A, 240V
MCB1 AC Input Panel MCB, 3P, 2A Curve K
ly
Thermal Circuit Breaker, TCP10/DC32V,
ECB1 AC Input Panel
32Vdc, 10A
Step/Start Resistor
MCB2 MCB, 3P, 16A Curve K
Tray
On
Step/Start Resistor
Tray
Voltage Feedback
CFS1, CFS2 Fuse, Anti-Surge, 1A
Armature Cable
Voltage Feedback Field
Cable
e
4.5.5.3 Amplifier Environmental Data
nc
Amplifier/vibrator/modules Heat rejected Cooling Max acoustic
Mass kg
installed to air kW airflow m³/s noise dBA
/V8900
re
See 4.5.5.5.
88 kVA 10.5 2.5 1100
below
2.9 See 4.5.5.5. 1160
128 kVA (shock) 12.36
below
fe
CAUTION:
• This Amplifier must be installed on a non-combustible surface.
Re
4.5.5.4 Amplifier Operating Environment

Feature Value
Ambient Temperature +5 to 30°C (41 to 104°F)
Airflow inlet temperature
+1º to +30º C (+34º to +86º F)
range
Relative Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing

4. Technical Data
4.5.5.5 Noise Declaration

See section 4.1 for details of how the values given in the table were obtained.
XPA88-K /
Parameter XPA128-K
Amplifier
LpA.: -
78 dBA
The A-weighted emission sound pressure level.
LpCpeak: -
The peak C-weighted instantaneous sound pressure value, also known as the N/A
C-weighted peak sound pressure level (if applicable).
ly
LWA: -
N/A
The A-weighted sound power level (if applicable).
On
4.5.6. LDS XPA-K Amplifier Labelling
Label Description
e
a.Warning; electrical hazard
nc
re
b.Warning; hot surface

fe
Re
c.No access for unauthorised persons

4. Technical Data
Label Description
d.No access for persons with medical implants
ly
e.Wear ear protection
On
f.CE mark
e
nc
g.Product; model; serial no; date of manufacture
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.6. Technical Data for the LDS Head Expander

This section is the Technical Data for the LDS 1220 mm x 1220 mm Unguided Head Expander and should
be read in conjunction with the appropriate Vibrator Specification in section 4.2. Part numbers of the
actual equipment supplied are included in section 5.
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1. A Typical LDS 1220 x 1220 Unguided Head Expander Mounted on a V8900 Lin-E-Air Vibrator
This LDS 1220 mm x 1220 mm Unguided Head Expander has been designed to fit the following
Vibrators: -
re
V875-440/640, V875LS, V8, V8900, V9

This section comprises:
4.6.1. Dimensions, Mass and Nominal Frequency
fe
4.6.2. Construction and Finish

4.6.3. Armature Insert Pattern
4.6.4. Lifting instructions
Re
4.6.5. Labelling
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0406-A-SHX1220-UM-EN-01

4. Technical Data
4.6.1. Dimensions, Mass and Nominal Frequency
ly
On
Figure 2 Head Expander Dimension References
Optional Thermal
Head Expander Kit Suitable for Vibrator
Barrier Kit
Size mm Dim Base mm Height mm 1st Vertical
Inserts Mass‡ kg (lb) Mass‡ kg (lb)
‘A’ x Dim ‘A’ Dim ‘B’ Dim ‘C’ fn† Hz
1220 × 1220 440 385 M14 242.0 (533.5) 537 56.9 (125.5) V875LS, V8900
† Nominal Frequency
‡ ± 5%
e
Table 1 Head Expander Dimensions, Mass and Nominal Frequency
nc
4.6.2. Construction and Finish
Feature
Material Magnesium Fabrication
re
Finish Anti-corrosion Coating

Flatness Tolerance 0.05 mm/m
fe
4.6.3. Armature Insert Pattern

For details of the Insert Pattern, refer to section 10 Schematics.
Re
0406-B-SHX1220-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

4. Technical Data
4.6.4. Lifting instructions

The Head Expander should be lifted vertically using the eyebolt supplied fitted to the lifting point; in
this way the expander can be safely lowered onto the vibrator armature or into storage facilities
without causing damage.
Note: The optional Thermal Barrier should be removed before lifting the Head Expander, following the
procedure in section 4.7.5.
WARNING:
 The mass of the Head Expander is given in Table 1 above; the mass of the associated
Thermal Barrier is also provided in the table for reference.
ly
 Failure to comply with these lifting instructions may cause death or serious personal
injury.
On
4.6.5. Labelling
The following labels are affixed to the Head Expander (see also the Vibrator Specification in section 4.2.):
Label Description
e a. Warning – Danger of crushing hazard

nc
re
b. Alternative Warning – Danger of crushing hazard

fe
Re
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0406-B-SHX1220-UM-EN-01

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
0406-B-SHX1220-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

4. Technical Data
4.7. Technical Data for the LDS Supplementary Features

Details of the LDS Supplementary Features fitted to this Vibration Testing System are in section 5.
For the Technical Data of the various LDS Supplementary Features, refer to the sections below: -
4.7.1. Technical Data for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
4.7.2. Technical Data for the LDS Thermal Barrier
4.7.3. Technical Data for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
4.7.4. Technical Data for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
4.7.5. Technical Data for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
4.7.6. Technical Data for LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.7.1. Technical Data of the LDS Airglide Transportation System
ly
On
e
nc
re
4.7.1.1 Air Castor Technical Data

4.7.1.2 Floor Specification Required for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
fe
WARNING:
• Because of the very low coefficient of friction exhibited by the air castors,
it is possible for the vibrator to ‘float’ unassisted down a slight gradient
Re
and cause personal injury or equipment damage. If such a gradient exists,

suitable restraining methods must be employed when the transportation
system is to be used.
The Airglide transportation option can be fitted to base or trunnion-mounted versions of LDS vibrators
or combos. This option consists of four air castors, each fitted beneath an air isolation mount on base
mounted versions, and fitted directly to the horizontal members on trunnion mounted versions. The
air castors allow the vibrator to be floated on a cushion of compressed air; the vibrator can then be
moved using only light hand pressure. To assist vibrator manoeuvrability on the smaller systems up to
the LDS V875, this option provides a grab handle fitted to the vibrator.
A dead-man’s handle is fitted to the vibrator to allow quick turn-off of the airglide system in case of an
emergency, such as the vibrator running away down an incline.

4. Technical Data
Technical data for the air castors is given in Section 4.7.1.1 below; for details of floor specification
requirements see Section 4.7.1.2 below.
Each air castor module comprises a urethane diaphragm bonded to a steel backing plate, and a central
landing pad. The compressed air enters the diaphragm via a hole in the backing plate. Air escapes
through a small hole in the diaphragm to form an air cushion beneath the load module. When the air
is shut off, the diaphragm collapses and the weight is supported by the central landing pad.
4.7.1.1 Air Castor Technical Data
Recomme
Operating
Man No.
Pressure
Nominal
Lift Area
Vibrator
Landing
Airflow
Height
Rated
nded
Area
Qty
Lift
ly
1 bar 1.175 l/s 4.76 mm 182.5 cm2 20.3 cm2
V830-T AB6H7 4
14.5 lbf/in2 2 ft3/min 0.19 in 28 in2 3 in2
On
1.8 bar 3.8 l/s 10.0 mm 258 cm2 32 cm2
V830-L 8N 4
1.8 bar 3.8 l/s 10.0 mm 258 cm2 32 cm2
V850-T 8N 4
2.1 bar 6.6 l/s 19 mm 516 cm2 71 cm2
V850-L K12N 4
e 2.1 bar 6.6 l/s 19 mm 516 cm2 71 cm2
V875-L K12N 4
nc
2.1 bar 6.6 l/s 22 mm 903 cm2 155 cm2
V8-L K15N 4
2.1 bar 6.6 l/s 22 mm 903 cm2 155 cm2
V8900-L K15N 4
re

2.1 bar 6.6 l/s 22 mm 903 cm2 155 cm2
V9X-L K15N 4
T = Solid Trunnion Mounted
fe
L = Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted
4.7.1.2 Floor Specification Required for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
WARNING:
Re
• The floor specifications given in this section are important for the LDS
Airglide Transportation System to operate correctly.
• Any excessive noise or vibration from the Airglide Castors will usually be
due to the floor not meeting the specification.
4.7.1.2.1 General
1. The operating surface is critical to the efficient operation of air castors. A smooth non-porous
surface such as sealed hand trowelled concrete or vinyl tiles is ideal.
2. Unsealed concrete may be permanently upgraded for air film handling use by sealing with
commercial penetrating sealers.

4. Technical Data
3. Surfaces with cracks or porosity rob the system of air either destroying the air film or requiring larger
volumes of air.
4. Friction load is so low that a floating load will float downhill on a slight gradient.
4.7.1.2.2 Surface Planarity

1. The overall planarity of the finished top concrete surface may deviate "X" (see Table 1 below) from
a true plane.
2. The local planarity of the finished top concrete surface should be within "Y" (see Table 1 below) in
any 3 metres (10 ft) as determined by a 3 metres (10 ft) straight edge when placed on the surface.
3. Castor sizes fitted to equipment:
ly
‘X’ ‘Y’
27N and 21N +/- 4.7 mm (+/- 3/16 in) 4.7 mm (3/16 in)
15N, 12N, 8N and 6N +/- 3.1 mm (+/- 1/8 in) 3.1 mm (1/8 in)
On
Table 1 Surface Planarity Requirements
4.7.1.2.3 Surface Levelness

1. The finished top concrete surface shall not slope from a flat overall plane greater than 1%.
2. The importance of levelness relates solely to the frictionless nature of a load floating on an air film
and with the levelness exceeding the specified figure, loads will tend to drift towards a lower level
and will require anti-drift constraints.
e
4.7.1.2.4 Surface Continuity
nc
1. The top surface must be a high quality smooth steel trowelled finish, continuous without cracks,
steps or other interruptions through which air losses can occur.
2. For cracks, clean free of all loose materials with an oil free high pressure air jet and epoxy fill smooth
and flush with adjoining surfaces.
re
3. Steps should be blended by grinding to a slope angle of not more than 1 in 20 and should not exceed
local planarity height limits quoted in Table 1 above. Blended areas should be sealed.
4. Projections should be ground flush with adjacent concrete or blended as for steps. Projections not
to exceed local planarity height limits (Table 1 above). Area should be sealed.
fe
5. Construction joints should be avoided whenever possible. If unavoidable, such joints should be
keyed to prevent movement between adjacent surfaces. Clean joint using an oil free high pressure
air jet or groove with a 1/8 in masonry saw and fill with epoxy, bolt grout or silastic. Smooth flush
with adjoining surfaces.
Re
4.7.1.2.5 Concrete Sealant

1. Concrete sealant should be applied to the concrete surface in a manner and time schedule specified
by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Insofar as air film performance is concerned, the essential function of the sealant is to close the
natural porosity of the concrete to prevent the passage of air. An optimum sealant is one which will
also uniformly fill the valleys in the top surface of the concrete and provide a durable, smooth and
light reflective surface.
3. Should the sealant not fill the valleys of the concrete and additional coating(s) are required, the
sealant must be of a compatible composition to allow and secure a permanent bond between the
two materials.

4. Technical Data
4.7.1.2.6 Concrete top coating

1. When a top coating is used, i.e. when a sealant is not used as described above, this should be a
seventies, epoxy based coating applied to the concrete in a manner specified by the coating
manufacturer. The function of the coating is to fill the valleys in the top surface of the concrete and
provide a durable, smooth and light reflective surface.
2. Where a sealant is used which does not satisfy the requirements of section 4.7.1.2.5 above. a top
coating should be applied; the top coating must be compatible with the sealant used.
4.7.1.2.7 Air Castor Load Capacity

The concrete floor must be adequate in strength to carry the loads imposed on the floor by the landing
areas of the air castors as given in the Technical Data above.
ly
4.7.1.2.8 Vinyl Tile Flooring
1. A vinyl tiled floor may be used providing the parameters for surface planarity and levelness specified
On
for concrete are met and there are no local indentations which could rob the system of air. Tiles
must be close fitting, i.e. there must be no discontinuity between the tiles through which air could
escape.
2. It is most important that the tiles should be securely bonded at the edge, otherwise air might enter
the gap between adjacent tiles and cause the tile to lift and break. This could happen on old floors
particularly where the bonding medium has aged around the edges causing loss of adhesion. As an
alternative to vinyl tiles, vinyl sheeting can be used and laid in the direction required to move the
e
vibrator so that the air castors do not have to bridge the gap between adjacent sheets.
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.7.2. Technical Data for the LDS Thermal Barrier

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with the LDS Thermal Barrier detailed in the Equipment List
in section 5.1.
4.7.2.1 LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier Kits
4.7.2.1.1 LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier Moving Masses
4.7.2.2 LDS Vibrator Armature Thermal Barriers
4.7.2.2.1 LDS Vibrator Armature Thermal Barrier Moving Masses
ly
4.7.2.1 LDS Slip Table Thermal Barriers
4.7.2.1.1 LDS Slip Table Thermal Barrier Moving Masses
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier for an Figure 2 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier for an
LDS Head Expander LDS Slip Table
re
fe
Figure 3 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier for an LDS Vibrator Armature

Re
LDS Thermal barriers are optional items that are selected when the payload is to be tested in extreme
temperatures. The thermal barrier reduces thermal conductivity between the payload and the
armature, head expander or slip plate during operation in conjunction with an environmental
chamber. The barrier has clearance holes corresponding to the mating surface insert pattern.
Head Expanders and Slip

Armatures
Tables
Barrier Thickness 19.05mm (0.75”) 20.0mm (0.787”)
Conductivity 0.27 W/(m K) 0.25 W/(m K)
Thermal limits up to 200°C (392°F) up to 220°C (428°F).
Standard Head Expander Thermal Barriers have pre-set holes for chamber integration.

4. Technical Data
Holes for the clamping strips are on the top face on a pitch/spacing of 100 mm and fitted with M6
helicoil inserts.
4.7.2.1 LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier Kits

Depending on model, LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier kits may include; thermal barrier, lifting
eyebolts, clamp plates, clamp plate corners, and some attachment screws.
4.7.2.1.1 LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier Moving Masses

Kit Moving
LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier Kit Description Kit Number
Mass kg (lb)
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 610x610-440, M8 4039410 13.4 (29.5)
ly
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 610X610-440, 3/8UNC 4039440 13.4 (29.5)
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 610X610-440, M10 4039940 13.4 (29.5)
On
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 762X762-440, 3/8UNC 4039450 21.5 (47.4)
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1000X1000-440 3/8UNC 4039460 36.8 (81.1)
e
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1220x1220-440-M8-A100G-E 4063580 56.4 (124.3)
nc
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1220x1220-440-3/8UNC-
4063600 56.4 (124.3)
A101.6G-E
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1220x1220-440-M10 4063590 56.4 (124.3)
Note: The moving masses quoted, include the thermal barrier, the clamp plates and the clamp plate
re
fixings. The figures do not include any other fixings or the payload, nor do they include any
silicon used for the joints on segmented barriers.
4.7.2.2 LDS Vibrator Armature Thermal Barriers

fe
LDS Vibrator Armature Thermal Barriers do not include fixings.
4.7.2.2.1 LDS Vibrator Armature Thermal Barrier Moving Masses

Barrier Mass
Re
LDS Vibrator Armature Thermal Barrier Description Part Number

kg (lb)
LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 17 holes, M8 1045490 5.74 (12.65)
LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 17 holes, M10 & 3/8UNC 1027480 5.73 (12.63)
LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 29 Holes, M8 1068270 5.72 (12.61)
LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 29 Holes, M10 & 3/8UNC 1068280 5.69 (12.54)
Note: The moving masses quoted, include the thermal barrier only. The figures do not include any
fixings, payload etc.

4. Technical Data
4.7.2.1 LDS Slip Table Thermal Barriers

Thermal Barriers for Slip Tables are generally incorporated into the Slip Table Kit, when the Vibration
Testing System is ordered. However, the items required for an LDS Slip Table Thermal Barrier include;
thermal barrier, clamp plates, and some attachment screws (depending on model).
4.7.2.1.1 LDS Slip Table Thermal Barrier Moving Masses

LDS Slip Table Thermal Barrier Description Part Number Kit Mass (kg)
LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT750-M8-2B 1067720 22.48 (49.55)
LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT750-3/8"UNC-2B 1067740 22.36 (49.30)
ly
On
LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT900-3/8UNC-2B 1065930 30.63 (67.53)
LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT1220-38UNC-3B 1065560 56.04 (123.54)
Note: The moving masses quoted, include the thermal barrier, the clamp plates and the clamp plate
fixings. The figures do not include any other fixings or the payload, nor do they include any
e
silicon used for the joints on segmented barriers.
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.7.3. Technical Data for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

This Vibration Testing System is suppled with an LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Cooling Unit with Silencer
re
Parameter Value
Dim ‘A’ 50Hz Model 1010 mm
fe
Dim ‘A’ 60Hz Model 959 mm

Mass 25 kg
Re
Figure 2 LDS Cooling Unit Silencer Dimensions

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.7.4. Technical Data of the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Plinth Cover Kit
ly
On
The LDS Plinth Cover Kit provides protection from vermin by closing off access into the LDS XPA-K
Amplifier from the bottom.
e
It consists of 2 Filter Trays, which provide a cover, but still permit cooling air to flow into the amplifier,
plus 2 Covers which are secured in the cable entry area of the amplifier.
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.7.5. Technical Data for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
4.7.6. Technical Data for LDS Quiet Mode

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with LDS Quiet Mode
4.7.6.1 Recommended Settings, In Addition to Standard Settings

Feature Value
Default Quantity of Power Modules
2 Power Modules
Enabled
Default Field Value 75%
4.7.6.2 Example Test Profile and Running Conditions

Note: The values given here are an example only. The actual values will be dependent on the test being
carried out and the mass of the payload.
Feature Condition
Test Profile 50-200Hz 0.98grms Random with 120kg Payload
Typical Noise level 1 70dBA measured 250mm above payload surface
Test duration Up to 60 minutes
4.7.6.3 Maximum Quantity of Power Modules Recommended for Use:

The full set of power modules can be used but each module when enabled exhibits a certain amount
of electrical noise which results in an increase in the overall system noise – e.g. increasing from 2 to 8
modules results in approximately +3dBA on the above figure. Also run times will be reduced if the
armature drive current is increased.
4.7.6.4 Maximum Field Value Recommended for Use:

100% Field can be used but will result in much shorter run times – i.e. less than 30 minutes
CAUTION:
• Brüel & Kjær VTS recommend that the LDS Cooling Unit (fan) is used after the test to
cool the equipment.
1 Noise levels given, are with the Hydraulic Units and Amplifier situated outside of the test chamber.

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

This VTS system may include materials found in the Safety Data Sheets below.
Note: Copies of the SDS’s, current at the time of issue of this manual are included in section 10. For
more up to date copies of the SDS’s refer to the OEM websites, (links provided below).
A. Oils and Lubricants and Other Liquids

Company & Product
Website Material Type Where Used
Name
http://www.shell.com/business- Vibrator
Shell TELLUS Oil S2 M 68 customers/lubricants-for-business/shell- Hydraulic Oil
ly
tellus-hydraulic-fluids.html Slip Table
Mobil DELV AC 1 SHC http://www.msds.exxonmobil.com/inta Slip Table

Diesel Engine Oil
5W-40 pps/psims/psims.aspx Alternative
On
3-IN-ONE Multi-purpose
http://www.3-in-one.co.uk/data-sheets/ Lubricant
Oil
B. Adhesives
Company & Product
Website Material Type Where Used
Name
Threadlocking
e
http://www.loctite.co.uk/data-sheets-
Adhesive -
medium
Henkel Loctite 243 Multiple
7355.htm strength.
nc
General
purpose.
Retaining
http://www.loctite.co.uk/data-sheets-
Henkel Loctite 603 Compound - Multiple
7355.htm
re
high strength.
fe
Re

4. Technical Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

Table of Contents
5.1. Introduction
5.2. LDS System Functional Diagram
5.3. Description of the LDS Vibration Testing Equipment
5.4. Description of the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
5.5. Description of the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
ly
5.6. Description of the LDS Amplifier
5.7. Description of the LDS Head Expander
On
5.8. Description of the LDS Supplementary Features
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.1. Introduction
This section gives an overview of the equipment supplied and a top level Equipment List and consists
of: -
5.1.1. Standard Vibrator Features
5.1.2. Vibrator Options
5.1.3. Equipment List
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Figure 1 A Typical LDS V8900 Vibration Testing System

The LDS range of vibrators are of the wide frequency band transducer type and have been designed to
provide controlled vibration and mechanical shock testing using sinusoidal, random or transient
excitation for quality and reliability testing of components and assemblies.
Systems are available in various forms to meet customers exact requirements.
The vibrator has been designed for use with the LDS XPAK Series amplifiers.
The vibrator is trunnion-mounted, either free-standing or as part of a vibrator/slip table combo.
Trunnion mounting allows the vibrator to be used in either the horizontal or vertical axis; when rotated
horizontally the vibrator can be used to test small payloads in the horizontal plane or to drive a slip

table when part of a combo. The trunnions are supported by a Lin-E-Air suspension system which
enables low frequency operation at full displacement.
Up to 101.6 mm (4”) stroke of the armature is available, depending on the type of Vibrator.
The maximum force obtainable from the vibrator depends on the amplifier size chosen to drive the
vibrator.
5.1.1. Standard Vibrator Features

Standard vibrator features include:
ly
On
• The LDS Vibration Testing Equipment
(Vibrator) detailed in section 5.3
• The LDS Lin-E Air System detailed in
section 5.3.
e
nc
Figure 2 LDS Vibrator
re
fe
• Raised (hexagonal) payload securing

inserts
Re
Figure 3 Typical View of Raised Payload Securing

Inserts

• Free-standing LDS Pedestal Control Unit

detailed in section 5.4.
• Adjustable Internal Load Support
(controlled from Pedestal Control Unit)
• Centre positioning and overtravel system.
ly
On
• Free-standing LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
detailed in section 5.5
Figure 5 A Typical LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit

e
nc
re
fe
• The XPAK Amplifier detailed in section 5.6

Re
Figure 6 The LDS XPAK Amplifier

• Emergency stop pushbuttons mounted on

either side the Vibration Testing
Equipment, the Pedestal Control Unit and
the Amplifier as a minimum.
ly
Figure 7 Emergency Stop Pushbuttons
On
• System Levelling with Jacking Screws and
Bolt to Floor with Fixings
Figure 8 System Levelling and Securing
5.1.2. Vibrator Options

e
nc
The following options are available:
• Optional LDS Airglide Transportation

re
System detailed in section 5.8.1.
Figure 9 LDS Airglide Transportation System

fe
Re
• Optional LDS Degauss Kit detailed in

section 5.8.2
Figure 10 A Typical LDS Degauss kit

• Optional LDS Head Expander detailed in

section 5.7.
Figure 11 A Typical LDS Head Expander
ly
5.1.3. Equipment List
This Vibration Testing System is supplied with the following equipment: -
On
BOM Reference: 9000XXX
Ref Part No Description

1. 4067490 VIBRATOR, V8900 M10 INSERTS
2. 2032110 LDS PUMP UNIT, OIL, V8900 SHAKER, 380-415V,3~50Hz & 440-480V,3~60Hz
3. 4066730 LDS HOSE KIT, HYDRAULIC, VIBRATOR, 10M
4. 4061050
e
LDS PEDESTAL BOX ASSY, V8900, WITH STAND
nc
5. 4067620-33 LDS CABLE, DEGAUSS, 33M
6. 4067500 AMPLIFIER, XPA88K V8900, 400V 3~50Hz
7. 4068360 LDS RFI FILTER KIT AC, XPA88/128K
8. 4068760 LDS FUSE KIT, V8900
re
4067000-X03 LDS FAN KIT, V8900,380-415V,3~50Hz, INCLUDES; START-UP KIT, HOSE &
9.
CLAMPS 254mm (10") BORE x 3.7m Lg
10. 4066190-30 LDS CABLE SET, V8900, XPAK, 30M NOMINAL
fe
11. 3005XXX 9000XXX SYSTEM MANUAL

12. 4068680 LDS UNGUIDED HEAD EXPANDER, UHX1220x1220-440-M14-100G-E
13. 4068740 LDS XPAK, REMOTE E-STOP, 12M
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.2. Functional Diagram
ly
On
Figure 1 Functional Diagram
Equipment
Ref Description Power Requirements
A Amplifier 3 phase AC supply
B
e
Vibration Controller 1 phase AC supply
C Data Acquisition Unit 1 phase AC supply
nc
1 phase AC supply,
D Pedestal Control Unit
6.9 bar compressed air supply
E Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply 3 phase AC supply
re
F Accelerometers
G V8900 Vibrator or V8900-HBT Combo (not shown)
H LDS Cooling Fan Starter Box 3 phase AC supply
fe
I LDS Cooling Fan

Slip Table Hydraulic Power Supply (for Combo only.
J 3 phase AC supply
Not shown)
Re
Connections
1. Vibration Control Signal from vibration controller to amplifier
2. Feedback Signal from accelerometer(s) on armature / slip table / payload
3. Oil Supply (and return) for V8900 hydrostatic bearing
4. Cooling Fan on/off control from Pedestal Control Unit CANbus
5. CANbus between Amplifier and Pedestal Control Unit
6. Armature Drive power, Field Coil power and Degauss Coil power from Amplifier
7. Interlocks, ICS, Load Support Control
8. Air supply for Lin-E-Air and Load Support

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.3. Description of the LDS Vibration Testing Equipment

This vibration testing system is supplied with an LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
re
5.3.1. Overview of the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Securing the Vibrator to the Floor
Trunnion Mounted Vibrator LDS Pedestal Control Unit
Standard Features and Options Overtravel Protection
fe
Power and Signal Inputs LDS Lin-E-Air Suspension

5.3.2. Description of the LDS V8900 Vibrator The Tilt Switch
Overview of the LDS V8900 Cooling and Noise Reduction
Vibrator
Re
Emergency Stop
The Armature Assembly
The LDS Vibration Testing System
Armature Payload Securing Cable Set
Armature Guidance Electrical Connections
LDS Vibrator Hydraulic Power 5.3.3. Vibrator Pneumatic and Hydraulic
Supply (HPS) Connections
Trunnion Mounted Vibrators

5.3.1. Overview of the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted

Vibrator
Standard Features and Options
The LDS V8900 Vibrator is a wide frequency band transducer, designed to provide a controlled
vibration environment for quality and reliability testing of components and assemblies. The vibrator
has been designed for use with the LDS XPA-K Series amplifier.
The LDS V8900 Vibrator is available either as a free-standing trunnion mounted unit, (as shown in
Figure 1 above) or as part of a vibrator/slip table combo. Trunnion mounting allows the vibrator to be
used in either the horizontal or vertical axis; when rotated horizontally the vibrator can be used to
drive a slip table (not supplied). The trunnions are supported by a Lin-E-Air suspension system which
ly
isolates the body from the trunnion supports (and thus from the floor).
A single 440 mm diameter armature is available, suitable for ‘high g’ tests and general use. The
maximum force obtainable from the vibrator depends on the amplifier size chosen to drive the
On
vibrator.
Adjustable body position stops are fitted for accurate repeatability when turning from vertical to
horizontal operation.
The armature table is supplied with 17 payload securing inserts in a standard pattern, or with 29
payload securing inserts by request.
The armature coil and field coils are cooled by air being drawn through the equipment, from top to
e
bottom, by a separate extraction fan.
The vibrator is protected, by means of interlocks, against armature overtravel, bearing oil pressure
nc
failure, cooling airflow failure, etc. An electronic armature position servo control system and overtravel
control are fitted as standard, supplemented by a manually operated Internal Load Support System.
Armature Table with Top cover with

Raised Inserts Air Inlet Louvres
re
Chamber Support
Option
Lifting Eyebolts
fe
Lin-E-Air Trunnion
Emergency Stop Suspension
Terminal Cover
Re
with Cable Entry

Trunnion Securing
Screws
Rotation Air Outlet Plenum

Handwheel
Bolt to Floor
Points with Airglide Option
Jacking Screws

Standard vibrator features include:
Feature Further Details in Section

Armature Table with Raised (hexagonal) payload
5.3.2.3
securing inserts
Lin-E-Air Suspension 5.3.2.10 and 5.9.1
Adjustable internal load support 5.3.2.8.2
Centre positioning and overtravel system 5.3.2.8.3
Free-standing Hydraulic Power Supply 5.3.2.5
Free-standing Pedestal Control Unit 5.3.2.8 and 5.4
ly
Free-standing Cooling Unit (Fan) 5.3.2.12 and 5.5
Emergency stop 5.3.2.13
On
Floor Fixing and Levelling 5.3.2.7
Trunnion Supports ready to accept a Guided Head
Expander option
The following options are available:
Option Further Details in Section

LDS Head Expander 5.7
e
All other options are detailed in the LDS
5.8
Supplementary Features section
nc
Power and Signal Inputs
The LDS V8900 Vibrator has the following electrical inputs / outputs: -
re
• Armature Drive Signal, direct from the Amplifier

• DC Field Coil Supply, direct from the Amplifier
• Interlock (fault) signals generated by the vibrator, sent to the Amplifier via the Pedestal
Control Unit CANbus.
fe
• Emergency Stop Circuit, direct to/from the Amplifier

• LDS Cooling Unit (Fan) powered from customer provided 3 phase AC outlet.
Re
• Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply powered from customer provided 3 phase AC outlet.
• LDS Pedestal Control Unit powered from customer provided single phase AC outlet.
Note: To operate the system as a whole, a signal source/controller is required to drive the amplifier.
5.3.2. Description of the LDS V8900 Vibrator

Overview of the LDS V8900 Vibrator
The LDS V8900 Vibrator comprises two main assemblies: the body and the armature. The body
contains field coils, which when supplied with DC current, produce the static magnetic field required
for vibrator operation. The armature assembly is suspended within the body at a mid-position by the
Internal Load Support System (see section 5.3.2.8.2) and controlled by the Inductive Centring System

(see section 5.3.2.8.3); when an AC current is supplied to the armature coil, controlled movement of
the armature assembly about the mid-position is achieved. The payload to be tested is secured to a
table forming the top of the armature assembly.
The vibrator body consists of a segmented top plate, body ring, centre pole, bottom plate and two
pairs of field coils; these assemblies form the magnetic structure of the vibrator.
The magnetic circuits created within the vibrator body are designed to provide high flux densities in
the air gap whilst having a low leakage flux density at the armature table.
A Degauss Coil, mounted on the top plate, is positioned around the armature table. Adjustment of
stray field for optimum setting is by means of a variable resistor located in the amplifier, which is
factory set.
ly
Flexure assemblies attached to the armature frame and the vibrator body provide the armature power
and the electrical grounding of the armature to the body.
The Armature Assembly
On
The armature consists of a cylindrical coil, manufactured from rectangular section aluminium wire,
bonded to a cast magnesium radial finned structure. The assembly is suspended within the vibrator
body so that the coil occupies part of the air gap.
The armature table insert plate forms the top of the armature assembly. The table is fitted with
stainless steel inserts which accept the payload attachment screws. The armature insert pattern, 17 or
29 inserts (29 on request only), are shown on the outline drawing included in section 10 of this manual.
e
Armature Payload Securing
Payloads for testing are secured to the
nc
Raised Payload Securing Inserts mounted on
the Armature Table.
The Inserts are available with the following
Threads: -
re
• 3/8” UNC
• M8
• M10
fe
As many inserts as possible must be used to

secure the payload, in order to transmit the
force required for the test being run.
Any inserts not used to secure the payload
Re
must be removed from the Armature Table,

to prevent any vibration ‘chatter’. Raised Inserts Armature Table
Figure 3 Armature Table showing Raised Inserts
Armature Guidance
The armature is axially guided within the vibrator body by a central hydrostatic bearing. Rotational
restraint is provided by self-lubricating plain bearing assemblies located peripherally.

The armature travel is monitored by the LDS ICS (Inductive Centring System), which in the event of
overtravel, provides a signal for immediate shutdown of the equipment. Physical bump stops are
provided top and bottom, to prevent armature damage.
LDS Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply (HPS)
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 4 A Typical Hydraulic Power Supply
The Vibrator Hydrostatic Bearing is lubricated by oil at a pressure of 172 bar (2500 lbf/in²) from a free-
standing electrically driven Hydraulic Power Supply (HPS). The unit connects to the Vibrator via flexible
re
hoses.
The HPS comprises: -

fe
Oil tank 5.3.2.5.1

Pressure regulator and gauge 5.3.2.5.2
Pump 5.3.2.5.3
Re
Filter and blockage indicator 5.3.2.5.4
5.3.2.5.1 Oil Tank

The oil tank contains the supply of hydraulic oil required by the system The capacity and oil type is
detailed in section 4 Technical Data. The tank is fitted with a sight gauge.
5.3.2.5.2 Pressure Regulator and Gauge

The gauge indicates the pressure on the discharge side of the pump. The regulator allows the supply
pressure to be adjusted.
5.3.2.5.3 Pump
The rotary pump is driven by a totally enclosed induction motor. The motor is driven, through the unit
mounted isolator, from a customer provided 3 phase AC mains outlet.

5.3.2.5.4 Filter And Blockage Indicator

The hydraulic supply line is fitted with a filter and blockage indicator. The filter must be renewed at
regular intervals. If the filter becomes blocked, a bypass circuit is activated to allow unfiltered oil to
flow to the vibrator. Blockage of the filter is indicated by the indicator window (located on top of the
hydraulic unit) changing from green to red when a blockage is sensed. It should be noted that a
blockage is only indicated when the hydraulic unit is switched on.
Trunnion Mounted Vibrators

Trunnion mounting allows the vibrator to be operated in the horizontal or vertical thrust axes. To assist
rotation of the vibrator between the vertical and horizontal axes a hand operated gearbox is fitted,
coupled to a gearwheel and drive pinion.
ly
Securing the Vibrator to the Floor
The LDS V8900 Vibrator is secured to the floor
by Anchoring and Levelling Points mounted at
On
each corner of the Vibrator Base. (The Combo
is mounted on Air Isolators).
Each point consists of a Jacking Unit and 2
hold down screws.
This permits the entire Vibrator to be levelled
in both the X and Y planes.
e
Figure 5 An Anchoring and Levelling Point
nc
LDS Pedestal Control Unit
Load Support Pressure Gauge Load Support Control
re
ICS Display
Air Isolation Control
Emergency Stop
fe
Re
Figure 6 Top View of the Pedestal Control Unit, Showing Controls

The vibrator is supplied with a free-standing Pedestal Control Unit, which provides the following
functions:


Air Isolation Control for the Lin-E-Air Suspension
5.3.2.8.1
System
Internal Load Support Control 5.3.2.8.2
Internal Load Support Pressure Display 5.3.2.8.2
Armature Position (ICS) Display 5.3.2.8.3
Emergency stop 5.3.2.13
Canbus Communication Module between the
5.4
Vibrator and the XPA-K Amplifier
ly
Further details of the LDS Pedestal Control Unit are given in section 5.4.
On
5.3.2.8.1 Air Isolation Control for the Lin-E-Air Suspension System
e
nc
re

fe
The Air Isolation Control regulator provides a compressed air supply to the airbags of the Lin-E-Air
Suspension System (see section 5.3.2.10 for details).
When the vibrator is used in the vertical axis, the Lin-E-Air control is adjusted to centralise the vibrator
body within the trunnion supports.
Re
When using the vibrator horizontally, the airbags require sufficient pressure to oppose the force
exerted by the Lin-E-Air return springs.

5.3.2.8.2 Internal Load Support System
ly
Load Support Load Support Control
On
Pressure Gauge

To achieve maximum displacement of a load under test, the armature must vibrate about a known
central point: the mid-position. When a payload is fitted in the vertical axis, the armature is forced
down from the mid-position, thus restricting the displacement available.
e
To allow the armature to be returned to the mid-position after a payload has been secured, an internal
load support (ILS) system is fitted, provided by sealing and pressurising a chamber below the armature
insert plate. Regulating the air supply to the chamber, causes the armature assembly to be raised or
nc
lowered.
It may be necessary to lightly pressurise the ILS even when the vibrator is operated horizontally, so as
to assist in centralising the armature.
5.3.2.8.3 Inductive Centring System (ICS)

re
ICS Display
fe
Re

Sensing and dynamic adjustment of the armature position is achieved by means of an Inductive
Centring System (ICS).
The ICS consists of three elements:


ICS Target PCB 5.3.2.8.3.1
ICS Sensor PCB 5.3.2.8.3.2
ICS Control PCB 5.3.2.8.3.3
5.3.2.8.3.1 ICS Target PCB

The ICS Target PCB is a resonant circuit mounted on the armature.
5.3.2.8.3.2 ICS Sensor PCB

The ICS Sensor PCB consists of “coarse” and “fine” sense coils and is mounted on the vibrator top plate.
ly
The length of the sense PCB may vary according to the rated operating stroke of the shaker.
5.3.2.8.3.3 ICS Control PCB
On
The ICS Control PCB is mounted in the Sensor Head mounted immediately above the Sensor PCB. The
Sensor Head contains the electronics to convert the analogue signals from the Sensor PCB to a digital
position which is then fed back to the XPA-K amplifier.
Overtravel Protection
If the armature exceeds the rated stroke, the ICS control system will initiate an amplifier interlock and
perform an amplifier shut-down.
e
The amplifier will not switch on if the overtravel interlock is activated.
Further overtravel protection is included on slip table systems.
nc
re
fe
Re

LDS Lin-E-Air Suspension

The LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator can be operated in either a vertical or horizontal
thrust axis.
ly
On
e
nc
LH Lin-E-Air RH Lin-E-Air
Suspension Unit Suspension Unit
re
LH Trunnion RH Trunnion
Support Vibrator Body Support
Figure 10 View showing Lin-E-Air Trunnion Suspension Units

fe
The vibrator body is isolated from the trunnion supports (and thus from the floor) by a Lin-E-Air
suspension system, whereby the trunnions are suspended on airbags and guided by shafts.
Control of this suspension system is provided on the LDS Pedestal Control Unit. (See section 5.3.2.8
Re
and section 5.4 for more details)

Guide Shafts Return Spring

Trunnion
Gearwheel
Rotation
Handwheel Vibrator Body
Support Shaft
Vertical
Rotation Stop
(behind
ly
Trunnion)
Suspension
Suspension
Airbag
Airbag
On
Gearbox
Pinion
Airbag Compressed
Air Supply Horizontal
Rotation Stop
Figure 11 Left-hand Side Trunnion Support, showing the Lin-E-Air Suspension System in Mid Position
e
Note: In Figure 11, the Guide Shafts extend from the frame by an equal amount, top and bottom, denoting
the mid position.
nc
Guide Shafts Return Spring
Vibrator Body
re
Support Shaft
fe
Re
Suspension
Suspension Airbag
Airbag
Airbag Compressed
Air Supply
Figure 12 Right-hand Side Trunnion Support, showing the Lin-E-Air Suspension System in Mid Position
The LDS V8900 Vibrator can be operated in either a vertical or horizontal thrust axis.
The vibrator body is isolated from the trunnion supports (and thus from the floor) by a Lin-E-Air
suspension system.

An adapter on each side of the body is supported by airbags and guided by shafts sliding in the trunnion
(see Figure 11 and Figure 12 – the V8900 vibrator has two guide shafts each side).

Pressure Gauge
The airbags are supplied with compressed

air regulated by the Air Isolation Regulator
on the Pedestal Control Unit.
ly
On
Regulator

When the vibrator is used in the vertical axis, the Air Isolation control is adjusted to centralise the
vibrator body between the trunnion supports.
When using the vibrator horizontally, the airbags require sufficient pressure to oppose the force
exerted by the return springs.
e
nc
re
fe
Lockout Lockout
Screw Screw
Re
Fitted Fitted
Figure 14 Left-hand Side Trunnion Support, Figure 15 Right-hand Side Trunnion Support,
showing the Lin-E-Air Suspension System in its showing the Lin-E-Air Suspension System in its
Lowest Position Lowest Position
Note: Lockout Screw Fitted for Rotation Purposes Note: Lockout Screw Fitted for Rotation Purposes
To enable safe rotation of the vibrator between the vertical and horizontal axes, the Suspension
Airbags are deflated and the Lockout Screws are fitted. The left-hand side trunnion support
incorporates a handwheel-operated gearbox, coupled to the Gearbox Pinion, which drives the
Trunnion Gearwheel. The procedure for rotating the vibrator and operating the Lin-E-Air Suspension
system is given in Section 3.

The Tilt Switch

A tilt switch is fitted to trunnion-mounted vibrators to provide closed contacts when the vibrator is
positioned vertically, and open contacts when it is positioned horizontally. The switch forms part of
the XPA-K amplifier interlock circuit.
Cooling and Noise Reduction

The magnetic fields required by the vibrator are produced by passing high currents through the
armature and field coils; when current flows through the coils, heat is generated. To prevent damage
to the vibrator, an air cooling system is employed to dissipate the unwanted heat.
ly
On
A free-standing air extraction fan is used to
draw air through the vibrator, driven from a
dedicated 3-phase AC supply, through a wall
mounted fan starter kit, independent of the
XPA-K amplifier. The fan is normally located
remotely to minimise heat and noise in the
vicinity of the vibrator.
e
nc
Figure 16 A Typical LDS Vibrator Cooling Fan
Ducts in Top Cover
re
The vibrator is cooled by air drawn through

ducts in the top cover into the space above the
top plate. Some air then flows over the
armature coil, some passes through the slots
fe
between the top plate segments and thence

over the field coils. The warmed air flows
through holes in the Bottom Plate and collects in
the output air plenum which is connected to the
Re
cooling fan by a flexible hose.

The cooling system is interlocked with the
amplifier so that the amplifier will shut down if
airflow through the vibrator is lost. The airflow is
sensed by an air switch, actuated by a spring
loaded diaphragm, located in the LDS Pedestal
Control Unit. The air switch contacts are closed
when correct airflow is maintained, and open
circuit if the airflow falls below that required. Air Plenum Air Hose
Figure 17 LDS Vibrator shown in Horizontal

Position

WARNING:
• On no account must the human body be subjected to compressed or forced air.
• Do not attempt to block exhaust openings of the fan, vibrator or amplifier as
ejected debris may cause serious injury; eyes being particularly vulnerable.
Emergency Stop
The LDS V8900 Vibrator is supplied with emergency stop buttons, located as follows:
• One on the LDS Pedestal Control Unit, which can be positioned on either side of the vibrator
ly
• One on the left-hand trunnion support of the Vibrator
• One on the right-hand trunnion support of the Vibrator
Note: An additional emergency stop is mounted the control panel of the XPA-K Amplifier (when supplied).
On
Further emergency stops (which must comply with BS EN ISO 13850:2015) may be connected into the
emergency stop circuit, as required.
Note: If the LDS Pedestal Control Unit is located on a non-standard installation layout, at least one emergency
stop button should be located on the opposite side of the vibrator from the unit location.
The LDS Vibration Testing System Cable Set

e
This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Vibrator Cable Set
The LDS V8900 Vibrator Cable Set connects the Vibrator to the Amplifier, Pedestal Control Unit and
nc
Cooling Unit (Fan).
The cables used in the Cable Set have been specified for the intended service (see below) to which
they are connected.
WARNING:
re
• Should any cable be damaged in any way, call Brüel & Kjær Service for
advice.
• Do not substitute any of the cables for locally sourced items. Serious
damage and / or injury may occur.
fe
The LDS V8900 Vibrator Cable Set is available in the following nominal lengths: -
• 10 metres,
Re
• 12 metres,
• 14 metres,
• 15 metres,
• 16 metres
• 20 metres.
Note: These dimensions are the nominal distances between the amplifier and shaker/pedestal box. Nominal
distance allowed for between shaker and pedestal box is 3m. Nominal distance between
cooling unit and pedestal box 10m. Some cables will be longer (+2 or 3m) to allow for rotation
of the shaker and also dependant on the location of the connection point.
Any other cable length will need to be requested at time of order and may incur additional charges.
The LDS V8900 Vibrator Cable Set consists of the following: -

a. Cable, Armature Drive

b. Cable, D.C. Field
c. Cable, Earthing
d. LDS Cable, CAN & RS-485
e. LDS Cable Assembly, Emergency Stop
f. LDS Cable Assembly, Earth, (Pedestal Control Unit-Amplifier)
g. LDS Cable, Terminal TB1-SK1,8 WAY (Vibrator Termination Panel- Pedestal Control Unit)
h. LDS Cable, ICS RS-485 (Vibrator Termination Panel- Pedestal Control Unit)
i. Cable, Fan- Pedestal Control Unit SK2
ly
j. LDS Cable Assembly, Emergency Stop, Terminal Box-Station
k. LDS Cable, Oil Pressure, Vibrator Bearing- Pedestal Control Unit SK5
On
l. LDS Cable, Degauss
Electrical Connections
Electrical connections to the vibrator are made to the terminal panel mounted under a cover on the
vibrator body. These connections are shown in the associated schematic in section 10 of this manual.
e
Connections to the LDS Pedestal Control Unit are shown in section 5.4 and also in the associated
schematic in section 10 of this manual.
nc
The protective earth (labelled PE) is attached to the vibrator body, adjacent to the terminal panel.
Power for each of the elements of the Vibration Testing System are: -
Item Power Source

LDS Vibrator LDS XPA-K Amplifier
re
LDS Cooling Unit (Fan) Starter Kit Independent 3 phase AC wall outlet
LDS Hydraulic Power Supply Independent 3 phase AC wall outlet
LDS Pedestal Control Unit Independent single phase AC wall outlet
fe
A functional diagram is shown in section 5.2.

Re

5.3.3. Vibrator Pneumatic and Hydraulic Connections
See Below
ly
On
See Below
e
nc
Figure 18 Vibrator Pneumatic and Hydraulic Connection Points
Vibrator Hydraulic
re
Flow Connection Point
The hose for the Vibrator Hydraulic Oil Flow is

connected to the Vibrator Hydraulic Pressure
Switch mounted on the right-hand side Trunnion
fe
Support.
Load Support
The hose for the Vibrator Hydraulic Oil Return and Connection Point
also for the Internal Load Support are connected to
Re
ports mounted on a bracket on the right-hand

Vibrator Hydraulic
Trunnion Support.
Return Connection Point
Figure 19 Vibrator Pneumatic and Hydraulic

Connection Points

Air Plenum Pressure

Connection Point
The hose for the Lin-E-Air Suspension System is

connected directly to the hose system at the
bottom right-hand side of the equipment.
The hose for the Air Plenum Pressure is connected
to the connection point on the side of the plenum
outlet.
ly
Lin-E-Air Connection
Point
Figure 20 Vibrator Pneumatic Connection Points
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.4. Description of the LDS Pedestal Control Unit

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 The LDS Pedestal Control Unit
re
The LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit is a free-standing unit, which provides the following functions: -
• Air isolation control for the Lin-E-Air system
• Internal load support control, pressure gauge and exhaust valve
fe
• Inductive Centring System (ICS) display

• Emergency stop
• Internal communication module between the Vibrator or Combo, the Vibrator Cooling Unit and the
Re
Amplifier

5.4.1. Standard Features and Options

Load Support Pressure Gauge Load Support Control
ICS Display
Emergency Stop
ly
On
Figure 2 Top View of the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit, Showing Controls
Figure 2 above shows the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit viewed from the top and features: -
Feature
e Further Details in Section
nc
Air Isolation Control for the Lin-E-Air Suspension
5.9.1
System
Internal Load Support Control 5.3
Internal Load Support Pressure Display 5.3
re
Centre Positioning System (ICS) Display 5.3

Emergency stop 5.3
fe
Re

ly
On
Electrical and Control Signal Pneumatic and Protective
Connections Earth Connections
Figure 3 Bottom View of the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit, Showing Connections
e
Figure 3 above shows the connections to be made for the vibrator, cooling fan, amplifier and air supply.
The Pedestal Control Unit can be positioned either side of the vibrator to suit the installation layout.
nc
The Pedestal Control Unit is powered from a single phase AC supply (provided by the customer) and is
connected to socket SK PSU on the bottom panel of the unit.
Access to the internals of the Pedestal Control Unit is by keyed access.
re
fe
Re

Air Isolation
E-Stop Regulator
Contactor
ICS Display Unit

Electronic Load
Support Regulator
Location of
Fuse FS1
Cabinet Power
ly
Supply Unit
Air Flow Control
Switch
On
Sensor
Connection Block Protective Earth
Connection,
behind panel
CanBus Modules
Lin-E-Air Isolation
e Compressed Air
Inlet Manifold
Connection
nc
Figure 4 Internal View of the Pedestal Control Unit
(wiring omitted for clarity)
All connections, apart from the protective earth, are made to the Pedestal Control Unit on the bottom
panel, using specific electrical connectors and push-fit pneumatic fittings. The protective earth cable is fed
re
through the grommet on the bottom panel of the unit and connected directly to cabinet during installation.
fe
Re

5.5. Description of the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit

This LDS V8900 Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Vibrator Cooling Fan.
ly
On
Figure 1 A Typical Vibrator Cooling Fan
e
5.5.1. LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
nc
5.5.2. LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit
5.5.3. LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Noise Attenuation
5.5.1. LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit

re
During operation, the vibrator generates heat, which must be dissipated to prevent damage to the
Vibrator.
To achieve this, a free-standing air extraction fan is used to draw air through the vibrator. It is normally
fe
located within 3.6m of the vibrator.

The vibrator is cooled by air drawn through ducts in the top cover into the space above the top plate
and then flows over the armature and field coils. The warmed air flows through holes in the Vibrator
Bottom Plate and collects in the output air plenum which is connected to the cooling fan by a flexible
Re
hose.
The action of extracting air from the Vibrator, creates a negative pressure within the Vibrator, which
is monitored. Should the negative pressure not be maintained, from e.g. blocked hose or fan failure,
the monitor will trigger an interlock, thereby shutting down the Amplifier and the Vibrator.
CAUTION:
• Ensure that there is sufficient space around the Fan Drive Motor for cooling air
and that the outlet from the fan is not blocked or disrupted in any way. The
minimum distance between the fan motor and a wall is 0.25 D where D is motor
fan cowl air inlet diameter (for the V8900 Fan ≈ 100mm).

• Ensure fan is not located in an area that can impose high levels of vibration and
ambient temperatures. Ambient temperatures should not exceed 40°C unless
designed for such conditions.
5.5.2. LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit
ly
On
e
Figure 2 Front View of Starter Kit Figure 3 Starter Kit Internals
In order to provide control and motor protection for the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit, a Starter Kit is
nc
provided.
3 phase AC power is supplied to the wall mounted Starter Kit from a wall outlet. Internal control units
switch the fan on and off with signals from the CANbus communication module in the LDS Pedestal
Control Unit.
re
5.5.3. LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Noise Attenuation

Generally, all fans and blowers produce a level of noise. The LDS Vibrator Cooling Fan is no exception.
To reduce the noise levels being output from the fan, an optional Silencer is available from Brüel &
fe
Kjær VTS. For further details, see section 5.8.3.

To attenuate the noise levels even further, an acoustic chamber could be used. Brüel & Kjær VTS
recommend that a suitable unit is purchased locally. Contact Brüel & Kjær VTS for further details.
Re

5.6. Description of the LDS Amplifier

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

This section consists of:- XPAK Amplifier Fuse and MCB
Locations
5.6.1. The LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
Connections and Fuses in the Input
5.6.2. Description of the Touchscreen Panel
Bay
5.6.3. Description of the Common Elements
Connections and Fuses in the
of the Touch Screen Display
Output Bay
5.6.4. Brief Description of the Main Menu
Connections for the Degauss Coil
Page
Potentiometer
5.6.5. Connections to the XPAK Amplifier and
Connections to the Control Unit
Fuse Locations

The LDS XPA-K Amplifier is modular in design, with up to 11 or 16 1 LDS 8 kVA ‘class D’ amplifier modules
providing the output power for the amplifier.
Multiple Switch Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) provide the Field Coil DC supply requirements and
Degauss Coil supply, when fitted.
The main elements are cooled by integral fans, supplemented by rear mounted extraction fans drawing
cooling air through the cabinet from the front.
The amplifier is controlled locally from the integral control panel.
The amplifier input signal is conditioned and then amplified by the power modules to provide the
necessary power to drive the vibrator armature. The amplifier gain is manually controlled by the
ly
master gain control located on the Amplifier Control Panel.
5.6.1. The LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel
On
The LDS XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel provides the controls and indicators required for local operation
of the amplifier.
The controls shown in Figure 2 below produce the following effects:

USB Port
Pushbutton e Pushbutton
nc
re

Pushbutton

fe
Control Description
A USB Key is inserted into this port when system settings need to be modified.
USB Port
System Settings can only be modified by Service Engineers.
Re
Pressing the emergency stop pushbutton initiates an emergency shutdown. The

Emergency Stop
control panel will display an Emergency Stop page and the amplifier will shut down in
Pushbutton
a controlled manner.
The Touchscreen Panel provides all of the features required to set up and display the
Touchscreen Panel
system data. See section 5.6.2. below
Master Gain Control Adjusts the level of gain between the amplifier input and the amplifier output.
This button is used to Switch-UP the Amplifier from an idle state to an operating
Switch-UP state.
Pushbutton Note: This pushbutton does not apply power or switch on the amplifier. It is only to
change the operating state.
1 Capacity for amplifier modules depends on the model of amplifier purchased.

Control Description
This button is used to Switch-DOWN the Amplifier from an operating state to an idle
Switch-DOWN state
Pushbutton Note: This pushbutton does not switch off the power or switch off the amplifier. It is
only to change the operating state.
5.6.2. Description of the Touchscreen Panel

The Touchscreen Panel provides access to the Amplifier for setting up for test and for viewing the
operating parameters.
Navigating around the Touchscreen Display is performed by simply tapping the relevant icon or field
ly
on the screen.
5.6.3. Description of the Common Elements of the Touch Screen
On
Display
1 2 3 4 5 6
e
nc
7
re
fe
Re
Figure 3 Main Menu

This icon is available on all Pages and when tapped, will display this Main
1. Home Page Icon
Menu page.
Tapping this icon will display the Service Info page from the History
Service Indicator
2. Menu. The colour of the icon will change to amber and then to red, as
Icon
the service interval approaches.
Tapping this icon will display the Main Output page from the Status
3. Main Output Icon Menu. It will show in a graphical form, the up-to-date levels of current,
voltage and gain for the armature.


Tapping this icon will display the Field Metering page from the Status
4. Field Metering Icon Menu. It will show in a graphical form, the up-to-date levels of current,
voltage and gain for the field.
Tapping this icon will display the Selection page from the Modes Menu.
5. Switch Modes Icon
It will show in graphical form, the quantity of Modules enabled.
6. Cooling Icon Tapping this icon will display the Cooling page from the Modes Menu.
7. Main Display In this area will be displayed the various elements of the system pages.
5.6.4. Brief Description of the Main Menu Page
ly
This page is the first page that will be displayed after powering up the system and also after selecting
the Home Page icon on any other page.
On
For a more comprehensive description of the Touchscreen Pages, see section 3.4. Operating the
System Amplifier.
2
e
nc
3
4
re
5
fe
6 7
Re
Figure 4 Main Menu

Common Page
1. For details of the Common Page Elements, see section 5.6.2. above
Elements
2. Status Menu From this menu various elements of System Status can be obtained.
2.a. Main Output Tapping this field will display the Main Output page of the Status menu.
2.b. Field Metering Tapping this field will display the Field Metering page of the Status menu.
2.c. Active Interlocks Tapping this field will display the Active Interlocks page of the Status menu.
2.d. Runtime Info Tapping this field will display the Runtime Info page of the Status menu.
3. Setup Menu From this menu various elements of the System Setup can be amended.


Tapping this field will display page 1 of the System Data pages of the Setup
3.a. System Data
menu. Other System Data pages are accessed from this page.
Tapping this field will display page 1 of the Configuration pages of the Setup
3.b. Configuration
menu. Other Configuration pages are accessed from this page.
3.c. Interlocks Tapping this field will display the Interlocks page of the Setup menu.
3.d. Device Tapping this field will display the Device page of the Setup menu.
4. History Menu From this menu various historical elements of the System can be viewed.
4.a. Service Info Tapping this field will display the Service Info page of the History menu.
ly
4.b. Interlock Events Tapping this field will display the Interlock Events page of the History menu.
4.c. Power Hours Tapping this field will display the Power Hours page of the History menu.
5. Modes Menu From this menu various System Modes can be set.
On
5.a. Selection Tapping this field will display the Selection page of the Modes menu.
5.b. Cooling Tapping this field will display the Cooling page of the Modes menu.
6. Amplifier Type In this area will be displayed the Amplifier Type
Current Time /
7. In this area will be displayed the current Time and Date
Date
e
5.6.5. Connections to the XPAK Amplifier and Fuse Locations
nc
XPAK Amplifier Fuse and MCB Locations
re

fe

Re

ECB1 AC Input Panel
32Vdc, 10A
Step/Start Resistor
Tray
Step/Start Resistor
Tray
Voltage Feedback
Armature Cable
Cable
Table 1 XPAK Amplifier Fuse and MCB Locations

Connections and Fuses in the Input Bay
Fuse ECB1
ly
Protection Screen
Support Post
On
e
nc
AC Input Line 1 (L1) and Fuse FS1 Cabinet Earth Rail and
AC Input Line 2 (L2) and Fuse FS2 Connection Point
AC Input Line 3 (L3) and Fuse FS3
Figure 5 Amplifier Input Bay (Protection Screen Removed for Clarity)

re
fe
Re

Connections and Fuses in the Output Bay

Armature
Field Coil -ve
Drive +ve
Busbar F2-
Busbar A1+
Field Coil -ve
Busbar F2- Armature
Field Coil +ve Drive -ve
Busbar F1+ Busbar A2-
Cabinet Earth
Protection
Rail
ly
Screen
RFI Earth
On
Connection
Point
e Figure 6 Amplifier Output Bay
Connections for the Degauss Coil Potentiometer

nc
re
Degauss Coil
Potentiometer Cable Tray
fe
Degauss Coil
Potentiometer
Re
Connector
Figure 7 Degauss Coil Potentiometer Connection Point

Connections to the Control Unit

EXT INT Port
PC – LAN Port
MTX Port
DRV BNC Port
AUX Port
ly
DRV – XLR Port
STATUS Port
On CAN-RS485 Port
e E-STOP Port
Figure 8 Rear View of Amplifier Control Unit
nc
re
fe
Re

5.7. Description of the LDS Head Expander

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Unguided Head Expander.
ly
On
e
Figure 1 1000 × 1000 Unguided Head Expander mounted on a Typical LDS Lin-E-Air Shaker
nc
The LDS standard range of square high-quality Unguided Head Expanders have been designed using
advanced finite element analysis modelling techniques and are cast from a high-strength magnesium
alloy with excellent damping properties.
Each head expander is supplied complete with fasteners and fitting tools for immediate testing
re
capability. Four accelerometer mounting positions are conveniently situated below the payload
mounting surface at appropriate control points.
To enable use with environmental chambers, thermal barriers are available for each size in the range.
For details of the actual Head Expander Kit supplied, see section 5.7
fe
For technical details of the Head Expander supplied, see section 4.6
For fitting details, see section 8.7
Re
5.7.1. Uses
5.7.2. Features
5.7.3. Head Expander Components
5.7.4. Accelerometer Options
5.7.5. Thermal Barrier Option
Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0507-A-SHX-UM-EN-01

5.7.1. Uses
 Increase the effective mounting surface of the shaker armature
 Accommodate larger payloads
 Increase the quantity of test items in one test to reduce testing time
 Provide increased flexibility in fixture design
5.7.2. Features
 High-quality aerospace-grade magnesium alloy structure with excellent damping properties
 Usable frequency range1 up to 2 kHz2
ly
 Standard insert pattern in M8, M10 or 3/8UNC insert sizes. (Other insert patterns can be
supplied to special order.)

On
Accurate, in-house tested dynamic performance (first mode data supplied)
 Multiple accelerometer control positions (10 – 32 UNF thread)
 Includes full mounting kit with tools
 Corrosion resistant: Non-machined parts are painted; machined parts are coated with
lubricant
 Standard off-the-shelf design for short lead time

e
Full technical support

nc
Accelerometer options
5.7.3. Head Expander Components

All head expander kits comprise:

re
Head expander with keyed payload attachment inserts in grid and armature patterns
 Armature screws, dedicated wrench key and torque wrench
 Lifting eye-bolt (attachment point top-centre)
fe
5.7.4. Accelerometer Options

A selection of CCLD accelerometers with TEDS, side connector, insulated base (without cable) are
available, such as:
Re
 Type 4533-B: 10 mV/g, handles up to 700 g

 Type 4533-B-001: 100 mV/g, handles up to 70 g
1 Defined as the range in which a sine sweep can be performed without abort.
2 Dependant on the control strategy (e.g. multipoint), payload characteristics and test profile; with optimal setup even higher frequencies may be
achievable.
0507-A-SHX-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

5.7.5. Thermal Barrier Option

The optional thermal barrier reduces thermal conductivity between the payload and the shaker during
operation in conjunction with an environmental chamber. The barrier has clearance holes
corresponding to the expander’s insert pattern.
 Thickness: 20 mm (≈3/4”)
 Conductivity: 0.25 W/(m K) [0.145 Btu/(hr ft °F)]
 Thermal limits: –70 to +230°C (-94 to +446°F)
 Attachments for environmental chamber seals
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.8. Description of the LDS Supplementary Features

This Vibration Testing System may be supplied with some or all of the following LDS Supplementary
Features.
5.8.1. Description of the LDS Airglide Transportation System
5.8.2. Description of the LDS Thermal Barrier
5.8.3. Description of the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
5.8.4. Description of the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
5.8.5. Description of the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
5.8.6. Description of the LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.8.1. Description of the LDS Airglide Transportation System

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Airglide Transportation System
Airglide Actuator
Airglide Control Unit
Airglide Air inlet
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Vibrator or Combo
Base Frame
Re
Airglide Air Castor

Note: The LDS Airglide Transportation System is shown with a typical Vibrator Base Frame for reference
purposes only and is not indicative of the actual system supplied.

WARNING:
 Whenever options allowing the vibrator to be moved, raised or lowered are fitted
WARNING:
 No attempt should be made to put hands, feet or any other part of the body
ly
The LDS Airglide Transportation System consists of Air Castors, System Controls (depending on model
supplied, may be within a Control Unit), an Actuator (Dead Mans Handle) and associated pipework.
Compressed air is supplied to the Control Unit via a hose. Depressing the Actuator supplies air to the
On
Air Castors and provides a cushion of air between the castor and the floor.
Releasing the Actuator turns off the Airglide system, thereby stopping the vibrator / combo running
away down an incline.
WARNING:
 Because of the very low coefficient of friction exhibited by the castors, it is possible
for the vibrator to ’float’ unassisted down a slight gradient and cause personal injury
e
or equipment damage. If such a gradient exists, suitable restraining methods must
be employed when the transportation system is to be used.
nc
The LDS Airglide Transportation System option can be fitted to base or trunnion-mounted versions of
Brüel & Kjær vibrators or combos. This option consists of a minimum of four Air Castors, each fitted
beneath an air isolation mount on base mounted versions, and fitted directly to the horizontal
members on trunnion mounted versions. The air castors allow the vibrator or combo to be floated on
a cushion of compressed air; the vibrator can then be moved using only light hand pressure. On
re
systems, up to and including the V875 Vibrator or Combo and specifically the V8 base mounted vibrator
only, a grab handle is fitted, to assist vibrator manoeuvrability.
Details of how to operate the LDS Airglide Transportation System are given in section 3.
fe
Technical Data for the Compressed Air requirements, the Air Castors as well as the details of floor
specification requirements is given in Section 4.
Re

5.8.2. Description of the LDS Thermal Barrier

ly
Figure 1 Typical LDS Thermal Barrier Kit for an
Armature
On
e
Figure 2 Typical LDS Thermal Barrier Kit for a Head
nc
Figure 3 Typical LDS Thermal Barrier Kit for a Slip
Expander Table
5.8.2.1 General
Optional thermal barriers as shown above are available for the majority of Vibrator Armatures, Head
re
Expanders and Slip Tables, to reduce the thermal conductivity between the payload and the mounting
surface when the equipment is used in conjunction with an environmental chamber.
General specification is as follows:
fe

Parameter Armatures
Tables
Re

A thermal barrier can be used on a Vibrator Armature, with flush or raised inserts fitted to the armature
and also when the vibrator is used in either the vertical or horizontal configuration.
Thermal barrier kits for an Armature include; thermal barrier only.
Thermal barrier kits for Head Expanders and Slip Plates include; thermal barrier, lifting eyebolts (where
required), clamp plates, clamp plate corners and attachment screws.
For the actual Thermal Barrier supplied with this Vibration Testing System, see section 5.1.

5.8.2.2 Environmental Chamber Integration

LDS Thermal Barriers are ready for environmental chamber integration.
Thermal Barriers can be used with Environmental Chambers on:
• A Vibrator Armature (only when the Vibrator is set in the vertical position)
• a Head Expander
or
• a Slip Table
As previously noted, Head Expander and Slip Plate Thermal Barriers are supplied with clamping strips
to secure the chamber seal, either on the top surface or the edge of the barrier.
ly
5.8.2.3 Securing the Thermal Barrier
Thermal Barriers are provided with clearance holes in the same pattern as the Armature, Head
On
Expander or Slip Plate insert pattern, and are secured by the payload mounting screws.
Any area of thermal barrier not attached with the payload must be secured using screws and washers.
For details of installing a Thermal Barrier see section 8.
5.8.2.4 Temperature Control

The temperature limits quoted for thermal barriers apply to the barrier material only, and do not
represent the permissible working temperature range of the LDS equipment.
e
When testing payloads at high or low temperatures, measures must be taken to ensure that heat
transmitted to the LDS equipment is dispersed. Constant use of the Vibrator Cooling Unit is required
nc
during tests at high temperatures; at low temperatures, use of the Vibrator Cooling Unit in conjunction
with the heat generated by the field coils is recommended, i.e. leave the field on if the climatic chamber
is switched on and running at cold temperatures.
re
fe
Re

5.8.3. Description of the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Cooling Unit Silencer.
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Cooling Unit Silencer (with support bracket)
The LDS Cooling Unit Silencer has been designed to attenuate the noise from the output port of the
LDS Cooling Unit (fan).
It is secured to the LDS Cooling Unit at one end and comes complete with a floor stand to suit both the
re
50 Hz and 60Hz models of the LDS Cooling Unit. The floor stand has been designed to be secured to
the floor.
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.8.4. Description of the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Plinth Cover Kit.
ly
On
The LDS Plinth Cover Kit has been designed to provide protection from vermin by closing off access
into the LDS XPA-K Amplifier from the bottom.
e
It consists of 2 Filter Trays, which provide a cover, but still permit cooling air to flow into the amplifier,
plus 2 Covers which are secured in the cable entry area of the amplifier.
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.8.5. Description of the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System

ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

5.8.6. Description of LDS Quiet Mode

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with LDS Quiet Mode.
LDS Quiet Mode includes an additional Set up option on the amplifier, and sensors fitted to the vibrator
to monitor the temperatures of the armature and field coils.
ly
On
e
Figure 1 A Typical Control System Page for Quiet Mode
nc
vibrator to be operated for limited periods without the Cooling Unit in operation. With the Cooling
Unit not running and the Vibrator Hydraulic Unit (and where fitted, the Slip Table Hydraulic Unit)
moved out of the test cell, this significantly reduces the system acoustic noise typically from >100dBA
down to <70dBA.
The amplifier may also be configured to change the field power level and the number of power
re
modules enabled.
The armature and field coil temperature sensors are interlocked via the amplifier to protect the
vibrator from overheating. Coil temperatures are displayed on the Amplifier Control System Page (see
Figure 1) and can be monitored during Standard Mode running as well as during Quiet Mode.
fe
Re
Figure 2 The Secondary Control System Page for Quiet Mode

When LDS Quiet Mode is enabled, the Cooling Unit (fan) can be switched on and off manually or can
be started manually and switched off automatically, by enabling and setting Cooling Run On. With
Cooling Run On enabled and a run time set, the Run On time Remaining will be displayed on the
Secondary Control System Page for Quiet Mode, as shown in Figure 2 above.
CAUTION:
ly
On
WARNING:
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Table of Contents
6.1. Purpose of this Section
6.2. LDS General System Set-up and Procedures
6.3. LDS Maintenance Schedules
6.3.1. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Vibrator
6.3.2. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
ly
6.3.3. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
6.3.4. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Amplifier
6.3.5. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Combo or Standalone Slip Table
On
6.3.6. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Head Expander
6.3.7. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Supplementary Features
6.4. LDS Fault Finding
6.4.1. Fault Finding on the LDS Vibrator
6.4.2. Fault Finding on the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
e
6.4.3. Fault Finding on the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
6.4.4. Fault Finding on the LDS Amplifier
nc
6.4.5. Fault Finding on the LDS Combo or Standalone Slip Table
6.4.6. Fault Finding on the LDS Head Expander
6.4.7. Fault Finding on the LDS Supplementary Features
6.5. LDS Maintenance Procedures
re
6.5.1. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Vibrator

6.5.2. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
6.5.3. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
fe
6.5.4. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Amplifier

6.5.5. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Slip Table
6.5.6. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Head Expander
Re
6.5.7. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Supplementary Features

6.6. LDS Sample Daily Log

This section of the manual, gives the ongoing user maintenance requirements for the LDS Vibration Testing
System.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.2. General System Set-up and Procedures

This section is for the General System Set-up and Procedures for the LDS V8900 Vibrator and LDS XPAK
Amplifier
WARNING:
• Vibration generators and amplifiers form a system which handles large amounts of
power. Incorrect application of power can have devastating effects both on the
vibrator and the load being tested.
WARNING:
ly
• Entry into the Danger Zone (see section 2, Health & Safety) should be restricted to
authorised personnel only. It is recommended that unless the system is operating,
the vibrator emergency stop should be actuated before entering the Danger Zone.
On
6.2.2. Fit the Head Expander (if required)
6.2.3. Power Up the Ancillaries
6.2.4. Securing the Payload
6.2.5. Test Supervision
e
6.2.6. Pneumatics Preparation
6.2.7. Activate System Cooling
nc
6.2.8. Power Up the Amplifier

re
fe
Follow the procedure for rotating the Vibrator as

Re
necessary to the required axis in either: -

1. For the Vertical Axis, follow the procedure in
section 3.6 Preparing for Vertical Testing.
Or
Figure 1 LDS V8900 Vibrator Set in the Vertical Axis

6. Maintenance
2. For the Horizontal Axis, follow the procedure in

section 3.7 Preparing for Horizontal Testing.
ly
On
Figure 2 LDS V8900 Vibrator Set in the Horizontal
Axis
6.2.2. Fit the Head Expander (if required)

e
nc
re
1. Fit the Head Expander to the Armature (if

required)
fe
Re
Figure 3 LDS Head Expander Fitted to the Vibrator

(If Required)

6. Maintenance
6.2.3. Power Up the Ancillaries
1. Check Oil Level in Vibrator Hydraulic Power

Supply Unit and top up as required.
2. Switch on the 3 phase AC supply for the Vibrator
ly
Hydraulic Power Supply Unit.
On
Figure 4 LDS Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit
e
nc
3. Switch on the single phase supply for the
Pedestal Control Unit at the mains isolator (if
not already on).
4. Check that a compressed air supply as specified
re
in Section 4 is available at the Pedestal Control

Unit.
fe

Re
6.2.4. Securing the Payload

1. Ensure that any Payload jigs and fixtures to be
used are flat.
2. Using suitable attachment screws secure the
payload to the Vibrator Armature or the Head
Expander, following the procedure in section
3.10; best performance is achieved when all
armature inserts are used.

6. Maintenance
6.2.5. Test Supervision

1. Secure control accelerometers as required and
connect to the appropriate control equipment –
ensure adequate slack is allowed in cables for
full travel of armature.
Note: Guidance on positioning of accelerometers is
given in section 9.2 Best Practice.
Note: To determine the correct control positions for
the tests to be run, the system should be
characterised by running at low level before
testing at full level. Characterisation plots can
ly
be kept for future reference.
2. Check test is within overturning moment of

vibrator.
On
3. When a test is performed, monitor payload
accelerations to ensure this is the case.
Note: For advice on specific test situations contact
Brüel & Kjær Engineering Dept.
6.2.6. Pneumatics Preparation

e Emergency Stop Load Support
nc
Pressure Gauge
1. Pressurise the Lin-E-Air suspension using the Air

Isolation control on the Pedestal Control Unit
re
(see Figure 6). Correct positioning is achieved

when the guide shafts project equally above and
below the trunnions
Note: Some vibrators have 2 guide shafts each side.
fe

Regulator
Re

6. Maintenance
Load Support
move1.(See section 6.2.6.1 below for further
ly
On
Figure 2.
e
Payload Mass vs Load Support Pressure Guide - Vertical
nc
re
fe
Re

kg bar lb lb / in²
0 0.6 0 8.6
100 1.4 220 20
1
2

6. Maintenance

kg bar lb lb / in²
200 2.1 441 31
300 2.9 661 42
400 3.7 882 53
500 4.4 1102 64
600 5.2 1323 76
700 6.0 1543 87
800 6.8 1764 98
ly
Note: The figures in Table 1 above are notional and are supplied as a guide to initially set the air pressure.
On
6.2.7. Activate System Cooling

e
nc
re
1. Switch on the 3 phase AC supply for the Cooling

Unit (Fan) and Starter Kit.
fe
Re
Figure 10 LDS Cooling Unit (Fan)
6.2.8. Power Up the Amplifier

1. Ensure that no objects or obstruction are blocking the air flow through the Amplifier. Unobstructed air
flow into the power module intake grills is very important
2. Check all Amplifier panels are fixed and locked correctly
3. Switch on the 3-phase supply for the Amplifier at the mains isolator.

6. Maintenance
4. Check that the Amplifier Control Panel is on and

displaying the Main Menu.
5. Check that all Amplifier Cooling Fans are
operating.
6. Check that the Vibrator Cooling Fan starts up and
runs in the correct direction of rotation.
Note: The Cooling icon on the top right-hand side of
the control panel display will be green.
ly
Figure 11 Main Menu
On
7. Check the function of all emergency stops in the
system by confirming that when tripped they
appear on the Amplifier display. Reset the stops.
e
nc
Figure 12 Screen showing Emergency Stop Event
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.3. LDS Maintenance Schedules

6.3.5. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Combo or Standalone Slip Table
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Vibrator
General
The tasks in these schedules are detailed in section 6.5.1.
Daily User Preventative Maintenance Schedule

Personnel
Support and test
Equipment qualification and
Ref Task equipment
concerned quantity by
ly
requirements
qualification
Authorised trained
D1. Test Emergency Stop Circuit Emergency Stop None
engineer
On
Authorised trained
D2. Check Vibrator Fan Hose Cooling Unit Standard Mechanical
engineer
Ensure that System Cables are Authorised trained
D3. Cable Set None
correctly routed engineer
Check pneumatic hoses for Authorised trained
D4. Vibrator Standard Mechanical
damage engineer
D5.
e
Check the Lin-E-Air System Lin-E-Air System
Standard Mechanical Authorised trained
and Electrical engineer
nc
Authorised trained
D6. Check Internal Load Support Vibrator Standard Mechanical
engineer
Check Hydraulic System for Authorised trained
D7. Vibrator HPS Standard Mechanical
Leaks engineer
re
Check Area Around Vibration Vicinity of Vibration Authorised trained

D8. Standard Mechanical
Testing System for Cleanliness Testing System engineer
Conduct a 2g bare table
Vibration Testing Authorised trained
D9. reference plot sweep, (if None
fe
System engineer
possible).
Weekly User Preventative Maintenance Schedule

Re
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Check Vibrator Hydraulic Authorised trained
W1. Vibrator HPS Standard Mechanical
Power System Oil engineer
Check Vibrator Hydraulic
Authorised trained
W2. Power System for damage Vibrator HPS Standard Mechanical
engineer
and Leaks
Authorised trained
W3. Clean the Vibrator Vibrator Cleaning materials
engineer

6. Maintenance
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
W4. Clean Cable Set Cable Set
Monthly User Preventative Maintenance Schedule

Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
ly
requirements
qualification
Power System Oil Level, Authorised trained
On
M1. Vibrator HPS Standard Mechanical
Pressure, filters, noise and engineer
vibration
Authorised trained
M2. Power System Oil Pressure Vibrator HPS Standard Mechanical
engineer
Switch
Check Vibrator Top Cover Authorised trained
M3. Vibrator Standard Mechanical
Dust Seal
e
Closely inspect all cables for
engineer
Authorised trained
M4. Cable Set None
nc
signs of damage engineer
Check Tightness and Flatness
Authorised trained
M5. (Annual) of Armature Table Vibrator Standard Mechanical
engineer
Inserts
Check Vibrator Acceleration
re
Authorised trained
M6. Waveform Distortion at Spot Vibrator
engineer
Frequencies
Six Monthly User Preventative Maintenance Schedule

fe
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
Re
qualification
Inspect Armature Lead-outs Standard Mechanical 2 x Authorised
S1. Vibrator
and other Cabling Standard Electrical trained engineers
Check degauss cables for
S2. damage and security of Degauss Cables
connections
Standard Mechanical 2 x Authorised
S3. Visual check of ICS Assembly Vibrator
and Electrical trained engineers
Authorised trained
S4. Check function of Interlocks Vibrator Standard Mechanical
engineer

6. Maintenance
Degauss Kit User Preventative Maintenance Schedule

Support and
Equipment test
Ref Task Personnel qualification and quantity by qualification
concerned equipment
requirements
Stray Field
Measurement Above
1. Gauss Meter Authorised trained engineer
(see note Vibrator
below)
Note: Stray field measurement may be performed by the customer on a frequency to suit, if stray fields are of
particular importance. E.g. testing sensitive electronic devices. A Gauss meter will be required for this
ly
to be performed.
Brüel & Kjær Maintenance
On
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Perform the pre-
Vibrator & System Brüel & Kjær
1. maintenance checks,
Cabling qualified engineer
including bare table tests
Perform the Air Cooled
e
Vibrator Checks including DVM Brüel & Kjær
nc
2. Vibrator
removal of armature and Insulation Tester qualified engineer
insulation resistance checks
Perform the Lin-E-Air Brüel & Kjær
3. Lin-E-Air System Standard Mechanical
Maintenance qualified engineer
re
Perform the Initial Power Up DVM

Vibrator and Brüel & Kjær
4. Checks, including interlock
Amplifier Clamp Meter qualified engineer
operation
Perform the System Tests, Vibrator and Brüel & Kjær
5. Oscilloscope
fe
including bare table tests Amplifier qualified engineer

Measure resistance to earth Standard Mechanical Brüel & Kjær
6. Degauss Kit
of degauss coil. and Electrical qualified engineer
Re
Remove top cover, check

degauss coil mountings and Standard Mechanical Brüel & Kjær
7. Degauss Kit
fixings are secure. Check for and Electrical qualified engineer
any signs of overheating.
Measure stray field level
Standard Mechanical Brüel & Kjær
8. 150mm (6”) above armature Degauss Kit
and Electrical qualified engineer
table.
Record any comments and Vibration Testing Brüel & Kjær
9.
observations System qualified engineer

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

Daily User Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Authorised trained
engineer
ly
Check electrical cabling for
Authorised trained
D2. damage and security of Pedestal Control Unit None
engineer
connections
On
Check pneumatic hoses for
Authorised trained
D3. damage and security of Pedestal Control Unit None
engineer
connections
Check pneumatic system for Authorised trained
D4. Pedestal Control Unit None
leaks engineer
Check door is locked and key Authorised trained
D5.
with responsible person
e Pedestal Control Unit None
engineer
nc
Weekly User Preventative Maintenance
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
re
Authorised trained
W1. Clean Pedestal Control Unit Cleaning materials
engineer
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan)

Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Authorised trained
D1. Check Vibrator Fan Hose Cooling Unit Standard Mechanical
engineer
ly
Check Vibrator Cooling Unit
Authorised trained
D2. (Fan) for noise and Cooling Unit Standard Mechanical
engineer
vibration etc.
On
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
W1. Clean Fan exterior

e Cooling Unit Cleaning materials
Authorised trained
engineer
nc
Yearly or Every 3800hrs User Preventative Maintenance
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
re
requirements
qualification
Brüel & Kjær Service
Y1. Clean Fan Rotor Fan Rotor Standard Mechanical
Engineer
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS XPAK Amplifier

Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Authorised trained
engineer
ly
Check System Cables for
Authorised trained
D2. damage and security of Amplifier Standard Electrical
engineer
connections
On
Ensure the area around the
amplifier is clear of
Authorised trained
D3. obstructions which could Amplifier None
engineer
prevent adequate airflow
into the air intake grills
Ensure cooling fans are Authorised trained
D4. Fan Panels None
operating correctly engineer
D5. Fill in daily log

e Amplifier None
Authorised trained
engineer
nc
Personnel
Support and test
re
Ref Task equipment

requirements
qualification
Check that all cabinet panels Standard Authorised trained
W1. Amplifier
are correctly fitted Mechanical engineer
fe
Monthly User Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
Support and test
Re

Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Inspect and clean the air
M1.
intake dust filter

6. Maintenance
Six Monthly User Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Check the interior of the Standard
Authorised trained
S1. amplifier for accumulations Amplifier Mechanical and
engineer
of dust or dirt Electrical
Ensure EMC gaskets are
Standard Authorised trained
S2. not damaged and are Panels
Mechanical engineer
securely fitted
ly
Yearly User Preventative Maintenance
On
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Authorised trained
Y1. Replace dust filter Front Panel
e engineer
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.3.5. Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Combo or Standalone Slip

Table
ly
On
flexibility.
e
nc

re
Combo Systems
fe
as a combo system. All feature the LDS Lin‐E‐Air body isolation and guidance system, which ensures
the body of the electrodynamic shaker is maintained on the central line, minimizing distortion and
Re


6. Maintenance
Applications
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Standard Head Expander
Weekly Customer Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
Operational Support and test
qualification and
Ref Operation equipment equipment
quantity by
concerned requirements
qualification
Check Head Expander for Authorised trained
W1. Head Expander None
signs of corrosion engineer
ly
Check inserts for fixing
Authorised trained
W2. payloads are free from Head Expander None
engineer
damage
On
Conduct 2g bare table Vibrator and Head Authorised trained
W3. None
reference plot sweep Expander engineer
Monthly Customer Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
qualification and
Ref Operation
e equipment
concerned
equipment
requirements
quantity by
qualification
nc
Check flatness of Head Authorised trained
M1. Head Expander Standard Mechanical
Expander engineer
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

Features.
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Thermal Barrier
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Airglide Transportation System

6.3.7.1.1 Customer Preventative Maintenance

The frequency of the tasks is determined by use and local operating conditions
Personnel
Support and test
Ref Task equipment
requirements
qualification
Airglide
ly
Authorised trained
1. Clean the Air Castors Transportation None
engineer
System
Examine the interior of each Airglide
Authorised trained
On
2. torus bag Transportation None
engineer
System
Check that the castor’s outer Airglide
Authorised trained
3. fabric is still shiny Transportation None
engineer
System
Examine the castors for any Airglide
Authorised trained
4. cuts or tears in the fabric, or Transportation Standard Mechanical
any damage
e System
engineer
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Thermal Barrier

6.3.7.2.1 Daily Customer Preventative Maintenance (when in use)

Personnel
qualification and
Ref Task equipment equipment
quantity by
qualification
Authorised trained
D1. Clean Thermal Barrier None
engineer
ly
Check for any damage to the Authorised trained
D2. Thermal Barrier None
surfaces of the barrier engineer
Check the barrier inserts Authorised trained
On
D3. Thermal Barrier None
(where applicable) engineer
6.3.7.2.2 Weekly Customer Preventative Maintenance (when in use)

Personnel
qualification and
quantity by
On segmented barriers,
e qualification
Authorised trained
nc
W1. check that sealant between Thermal Barrier Standard Mechanical
engineer
gaps is watertight
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
6.3.7.3.1 Weekly Customer Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
qualification and
quantity by
qualification
Authorised trained
W1. Clean Silencer Standard Mechanical
engineer
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

6.3.7.4.1 Weekly Customer Preventative Maintenance

Personnel
qualification and
quantity by
qualification
Authorised trained
W1. Clean Plinth Cover Kit Standard Mechanical
engineer
ly
6.3.7.4.2 Yearly Customer Preventative Maintenance
Personnel
On
qualification and
quantity by
qualification
Authorised trained
Y1. Replace the Filters Plinth Cover Kit Standard Mechanical
e engineer
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule for the LDS Quiet Mode

There are no user serviceable items available for LDS Quiet Mode.
Should any maintenance be required, contact Brüel & Kjær VTS Service.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.4. LDS Fault Finding

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Vibrator
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS V8900 Vibrator
re
General
System Interlock Reason Possible Cause/s
fe
The output voltage exceeds the Fault in the connections between the
Amp Overvoltage [V]
amplifier limit. amplifier and vibrator armature.
Short circuits on the input terminals of
The output current exceeds the system the vibrator.
Amp Overcurrent [A]
Re
limit. Fault in the connections between the

amplifier and vibrator armature.
Pump not switched on.
Oil level in tank low.
Oil supply to the slip table has fallen Blockage in system.

Vib Oil Pressure
below minimum operating pressure.
Faulty pressure switch.
Interlock cable damaged or dis-

connected.

6. Maintenance

Test profile limits exceed rated stroke
of system (remember to include any
allowance for body movement on Lin-
Vibrator armature has exceeded E-Air isolated systems).
Vib Overtravel
Maximum Travel.
ICS requires re-calibrating.
connected.
Field supply cables damaged or not
Vibrator field current has fallen below connected properly.
Vibrator field
ly
a preset limit. Internal fault within Field Power Supply
unit/s.
On
ICS cables damaged or not connected
VPS Control VPS General Interlock. properly.
Internal fault within ICS assembly.
LDS Degauss Kit

Symptom Possible Cause Possible Solution
e
Fuse/s blown.
Check fuses FS1 & 2 on Vibrator
Terminal Panel.
nc
Stray Field Levels above Check cable connections at
Cable disconnected.
specified limit. vibrator and amplifier.
Degauss Potentiometer requires re-
Brüel & Kjær Engineer required.
adjustment.
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit
General
re
Check AC is connected and

ICS display not working No AC Input
switched on
Check AC is connected and
No AC Input
switched on
fe
Check compressed air input and

No compressed air
hoses
Load Support Regulator not
Vibrator Hydraulic Supply Unit not Check Vibrator Hydraulic Supply
working
Re
working or faulty Unit

Vibrator Hydraulic Supply
Check Vibrator Hydraulic Supply
Pressure Switch not working or
Pressure Switch
faulty
Check compressed air input and

No compressed air
hoses
Load Support Drain Valve open Close Load Support Drain Valve
Load Support Pressure Gauge not
working Load Support Regulator not See Load Support Regulator not
working working above
Fuse FS1 failed Replace Fuse FS1

6. Maintenance

Faulty pneumatic hoses, fittings or Check pneumatic hoses, fittings
valves and valves
Compressed Air Escaping
Load Support Drain Valve open Close Load Support Drain Valve
Communication and Interlocks

CAN External External CAN Bus Communication Error Interlock cable damaged or dis-
connected or CAN module fault
ly
CAN Internal Internal CAN Bus Communication Error CAN module fault
properly
VPS Control VPS General Interlock
On
Internal fault within ICS
assembly/wiring
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
Failure to Power Up
System Interlocks
re
Failure to Power Up
fe
AC Failure
Customer fuse failure
Starter Kit Isolator turned off
Re
Motor Fails to Run Power supply failure

Starter Kit MCCB Tripped (see section
6.5.3)
Starter Kit Thermal Overload Tripped
(see section 6.5.3)

6. Maintenance
System Interlocks
Power supply failure. (see section
6.4.3.1 above)
Blower Motor Blower Motor not running. Damaged motor.

connected.
Blockage or restriction in system, kinks

or damage to blower hose.
ly
Blower hose support not fitted in
horizontal operating mode.
Cooling air flow from the
On
Blower Flow vibrator has fallen below Air pressure switch requires
minimum allowable level. adjustment.
Motor running in the wrong direction.

e connected.
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

ly
On
e
nc
Failure to Power Up
re
System Interlocks
Power Module Failure
fe
Failure to Power Up
If the amplifier does not power up when the 3-phase supply is switched on, complete the following
checks (for fuse details see earlier in this chapter):
Re

Control Panel LCD Check the Control Transformer Fuses.
Fuse failure.
does not illuminate
Cooling fans not Check the Rectifier and Module
Fuse failure.
operating Housing Fan Fuses.
Check the Switch Mode Power Supply
Fuse failure.
Switch Mode Power fuse.
Supply not operating Check the Switch Mode Power Supply
Faulty Unit.
and replace with a spare if required.

6. Maintenance
System Interlocks
Error in system calibration or vibration
Drive signal level to the amplifier input test programme.
Input Overdrive stages has exceeded the specified
limits. Fault in feedback loop from
accelerometer to controller.
The output armature voltage exceeds Fault in the connections between the
Amp Overvoltage [V]
the amplifier limit. amplifier and vibrator armature.
Short circuits on the output terminals
ly
The output armature current exceeds of the amplifier.
Amp Overcurrent [A]
the system limit. Fault in the connections between the
amplifier and vibrator armature.
On
Fault with Mk4a Power Module Refer to Power Module Failure in
Power Module n
number “n”. section 6.4.4.3.
Fault in the connections between the
The output field current exceeds the amplifier and vibrator field.
Field Supply Max [A]
system limit. Internal fault within Field Power Supply
unit/s.
e Fault in the connections between the
nc
The output field current is below the amplifier and vibrator field.
Field Supply Min [A]
minimum system limit. Internal fault within Field Power Supply
unit/s.
Internal fault within Field Power Supply

Field Unit 1/2 Field SMPS Unit Fault.
re
unit/s.
High ambient temperature.
Amplifier Transformer or Rectifiers
Amplifier cooling Inadequate ventilation.
Above Maximum Temperature.
fe
Amplifier fans not working correctly.

Outputs not connected to potential-
free contacts which open when there is
External 1/2 User Configurable Interlock tripped. a fault condition.
Re
If not used disable in the Interlock

Setup page.
Module Supply Output Voltage is Supply Voltage and/or incorrect tap

Module supply Max used on input transformer.
above maximum limit (Internal
[V]
Rectifier). Fault with rectifier.
Module Supply Output Voltage is Supply Voltage and/or incorrect tap
Module supply Min used on input transformer.
below minimum limit (Internal
[V]
Rectifier). Fault with rectifier.
The incoming mains supply has lost a
3-Phase failure Supply Fuse/s blown.
phase(s) or a phase(s) are low.

6. Maintenance

Communications failure with
Main Contactor Fault with main 3 phase contactor. contactor.
Internal fault with contactor.
Step Contactor Fault with Step/Start Contactor. Internal fault with step/start contactor
Fault with Control Board Internal Internal fault.
Internal Supplies
Supplies.
Amplifier Internal System Communications cable fault or
Ctrl Comms Fault
Communications Failure. connection fault.
ly
VPS Control VPS General Interlock. properly.
Internal fault within ICS circuitry.
On
Power Module Failure
The amplifier is fitted with Mk 4A power modules each providing 8 kVA of output.
Eight LEDs on the indicator PCB at the front of the module (see Figure 6.5) can be viewed from the
front of the amplifier after removal of the front panel.
e
Power module LEDs can be interpreted from the table below.
LED Message Notes

nc
1 Module fault Indicates either a failure of the block specified, or a fault with the block output
(L/H block) circuitry (wiring fault). Contact Brüel & Kjær for further advice.
2 Module fault Illumination of both RH and LH LEDs indicates a high output current demand
(R/H block) during the first one second of module enabling.
re
3 Done Indicates a problem with the module control. Contact Brüel & Kjær for further
advice.
4 Running This LED is normally lit when the amplifier is in stand-by mode and is
extinguished once the power module current exceeds 20 A.
fe
If the LED is not extinguished above this level it indicates that the module is not
driving at the correct level of current. Check the module fuses.
If the fault cannot be corrected, contact Brüel & Kjær for further advice.
Re
5 Sync loss Indicates that the SYNC signal to the power module is missing.
6 Power module Indicates excessive temperature. Check that the appropriate fan is operating
overtemperature correctly. Check that the ambient temperature does not exceed that stated in
Section 4.1.
Check the amplifier drive parameters.
If the above checks do not resolve the fault, contact Bruel & Kjaer for further
advice.
7 Module Indicates that the module output current has exceeded 90 A rms.
overcurrent
8 Spare Used during Brüel & Kjær production testing.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

ly
On
flexibility.
e
nc
re
Combo Systems
fe

Re


6. Maintenance
Applications
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Unguided Head Expander
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Unguided Head Expander on an LDS V8900 Vibrator

Review control strategy and use multi-
point control.
re
Cannot control to Modify position of control

Highly resonant Load.
high frequencies. accelerometer/s.
Ensure not controlling on a node.

fe
Adjust Lin-E-Air Isolation to centralise

Cannot achieve body in trunnions.
required Excessive body movement.
displacement. Ensure mass of expander is included in
Re
achievable displacement calculations.
Expander surface will become non-

Non-uniform
uniform as frequency increases, this will Modify position of control
acceleration of
occur at reduced frequencies as the size accelerometer/s or control strategy.
expander surface.
of expander increases.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

Features.
Fault Finding on the LDS Airglide Transportation System
Fault Finding on the LDS Thermal Barrier
Fault Finding on the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
Fault Finding on the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
Fault Finding on the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
Fault Finding on LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Fault Finding on the LDS Airglide Transportation System

ly
On
e
nc

A slight hissing noise in the air supply
system is normal. A whistle or squeal Check air supply system for leaks.
re
can occur when crossing a small crack Check floor surface for cracks or holes
or hole in the floor.
Excessive air pressure is being applied. Reduce the air pressure.
Castors Re-distribute the load on the machine.
System loaded too far off centre
fe
whistling/squealing
resulting in excess air to those castors Adjust flow control valves to individual
carrying the lightest load. castors.
Air inlet gasket or landing pad
Check gaskets and replace if required
Re
mounting hole gasket ineffective.

Air leaks in the pipes. Check air supply system for leaks
Excess air pressure for the weight of
Reduce air flow
Load is oscillating load.
Castor inlets obstructed. Check castors are working correctly
Inadequate air supply. Increase air supply.
Re-distribute the load on the machine.
Excessive force
System loaded too far off centre. Adjust flow control valves to individual
required to move the
load castors.
Check castors and replace with
Unserviceable castor or castors.
serviceable spare as required

6. Maintenance

Inadequate air supply. Increase air supply.
Check air supply system for leaks or
Obstruction/leak in air supply line.
blockages.
System overloaded. Reduce the load on the machine.
The remedy is to inflate the castors
One or more castors System brought to a sliding stop during slowly and gently push the loaded
fails to inflate last move; this can cause the castors to castors in the opposite direction of the
correctly fold. last move. Alternatively, rock gently
back and forth.
ly
Raise machine and remove object.
Object caught under castor. Check that the surface to be travelled
over is clean and free of obstruction.
On
Check castors and replace with
Worn or damaged castor.
serviceable spare as required
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Fault Finding on the LDS Thermal Barrier

ly
Armature
On
e
Figure 2 Typical LDS Thermal Barrier Kit for a Head Figure 3 Typical LDS Thermal Barrier Kit for a Slip
nc
Expander Table

re
Damaged thermal barrier Replace thermal barrier

Temperature
transmission not Silicon sealant missing on segmented
Install silicon sealant
being controlled thermal barrier
fe
Replace thermal barrier

Thermal barrier not
Incorrect storage methods Ensure that thermal barrier is stored
fitting flush on the
surfaces flat
Re
Tighten fixings according to the torque

Overtightening fixings
values given in this manual.
Damage to fixing Loosely secure the payload and

positions on thermal No account taken of the thermal thermal barrier fixings and allow them
barrier expansion / contraction of fixings to acclimatise to the operating
before torque tightening temperature of the test before torque
tightening.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Fault Finding on the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
ly
On
e
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Cooling Unit with Silencer
nc
Very Noisy Silencing medium failing Replace silencer
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Fault Finding on the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

ly
On

Equipment above
overheating
e
Filters blocked Replace filters
Vermin entering
Covers removed or missing Refit covers
nc
amplifier
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Fault Finding on the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System

ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Fault Finding on the LDS Quiet Mode


Erroneous Contamination of IR Sensor lens
Armature
Contact Brüel & Kjær VTS Service
temperature IR Sensor cable damage
reading / interlock 1
Thermocouple becoming
Contact Brüel & Kjær VTS Service
ly
Erroneous Field detached
temperature Thermocouple cable being
reading / interlock1 Contact Brüel & Kjær VTS Service
damaged
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
1
This type of fault is extremely uncommon.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.5. LDS Maintenance Procedures

6.5.6. Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Head Expander
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
ly
On
e
nc
re
Serviceability Check
6.5.1.2.1 Task Reference §D1 – Test Emergency Stop Circuit
fe
6.5.1.2.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check Vibrator Fan Hose

6.5.1.2.3 Task Reference §D3 – Ensure that Cables are Correctly Routed
6.5.1.2.4 Task Reference §D4 – Check Pneumatic Hoses for Damage
Re
6.5.1.2.5 Task Reference §D5 – Check Lin-E-Air System

6.5.1.2.6 Task Reference §D6 – Check Internal Load Support
6.5.1.2.7 Task Reference §D7 – Check Hydraulic System for Leaks
6.5.1.2.8 Task Reference §D8 – Check Area Around the Vibration Testing System for Cleanliness
6.5.1.2.9 Task Reference §D9 – Conduct a 2g Bare Table Reference Plot Sweep, (if possible).
6.5.1.3.1 Task Reference §W1 – Check Vibrator Hydraulic Power System Oil
6.5.1.3.2 Task Reference §W2 – Check Vibrator Hydraulic Power System for Damage and Leaks
6.5.1.3.3 Task Reference §W3 – Clean the Vibrator
6.5.1.3.4 Task Reference §W4 – Clean the Cable Set

6. Maintenance

6.5.1.4.1 Task Reference §M1 – Check Vibrator Hydraulic Power System Oil Level, Pressure,
Filters, Noise and Vibration
6.5.1.4.2 Task Reference §M2 – Check the Vibrator Hydraulic Power System Oil Pressure Switch
6.5.1.4.3 Task Reference §M3 – Check the Vibrator Top Cover Dust Seal
6.5.1.4.4 Task Reference §M4 – Closely Inspect all Cables for Signs of Damage
6.5.1.4.5 Task Reference §M5 – Check Tightness and Flatness of Armature Table Inserts
6.5.1.4.6 Task Reference §M6 – Check Vibrator Acceleration Waveform Distortion at Spot
Frequencies
ly
6.5.1.5.1 Task Reference §S1 – Inspect Armature Lead-outs and other Cabling
6.5.1.5.2 Task Reference §S2 – Check Degauss Cables for Damage and Security of Connections
On
6.5.1.5.3 Task Reference §S3 – Visual Check of ICS Assembly
6.5.1.5.4 Task Reference §S4 – Check Function of Interlocks
6.5.1.6.1 Task Reference §1 – Stray Field Measurement
General Maintenance Procedures
6.5.1.7.1 Removing the Vibrator Top Cover
e
6.5.1.7.2 Refitting the Vibrator Top Cover
6.5.1.7.3 Replacing the Vibrator Top Cover Dust Seal
nc
6.5.1.7.4 Removing the Terminal Cover
6.5.1.7.5 Refitting the Terminal Cover
6.5.1.7.6 Adjusting the Vibrator Rotation Stops
re
Serviceability Check
CAUTION:
fe
• Continuous testing at high displacements (>5 mm) may cause increased wear in some
components.
Components which may require increased maintenance are:

Re
• Load Support Seal

• Armature current leads and earth straps
• Armature to Top Cover Dust Seal
Duty cycling is too variable to define, depending on a number of factors such as level of displacement,
payload, swept or fixed frequency testing and degree of repeated testing over time. As a guide, greater
than repeated 1 hour in 10 hours high displacement testing may lead to increased maintenance.
The procedures in section 6.5.1.2 below detail the checks necessary to establish the serviceability of
the vibrator. It is recommended that checks be performed after installation and at regular intervals as
detailed in section 6.3, or at intervals determined by local operating conditions and frequency/length
of use. For advice on specific situations contact the Brüel & Kjær Service Centre.

6. Maintenance
Note: The task references within this section, refer to the maintenance schedule in section 6.3.1.
The majority of the maintenance tasks within this section, require that the equipment is in a state where
it is ready to perform a vertical test, but with the amplifier Switched-DOWN. This means that the AC
mains is energised, i.e. AC mains and pneumatic power still on for all equipment. Where it is required
to be off, this will be stated in the task.

Frequency – Daily
ly
The LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
is fitted with 2 Emergency Stop Pushbuttons. The following procedure will apply to both of these
pushbuttons.
On
For this procedure to be performed, the Amplifier, the Pedestal Control Unit, the Cooling Unit and the
Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply must all be connected to the AC mains and the compressed air supply
to the Pedestal Control Unit must be available. The LCD Touchscreen Display on the Amplifier could be
showing any page at all.
e
nc
1. Depress the left-hand Emergency Stop
Pushbutton.
Note: The pushbutton will now be locked on.
re
Left-hand E-Stop Right-hand E-Stop

fe
Figure 2 Vibrator Emergency Stop Pushbuttons

Re
Note: On the LDS XPA-K Amplifier Touchscreen

Panel, the Emergency Stop page will be
displayed.
Figure 3 Emergency Stop Page

6. Maintenance
2. Release the Emergency Stop Pushbutton by

turning the knob to the left or right until the
knob pops out to its normal position.
Note: The Main Output page of the Status
group will now be displayed.
3. Now repeat the process with the right-hand
Emergency Stop Pushbutton.
4. To ensure that all Emergency Stop
Pushbuttons are operational, it may be
sensible to check the ones fitted to the
Pedestal Control Unit, the Amplifier and any
ly
secondary Emergency Stop Pushbuttons at
this time, by following the procedure above. Figure 4 Status-Main Output Page
On
Frequency – Daily
1. Check that the Vibrator hose is not damaged

or crushed in any way.
2. Check that the hose clips are properly
the Vibrator
e
secured on the Air Plenum at the bottom of
nc
CAUTION:
• If the Vibrator Fan Hose leaks, due to damage, not being fitted and secured
correctly or is crushed, the airflow through the Vibrator will be reduced or not
available. If the Vibrator is actually performing a test, the ‘Blower Flow’
re
interlock will be activated and the amplifier will perform a shut-down of the
system. It will not be possible to restart the system until the airflow through
the Vibrator has been restored.
3. When the Cooling Unit (Fan) is running, check

fe
that the hose is not collapsing.

4. If any damage is found, firstly determine the
cause and then try to repair it or replace the
hose.
Re
Note: Contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for

further advice.
6.5.1.2.3 Task Reference §D3 – Ensure that Cables are Correctly Routed
Frequency – Daily
1. Check that the cables connecting to the shaker
are correctly routed to allow rotation of the
shaker body.

6. Maintenance

Frequency – Daily
1. Check all pneumatic hoses to ensure that
there is no damage or leaks.
2. Check to see if the hose connections are
secure and tightened correctly.
part with a Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
ly
further advice.
6.5.1.2.5 Task Reference §D5 – Check Lin-E-Air System
On
Frequency – Daily
1. Check the shafts and bearings for damage. If
any damage is found, firstly determine the
2. Check the pneumatic hoses for the Lin-E-Air
System for damage. If any damage is found,
e
firstly determine the cause and then try to
repair it or replace the part with a Brüel &
nc
Kjær Spare Part.
4. Check the airbags for damage. If any damage
is found, firstly determine the cause and then Figure 6 Vibrator Left-hand Lin-E-Air Suspension
re
contact the Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for

further advice. Emergency Stop Load Support
5. Check that the Earth Strap on the top of the Pushbutton Regulator &
suspension system is undamaged and secure. Pressure Gauge
fe
6. Using the Air Isolation Regulator (see Figure

7), pressurise the Lin-E-Air System and set in
the mid position, following the procedure in
section 3.5.7.
Re
7. Check that there are no air leaks. If any leaks

are found, firstly determine the cause and
then try to repair it or replace the part with a
Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
8. Check that the suspension system moves Air Isolation
ICS Display
smoothly when increasing or reducing the air Regulator
pressure.
9. If any other damage is found, firstly determine Figure 7 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
the cause and then try to repair it or replace
the part with a Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
further advice.

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.2.6 Task Reference §D6 – Check Internal Load Support

Frequency – Daily

Pressure Gauge
1. Check the pneumatic hoses for the Internal

Load Support System for damage. If any
damage is found, firstly determine the cause
and then try to repair it or replace the part
with a Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
ly
On
Regulator
Load Support
e
3. To check the Load Support System, turn the
Load Support Regulator, gradually clockwise
Pressure Gauge
on the Pedestal Control Unit (see Figure 1)

nc
until the armature begins to move1.
Note: The Armature Load Support Seal will
provide some resistance to movement,
so turn the Load Support Regulator, very
re
slowly.
4. When the armature starts to move back off
the regulator slightly (approx. ¼ turn), to Figure 9 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
prevent the armature overshooting.
fe

the indicator on the ILS display is lit
between ¼ and ¾, but as close as possible
to ½ as shown in Figure 2.
Re
6. Turn the Load Support Regulator

anticlockwise to depressurise the system.
The ICS display will register ‘0’ and the Load
Support Pressure Gauge will also display ‘0’. Figure 10 Pedestal Control Unit showing ICS
Regulator
7. While pressurising the Load Support System,

check that the Armature rises smoothly.
1

6. Maintenance
8. If any issue is found, firstly determine the

cause and then contact the Brüel & Kjær
Service Centre for further advice.
6.5.1.2.7 Task Reference §D7 – Check Hydraulic System for Leaks

Frequency – Daily
1. Check the hydraulic hoses between the
Vibrator Hydraulic Power System and the
Vibrator for damage. If any damage is found,
firstly determine the cause and then try to
repair it or replace the part with a Brüel &
ly
Kjær Spare Part.
Note: Hydraulic hose damage can also be cracks
in the surface of the hose.
On
3. If any other issue is found, firstly determine
the cause and then contact the Brüel & Kjær
6.5.1.2.8 Task Reference §D8 – Check Area Around the Vibration Testing System for
Cleanliness
e
Frequency – Daily
nc
1. Check the area around the Vibrator and the
Pedestal Control Unit to ensure that there are
no residual hazards present. E.g. oil spills,
dust and dirt, extra test jigs and other
re
equipment not currently being used on the

Vibrator.
6.5.1.2.9 Task Reference §D9 – Conduct a 2g Bare Table Reference Plot Sweep, (if
fe
possible).
Frequency – Daily
1. Perform a 2g Bare Table Reference Plot
Re
Sweep.
Note: Depending on circumstances, this may not
always be possible, e.g. if a test payload
has been left on the equipment overnight.

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.3.1 Task Reference §W1 – Check Vibrator Hydraulic Power System Oil
Frequency – Weekly
1. Take a sample of the hydraulic oil and pass it

through a filter paper or clean cloth; any
ly
residue will indicate contamination.
2. If the oil is dirty, black or contaminated,
replace the oil in the system.
On
brown to black.
Figure 12 Vibrator Hydraulic Power System

e
6.5.1.3.2 Task Reference §W2 – Check Vibrator Hydraulic Power System for Damage
nc
and Leaks
re
1. Check the Vibrator Hydraulic Power System

fe
for damage. Hydraulic oil may be evidence of

damage to the system.
Re

3. Clean up any oil spillages.

6. Maintenance
4. Check the hydraulic hoses between the

Vibrator Hydraulic Power System and the
Vibrator for damage.
Note: Hydraulic hose damage can also be cracks
in the surface of the hose.
6. Check to see if the hose connections are Figure 14 Checking for Damage to Hydraulic Hoses
7. Check that the Vibrator Hydraulic Power
ly
System AC Isolator operates correctly.
8. If any other issue is found, firstly determine
the cause and then contact the Brüel & Kjær
On
6.5.1.3.3 Task Reference §W3 – Clean the Vibrator

Frequency – Weekly or as required
1. Ensure that all electrical supplies to the Vibration Testing System have been switched off and
isolated.
e
2. Clean the Armature Table with a soft brush or lint-free cloth. After cleaning, apply a thin layer of
moisture repellant.
CAUTION:
nc
• Do not clean the Armature Table with water or allow water to come into
contact with it.
3. Clean the Vibrator with a damp, lint free cloth, using warm soapy water and wipe dry.
re
6.5.1.3.4 Task Reference §W4 – Clean the Cable Set

fe
1. Ensure that all electrical supplies to the Vibration Testing System have been switched off and
isolated.
2. Clean the cables to remove any dirt or dust.
Re

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.4.1 Task Reference §M1 – Check Vibrator Hydraulic Power System Oil Level,
Pressure, Filters, Noise and Vibration
Frequency – Monthly
1. Check the oil level on the sight glass located
on the Hydraulic Oil Power System to ensure
that the level is above the minimum required.
The correct level would be approximately
half-way on the sight glass with the pump
running.
ly
2. With the Vibrator Hydraulic Power System
running, check that the pressure gauge is
reading the correct value as quoted in section
On
4.2.
3. The hydraulic supply line is fitted with a filter
and blockage indicator. The filter must be
renewed at regular intervals. If the filter
becomes blocked, a bypass circuit is activated
to allow unfiltered oil to flow to the Vibrator.
Blockage of the filter is indicated by the
e
indicator window (located on top of the
hydraulic unit) changing from green to red
when a blockage is sensed. It should be noted
nc
that a blockage is only indicated when the
hydraulic unit is switched on.
4. With the Vibrator Hydraulic Power System
running, check that the pump and drive
motor have not become noisy or are
re
vibrating. Excessive noise and vibration are

indicators of faults within the system. Contact
Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for advice.
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.4.2 Task Reference §M2 – Check the Vibrator Hydraulic Power System Oil
Pressure Switch
1. It is essential that hydraulic oil is provided to

the Vibrator at all times during operation.
Failure to provide oil to the vibrator will result
in the Armature Hydrostatic Bearing failing
and the equipment being unusable until it is
ly
repaired. The Vibrator Hydraulic Power
System Oil Pressure Switch monitors the oil
pressure being supplied to the Vibrator.
2. With no other interlock showing on the
On
Amplifier Touchscreen Panel and the Vibrator
Hydraulic Power System running, switch off
the Vibrator Hydraulic Power System using
the Isolator on the unit.
e Figure 16 Vibrator Hydraulic Power System
3. On the Amplifier Touchscreen Panel the ‘Vib

Oil Pressure’ interlock will be displayed,
nc
meaning that there is a problem with the oil
pressure to the Vibrator.
Note: For additional information touch the
information icon on the bottom
right-hand side of the page.
re
4. Switch on the Vibrator Hydraulic Power

System using the Isolator on the unit. The
interlock will be de-activated and the
Status-Main Output page will be displayed.
fe
Figure 17 Halted - Interlock Activated Page

Re

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.4.3 Task Reference §M3 – Check the Vibrator Top Cover Dust Seal
Armature Table
1. Check the Vibrator Top Cover Dust Seal for

any splits, cracks or any other damage.
2. If any damage is found, it will be necessary to
ly
replace the Dust Seal. Contact Brüel & Kjær
Service for advice.
On
Top Cover Dust Seal
Figure 18 The Vibrator Top Cover
6.5.1.4.4 Task Reference §M4 – Closely Inspect all Cables for Signs of Damage
e
1. Check all cables to ensure that there is no
nc
damage.
2. Check to see if the cable connections are
re
cable with a Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
Contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for further

advice.
fe

Re

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.4.5 Task Reference §M5 – Check Tightness and Flatness of Armature Table
Inserts
Frequency – Monthly (tightness) annual (flatness)
1. Using a torque wrench set to the value in
section 4.2, check that the Armature Inserts
are correctly torque set.
2. Check the flatness of all the Armature Inserts
by using a calibrated precision steel straight
edge and feeler gauges.
The straight edge should be laid diagonally
ly
across the armature and the feeler gauge
used to check that gaps do not exist between
the straight edge and the armature/armature
inserts. All the inserts should be checked.
On
3. The feeler gauge thickness is as follows:
Armature diameter up to and including
600mm = .04mm
Armature diameter greater than 600mm =
.05mm
Figure 20 View of Top of Vibrator.
Note: In the event that an insert is found to be
proud on no account overtighten the
e
insert in order to attempt to rectify the
situation.
nc
6.5.1.4.6 Task Reference §M6 – Check Vibrator Acceleration Waveform Distortion
at Spot Frequencies
re
Secure an accelerometer to the armature

table, ensuring it is electrically insulated from
the table to avoid earth loops.
1. Connect the accelerometer output to an
fe
appropriate amplifying system.

2. Using an oscilloscope, monitor the output of
the accelerometer amplifier.
Scan through the frequency range of the
Re
vibrator, recording the waveform at several

levels. Compare the waveforms with those
recorded after installation.
Note: A distinction must be made between
normal and abnormal distortion. Some
distortion at sub-multiples of the resonant
frequency can be expected due to the
magnification of amplifier distortion. A
seriously distorted sine wave at low
frequencies usually indicates that the
armature bearing is misaligned or
damaged.

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.5.1 Task Reference §S1 – Inspect Armature Lead-outs and other Cabling
Frequency – Six-Monthly
ly
1. Follow the procedure in section 6.5.1.7.1
On
below for Removing the Vibrator Top Cover
and in section 6.5.1.7.4 below for Removing
the Terminal Cover, if not already removed.
e Figure 21 Vibrator Top Cover and Terminal Cover

Removed
nc
2. Check the 4 Power Lead-outs and the 2 earth
Lead-outs in particular, plus all other cabling
on the Vibrator for the following: -
re
a. Cable chafing
b. Crushed cables
c. Cable insulation missing
d. Cable insulation burnt through Figure 22 Examples of Cable Damage
fe
e. Cables pulling out of cable lugs

f. Cable connections loose
g. Fretting on cable lugs
ü
Re
h. Evidence of overheating
3. If any damage is found, contact Brüel & Kjær
û
Service centre for advice. Figure 23 Examples of Cable in Lug
4. If no other work is to be performed, follow the
procedure in section 6.5.1.7.2 below for
Refitting the Vibrator Top Cover and in
section 6.5.1.7.5 below for Refitting the
Terminal Cover.

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.5.2 Task Reference §S2 – Check Degauss Cables for Damage and Security of
Connections
Frequency – Daily
5. Check the Degauss Cables for any damage.

7. If any damage is found, firstly determine
the cause and then try to repair it or
replace the cable with a Brüel & Kjær Spare
ly
Part.
further advice.
On
6.5.1.5.3 Task Reference §S3 – Visual Check of ICS Assembly

ICS Sensor and ICS Target

e Control PCB’s Armature Table
nc
1. Ensure that all electrical supplies to the
Vibration Testing System have been switched
off and isolated.
re
below for Removing the Vibrator Top Cover,

if not already removed.
3. Visually check to see if there is any damage to
the ICS Target or Sensor PCB’s.
fe
4. If any damage is found, contact Brüel & Kjær

Service centre for advice.
5. If no other work is to be performed, follow the
procedure in section 6.5.1.7.2 below for
Re
Refitting the Vibrator Top Cover.
Terminal Cover
Figure 25 Location of Inductive Centring System

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.5.4 Task Reference §S4 – Check Function of Interlocks

6.5.1.5.4.1 Checking the Function of the Vibrator Oil Pressure Interlock
Pressure Gauge
Isolator
ly
1. With the Amplifier, Pedestal Control Unit,
Cooling Unit and Vibrator Hydraulic Power Regulator
System powered up and no test running,
On
switch off the Vibrator Hydraulic Power
System using the local Isolator.
e Figure 26 Vibrator Hydraulic Power System

nc
2. The Vib Oil Pressure interlock should be
activated on the Amplifier Touchscreen
panel, as shown in Figure 27.
re
3. Switch on the Vibrator Hydraulic Power

System using the local Isolator and the Status-
Main Output page will be displayed.
4. If the interlock is not displayed, contact
fe
Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for advice.
Figure 27 Vibrator Oil Pressure Interlock Activated

Re
6.5.1.6.1 Task Reference §1 – Stray Field Measurement

Frequency – As required
Note: Stray field measurement may be performed by the customer on a frequency to suit, if stray fields are of
particular importance. E.g. testing sensitive electronic devices. A Gauss meter would be required for
this to be performed.

6. Maintenance
1. Using a Gauss meter, measure the stray

field level 150mm (6”) above the armature
table.
2. If adjustment is required, contact Brüel &
Kjær Service Centre.
General Maintenance Procedures
6.5.1.7.1 Removing the Vibrator Top Cover
ly
WARNING:
• Switch off and isolate all electrical and pneumatic supplies to the Vibration
Testing System, before starting this procedure.
On
• Failure to follow this warning, may result in serious personal injury and
equipment damage.
Armature Table
1. If the Vibrator is set for testing in the

horizontal axis, follow the procedure in
section 3.6.
e
2. Switch off all electrical supplies to the
Vibration Testing System, including the
nc
Amplifier, the Pedestal Control Unit, the
Cooling Unit (Fan) and the Vibrator Hydraulic
Power System.
3. Unscrew and remove the 8 screws and
washers securing the Vibrator Top Cover to
re
the Vibrator and put to one side.

4. Loosen the Vibrator Top Cover Dust Seal from
its housing around the edge of the Armature Top Cover Fixings Dust Seal
Table.
fe
Figure 28 Removing the Vibrator Top Cover Fixings

Re

6. Maintenance
5. Remove the Vibrator Top Cover.
ly
On
Figure 29 Vibrator Top Cover Being Removed
6.5.1.7.2 Refitting the Vibrator Top Cover

e
nc
6. Reposition the Vibrator Top Cover on the
Vibrator Top Cover Support Posts.
7. Guide the edge of the Vibrator Top Cover Dust
re
Seal into its housing around the edge of the

Armature Table, while aligning the Vibrator
Top Cover fixing holes with the tapped holed
in the Support Legs.
fe
Load Support Top Cover

Seal Housing Support Post
Re
Figure 30 Refitting the Vibrator Top Cover

6. Maintenance
8. Refit the retained 8 screws and washers

through the Vibrator Top Cover and tighten
to a torque of 4 Nm.
ly
On
Figure 31 Vibrator Top Cover Refitted
6.5.1.7.3 Replacing the Vibrator Top Cover Dust Seal

e
nc
1. This task can only be performed by a Brüel &
re
Kjær trained service engineer. Contact

Brüel & Kjær Service for advice
fe
Re
Vibrator Top Cover

Figure 32 Vibrator with Vibrator Top Cover Fitted
6.5.1.7.4 Removing the Terminal Cover

WARNING:
• Switch off and isolate all electrical and pneumatic supplies, before starting this
procedure.
• Failure to follow this warning, may result in serious personal injury and
equipment damage.

6. Maintenance
1. Loosen the 2 screws on each side of the

Terminal Cover securing it to the Support
Brackets, but do not remove.
ly
On
Terminal Cover
Fixings
e Figure 33 Removing the Terminal Cover
nc
re
2. Remove the Terminal Cover.

fe
Re
Figure 34 Terminal Cover Removed

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.7.5 Refitting the Terminal Cover
1. Reposition the Terminal Cover over the

Terminal Panel, aligning the slots in the
Terminal Cover with the fixings on the
ly
Support Brackets.
On
Support Brackets
and Fixings
e Figure 35 Refitting the Terminal Cover
nc
re
2. Tighten the Fixings to a torque of 4 Nm

fe
Figure 36 Terminal Cover Refitted

Re

6. Maintenance
6.5.1.7.6 Adjusting the Vibrator Rotation Stops

Engineers Level Rotation Hand-wheel
1. Check that the Trunnion Supports, left-hand
ly
and right-hand are level, both front to back
and left to right.
2. With the Vibrator set for Vertical Testing (see
On
section 3.6 for details) and using an Engineers
Level, check to see if the Armature Table is
level.
e Vertical Rotation Horizontal

Stop Rotation Stop
nc
Figure 37 Checking the Armature Table for
Levelness
Adjustment
re
Lock Nut
Screw
fe
3. If the Armature Table is not level, firstly check

that the Block Fixings are tight. The torque
value for these fixings is 50 Nm (36.9 lb ft).
4. Loosen the Lock Nut and turn the Adjustment
Re
Screw away from the Rotation Stop Block.

5. Using the Rotation Hand-wheel (see Figure 37
above), very slowly rotate the Vibrator until
the Armature Table is level.
6. Turn the Adjustment Screw onto the Rotation
Stop Block until just tight and tighten the Lock
Nut to a torque of 30 Nm
Rotation Stop
Block Fixings
Block
Figure 38 Vertical Rotation Stop

6. Maintenance
Adjustment
Lock Nut
Screw
7. Set the Vibrator for Horizontal Testing (see

section 3.7 for details) and using an Engineers
Level, check to see if the Armature Table face
is vertical.
8. Loosen the Lock Nut and turn the Adjustment
Screw away from the Rotation Stop Block.
ly
9. Using the Rotation Hand-wheel (see Figure 37
above), very slowly rotate the Vibrator until
the Armature Table is level.
10. Turn the Adjustment Screw onto the
On
Rotation Stop Block until just tight and
tighten the Lock Nut to a torque of 30 Nm
Rotation Stop
Block Fixings
Block
Figure 39 Horizontal Rotation Stop

e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit.
ly
On
e
nc
re
6.5.2.1.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check System Cables for Damage and Security of Connections
6.5.2.1.4 Task Reference §D4 – Check Pneumatic Hoses for Leaks
fe
6.5.2.1.5 Task Reference §D5 – Check Door is Locked and Key with Responsible Person
6.5.2.2.1 Task Reference §W1 – Cleaning the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit
Re
Fuses

Note: The task references within this particular section, refer to the maintenance schedule in section 6.3.1.
Note: The majority of the maintenance tasks within this section, require that the equipment is in
a state where it is ready to perform a vertical test, but with the amplifier Switched-DOWN. This
means that the AC mains is energised, i.e. AC mains and pneumatic power still on for all
equipment. Where it is required to be off, this will be stated in the task.

6. Maintenance

Frequency – Daily
The LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit is fitted with 1 Emergency Stop Pushbutton.

Pressure Gauge
ly
On
1. Depress the Emergency Stop Pushbutton.
Note: The pushbutton will now be locked on.

Regulator
e Figure 2 Pedestal Control Unit Panel
nc
re

displayed.
fe

Re

6. Maintenance

turning the knob to the left or right until
the knob pops out to its normal position.
Left-hand and Right-hand sides of the
Vibrator, the Amplifier and any secondary
Emergency Stop Pushbuttons at this time,
ly
by following the procedure above.
On
6.5.2.1.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check System Cables for Damage and Security of
Connections
Frequency – Daily

damage.
e
nc
cable with a Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
re
further advice.

fe
Frequency – Daily
there is no damage.
Re

further advice.

6. Maintenance
6.5.2.1.4 Task Reference §D4 – Check Pneumatic Hoses for Leaks

Frequency – Daily
there are no leaks.
2. This can be simply achieved using a soap
solution around joints and connectors.
ly
further advice.
6.5.2.1.5 Task Reference §D5 – Check Door is Locked and Key with Responsible
Person
On
Frequency – Daily
e
nc
1. Check that the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control
Unit door is closed and locked and that the
key is with a responsible person.
Note: If there is a problem with the door or the
re
key is lost, contact Brüel & Kjær Service

Centre for further advice.
fe
Re
Figure 6 A Typical LDS V8900 Pedestal Control

Unit
6.5.2.2.1 Task Reference §W1 – Cleaning the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit
1. Clean the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit with a soft brush or clean lint-free cloth.
2. If particularly dirty after cleaning with a dry cloth, clean the unit with a damp, lint free cloth,
using warm soapy water and wipe dry.

6. Maintenance
Fuses
This section lists the location, type and value of all fuses in the equipment.
WARNING:
• Before attempting to replace any fuse, ensure that the mains supply is
switched off at the isolator.
Item Location Requirement
Fuse FS1 Internal DIN Rail 500mA, T, 250V
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit.
The LDS V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit
re

6.5.3.2.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) for Noise and Vibration etc.
fe
6.5.3.3.1 Task Reference §W1 – Cleaning the Exterior of the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan)
6.5.3.4.1 Task Reference §Y1 – Cleaning the Fan Rotor
Re
General Maintenance
6.5.3.5.1 Resetting the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit MCCB
6.5.3.5.2 Resetting the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit Thermal Overload Trip

Note: The majority of the maintenance tasks within this section, require that the equipment is in a state where
the AC mains is not energised, i.e. AC mains off and isolated. Where it is required to be on, this will be
stated in the task.

6. Maintenance

Frequency – Daily
1. Check that the Vibrator hose is not damaged

or crushed in any way.
2. Check that the hose clips are properly
secured on the Air Plenum at the bottom of
the Vibrator
CAUTION:
• If the Vibrator Fan Hose leaks, due to damage, not being fitted and secured
ly
correctly or is crushed, the airflow through the Vibrator will be reduced or not
available. If the Vibrator is actually performing a test, the ‘Blower Flow’
interlock will be activated and the amplifier will perform a shut-down of the
On
system. It will not be possible to restart the system until the airflow through
the Vibrator has been restored.
3. When the Cooling Unit (Fan) is running,

check that the hose is not collapsing.
cause and then try to repair it or replace
the hose.
e
further advice.
nc
6.5.3.2.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) for Noise and
Vibration etc.
Frequency – Daily
re
CAUTION:
• This procedure requires that the Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) is running. Wear
appropriate PPE as necessary.
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
1. Run up the Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) and

check that there is no abnormal noise or
vibration.
Note: Abnormal noise and vibration may be an
indicator of a dirty impeller. Follow the
procedure in section 6.5.3.4 to clean the
rotor.
2. Check that the motor cooling fan is running
ly
and that the bearings are not running
‘hot’.
3. If any other fault is found, contact the Brüel
& Kjær Service Centre for advice.
On
Figure 3 A Typical V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit
(Fan)
6.5.3.3.1 Task Reference §W1 – Cleaning the Exterior of the LDS Vibrator Cooling
Unit (Fan)
e
nc
1. Ensure that the electrical supply to the Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) has been switched off and
isolated.
2. Clean the exterior of the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit (Fan) with a soft brush or lint-free cloth.
re
6.5.3.4.1 Task Reference §Y1 – Cleaning the Fan Rotor

Frequency – Yearly, every 3800 hrs or as required
fe
Note: If the fan becomes abnormally noisy or is vibrating, it may be an indicator of a dirty impeller.
Re

6. Maintenance
1. Ensure that the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Rotor Access Panel
(Fan) is switched off and isolated from the
AC Mains.
2. Unscrew and remove the fixings securing
the Rotor Access Panel to the Fan and
retain.
Note: For ease of removal, it may be sensible
to remove the Vibrator Fan Hose from
the Fan.
3. Remove the Rotor Access Panel and put to
one side.
ly
4. Check the impeller blades for damage.
5. If any fault is found, contact the Brüel &
Kjær Service Centre for advice.
On
6. Clean the impeller blades, both front and
back, using a soft dry cloth only. Do not
use liquids of any type.
7. Clean the inside of the fan housing to Figure 4 A Typical V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit
remove any foreign bodies. (Fan)
8. Refit the Rotor Access Panel and secure
using the fixings previously removed.
e
9. Tighten the fixings to a torque of 15 Nm
10. Refit Vibrator Fan Hose if previously
nc
removed.
General Maintenance
6.5.3.5.1 Resetting the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit MCCB
re
MCCB
fe
Note: Should the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit

Starter Kit MCCB trip, the switch lever
Re
will be shown in the mid position.

1. Switch the MCCB Off (down) and then
switch the MCCB On (up).
Note: This procedure must be followed
correctly to ensure that the MCCB is
reset.

Starter Kit

6. Maintenance
6.5.3.5.2 Resetting the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit Thermal Overload Trip
MCCB
Note: The LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit Starter Kit

Thermal Overload Trip has been set for
manual operation and will usually only
ly
trip if the fan is switched on and off
continuously, thereby causing the unit
to heat up and trip.
On
1. After being activated, the Thermal
Overload Trip can be reset by pressing the
blue reset button.
Thermal Overload Trip

Thermal Overload Trip
e Reset Button

nc
Starter Kit
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS XPA-K Amplifier.
ly
On
e
nc
re

fe
6.5.4.1.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check System Cables for Damage and Security of Connections
6.5.4.1.3 Task Reference §D3 – Ensure The Area Around the Amplifier Is Clear of Obstructions
Which Could Prevent Adequate Airflow into The Air Intake Grills
6.5.4.1.4 Task Reference §D4 – Ensure Cooling Fans Are Operating Correctly
Re
6.5.4.1.5 Task Reference §D5 – Fill in Daily Log

6.5.4.1.1 Task Reference §W1 – Check That All Cabinet Panels Are Correctly Fitted
6.5.4.2.1 Task Reference §M1 – Inspect and Clean the Air Intake Dust Filter
6.5.4.3.1 Task Reference §S1 – Check The Interior of the Amplifier for Accumulations of Dust or
Dirt
6.5.4.3.2 Task Reference §S2 – Ensure EMC Gaskets Are Not Damaged and Are Securely Fitted.

6. Maintenance
6.5.4.4.1 Task Reference §Y1 – Replace Dust Filter

Fuses and MCB’s
WARNING:
• Attention is drawn to the safety precautions and hazard warnings contained
within section 2 of this manual.
WARNING:
• Lethal voltages and high temperature metallic areas are present within the
equipment cabinet. Before attempting any work within the cabinet, the
ly
supply must be switched off and locked off at the incoming isolator.
WARNING:
• If it is necessary to access the equipment with covers open and the amplifier
On
switched on, precautions must be taken to ensure that only competent,
Brüel & Kjær trained and authorised engineers are allowed to work on the
equipment
The following routine activities are recommended by Brüel & Kjær at the stated intervals. Note
however that local operating conditions may require the activities be performed at more frequent
intervals than those stated:
e
Contact Brüel & Kjær if any of the following checks are not completed satisfactorily or if there is doubt
as to whether any part of the equipment is operating correctly.
nc
Note: The majority of the maintenance tasks within this section, require that the equipment is in a state where
the AC mains is not energised, i.e. AC mains of and isolated. Where it is required to be on, this will be
re
stated in the task.

Frequency – Daily
fe
Re
1. Depress the Emergency Stop Pushbutton

on the Amplifier Control Panel.
Note: The pushbutton will now be locked on. Emergency Stop
Pushbutton
Figure 2 The XPA-K Amplifier Control Panel

6. Maintenance

displayed.
ly
On
turning the knob to the left or right until
the knob pops out to its normal position.
e
Vibrator, the Pedestal Control Unit and any
secondary Emergency Stop Pushbuttons at
nc
this time, by following the procedure
above.
re
6.5.4.1.2 Task Reference §D2 – Check System Cables for Damage and Security of
Connections
Frequency – Daily
fe

damage.
Re

cause and then try to repair it or replace
the cable with a Brüel & Kjær Spare Part.
4. Contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for
further advice.

6. Maintenance
6.5.4.1.3 Task Reference §D3 – Ensure The Area Around the Amplifier Is Clear of
Obstructions Which Could Prevent Adequate Airflow into The Air Intake Grills
Frequency – Daily
Note: The Amplifier is fitted with fans to cool
the internal equipment. In order for the
airflow to be maintained, it is
recommended that an area of 1 metre
around the Amplifier is kept clear.
1. Check that the area around the Amplifier is
free of any obstuctions, including waste.
ly
6.5.4.1.4 Task Reference §D4 – Ensure Cooling Fans Are Operating Correctly
Frequency – Daily
On
e
nc
1. With the AC power applied to the
Amplifier, check that all the fans on the
rear are operating.
Note: There is no fan fitted to the upper left-
re
hand panel as shown in Figure 6

fe
Re
Figure 6 Rear view of XPA-K Amplifier, Showing

Fan Outlets
6.5.4.1.5 Task Reference §D5 – Fill in Daily Log

Frequency – Daily
1. The equipment history can prove invaluable should advice be required from Brüel & Kjær, so
users are strongly advised to keep a daily log, the information of which may be required in the
event of any warranty claim. See section 6.6 for a Sample Log.

6. Maintenance
6.5.4.1.1 Task Reference §W1 – Check That All Cabinet Panels Are Correctly Fitted
1. Check that all the Amplifier panels are fitted
and all fixings inserted and secure.
CAUTION:
• It is important to check the Amplifier panels are fitted to: -
o Ensure that there is no access to the electrical items inside the
cabinet.
ly
o Ensure that the correct airflow is maintained at the maximum
through the cabinet.
On
6.5.4.2.1 Task Reference §M1 – Inspect and Clean the Air Intake Dust Filter
Frequency – Monthly e Air Intake and
Dust Filter
nc
re
1. Inspect the air intake grilles. Brush off, or

wash with warm soapy water, any dust or
fe
fluff that has accumulated.

2. Ensure that the dust filters are clean and
free from accumulated dirt. Replace any
filters that cannot be fully cleaned.
Re

6. Maintenance
CAUTION:
• It is important to check the Amplifier air intake to: -
o Ensure that the airflow through power modules and rectifier
assemblies be kept to a maximum. All airways must be kept clear of
obstruction and any dust filter which cannot be adequately cleaned
should be replaced.
6.5.4.3.1 Task Reference §S1 – Check The Interior of the Amplifier for
ly
Accumulations of Dust or Dirt
1. Switch off and lock off the isolator for the
On
Amplifier.
WARNING:
• Failure to isolate the AC mains power to the Amplifier may result in serious
personal injury and damage to the equipment.
2. Remove the front and rear panels and check

the interior of the amplifier for
e
accumulations of dust or dirt.
3. Clean, as required, with a soft brush or dry
nc
lint-free cloth; do not use fluids of any kind.
4. Inspect all cooling fans. If dirty, clean the
blades with a dry soft cloth; do not use fluids
of any kind.
5. Continue with section 6.5.4.3.2 below.
re
6.5.4.3.2 Task Reference §S2 – Ensure EMC Gaskets Are Not Damaged and Are
Securely Fitted.
fe
above.
Re
2. Attached to the edges of all panels are EMC

Gaskets. Check that they are not damaged
and are securely fitted to the cabinet
panels.
3. Refit the cabinet panels and tighten the
fixings to a torque of 4 Nm.

6. Maintenance
6.5.4.4.1 Task Reference §Y1 – Replace Dust Filter

Air Intake and

Dust Filter
ly
On
1. Remove the panel housing the Dust filter
and replace the filter.
2. Refit the panels and tighten the fixings to a
torque of 4 Nm. e
nc
re
Fuses and MCB’s

fe
This section lists the location, type and value of all fuses and MCB’s in the amplifier.
WARNING:
Re
• Before attempting to replace any fuse, ensure that the mains supply is
switched off at the 3-phase isolator.


6. Maintenance

ECB1 AC Input Panel
32Vdc, 10A
Step/Start Resistor
Tray
Step/Start Resistor
Tray
Voltage Feedback
Armature Cable
ly
Cable
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance

ly
On
flexibility.
e
nc
re
Combo Systems
fe

Re


6. Maintenance
Applications
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.5.6. Maintenance of the LDS Head Expander

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Unguided Head Expander
ly
On
e
Figure 1 1000 × 1000 Unguided Head Expander mounted on a Typical LDS Lin-E-Air Shaker
nc
Customer Preventative Maintenance
6.5.6.1.1 Task Reference §W1 – Check Head Expander for Signs of Corrosion
6.5.6.1.2 Task Reference §W2 – Check Inserts for Fixing Payloads Are Free from Damage
re
6.5.6.1.3 Task Reference §W3 – Conduct 2g Bare Table Reference Plot Sweep
6.5.6.1.4 Task Reference §M1 – Check Flatness of Head Expander
General LDS Unguided Head Expander Maintenance
fe
6.5.6.2.1 General
6.5.6.2.2 Magnesium Components
Cleaning an LDS Head Expander
Re
Customer Preventative Maintenance

6.5.6.1.1 Task Reference §W1 – Check Head Expander for Signs of Corrosion
1. Examine the surface of the Head Expander for any signs of corrosion.
2. If any corrosion or other damage is found, contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for advice.
3. Always follow the procedure in section 6.5.6.2 below General LDS Unguided Head Expander
Maintenance for the protection of magnesium components.

6. Maintenance
6.5.6.1.2 Task Reference §W2 – Check Inserts for Fixing Payloads Are Free from
Damage
1. Check that there is no damage to the Payload Inserts, particularly in the threads.
2. If any damage is found, contact Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for advice.
Note: It is recommended that only Brüel & Kjær Service personnel replace the Payload Inserts.
6.5.6.1.3 Task Reference §W3 – Conduct 2g Bare Table Reference Plot Sweep
ly
1. Perform a 2g Bare Table Reference Plot Sweep.
Note: Depending on circumstances, this may not always be possible, e.g. if a test payload has been
left on the equipment overnight.
On
6.5.6.1.4 Task Reference §M1 – Check Flatness of Head Expander
1. Use a calibrated steel straight edge and feeler gauges to determine that the Head Expander is flat
to within a tolerance of 0.1mm per metre.
2. If the flatness is outside of this tolerance, then please contact the Brüel & Kjær Service Centre for
further advice.
e
nc
General LDS Unguided Head Expander Maintenance
6.5.6.2.1 General
When not in use the head expander should be stored in a cool dry place. It should be kept out of
contact with dissimilar metals, to obviate the risk of galvanic corrosion.
re
The attachment screws should be stored in such a way that the threads are protected from damage.
6.5.6.2.2 Magnesium Components

fe
Magnesium in a damp atmosphere will corrode extremely quickly. Magnesium head expanders are a
particular case, having large surfaces machined to extremely tight tolerances. It is essential that the
surfaces are protected at all times.
The metal is quite soft and can easily be damaged by careless handling. Operators should be made
Re
aware that the surface must be kept clean and free from swarf or any item that could damage the
surface.
Surfaces can be protected from atmospheric pollution by the use of petroleum jelly.
The use of absorbent material, cardboard, corrugated paper etc. on the magnesium must be avoided
and the surface covered with a liberal coating of water repellent at all times.
Cleaning an LDS Head Expander

The surface of the LDS Head Expander can be cleaned using degreasing agents, e.g. Ambersil
Amberklene FE10.
Cleaning the areas where accelerometers are to be fitted with the degreasing agent, will also help with
bonding the accelerometers to the Head Expander.

6. Maintenance

Features.
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Thermal Barrier
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
Maintenance Procedures for LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Airglide Transportation System

This Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Airglide Transportation System
Airglide Actuator
Airglide Air inlet
ly
On
e
nc
re
Vibrator or Combo
fe
Base Frame
Airglide Air Castor

Re

The Airglide Transportation System option can be fitted to base or trunnion-mounted versions of LDS
vibrators and combos. This option consists of four or six air castors, each fitted beneath an air isolation
mount on base mounted vibrators and combos and fitted directly to the horizontal members on
trunnion mounted vibrators. The air castors allow the vibrator or combo to be floated on a cushion of
compressed air; the vibrator or combo can then be moved using only light hand pressure. On systems,
up to and including the V875 Vibrator or Combo, a grab handle is fitted, to assist vibrator
manoeuvrability.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Thermal Barrier

This LDS Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Thermal Barrier.
ly
Armature
On
e
Figure 3 Typical One Piece LDS Thermal Barrier Kit Figure 4 Typical Sectioned LDS Thermal Barrier Kit
for Head Expanders and Slip Tables
nc
for Head Expanders and Slip Tables
Optional thermal barriers are available for all Vibrator Armatures, Head Expanders and Slip Tables, to
reduce the thermal conductivity between the payload and the mounting surface when the equipment
is used in conjunction with an environmental chamber.
re
Typical Parameters
Paramater Armatures
Tables
fe

Re
Attachment holes are provided to suit mounting face of Armature, Head Expander or Slip Plate
Thermal barriers have holes for environmental chamber integration. Holes for securing the clamping
strips are already on the top face of the Thermal Barrier for a Head Expander and on the side faces of
the Thermal Barrier for Slip Plates and are fitted with M6 helicoil inserts.
Thermal Barrier Kits for Armatures include; thermal barrier only
Thermal Barrier Kits for Head Expanders and Slip Plates include; thermal barrier, lifting eyebolts (where
required), clamp plates (where appropriate), clamp plate corners, attachment screws and washers.

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

This Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 5 . A Typical LDS Cooling Unit Silencer with an LDS Cooling Unit and Hose
For some of the LDS Cooling Units, an optional LDS Cooling Unit Silencer may be fitted to the outlet
fe
port of the fan, in order to reduce the noise output of the Cooling Unit.
A noise attenuation value of up to 12dB can be achieved, using the optional LDS Cooling Unit Silencer.
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

This Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Plinth Cover Kit
ly
Figure 6 A Typical LDS Plinth Cover Kit
On
The LDS Plinth Cover Kit has been designed to cover open areas and restrict access to the inside of the
XPA-K Amplifier from the bottom of the cabinet in environments where rodents and other pests may
cause damage to the electrical equipment.
The cable entry cover plates provide access for cables and the plinth cover filters obstruct access whilst
still providing a flow of air.
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Maintenance Procedures for LDS Quiet Mode

This Vibration Testing System is not supplied with LDS Quiet Mode.
LDS Quiet Mode includes an additional Set up option on the amplifier, and sensors fitted to the vibrator
to monitor the temperatures of the armature and field coils.
ly
On
Figure 8 A Typical Control System Page for Quiet Mode
e
vibrator to be operated for limited periods without the Cooling Unit (fan) in operation.
nc
Siting the Amplifier, the Vibrator Hydraulic Unit (and where fitted, the Slip Table Hydraulic Unit),
outside of the test cell, along with not running the Cooling Unit, significantly reduces the system
acoustic noise typically from >100dBA down to <70dBA.
The amplifier may also be configured to change the field power level and the number of power
modules enabled.
re
The armature and field coil temperature sensors are interlocked via the amplifier to protect the
vibrator from overheating. Coil temperatures are displayed on the Amplifier Control System Page (see
Figure 8) and can be monitored during Standard Mode running as well as during Quiet Mode.
fe
LDS Quiet Mode is available as a system upgrade. Should longer hoses and cables be required to site
the ancillaries outside of the test cell, this should be requested at the time of ordering.
Contact your local Brüel & Kjær VTS representative for more details.
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
6.6. LDS Sample Daily Log

The equipment history can prove invaluable should advice be required from Brüel & Kjær, so users are
strongly advised to keep a daily log recording the following information (which may be required in the
event of any warranty claim):
* number of hours run
* timetable of system faults/interlock trips
* cause of faults/interlock trips (if known)
* action taken to rectify faults
ly
* drive plots and control strategy of tests run, especially endurance and demanding
tests.
* any matters of concern
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
Daily Log for LDS Equipment

Serial Equipment
No
Date Operator No of Hours Run hrs
Time Event Cause Action Taken
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

Table of Contents
7.1. Spares Classification
7.1.1. Lifed Parts (LP)
7.1.2. High Value Parts (HVP)
7.1.3. General Parts (GP)
7.1.4. Consumables (CP)
ly
7.1.5. Tools (TLS)
7.2. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Vibrator
7.3. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
On
7.4. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Cooling Unit
7.5. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Amplifier
7.6. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Combo or Standalone Slip Table
7.7. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Head Expander
7.8. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Supplementary Features
e
nc
7.1. Spares Classification
7.1.1. Lifed Parts (LP)
re
Any item that, as a result of its use in the equipment, will wear, deteriorate or fail is included in this
section. Items considered are fuses, bulbs, ‘O’ rings, seals, filters, load supports and any other parts.
7.1.2. High Value Parts (HVP)

fe
This category comprises items of high value that have a history of movement. Items such as armature
kits or armatures, field coils, pumps, motors and any other parts are considered.
7.1.3. General Parts (GP)

Re
Items in this category are electrical and mechanical items that have a spares movement history or, due
to the nature of the design of the product, have a history of usage. Items of this nature are normally
active mechanical, electronic or electrical components such as relays, transistors, air switches,
pneumatic valves and any other similar parts.
7.1.4. Consumables (CP)

This category comprises all items that will require replenishment on an on-going basis. Such items will
include oils, grease, cleaning materials, recording paper, adhesives, silicon, rubber gloves, water
purifiers, filters and any other parts.

7.1.5. Tools (TLS)

This lists the tool kit recommended to undertake the level of maintenance as specified in section 6.
Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.2. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Vibrator

These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS V8900 Vibrator.
Note: We reserve the right to change part numbers for spare parts without warning.
Part No Description Extended Description Qty Category
621410 TELLUS S2 M 68 20l drum, Vib hyd unit holds 45l. 45l CP
1063150 LDS,SEAL, DUST, Ø440, V8900 1 LP
Degauss Coil Fuses - fitted to
708850 LDS FUSE,8A, T,250V 2 LP
vibrator Terminal Panel
ICS Enclosure Dust Cover for USB
2034880 DUST COVER, MINI USB 1 GP
ly
port
LDS INSERT, TABLE, M8, RAISED,
1061720 17 GP
V8900
On
LDS INSERT, TABLE, M10, RAISED,
1061730 17 GP
V8900
LDS INSERT, TABLE,3/8UNC, RAISED,
1061740 17 GP
V8900
4068760 LDS FUSE KIT, V8900 1 GP
Note: Fuses in this list are included in 4068760 LDS Fuse Kit, V8900. 1-2 fuses of each type per kit.
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.3. Spare Parts List for the LDS Pedestal Control Unit
These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit.
708380 LDS FUSE,500mA,T,250V 1 LP
LDS
714660 Air Isolation Regulator. 1 GP
REGULATOR,MINIATURE,1/4BSP
699330 LOCK RING Used with Regulator 714660. 1 GP
LDS REGULATOR, PROPORTIONAL
ly
2033850 PRESSURE, VPPM, 6mm, 1/8", 10 Load Support regulator. 1 GP
BAR
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.4. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Vibrator Cooling Unit
These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS V8900 Vibrator Cooling Unit.
2033550 HOSE, Ø10", 3.7MTRS 1 GP
CLIP, HOSE, WORMDRIVE, SUITS DIA
2034450 2 GP
235-267MM
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.5. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Amplifier

These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS XPA-K Amplifier.
11
LDS MK4A,8KW,POWER MODULE
4026910 Individual power module only. / HVP
ASSEMBLY
16
1066740 FILTER, DUST, XPAK Power Bay Front Panel. 1 CP
LDS Input Panel. Mains input fuses. FS1,
049980 3 LP
ly
FUSE,125A,660V,SEMICONDUCTOR FS2 & FS3.
Supply Transformer. HT Fuses. FS7,
624680 LDS FUSE,630A,240V 3 LP
FS8 & FS9.
On
Voltage Feedback Armature Cable.
2018560 FUSE,ANTI-SURGE,1A 2 LP
CFS1 & CFS2.
Voltage Feedback Field Cable. CFS3
& CFS4.
Voltage Feedback Power Module
Supply. CFS5 & CFS6.
624820 LDS FUSE,63A,240V Power Module. Supply FS41 1 LP
708800 LDS FUSE,125A,240V
e
FAN, AXIAL COMPACT, DC, 119 x
Power Module. Output FS40 FS42.
Power Bay Lower Rear Fan Panel
2 LP
2034230 4 GP
119 x 38 Assembly
nc
FAN, AXIAL COMPACT, DC, 119 x Power Bay Upper Rear Fan Panel
2034230 12 GP
119 x 38 Assembly
Control Bay Lower Rear Fan Panel
2035080 FAN, AXIAL, DC, 150 x 150 x 55 3 GP
Assembly
re

fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.6. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Combo or Standalone Slip
Table
ly
On
flexibility.
e
nc

re
Combo Systems
fe
Re


Applications
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.7. LDS Head Expander Spare Parts

These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS Unguided Head Expander
7.7.1. Spare Parts for LDS Head Expanders with M8 Fixings to

Armature
LDS SCREW, M8x70mm, SOCKET Head Expander to Armature fixing
247218 17 GP
CAP screws (M8).
ly
For tightening expander fixing
920790 LDS KEY, WRENCH, 6mm 1 TLS
screws (M8).
On
7.7.2. Spare Parts for LDS Head Expanders with M10 Fixings to
Armature
LDS SCREW, M10x70mm, SOCKET Head Expander to Armature fixing
247318 17 GP
CAP screws (M10).
HEX KEY WRENCH, 8MM A/F, For tightening expander fixing
1037640 1 TLS
300MM LG, P
e screws (M10).
7.7.3. Spare Parts for LDS Head Expanders with 3/8UNC Fixings to
nc
Armature
Head Expander to Armature fixing
245127 SCREW,3/8UNCX2 3/4IN, SOCKET 17 GP
re
screws (3/8UNC).
HEX KEY WRENCH, 5/16" A/F, For tightening expander fixing
1037660 1 TLS
300MM LG, P screws (3/8UNC).
7.7.4. Common LDS Head Expander Spare Parts

fe

For tightening expander fixing
2002000 TORQUE WRENCH 5LB.FT-45LB.FT 1 TLS
bolts.
Re
7.7.5. Spare Parts for LDS Thermal Barriers with M8 Inserts on the
Head Expander
Thermal Barrier to Head Expander
LDS SCREW, M8x35mm SOCKET fixing screws (M8).
247261 - GP
CAP (Quantity dependant on
barrier/expander size)

7.7.6. Spare Parts for LDS Thermal Barriers with M10 Inserts on the
Head Expander
fixing screws (M10).
247362 SCREW, M10 X 40, SOCKET CAP, S/S - GP
(Quantity dependant on
7.7.7. Spare Parts for LDS Thermal Barriers with 3/8UNC Inserts on
the Head Expander
ly
SCREW,3/8UNCX1 1/2INSOCKET fixing screws (3/8UNC).
245168 - GP
On
CAP (Quantity dependant on
7.7.8. Common LDS Thermal Barrier Spare Parts

Fixing clamps to sides of thermal
LDS SCREW, M6x12mm, BUTTON barrier.
396990
HEAD
e (Quantity dependant on
- GP
nc
re
fe
Re

7.8. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Supplementary Features

Features.
7.8.1. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
7.8.2. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Thermal Barrier
7.8.3. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
7.8.4. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
7.8.5. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
ly
7.8.6. Spare Parts Lists for LDS Quiet Mode
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.8.1. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Airglide Transportation System
This Vibration Testing System is not supplied with an LDS Airglide Transportation System
Airglide Actuator
Airglide Air inlet
ly
On
e
nc
re
Vibrator or Combo
fe
Base Frame
Airglide Air Castor

Re

The Airglide Transportation System option can be fitted to base or trunnion-mounted versions of LDS
vibrators and combos. This option consists of four or six air castors, each fitted beneath an air isolation
mount on base mounted vibrators and combos and fitted directly to the horizontal members on
trunnion mounted vibrators. The air castors allow the vibrator or combo to be floated on a cushion of
compressed air; the vibrator or combo can then be moved using only light hand pressure. On systems,
up to and including the V875 Vibrator or Combo, a grab handle is fitted, to assist vibrator
manoeuvrability.

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.8.2. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Thermal Barrier

These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS Thermal Barrier.
7.8.2.1 Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Head Expander Thermal Barrier
Part No Description Category
4039410 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 610x610-440, M8 GP
4039440 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 610X610-440, 3/8UNC GP
4039940 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 610X610-440, M10 GP
ly
4039450 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 762X762-440, 3/8UNC GP
GP
On
4039430 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1000X1000-440, M8
4039460 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1000X1000-440 3/8UNC GP
4063580 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1220x1220-440-M8-A100G-E GP
LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1220x1220-440-3/8UNC-A101.6G-
4063600 GP
E
4063590 LDS Thermal Barrier Kit, Head Expander 1220x1220-440-M10 GP
e
7.8.2.1 Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Armature Thermal Barrier
nc
1045490 LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 17 holes, M8 GP
1027480 LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 17 holes, M10 & 3/8UNC GP
1068270 LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 29 Holes, M8 GP
re
1068280 LDS Thermal Barrier, 440 dia, 29 Holes, M10 & 3/8UNC GP
7.8.2.1 Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Slip Table Thermal Barrier
fe

1067720 LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT750-M8-2B GP
1067740 LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT750-3/8"UNC-2B GP
Re

1065930 LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT900-3/8UNC-2B GP
1065560 LDS Thermal Barrier, V8900-HBT1220-38UNC-3B GP

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.8.3. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer.
2035690 LDS Silencer, V8900, 50/60Hz 1 GP
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.8.4. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
These Spare Parts Lists are for the LDS Plinth Cover Kit.
4069430 LDS Plinth Cover Kit, XPA88/128K
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

7.8.5. Spare Parts Lists for the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
Normal Filling Point PRES Filling Point Slip Plate
ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
7.8.6. Spare Parts Lists for LDS Quiet Mode

There are no user serviceable items and therefore no user spare parts available for LDS Quiet Mode.
Should any maintenance or spare parts be required, contact Brüel & Kjær VTS Service.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Maintenance
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8. Installation Procedures
Table of Contents
8.1. General Installation Notes
8.2. Installing the LDS Vibration Testing System
8.3. Installing the LDS Pedestal Unit
8.4. Installing the LDS Cooling Unit
8.5. Installing the LDS Amplifier
ly
8.6. Installing the LDS Cable Set and Pneumatic Hoses
8.7. Installing the LDS Head Expander
8.8. Installing the LDS Supplementary Features
On
8.9. Post Installation Checks
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0800-F-V8900HBT-UM-EN-02

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
0800-F-V8900HBT-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

8.1. General Installation Notes

8.1.1. Sequence of Installation
8.1.2. Siting the LDS Vibration Testing System
8.1.2.1 Siting the Vibrator or Combo
8.1.2.2 Siting the Hydraulic Power Supply Unit(s)
8.1.2.3 Siting the Pedestal Control Unit
8.1.2.4 Siting the Cooling Unit (Fan)
ly
8.1.2.5 Siting the Amplifier
8.1.2.6 Siting the Cable Set
8.1.3. Securing Equipment to the Floor
On
8.1.4. Inspection of Threaded Items
8.1.4.1 Inspecting Bolts and Screws
8.1.4.2 Inspecting Bolt Mating Threads
8.1.4.3 Inspecting Eyebolts
8.1.4.4 Inspecting Eyebolt Mating Threads
e
8.1.5. General Guidance on the use of Lifting Accessories
8.1.5.1 Eyebolts
nc
8.1.5.2 Slings
8.1.6. Lifting Details
8.1.6.1 Trunnion-Mounted Vibrator
8.1.6.2 Vibrator/Slip Table Combos
re
8.1.6.3 Cooling Unit

8.1.6.4 Head Expanders
8.1.6.5 Amplifier
fe
8.1.7. System Configuration

Re

WARNING:
• Incorrect lifting methods can cause serious personal injury and damage to the
equipment.
• Attention is drawn to the safety precautions and hazard warnings contained within
the preface to this manual.
• Lethal voltages and high temperature metallic areas are present within the
equipment cabinet. Before attempting to alter any links or connections the supply
must be switched off at the incoming isolator.
• If it is necessary to access the equipment with covers open and the amplifier
switched on, precautions must be taken to ensure that only Brüel & Kjær trained
ly
and authorised engineers are allowed to work on the equipment.
• Whenever options allowing the vibrator to be moved, raised or lowered are fitted
On
8.1.1. Sequence of Installation

e
The LDS Vibration Testing System may be installed in the following sequence or to suit site conditions:
-
nc
1. Vibrator or Combo
2. Cable Set
3. Cooling Unit
re
4. Amplifier
5. Pedestal Control Unit
6. Hydraulic Power Supply Unit(s)
fe
8.1.2. Siting the LDS Vibration Testing System

8.1.2.1 Siting the Vibrator or Combo
Re
1. The Vibrator or Combo must be sited on a stable, flat floor, capable of supporting the mass of the
equipment. Details of the floor loading specification is included in section 4 Technical Data.
Note: For systems without the LDS Airglide option, some unevenness of the floor surface can be
accommodated, as Vibrators are fitted with Jacking Screws and Combos are fitted with Air
Isolators.
2. Where the equipment is supplied with the LDS Airglide Transportation System, the floor surface
must comply with the specification given in section 4 Technical Data. Failure to comply may result
in damage to the LDS Airglide Transportation System and subsequent loss of service.
3. There must be sufficient clearance to permit a 2 metre (78 in) Exclusion (Danger) Zone around the
Vibrator or Combo.

4. Ensure that the positioning of all equipment to be installed is compatible with the length of
interconnecting cables (refer to the interconnection diagram in section 10).
5. Ensure that the area where the vibrator is to be installed can be maintained free from contamination
by ferromagnetic particles.
8.1.2.2 Siting the Hydraulic Power Supply Unit(s)

The Vibrator is supplied with a Hydraulic Power Supply Unit whether it is a stand-alone Vibrator or part
of a Combo.
An additional Hydraulic Power Supply Unit is supplied for the Slip Table of a Combo.
1. Place the Hydraulic Power Supply Unit(s) in a suitable position, so that they do not interfere with
operations around the Vibrator or Combo, but close enough to connect the hydraulic hoses.
ly
Note: The Hydraulic Power Supply Unit(s) require separate 3 phase AC outlets from the Amplifier.
8.1.2.3 Siting the Pedestal Control Unit
On
1. The Pedestal Control Unit must be sited on a stable, flat floor, close enough to the Vibrator or
Combo, the Amplifier and the Cooling Unit (Fan), in order that it may be connected using the Cable
Set.
Note: Some unevenness of the floor surface can be accommodated, as the pedestal is fitted with
levelling feet. e
8.1.2.4 Siting the Cooling Unit (Fan)
1. The Cooling Unit (Fan) must be sited on a stable, flat floor, close enough to the Vibrator or Combo
nc
the amplifier and the Pedestal Control Unit, in order that it may be connected, both electrically and
also via the ducting hose.
2. The Cooling Unit (Fan) may be sited remotely, but Bruel and Kjaer must be consulted for advice and
confirmation.
re
8.1.2.5 Siting the Amplifier

1. The Amplifier must be sited on a stable, flat floor.
Note: Some unevenness of the floor surface can be accommodated, as the cabinet is fitted with jacking
fe
feet.
2. The Amplifier should be moved into position using a forklift or pallet truck and finally manoeuvred
using the plinth mounted wheels (where fitted).
Re
3. Once in position, the plinth mounted Jacking Feet should be used to raise the cabinet off of the
wheels (where fitted) and also to level the unit.
4. There must be clearance of at least 1 metre (39 in) between each unit and any wall or other
equipment.
5. Areas immediately around and below the units must be clear to allow free airflow through cabinets.
8.1.2.6 Siting the Cable Set

1. Cabling should be contained within ducting/trunking to avoid undue strain on the connection
terminals (see also Section 9).

8.1.3. Securing Equipment to the Floor

Some of the LDS equipment must be secured to the floor, e.g. Trunnion Mounted Vibrators, Cooling
Units (Fans) etc.
Where this is required, follow the fixing bolt manufacturer’s instructions for drilling and securing.
8.1.4. Inspection of Threaded Items

8.1.4.1 Inspecting Bolts and Screws
1. Bolt Heads should be clean, free from
wear, corrosion and damage,
ly
especially around the bearing surface
(the circular underside of the bolt
head that makes contact with the
part/washer) and the mating faces for
On
the driver type, (e.g. the flat surfaces
for a spanner or the driving recess in
a socket head cap screw).
2. Threads should be clean, free from
wear, corrosion and damage.
3. There should be no distortion of the
e
bolt, i.e. bent, reduced diameter, nor
should any damage be present, i.e.
Figure 1 A Typical Socket Head Cap Screw
nicks, cracks, gouges, or corrosion.

nc
4. Apply a light smear of oil to the
threads of the expander securing
screws and confirm that they work
freely in the inserts before placing the
re
expander on the armature.
8.1.4.2 Inspecting Bolt Mating Threads

Bolt Mating Threads should be inspected before use, paying particular attention to the following
fe
features:
1. Threads should be free from wear, corrosion and damage.
2. There should be no debris present in the thread.
Re

8.1.4.3 Inspecting Eyebolts

Eyebolts used for lifting purposes, should be inspected before use, paying particular attention to the
following features:
1. The marking on the eyebolts should be

legible, e.g.
a. The manufacturer’s identification
mark or symbol;
b. The nominal size.
c. The axial working load limit in
general service.
ly
d. The traceability code to enable
any particular eyebolt or batch
of eyebolts to be identified with
On
the manufacturer’s certificate;
2. Threads and the collar contact surface
should be clean, free from wear,
corrosion and damage.
Figure 2 A Typical Eyebolt
3. There should be no distortion of the
eyebolt, i.e. bent shank, deformed eye,
e
reduced diameter at the undercut, nor
should any damage be present, i.e.
nicks, cracks, gouges, or corrosion.
nc
WARNING:
• Do not use defective eyebolts.
re
• Failure to comply with this warning can result in serious personal injury.
8.1.4.4 Inspecting Eyebolt Mating Threads

Eyebolt Mating Threads should be inspected before use, paying particular attention to the following
fe
features:
1. Threads and the collar contact surface should be free from wear, corrosion and damage.
2. There should be no debris present in the thread nor on the eyebolt collar contact surface.
Re
8.1.5. General Guidance on the use of Lifting Accessories

Do not attempt lifting operations unless you understand the use and limitations to use of the
equipment, the slinging procedures and the mode factors to be applied.
8.1.5.1 Eyebolts
1. Tighten the eyebolt down firmly by hand. DO NOT use a tommy bar or other implement to tighten
down the eyebolt.
2. The eye must be in the correct plane for lifting and the collar must sit evenly on the contact surface.
Use shims between the collar and the mating surface, but do not machine the collar or over tighten
to achieve this.

8.1.5.2 Slings
1. Ensure that slings are free of damage and are not frayed
2. Ensure that the label is attached to the sling detailing safe working load and current inspection data.
CAUTION:
• Never use damaged slings or accessories.
• Never twist, knot or tie slings.
• Never hammer slings into position.
• Never overload slings due to the weight of the load or the mode of use.
ly
• Never trap slings when landing the load.
• Never drag slings over floors etc. or attempt to pull trapped slings from under loads.
On
8.1.6. Lifting Details
8.1.6.1 Trunnion-Mounted Vibrator
The trunnion-mounted vibrator is provided with four M48 holes to accommodate lifting
eyebolts as shown on the outline drawing. To lift the vibrator, a crane having a minimum
e
lifting capacity to suit the mass (refer to section 4 for actual value) must be used together
with suitable lifting slings and spreader. No attempt must be made to lift the vibrator using
attachment points other than the eyebolt holes.
nc
8.1.6.2 Vibrator/Slip Table Combos
Two lifting lugs are provided the end of the slip table. The lugs must be used in conjunction
with lifting eyebolts fitted to the trunnion supports (see outline drawing). No other method
of lifting the combo must be attempted.
re
To lift the combo, a crane having a minimum lifting capacity to suit the mass (refer to
section 4 for actual value) must be used.
Two pairs of chains are required: the effective lengths of the chains should be such that the
fe
unit remains horizontal when the crane takes the weight. The chains should, if necessary,
be used with a spreader to ensure that they remain vertical.
WARNING:
Re
• The total mass of the Vibrator/Slip Table Combo is given in section 4.

• Failure to comply with these lifting instructions may result in death or serious
personal injury.
8.1.6.3 Cooling Unit

LDS Cooling Units are either for air cooled vibrators, where an extraction fan is required, or
water cooled vibrators, where a water cooling unit (which may be combined with a field
power supply module) is required.
To lift the fan, a crane together with suitable lifting slings and spreader must be used.

To lift the water cooling unit, a forklift or for units fitted with lifting points, a crane together
with suitable lifting slings and spreader must be used. When using a crane for lifting, no
attempt must be made to lift the unit using attachment points other than the lifting lugs.
8.1.6.4 Head Expanders

Unguided head expanders are supplied with either 1 or 2 lifting eyes for insertion into
specific points on the surface table.
Guided head expanders are fitted with 4 lifting eyes.
To lift the unguided head expanders, a crane together with suitable lifting slings and
spreader if required, must be used. No attempt must be made to lift the unit using
attachment points other than the lifting eyes.
ly
8.1.6.5 Amplifier
The Amplifier is housed in a cabinet, that may also have plinth mounted castors, which
On
must be lifted with a fork or pallet type lift.
The cabinet is packed for transportation in heavy-duty wrap-round cardboard enclosures
which cover the sides and top of the equipment.
CAUTION:
• Special Lifting instructions for any particular configuration will be printed on the
outer packaging. Where they exist, they must be strictly adhered to.
e
8.1.7. System Configuration
nc
Following physical installation and electrical connection, the system must be configured by
Brüel & Kjaer trained personnel in accordance with the vibrator details supplied on form
Q.S. 80-70-037, Page 2.
WARNING:
re
• If the vibration test system is used before being configured as described above,
damage to the equipment may result.
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.2. Installing the LDS Vibration Testing System

This is the installation procedure for an LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
This section provides general guidance on the procedures required to install an LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air
Trunnion Mounted Vibrator test system. It should be read in conjunction with the appropriate system
interconnection diagram and outline drawing included with this manual in section 10, together with
the appropriate documentation for the signal source/controller to be used with the system.
Section 4 ‘Specification’ details the environmental requirements of system components and the
services which the customer is responsible for providing.
ly
8.2.1. Installing the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
8.2.2. Installing the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply
On
8.2.1. Installing the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
1. Check that all electrical and pneumatic services as detailed in section 4 Specification /
Datasheets are available (refer to outline and interconnection drawings).
e
2. Check the equipment received against the packing list. Inspect all equipment for transit
damage, and advise Brüel & Kjaer of any problems within 48 hours.
3. Ensure that suitable equipment is available for lifting the Vibrator/Slip Table Combo assembly
nc
into position.
4. If an Airglide option is fitted to the vibrator assembly, check that the floor surface is suitable
as specified in section 4 Specification / Datasheets, ‘Airglide transportation system’.
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1. Lifting the LDS V8900 Lin-E-Air Trunnion Mounted Vibrator
5. Attach Lifting Equipment (not supplied) to the Vibrator.

6. Lift the Vibrator into position, ensuring that the lifting strops / chains are kept vertical at all
times
re
WARNING:
• The lifting strops / chains attached to the lifting eyes and brackets on the Vibrator
MUST be vertical at all times during a lift.
fe
• Failure to follow this procedure may result in serious equipment damage and render
the Vibrator unserviceable.
Re

7. Enter the Trunnion Base Fixings through

the Trunnion Support Base into the Floor
Anchors, but leave loose at this stage.
8. Adjust the 4 Jacking Screws until the
armature table is perfectly horizontal.
9. The Pad Guide Shoulder Bolts do not need
to be loosened.
10. Grout underneath the Trunnion Support
Base and allow to set.
11. Tighten the Trunnion Base Fixings to a
torque of 200 N m (148 lbf ft).
ly
Jacking Screw
Trunnion Base Fixings Jacking Pad
On
Trunnion Support Base Pad Guide
Shoulder Bolts
Figure 2 Vibrator Jacking Arrangement
Note: Details of connecting the electrical and pneumatic systems are given in section 8.6 Installing the
LDS Cable Set.
8.2.2. Installing the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply

e
As the Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply is a stand-alone unit mounted on castors, the only installation
required is the connection of the flow and return hoses between the Vibrator and the Hydraulic Power
nc
Supply and the 3 phase AC mains.
re
1. Screw the supply hose fitting onto the

connector on the Vibrator Hydraulic
Power Supply Unit.
2. Tighten the fitting to a torque of 35 Nm
fe
(25 lbf ft)

3. Screw the return hose fitting onto the
connector on the Vibrator Hydraulic
Power Supply Unit.
Re
4. Tighten the fitting to a torque of 60 Nm

(44 lbf ft)
5. Route the hydraulic hoses so that there a
no kinks, are not in a position to be
damaged and so they do not cause a
hazard, e.g. a trip hazard.
Figure 3 Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit

6. Screw the supply hose fitting onto the

Vibrator Hydraulic Flow Connection Point.
7. Tighten the fitting to a torque of 15-16 Nm
(11-12 lbf ft)
8. Screw the return hose fitting onto the
Vibrator Hydraulic Return Connection
Point.
9. Tighten the fitting to a torque of 15-16 Nm
(11-12 lbf ft)
10. Fill the Hydraulic Oil reservoir with the Figure 4 Vibrator Hydraulic Connection Points
selected oil (Shell Tellus S2 M 68).
ly
Vibrator Hydraulic
11. Connect the Vibrator HPS to the 3-phase
Flow Connection Point
mains supply, in accordance with the
Interconnection Diagram included in
section 10 of this manual.
On
Note: Correct rotation for the pump motor is
clockwise when viewed from the motor
end. If the motor rotates in the wrong Load Support
direction, reverse any two phases. Connection Point
12. Switch on the Vibrator HPS. Check that
the indicated pressure reads Vibrator Hydraulic
e
approximately 172 bar/2500 lbf/in².
13. Allow the HPS to operate for at least 15
Return Connection Point
minutes. Check for oil leaks and that oil Figure 5 Vibrator Pneumatic and Hydraulic
nc
pressure has been maintained. Connection Points
re

1. Trunnion Support Base to Floor Anchor M16 200 N m (148 lbf ft)
fe
Vibrator Hydraulic Supply Hose Fitting to

2. 35 Nm (25 lbf ft)
Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit
Vibrator Hydraulic Return Hose Fitting to

Re
3. 60 Nm (44 lbf ft)

Vibrator Hydraulic Power Supply Unit
Vibrator Hydraulic Supply Hose Fitting to 15-16 Nm (11-12 lbf

4. Vibrator Hydraulic Flow Connection Point ft)
Vibrator Hydraulic Return Hose Fitting to 15-16 Nm (11-12 lbf

5. Vibrator Hydraulic Return Connection Point ft)

8.3. Installing the LDS Pedestal Unit

ly
On
e
nc
This section provides general guidance on the procedures required to install an LDS V8900 Pedestal
Control Unit. It should be read in conjunction with the appropriate system interconnection diagram
and outline drawing included with this manual in section 10.
re
Section 4 ‘Technical Data’ details the environmental requirements of system components and the
WARNING:
fe
• Incorrect lifting methods can cause serious personal injury, and damage to the
equipment.
Re

• Lethal voltages are present within the equipment. Before attempting to alter any links
or connections the supply must be switched off at the incoming isolator.
• If it is necessary to access the equipment with covers open and the amplifier switched
on, precautions must be taken to ensure that only competent, Brüel & Kjær trained,
electronic or electrical engineers are allowed to work on the equipment.

8.3.1. Installing the LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit

1. Check that all electrical and pneumatic services as detailed in section 4 Technical Data are
available (refer also to the outline and interconnection drawings in section 10 Schematics).
2. Check the equipment received against the packing list. Inspect all equipment for transit damage,
and advise Brüel & Kjaer of any problems within 48 hours.
3. Ensure that suitable equipment is available for lifting the unit into position (if required).
4. Put the unit in position, remembering that

the cables are of a specific length and level
using the Levelling Feet.
ly
Note: The LDS V8900 Pedestal Control Unit is a free-
standing unit and does not require fixing
down to the floor..
On
Figure 2. The Levelling Feet of the LDS V8900
Pedestal Control Unit
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.4. Installing the LDS Cooling Unit

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Cooling Fan
ly
On
e
nc
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Cooling Fan
This section provides general guidance on the procedures required to install an LDS Cooling Fan. It
re
should be read in conjunction with the appropriate system interconnection diagram and outline
drawing included with this manual in section 10.
Section 4 ‘Technical Data’ details the environmental requirements of system components and the
fe
WARNING:
• Incorrect lifting methods can cause serious personal injury, and damage to the
equipment.
Re
• Lethal voltages are present within the equipment. Before attempting to alter any links
or connections the supply must be switched off at the incoming isolator.
• If it is necessary to access the equipment with covers open and the amplifier switched
on, precautions must be taken to ensure that only Brüel & Kjær trained and
authorised engineers are allowed to work on the equipment.
8.4.1. Siting the LDS Cooling Fan
8.4.2. Installing the LDS Cooling Fan
8.4.3. Installing the LDS Cooling Unit Starter Kit

8.4.1. Siting the LDS Cooling Fan

CAUTION:
• Ensure that there is sufficient space around the Fan Drive Motor for cooling air and
that the outlet from the fan is not blocked or disrupted in any way. The minimum
distance between the fan motor and a wall is 0.25 D where D is motor fan cowl air
inlet diameter (for the V8900 Fan ≈ 100mm).
• Ensure fan is not located in an area that can impose high levels of vibration and
ambient temperatures. Ambient temperatures should not exceed 40°C unless
ly
designed for such conditions.
8.4.2. Installing the LDS Cooling Fan
On
1. Check that all electrical services as detailed in section 4 Technical Data are available (refer also to
the outline and interconnection drawings in section 10 Schematics).
2. Check the equipment received against the packing list. Inspect all equipment for transit damage,
and advise Brüel & Kjær of any problems within 48 hours.
3. Check that the fan rotates freely. Report and rectify any problem before starting up fan.
4. Ensure safety guards are fitted and inlet & outlet are free from any transit blanking off plates.
e
5. Ensure that suitable equipment is available for lifting the Cooling Fan into position.
6. Put the unit in a suitable position so as to be able to route the extraction hose between the
Vibrator and the Cooling Fan allowing for a sufficient length of hose for the Vibrator to be
nc
rotated, when required. Ensure that the placement of the Cooling Unit (Fan) permits the cable
from the Pedestal Control Unit to the Cooling Unit (Fan) to be routed safely.
re
7. When securing the unit to the floor, mark

fe
the floor and fit floor anchor bolts in

accordance with the outline drawing
included in section 10 of this manual.
8. Reposition the unit and secure to the floor
Re
anchors, tightening the fixings to a torque

to suit the floor anchors used.
Note: Floor fixings are to be supplied by the
customer to suit the actual floor
requirements.
Figure 2. Securing the LDS Cooling Fan

9. Route the hose between the Cooling Fan

and the Vibrator, ensuring that it will not
cross walkways etc., and cause a hazard.
CAUTION: HOSE ROUTING
• Ensure that the hose is supported correctly all the way along its length and
especially at the fan end. If it crosses a gap, it may need supporting from above
or below, to prevent it sagging.
• When routing the hose, try to keep it as straight as possible; any bends will have
a negative effect on the airflow.
• Ensure that a sufficient length of hose is allowed for when the Vibrator is
ly
rotated.
• Ensure that the placement of the Cooling Unit (Fan) permits the cable from the
Pedestal Control Unit to the Cooling Unit (Fan) to be routed safely.
On
e
10. Connect the hose to the Cooling Fan and
secure with the clips provided.
nc
re
Figure 3 Securing the Hose

fe
Re

8.4.3. Installing the LDS Cooling Unit Starter Kit

Control Cable MCCB
Connection Point
ly
On
e
Isolator
nc
Output Connection Point
AC Input Connection Point
Figure 4 LDS Cooling Unit Starter Kit
1. Mount the cabinet on a suitable wall, close to the position of the LDS Cooling Unit (Fan).
re
2. Fit the conduit (not supplied) to the AC Input hole and connect the 3 phase AC Input cables to the
AC Isolator, in accordance with the interconnection diagram in section 10.
3. Fit the conduit between the Starter Kit and the LDS Cooling Unit (Fan) and connect the cables in
accordance with the interconnection diagram in section 10.
fe
Re

8.5. Installing the LDS Amplifier

This is the installation procedure for an LDS XPAK Amplifier
This section provides general guidance on the procedures required to install an XPAK Amplifier. This
section should be read in conjunction with the appropriate system interconnection diagram and
outline drawing; together with the appropriate Installation and Operating Manual for the signal
source/controller selected.
Refer to section 4 for technical data and requirements for the amplifier.
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 1 A Typical XPAK Amplifier

fe
The Amplifier must be sited on a stable, level non-combustible floor.

WARNING:
• The Amplifier MUST NOT be sited on any surface that is combustible.
Re
There must be clearance of at least 1 metre (39 in) between the amplifier and any wall or other
equipment. The area immediately around and below the amplifier must be clear to allow free airflow
through the cabinet.
Generally, cabling should be contained within ducting/trunking (not supplied) to avoid undue strain on
the connection terminals.
The complete amplifier system is housed in a single cabinet, which must be lifted with a Forklift or
Pallet Truck.
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to lift the cabinet in any other way.

The cabinet is packed for transportation in a heavy-duty wrap-round cardboard enclosure which covers
the sides and top of the equipment.
8.5.1. Installing the LDS XPAK Amplifier

1. Place the Amplifier in position, using a Forklift or Pallet Truck.
Note: For details of mass, refer to section 4.
2. Make a note of any damage to the transportation packing. Exterior damage may indicate interior
damage.
3. Remove the transportation packing, make a note of any damage and report this to Brüel & Kjær VTS
Ltd.
ly
4. Check that the cabinet is level, both from front to back and from left to right.
On
e
nc
Jacking Screw Cabinet Castor
re
Plinth Jacking Screw

Figure 2 Cabinet Castors and Jacking Screws
5. Adjust the level, using the 6 jacking feet fitted to the plinth at the bottom of the cabinet to remove
fe
the weight of the Amplifier from the Castors.

WARNING:
 Amplifier MUST NOT remain on the castors when in operation.
Re
6. Follow the procedure in section 8.5.2. below for Voltage Selection.

7. Follow the procedure in section 8.6 for connecting the cables.
8.5.2. Voltage Selection

The 3-phase supply transformer has a tap selection facility from 380 V to 500 V. Check and if necessary
set the tap settings for the transformer to match the installation mains voltage.
The correct tap setting voltage should appear on the serial number label on the rear lower cabinet
panel. This label may be corrected by applying the appropriate voltage label contained in label kit
015140 supplied.

8.6. Installing the LDS Cable Set and Pneumatic Hoses

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS Cable Set and Pneumatic Hoses.
8.6.1. Routing the LDS V8900 Combo Cable Set
8.6.1.1 AC Mains Supplies
8.6.2. Connecting the Equipment to the Cable Set
8.6.3. Routing the Pneumatic Hoses
ly
8.6.1. Routing the LDS V8900 Combo Cable Set
Lay the Cable Set preferably in ducting (not supplied) or route in such a way as to prevent any hazard.
On
Leave sufficient cabling at the Vibrator end to allow for the rotation of the Vibrator.
Also, refer to the following sections for advice on routing cables: -
• Section 9.4. Earthing Advice
• Section 9.5. Mains Supply Advice
• Section 9.6. Equipment Cabling Advice
CAUTION:
e
• Ensure that the Field and Drive Cables are laid singly with sufficient air gap between
nc
them.
• Ensure that the Signal cables are laid separately from the Field and Drive Cables
8.6.1.1 AC Mains Supplies

re
Separate AC Mains Supplies are required for the equipment in the Vibration Testing System: -
The Amplifier requires a dedicated 3-phase isolator with an upstream RFI Filter.
Ancillary equipment, e.g. the Vibrator Cooling Unit or the Pedestal Control Unit, should each be fed
fe
from separate isolators.

It is essential that isolators be located within easy reach of the person operating the Vibration Testing
System.
Re
Note: It is recommended that all isolators be fed from the same point of origin on the mains supply.
8.6.2. Connecting the Equipment to the Cable Set

The Cable Set must be connected by Brüel & Kjær trained and approved engineers only.
The only customer connection details are for the AC input to the equipment.
8.6.3. Routing the Pneumatic Hoses

Lay the pneumatic hoses preferably in ducting (not supplied) or route in such a way as to prevent any
hazard.
Connection of the hoses will be undertaken by Brüel & Kjær trained and approved engineers only.

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.7. Installing the LDS Head Expander

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with a LDS Unguided Head Expander
8.7.1. Preparing to fit the LDS Unguided Head Expander to the Vibrator
8.7.1.1 General
8.7.1.2 Dimensions, Mass and Nominal Frequency
8.7.1.3 Armature Insert Patterns
8.7.2. Fitting the Head Expander to the Vibrator
ly
8.7.2.1 Tightening the Armature Fixings
8.7.2.2 Torque Tightening Sequences
8.7.2.2.1 Head Expander to Armature Torque Tightening Sequence for V850-440, V875-440,
On
V875-640, V875LS, V8, V8900 and V9 Vibrators
8.7.2.2.2 Head Expander to Armature Torque Tightening Sequence for V830-335 Vibrator
8.7.2.2.3 Torque Values
8.7.2.3 Head Expander Mounted on Vibrator
8.7.3. Removing the Head Expander
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.7.1. Preparing to fit the LDS Unguided Head Expander to the

Vibrator
8.7.1.1 General
1. Before fitting the Head Expander, please
refer to the Health and Safety
information in Section 2 of this manual,
paying particular attention to the Health
and Safety guidance for Head Expanders.
2. Ensure that the Vibrator is set for Vertical
Testing. If necessary, follow the
ly
procedure in section 3.6 for Preparing the
System for Vertical Testing.
3. Ensure that the Load Support is
On
depressurised so that the Armature sits
on the Lower Bump Stops, thereby
preventing any further movement when
the Head Expander is fitted.
4. Ensure that the mounting faces of the
armature inserts are clean. If an
accelerometer has been attached to an
e
insert, remove all traces of adhesive.
5. Ensure that the lower surface of the head
nc
expander is clean.
Figure 1 View of Armature Plate with Inserts
6. All holes that match with the armature
inserts should be used for securing the
expander to the armature; unused inserts
should be removed to avoid ‘chatter’.
re
7. To ease the fitting of securing screws, an

extended hexagon key is supplied to
which a torque wrench can be fitted.
fe
Figure 2 Extended Hexagon Key

Re
8.7.1.2 Dimensions, Mass and Nominal Frequency

For details of dimensions, mass and nominal frequency, refer to section 4 Technical Data.
8.7.1.3 Armature Insert Patterns

For details of the Armature Insert Patterns for various Standard Head Expanders, refer to section 4
Technical Data.

8.7.2. Fitting the Head Expander to the Vibrator

1. Insert the M20 Eyebolt supplied with the
Head Expander into the Central Lifting
Point, as indicated in Figure 3 to the right
2. Tighten the M20 Eyebolt firmly, by hand.
3. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise the
Head Expander and carefully lower onto
the Vibrator, aligning the fixing holes.
Figure 3 Lifting Eyebolt fitted to Head Expander
WARNING:
ly
• Never use a tommy bar, grips or a wrench to tighten eyebolts.
• Failure to comply with this warning can result in serious personal injury.
On
4. Insert the Head Expander to Armature
Securing Screws through the Attachment
Counterbored holes and hand tighten.
5. Remove the M20 Eyebolt and insert the
centre Armature Securing Screw.
e
nc
Figure 4 Securing the Head Expander on the
Vibrator
8.7.2.1 Tightening the Armature Fixings

re
1. Select the correct Vibrator Armature

Torque Tightening Sequence graphic from
section 8.7.2.2 Torque Tightening
Sequences below.
fe
1. Using that graphic, tighten the fixings to

the Torque Value given in section
8.7.2.2.3 Torque Values below for the
fixing size.
Re
8.7.2.2 Torque Tightening Sequences

The tightening sequence should generally be on opposite sides at evenly spaced intervals, working from the
outside edge to the middle. The following graphics give an indication for each of the V8 – V800 series of
vibrator. The torque values for each size of fixing is given at the end of this section.

8.7.2.2.1 Head Expander to Armature Torque Tightening Sequence for V850-440,

V875-440, V875-640, V875LS, V8, V8900 and V9 Vibrators
17 counter-bored holes as follows:

• 1 hole in centre
ly
• 8 equispaced on 203.4 mm (8 in) PCD*
• 8 equispaced on 406.4 mm (16 in) PCD
On
Figure 5 Head Expander to Armature Torque
Tightening Sequence for 440mm and 640mm
Note: * PCD = Pitch Circle Diameter Armatures
e
8.7.2.2.2 Head Expander to Armature Torque Tightening Sequence for V830-335
nc
Vibrator
re
17 counter-bored holes as follows:

• 1 hole in centre
• 8 equispaced on 152.4 mm (6 in) PCD*
fe
• 8 equispaced on 304.8 mm (12 in) PCD

Re
Figure 6 Head Expander to Armature Torque

Note: * PCD = Pitch Circle Diameter Tightening Sequence for 335mm Armatures
8.7.2.2.3 Torque Values

Screw Size Torque Value
M8 34 Nm (25 lbf/ft)
3/8” UNC 34 Nm (25 lbf/ft)
M10 47 Nm (35 lbf/ft)

8.7.2.3 Head Expander Mounted on Vibrator

1. The Head Expander is now fitted to the
Armature of the Vibrator.
2. At this point, the Payload should be fitted,
following the procedure in section 3.10
Guidance for the Attachment of a
Payload.
3. Now follow the procedure in section 3.8
for Operating with an LDS Head Expander.
Note: This procedure will centralise the Vibrator
Body within the Trunnions and the Armature
ly
within the Vibrator Body, to accommodate the Figure 7 Head Expander Mounted on Vibrator
increase in mass of the Head Expander and
Payload.
On
8.7.3. Removing the Head Expander
1. Turn the Load Support Regulator fully anti- Load Support
clockwise on the Pedestal Control Unit Regulator &
(see Figure 8) until the Armature settles Pressure Gauge
on the bump stops.
e
2. If not already done, remove the Payload
from the Head Expander
nc
re
Air Isolation
Emergency Stop
fe

Re

3. With the payload removed, unscrew and

remove the central Head Expander to
Armature Securing Screw and reserve for
future use.
Note: This is to permit the M20 Eyebolt and
lifting equipment to be fitted to
support the Head Expander during
removal.
4. Insert the M20 Eyebolt supplied with the
Head Expander into the Central Lifting
Point, as indicated in Figure 9.
ly
5. Tighten the M20 Eyebolt firmly, by hand.
6. Using suitable lifting equipment, support
the Head Expander to prevent it from
On
falling over / off the vibrator, when all
fixings are removed.
7. Unscrew and remove the remaining Head
Expander to Armature Securing Screws.
Reserve the fixings for future use.
8. Using suitable lifting equipment, carefully
e
remove the Head Expander from the
Vibrator and place in a safe storage
position.
nc
Figure 9 Lifting Eyebolt fitted to Head Expander
re
fe
Re

8.8. Installing the LDS Supplementary Features

Features.
8.8.1. Installing the LDS Thermal Barrier
8.8.2. Installing the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
8.8.3. Installing the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
8.8.4. Installing the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System
8.8.5. Installing LDS Quiet Mode
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.8.1. Installing the LDS Thermal Barrier

8.8.1.1 Pre-installation Checks
8.8.1.2 Installing the LDS Thermal Barrier
8.8.1.2.1 Installing an LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Head Expander
8.8.1.2.2 Installing an LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Vibrator Armature
8.8.1.2.3 Installing an LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Slip Table
ly
8.8.1.3 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seals to the LDS Thermal Barrier
8.8.1.3.1 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seals to the LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Head
Expander
On
8.8.1.3.2 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seals to the LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Slip Table
8.8.1.4 Typical Torque Values
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Figure 1 A Typical LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Head Expander

An LDS Thermal Barrier can be installed: -
a. Directly onto the Vibrator Armature surface.
b. Directly onto the surface of a Head Expander.
c. Directly onto the surface of a Slip Table.
In all cases, the Thermal Barrier has clearance holes matching the surface to which it is being secured
and is primarily secured by the payload securing screws. Any area of Thermal Barrier not attached with
the payload must be secured using screws and washers.

8.8.1.1 Pre-installation Checks

1. Check that the mounting surface (Armature,
Head Expander or Slip Table) is clean and free
from any damage.
2. Check that the screw inserts in the surface are
also clean and free from any damage.
Figure 2 Checking for Cleanliness and Damage
ly
On
3. Check that the surface is level in one axis
then
Figure 3 Checking for Level Axis 1

e
nc
4. Check that the surface is level in the other axis
5. If the surface is not level, follow the procedure in
section 8.3 or 8.4 to level the machine.
re
Figure 4 Checking for Level Axis 2

fe
6. Check that the LDS Thermal Barrier is clean and

free from any damage.
7. On segmented barriers, ensure that any silicon
Re
sealant used to seal the gaps is removed

completely from the segments.
Figure 5 Checking the [Subject]
8.8.1.2 Installing the LDS Thermal Barrier

Generally, due to its mass, any LDS Thermal Barrier over 600mm wide or diameter, should be lifted by
mechanical means or by more than one person.
Note: Please refer to section 4.6.5 for the mass of the actual LDS Thermal Barrier supplied.

8.8.1.2.1 Installing an LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Head Expander

A Head Expander Thermal Barrier may be supplied in segments, for ease of installation and storage.
Where it is supplied in segments, follow the general procedure in section 8.8.1.2.3 below
1. Fit the Lifting Eyes supplied with the LDS Thermal

Barrier into the inserts on the barrier and hand
tighten only.
2. Lower the barrier onto the surface using suitable
ly
lifting equipment.
Figure 6 Lifting the LDS Thermal Barrier onto the
On
Surface
3. Fit 4 x screws and washers 1 supplied to align it on

the surface.
e
4. Remove the Lifting Eyes from the barrier.
nc
Figure 7 Preparing to secure the LDS Thermal
Barrier
re
fe
Re
1 Note that Brüel & Kjær VTS do not supply Payload fixings, but do provide some Thermal Barrier to Head Expander Fixings.

5. Tighten the 4 fixings fitted, loosely, to allow the

remaining fixings to be fitted.
Note: At this stage we recommend that the
payload is fitted.
Figure 8 LDS Thermal Barrier Located on Surface
6. Follow the procedure in section 3.10. for fitting
the payload. Note: (Payload not shown)
ly
7. Fit additional fixings in positions not used by the
payload and tighten all fixings, including those
securing the payload to the torque
recommended for the screw size being fitted in
On
section 8.8.1.4 below.
e
8.8.1.2.2 Installing an LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Vibrator Armature
nc
1. Position the LDS Thermal Barrier on the
re
Armature.
fe
Figure 9 Positioning the LDS Thermal Barrier

Re
2. Fit 2 screws and washers 2 to secure the barrier on

the outer diameter (thereby leaving the centre to
place the payload), to align it on the surface and
tighten loosely.
Figure 10 Preparing to secure the LDS Thermal

Barrier
2 Note that Brüel & Kjær VTS do not supply Payload fixings or Thermal Barrier to Armature Fixings.

Note: At this stage we recommend that the payload

is fitted.
3. Follow the procedure in section 3.10. for fitting
ly
the payload.
4. Fit the additional fixings in positions not used by
the payload and tighten all fixings, including
On
those securing the payload to the torque
section 8.8.1.4 below. Figure 11 LDS Thermal Barrier Ready for the
Payload
Note: (Payload not shown)
e
nc
8.8.1.2.3 Installing an LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS Slip Table
re
Generally, a Slip Table Thermal Barrier will be supplied in segments, for ease of installation and storage.
Where it is supplied as one piece, follow the general procedure in section 8.8.1.2.1 above.
fe
Re
1. Position the first segment of the LDS Thermal

Barrier on the Slip Plate and locate using a screw
and washer 3 to locate the barrier.
Figure 12 Positioning the First Segment
3 Note that Brüel & Kjær VTS do not supply Payload fixings, but do provide some Thermal Barrier to Slip Plate Fixings.

2. Fit a second screw and washer to align the LDS

Thermal Barrier on the surface and tighten
loosely.
Figure 13 Locating the First Segment
ly
On
3. Position the second segment of the LDS Thermal
Barrier on the Slip Plate and fit 2 screws and
washers to align it on the surface and tighten
loosely.
e Figure 14 Locating the Second Segment
nc
4. Position the third segment of the LDS Thermal
re

loosely.
fe
Figure 15 Locating the Third Segment

Re
5. Position the last segment of the LDS Thermal

loosely.
Figure 16 Locating the Last Segment

6. Position one of the Seal Clamps on the side of 2

barrier segments and secure using the M6
Button Head Screws supplied.
Figure 17 Fitting the First Seal Clamp
7. Fit the remaining Seal Clamps on the side of the

barrier segments and secure using the M6
Button Head Screws supplied.
8. Tighten the fixings to a torque of 4 Nm / 2.9
ly
lbf.ft.
9. In order to protect the Magnesium Slip Plate
surface from any condensate generated, seal
On
the gaps between the barrier segments with
suitably temperature rated silicon sealant.
Note: At this stage we recommend that the payload
is fitted.
10. Follow the procedure in section 3.10. for fitting Figure 18 Fitting the Remaining Seal Clamps
the payload.
e
nc
11. Fit the additional fixings in positions not used by
the payload and tighten all fixings, including
those securing the payload to the torque
re
section 8.8.1.4 below.
Figure 19 Securing the Thermal Barrier

Note: (Payload not shown)
fe
Re

8.8.1.3 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seals to the LDS Thermal Barrier
8.8.1.3.1 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seals to the LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS
Head Expander
1. Follow the procedure for installing the Climatic

Chamber in the documentation supplied with
the chamber.
2. Unscrew and remove the fixings securing the
Clamp Strips to the Thermal Barrier and reserve.
ly
3. Remove the Clamp Strips.
Figure 20 Clamp Strips Removed
On
4. Position the Climatic Chamber Seal over the
Thermal Barrier.
e
nc
Figure 21 Positioning the Climatic Chamber Seal
re
5. Place one Clamp Strip in position and secure

using the fixings previously removed, but only
hand tight at this stage.
fe
Figure 22 Locating One Clamp Strip

Re
6. Fit the remaining Clamp Strips and secure using

the fixings previously removed.
lbf.ft.
Figure 23 Climatic Chamber Seal Secured

8.8.1.3.2 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seals to the LDS Thermal Barrier on an LDS
Slip Table
1. Follow the procedure for installing the Climatic

Chamber in the documentation supplied with
the chamber.
2. Unscrew and remove the fixings securing the
Clamp Strips to the Thermal Barrier and reserve.
3. Remove the Clamp Strips.
ly
Figure 24 Clamp Strips Removed
4. Position the Climatic Chamber Seal over the
On
edges of the Thermal Barrier.
5. Place one Clamp Strip in position and secure
using the fixings previously removed, but only
hand tight at this stage.
6. Fit the remaining Clamp Strips and secure using
the fixings previously removed.
Figure 25 Securing the Climatic Chamber Seal
lbf.ft.
e
nc
8.8.1.4 Typical Torque Values
Thread Size Torque Value
M6 4 Nm / 2.9 lbf.ft
M8 34 Nm / 25 lbf.ft
re
M10 47.5 Nm / 42 lbf.ft

M12 94 Nm / 70 lbf.ft
3/8" - 20 BSF 34 Nm / 25 lbf.ft
fe
3/8" - 16 UNC 34 Nm / 25 lbf.ft

3/8" - 24 UNF 34 Nm / 25 lbf.ft
1/2" - 20 UNF 81 Nm / 60 lbf.ft
Re
1/2" - 13 UNC 94 Nm / 70 lbf.ft

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.8.2. Installing the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

This Vibration Testing System is supplied with an LDS V8900 Cooling Unit Silencer
ly
On
e
nc
re
Figure 1 The LDS V8900 Cooling Unit and Silencer

8.8.2.1 Assembling the LDSV8900 Cooling Unit Silencer
8.8.2.2 Fitting the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer to the LDS V8900 Cooling Unit
fe
Re

8.8.2.1 Assembling the LDSV8900 Cooling Unit Silencer
Note: The Silencer is suitable for both the 50 Hz and

60 Hz types of V8900 Cooling Unit Fans and
can be set at the two different fan output
heights.
For the 50 Hz LDS V8900 Cooling Unit Fan, the
ly
lower mounting holes in the Silencer Bracket
are used, which gives Dim ‘A’ as 1010mm.
For the 60 Hz LDS V8900 Cooling Unit Fan, the
On
upper mounting holes in the Silencer Bracket
are used, which gives Dim ‘A’ as 959mm.
Figure 2 Setting the Silencer Stand at the Correct

Height
e
nc
1. Align the holes in the Silencer Bracket (lower for
re
the 50 Hz Fan and upper for the 60 Hz Fan) with

the mounting holes in the Silencer Stand, as
shown in Figure 3.
Note: The bottom securing flange of the Silencer
Stand should face outward, as shown in
fe
Figure 3.
2. Insert the M10 x 25 Bolts into the Silencer
Bracket and through the Silencer Stand and
Re
lightly secure using an M10 Plain Washer and

M10 Full Nut.
Note: Do not tighten the fixings at this stage.
Figure 3 Assembling the Silencer Stand

8.8.2.2 Fitting the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer to the LDS V8900 Cooling Unit
1. Align the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer with the LDS

V8900 Cooling Unit.
2. Insert two M10 x 30 Bolts and M10 Plain
Washers to hold the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer in
position.
ly
Silencer Fixings
Figure 4 Pre-fitting the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer
3. Check that the Silencer Stand is vertical and mark

the 2 x securing holes on the floor.
On
e
4. Remove the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer if required
and drill and fit M16 floor anchors in the floor.
nc
Floor Securing Points
Figure 5 LDS Cooling Unit Silencer Installed
re
WARNING:
• Ensure that any dust or debris is contained and removed after drilling in conctrete
floors.
fe
5. Assemble the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer to the

LDS V8900 Cooling Unit, placing the Gasket
Re
between the two faces.

6. Secure the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer to the LDS
V8900 Cooling Unit using the four M10 x 30
Bolts and M10 Plain Washers.
Figure 6 Fitting the LDS Cooling Unit Silencer

7. Fit the M16 Anchor Bolts and tighten to the

torque recommended by the manufacturer.
8. Tighten the M10 Silencer to V8900 Cooling Unit
fixings to a torque of 47.5 Nm (35 lb ft).
9. Tighten the Silencer Bracket to Silencer Stand
fixings to a torque of 47.5 Nm (35 lb ft).
ly
Figure 7 LDS Cooling Unit Silencer Fitted
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.8.3. Installing the LDS Plinth Cover Kit

This LDS XPA-K Amplifier is fitted with an LDS Plinth Cover Kit
ly
On
The LDS Plinth Cover Kit consists of 2 Filter Tray Assemblies and 2 Plinth Cover Plates.
8.8.3.1 Installing the Filter in the Filter Tray Assembly
e
8.8.3.2 Preparing the LDS XPA-K Amplifier for Installing the LDS Plinth Cover Kit
8.8.3.3 Installing the Filter Tray Assemblies
nc
8.8.3.4 Installing the Control and Power Bay Plinth Cover Plates
8.8.3.5 Finalising Installation
re
8.8.3.1 Installing the Filter in the Filter Tray Assembly

Note: This procedure will only be necessary if the parts are received separately.
fe
1. Place the Filter Tray on a flat surface.

Re
Figure 2 Filter Tray
2. Put the Filter in place on the Filter Tray.
Figure 3 Filter Fitted

3. Fit the Filter Tray Cover to the Filter Tray by

inserting the end of the Cover under the lip
of the tray, as shown.
Figure 4 Fitting the Filter Tray Cover
ly
4. Fit the 2 x M4 screws and washers and
tighten to a torque of 3.0 Nm (2.22 lb ft)
On
Figure 5 Filter Tray Assembly Complete
8.8.3.2 Preparing the LDS XPA-K Amplifier for Installing the LDS Plinth Cover
Kit
1. Switch off and isolate the AC power to the
XPA-K Amplifier.
e
WARNING:
nc
• Failure to power off and isolate the amplifier may result in serious injury or
death.
re
fe
Re

Fixing
ly
Grommet
2. Remove the Grommets covering the Side
Panel Fixings on both sides of the amplifier
On
and put to one side in a safe place.
Side Panel
e
nc
Figure 6 Side View of the XPA-K Amplifier
re
fe
Re

3. On one Side Panel, unscrew and remove the Panel
ly
Side Panel Fixings and put to one side in a Fixings
safe place.
4. Remove the Side Panel and put to one side
On
in a safe place.
5. Repeat paragraphs 3 and 4 for the other Side Side Panel
Panel.
e
nc
re
fe
Re

6. Unscrew and remove the fixings on one of

the Lower Rear Panels and put to one side in
ly
a safe place.
7. Remove the Lower Rear Panel, disconnecting
the fan cable from the socket and put the
On
panelto one side in a safe place.
8. Repeat paragraphs 6 and 7 for the other
Lower Rear Panel.
e
nc
Lower Rear Panels
Figure 8 Rear View of the XPA-K Amplifier

re
9. Unscrew and remove the fixings on the

exposed Control Bay Protective Cover and
fe
put to one side in a safe place.

10. Remove the Control Bay Protective Cover
11. Unscrew and remove the fixings on the
Re
exposed Power Bay Protective Cover and

put to one side in a safe place.
12. Remove the Power Bay Protective Cover
Protective Covers
Figure 9 Lower Rear Panels Removed

13. The amplifier is now ready to receive the

LDS Plinth Cover Kit
ly
Figure 10 Protective Covers Removed
On
8.8.3.3 Installing the Filter Tray Assemblies
Filter Guides
e
1. On one side of the amplifier below the
nc
transformer, place a Filter Tray Assembly
into the guides, as shown.
re
Figure 11 Installing a Filter Tray Assembly

Transformer
fe
2. Slide the Filter Tray Assembly in until the

Re
fixing can be inserted.

3. Insert the M6 Screw and Washer and tighten
to a torque of 9.5 Nm (7 lb ft)
Filter Tray Fixing

Figure 12 1st Filter Tray Assembly Secured

4. On the other side of the amplifier, place a

Filter Tray Assembly into the guides and
slide in until the fixing can be inserted.
5. Insert the M6 Screw and Washer and tighten
to a torque of 9.5 Nm (7 lb ft)
ly
Filter Tray Fixing
Figure 13 2nd Filter Tray Assembly Secured
On
8.8.3.4 Installing the Control and Power Bay Plinth Cover Plates
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Fixing Points for the Fixing Points for the

Control Bay Plinth Power Bay Plinth Cover
Cover Plate Plate
Figure 14 Plinth Cover Plate Positions
1. Check that the fixing point holes are clean for both of the Plinth Cover Plates

2. Check that the Grommets are in position in

the cut-outs. Figure 15 Control Bay Plinth Cover Plate
Note: The Grommets are required to provide a
smooth edge for any cables.
ly
Figure 16 Power Bay Plinth Cover Plate
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Fixings for the Control Fixings for the Power

Bay Plinth Cover Plate Bay Plinth Cover Plate
Figure 17 Installing the Plinth Cover Plates

3. Put the Plinth Cover Plates in position as shown above and secure with 2 M6 Screws and
Washers for each plate.
4. Tighten the fixings to a torque of 9.5 Nm (7 lb ft).

8.8.3.5 Finalising Installation
1. Reposition the Control Bay Protective Cover

and secure using the M6 Fixings previously
removed.
2. Tighten the fixings to a torque of 9.5 Nm (7
lb ft).
3. Reposition the Power Bay Protective Cover
ly
and secure using the M6 Fixings previously
removed.
On
lb ft). Control Bay Power Bay
Protective Cover Protective Cover
Figure 18 Lower Rear Panels Removed
e
nc
5. Check that the EMC Gasket fitted to the
Lower Rear Panels is in position and is not
damaged.
6. Reconnect the fan cable of the Control Bay
re
Lower Rear Panel and reposition the panel

on the rear of the Amplifier.
7. Secure the panel using the M5 Fixings
previously removed.
fe

lb ft).
9. Reconnect the fan cable of the Power Bay
Re
Lower Rear Panel and reposition the panel

on the rear of the Amplifier.
10. Secure the panel using the M5 Fixings
previously removed.
lb ft).
Control Bay Lower Power Bay Lower

Rear Panel Rear Panel
Figure 19 Rear View of the XPA-K Amplifier

12. Check that the EMC Gasket fitted to the

Side Panels is in position and is not
damaged.
Panel
ly
13. Put one Side Panel in position and secure
Fixings
with the M5 Fixings previously removed.
lb ft).
On
15. Put the other Side Panel in position and
secure with the M5 Fixings previously Side Panel
removed.
lb ft). e
nc
re
fe
Re

Fixing
ly
Grommet
17. Refit the Grommets to cover the Side Panel
On
Fixings on both sides of the amplifier.
Side Panel
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.8.4. Installing the LDS Slip Plate Thermal Control System

Normal Filling Point PRES Filling Point Slip Plate
ly
On
e
nc
re

Manifold Block
fe
(+45°F to +86°F).
Re


ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.8.5. Installing LDS Quiet Mode

There are no user installable items available for LDS Quiet Mode.
Should any problems be encountered, contact Brüel & Kjær VTS Service.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

8.9. Post Installation Checks

8.9.1. Vibrator Post Installation Checks
1. Carry out the checks detailed in Chapter 4, ‘Pre-use checks’.
2. Switch on the amplifier. If the amplifier trips off during initial switch-on, indicating “Phase
Failure” on the control panel display, isolate and lock-off the incoming supply, reverse any two
incoming phases at the amplifier input panel and check the incoming voltage level. Refer to
section 3.1 Essential Precautions.
3. Check for correct rotation of the cooling fan (clockwise when viewed from the motor side). If the
ly
rotation is incorrect, isolate and lock-off the incoming supply reverse any two phases of the fan
connections on the amplifier output panel. Refer to section 3.1 Essential Precautions.
4. Should the air switch interlock require re-adjustment, refer to B&K service for advice.
On
8.9.2. Slip Table Post Installation Checks
1. Using Shell Tellus 68, or an equivalent oil, fill the reservoir of the hydraulic power supply (HPS) to
the top of the sight glass. Fill the slip table moat with sufficient oil to prime the HPS scavenge
pump.
2. Connect the HPS to the 3-phase mains supply. Correct rotation for the pump motor is clockwise
e
when viewed from the motor end. If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, reverse any two
phases.
nc
3. Switch on the HPS. Check that the indicated pressure reads approximately 172 bar/ 2500 lbf/in².
4. Allow the HPS to operate for at least 15 minutes. Check for oil leaks and that oil pressure has
been maintained.
5. Check that an oil film has formed around the edge of the granite block and that a 0.05 mm feeler
re
gauge can be inserted at all points between the slip plate and the granite block.
6. Check that the slip plate moves freely over its full stroke when hand pressure is applied.
7. Check that the overtravel and oil pressure switches are connected as detailed in Section 3.
8. Set up the overtravel switch as detailed in Section 6
fe
9. Fit and align the driver bar to the vibrator armature and slip plate as detailed in Section 6.
10. Mount a control accelerometer. Refer to the precautionary note in Section 3.
Re
11. Calibrate the system using available means.
8.9.3. Cooling Fan Post Installation Checks

WARNING:
• Do not run a fan that is not connected to a ducting system, this is hazardous to
personnel and will overload fan motor.
• If it is required to test run the fan before connecting to the system, blank off inlet
to avoid motor overload.
After connecting the fan to the electrical supplies: -
1. Briefly start and switch off fan, checking for correct rotation according to rotation arrow on
nameplate, listen for sounds of noisy bearings, mechanical contact of impeller etc.

2. If the fan is rotating the wrong way, switch over 2 of the phase connections.
3. When satisfied that the fan is ready to run, start up fan. Check to ensure motor amps are
within motor limits shown on nameplate.
4. Allow fan temperatures to stabilise, measure to ensure they are within specified limits.
5. Fan bearing temperatures may appear quite high initially but should settle to acceptable
limits.
6. Do not allow fan to run with fan bearing temperatures in excess of 90°C unless specifically
designed to do so.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
Table of Contents
9.1. Introduction
9.2. Best Practice
9.3. Calculating Over-turning Moments
9.4. Earthing Advice
9.5. Mains Supply Advice
ly
9.6. Equipment Cabling Advice
On
9.1. Introduction
This section includes data that may be necessary during the life of the machine.
For any additional data that is required and not included, please contact Brüel & Kjær VTS. (please
refer to the Contact Details in Section 1).
e
nc
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
9.2. Best Practice

The information in this document is taken from Brüel & Kjær EIN138, issue 3 and consists of the
following: -
9.2.1. ‘Dos and don’ts’ in Vibration Testing
9.2.2. Site Design
9.2.3. Vibrators
9.2.4. Testing
9.2.5. Maintenance
ly
9.2.6. Vibrator and slip table mounting
9.2.7. Predictive test methodologies
On
9.2.1. ‘Dos and don’ts’ in Vibration Testing
This EIN provides guidance on avoiding pitfalls and difficulties commonly encountered during the
design, installation and operation of vibration testing systems. It is based on Brüel & Kjær engineers’
many years of experience of the range of problems that can arise during vibration testing.
To ensure that they follow established good practice in vibration testing, customers are strongly
•
advised to
e
Read this EIN in detail before first using Brüel & Kjær equipment
nc
• Review the latest issue (obtainable on request from Brüel & Kjær) at regular intervals
9.2.2. Site Design

9.2.2.1 Layout
re
9.2.2.1.1 Position of control room

The control room should if possible be positioned within sight of the vibrator. If this is not
possible a CCTV system should be installed to provide a view of the vibrator.
fe
9.2.2.1.2 Room access

There should be adequate access both for installation and maintenance of the vibration
system and to allow mounting of payloads.
Re
9.2.2.1.3 Vibration
Consideration should be given to the vibration, especially at low frequencies, that will be
transmitted into the floor during testing. Various mounting options are available to reduce
vibration transmission but all have a low frequency limit.
An unsuitable isolation mounting resonance can lead to excessive motion of the vibrator and
even damage to the building containing the system.
9.2.2.1.4 Location of amplifier

The system amplifier should not be sited directly against a wall as this will restrict the air flow
available to cool it; maintenance will also be easier if the amplifier is surrounded by free
space. Systems manuals contain detailed recommendations.

9. Reference Data
9.2.2.1.5 Airglide mounts

Where equipment to be installed is fitted with ‘Airglide’ mounts, ensure that the floor has a
suitable finish and level as specified in manuals.
9.2.2.1.6 Blower hoses

Extended blower hoses should not be fitted without consulting Brüel & Kjær as their extra
length can cause overheating of the vibrator. For the same reason sharp bends in hoses
should be avoided, and hose arrangements shown in outline drawings should not be
modified without consulting Brüel & Kjær.
9.2.2.1.7 Floor loading
ly
The floor must be able to bear the load of the vibration system – vibrators and their
associated equipment are heavy items.
9.2.2.1.8 Position of mains isolators
On
Main electrical isolators and switches should be fitted in an accessible position close to the
amplifier. Positioning should comply with relevant safety regulations.
9.2.2.1.9 Acoustic noise

Be aware that due to the nature of vibrators, noise is produced by the armature. For larger
systems this can lead to high levels of noise. Consideration should be given to the use of
soundproof rooms etc. Vibrator noise levels are specified in manuals.
e
9.2.2.1.10 Other equipment
nc
Siting vibrators next to other heavy equipment can cause problems due to transmission of
vibration or electrical noise.
9.2.2.2 Environmental
re
9.2.2.2.1 Temperature and humidity

Do not operate Brüel & Kjær equipment outside the temperature and humidity limits
specified in the relevant manuals.
fe
9.2.2.2.2 High altitudes

At higher altitudes the cooling of the vibrator will be affected by the reduced air density. If
this is likely to be a problem, consult Brüel & Kjær.
Re
9.2.2.2.3 Cleanliness
The vibrator and other equipment should not be operated in damp, oily, dirty or dusty
conditions. Dirt and dust may cause the centre positioning system (where fitted) not to
function correctly. Water collection due to damp conditions will cause corrosion of the
vibrator and may also lead to electrical short circuits. Oil on or around the vibrator makes
surfaces slippery, creating a hazard for operators.
9.2.2.2.4 Condensation
If operational temperature and humidity (for instance when operating with a thermal
chamber) are such that the temperature of the vibrator armature falls below the dew point,
moisture will condense on the armature. This can cause corrosion to the frame and also lead
to electrical shorts.

9. Reference Data
These problems can be avoided by:

• The use of a thermal barrier
• Fitting heating elements around the armature/chamber interface
• Directing the blower warm air towards the underside of the chamber
9.2.2.2.5 Vacuum
When the vibrator is used with an altitude chamber the chamber will suck on the armature.
For air-cooled vibrators the load compensation is based on positive pressure, so special
control will be required. Water-cooled vibrators are fitted with a small vacuum pump to
provide negative pressure on the armature, however this would be fighting against the
vacuum pump for the chamber which is usually larger.
ly
9.2.2.2.6 Thermal expansion
When using a thermal chamber be aware of thermal expansion and the stresses it can cause.
On
This is particularly important when the chamber is attached to a multi-bearing slip table.
9.2.2.2.7 Corrosion of magnesium components

The magnesium alloy used in slip tables, head expanders and other components is extremely
susceptible to atmospheric or other corrosion, and the advice on this topic in manuals should
be carefully followed.
e
9.2.2.3 Services and cabling
9.2.2.3.1 Availability of services

nc
Ensure that all services required for the equipment are available and as specified in the
relevant manuals.
9.2.2.3.2 Cabling
re
The following points should be borne in mind when running cabling:

• All cable lengths should be kept to a minimum, as cables longer than those specified in
manuals may restrict the performance of a system. If in doubt, consult Brüel & Kjær
Engineering Dept.
fe
• Care should be taken not to apply undue loads to cable terminations.

• Ducting for armature drive and field cables should be ventilated to avoid the possibility
of heat build-up in the cables.
• Cables should be routed neatly and safely to avoid possible trip hazards.
Re
• Power and signal cables should be routed separately to avoid interference problems.
• All signal cables should be screened; triaxial cables should be used for analogue signals
over long lengths.
Further guidance on cabling is given in system manuals.
9.2.2.4 Electromagnetic
9.2.2.4.1 Safety and RFI earths

Ensure that safety earths are fitted and used. RFI earths should be used and be of the correct
type as specified in manuals.
Further guidance on earthing is given in system manuals.

9. Reference Data
9.2.2.4.2 Mounting the vibrator

The body of the vibrator is constructed from steel in order to conduct the magnetic fields. If
the body is connected to large steel components other than supplied by Brüel & Kjær, these
fields will flow in the connecting parts. This can cause problems with magnetised plates, loss
of flux within the vibrator and / or large stray fields.
9.2.2.4.3 Siting of control equipment

If control equipment is sited close to the vibrator the stray field may distort the monitor.
9.2.2.4.4 Low frequency fields

Brüel & Kjær recommend that personnel, particularly those with medical implants, do not
ly
enter the danger zone whilst the vibrator is running.
9.2.3. Vibrators
On
9.2.3.1 Air-cooled vibrators
9.2.3.1.1 Dirt and dust

If the vibrator is operated in dirty and dusty conditions the air vents will be blocked and the
vibrator cooling will be impaired.
9.2.3.1.2 Ambient temperatures

e
If the vibrator is operated at high ambient temperatures (above 30° C) the vibrator coils will
overheat at full force. The cooler the air to the vibrator the longer the life will be. If
nc
temperatures cannot be kept below 30° C the vibrator must be de-rated in force.
9.2.3.1.3 Air cooling hoses

Hose lengths should be as short as is practical. Where the standard supplied length of hose
re
is too short, Brüel & Kjær should be consulted as to the requirements for long ducts. Long
ducts can increase the pressure drop seen by the fan and thus restrict the flow of air to the
vibrator.
A kinked or damaged cooling hose reduces the flow of air to the vibrator, leading to increased
fe
running temperatures which reduce the life of the vibrator.
9.2.3.1.4 Air supply

Particularly where air compressors may turn off overnight, consideration should be given to
Re
fitting a safety switch to ensure that the vibrator cannot run without an air supply present.
9.2.3.1.5 Air quality

Air supply should conform to ISO 8573-1: class 1.7.1, with maximum particle size of 0.01
microns and remaining oil content of 0.01 ppm. Water or oil traps should be fitted if
necessary.
9.2.3.2 Water-cooled vibrators
9.2.3.2.1 Continuous running

Due to gradual heating of the body, standard water-cooled vibrators should not be run
continuously. Optional body cooling is available for V964 vibrators which allows continuous
running.

9. Reference Data
9.2.3.2.2 Cooling unit, oil

Raw water supplied to the cooling unit should always be within specification for temperature
and flow. High raw water temperatures or low flow will cause the system to trip as the cooling
unit coils will not be able to reject all of their heat.
Where the cooling unit is sited either above or below the vibrator, special consideration is
required to how water and oil are returned from the vibrator. If the cooling unit is below the
vibrator, syphoning can occur from the vibrator. If the cooling unit is above the vibrator,
scavenging will be required for the oil.
Oil scavenging should also be considered if supply hoses are unusually long.
The cooling unit tank must always be full as damage to both the vibrator and the cooling unit
will occur if the tank is empty.
ly
9.2.3.2.3 Economy tap
When running on economy tap the vibrator will not be able to produce full force. Full field
On
will be required in order to do this.
9.2.3.3 Maximising armature life

Whilst Brüel & Kjær vibrators are extremely robust, the armature is a lifed component: the
high numbers of stress cycles, high stresses and high temperatures will ultimately lead to
failure and the need for replacement.
•
e
The time taken for an armature to fail depends on
primarily the force level at which it is running
nc
• secondarily the type of test
• other factors which will influence its life
As a guide, Brüel & Kjær vibrators have an expected life of over 10,000 hrs when running at
80% force. At force levels below 80% the expected life will be longer; at levels above 80% it
will be shorter. This relationship is non-linear, being based on S-N curves which approximate
re
to a straight line only on a log-log scale.

Life is also affected by the type of test run as shown below (higher values leading to reduced
life):
fe
Sine sweep 1
Random broad band (20-2000 Hz) 1
Shock 1.5
Re
SRS 2
Sine on random 2
Narrow band random 2
Fixed frequency sine 3
Expected armature life can be calculated by dividing this number into the rated life for the
force level used. For instance, expected life for a fixed frequency sine test run at 80% force
will be approximately 10,000 / 3 = 3,000 hours.
Other risk factors tending to reduce armature life are
• High temperature of raw cooling air or water
• Distortion caused by ‘slapping’ components.
• High ‘g’ levels

9. Reference Data
• Humid or dusty atmosphere

• High frequency > fn
• Large displacement
• Horizontal running
• Running under a chamber
• Large moment applied
• Large velocity
• Drive high
• Lively payload
• Poor control
ly
• Not keeping reference plots
• Poor maintenance
• Unattended operation
On
• Large payload
Maximum armature life will be obtained when these factors are avoided as far as possible,
while using the vibrator well within its specified performance range.
9.2.4. Testing e
9.2.4.1 Test design
9.2.4.1.1 Test dynamics

nc
The combined dynamics of the item under test, fixtures and vibrator armature should be well
understood, especially where the payload is large or the test is severe.
9.2.4.1.2 Test frequencies

re
The vibrator should only be run within both its maximum and minimum frequencies.
9.2.4.1.3 Accelerometers
Ensure that accelerometers are rigidly mounted and will not fall off during the course of the
fe
test.
9.2.4.1.4 Cross-axial motion

Monitor cross-axial motion carefully to avoid exceeding vibrator moment capability.
Re
9.2.4.2 Loads and fixtures

9.2.4.2.1 Suitability for purpose
Do ensure that fixtures are suitable for the purpose required of them.

Jig design should take account of the effects of thermal expansion. Different materials when
fastened together and subjected to changes in temperature will induce stress in the
components.

9. Reference Data
Slip tables in thermal chambers are particularly susceptible: bearings can be damaged if jig
bolts are tightened before the slip plate has reached the working temperature of the
chamber.
9.2.4.2.3 Torque settings

Inserts and payload bolts should always be tightened to the correct torques as defined in
manuals. Over tightening can cause damage to the inserts, while under tightening can cause
the payload to rattle or work loose.
9.2.4.2.4 Load support

Always use the load support system as described in manuals.
ly
9.2.4.2.5 Accelerometer positioning
Accelerometer positions should be chosen with great care. Control accelerometers must not
be positioned at vibration nodes or the vibrator armature may be severely damaged.
On
9.2.4.2.6 Fixing the load
Use as many fixing points as possible to attach a fixture or payload. Use short fixing bolts
rather than long ones which may resonate.
9.2.4.2.7 Overturning
The vibrator can be damaged by payloads that are unstable or mounted so as to exceed its
e
moment capabilities. Accelerometers can be used to limit the overturning moment applied
to the system.
nc
9.2.4.2.8 Payload dimensions
For payloads wider than the diameter of the vibrator armature a head expander or extender
must be used.
re
9.2.4.3 Large payloads

Where the type of payload to be tested is unusually large (in the order of tonnes and metres),
then type of installation that is best depends on the budget available and the exact test
requirements. Brüel & Kjær will be pleased to make suggestions if detailed test criteria can
fe
be supplied.
Tall payloads impose high overturning moments on the armature guidance and vibrator
support structure.
Brüel & Kjær has considerable experience of supplying systems featuring:
Re
• large head expanders

• large slip tables (up to 3 m square) and combos
• large vibrators in both Lin-E-Air and solid trunnion configurations
• seismic block mounting see ’Vibrator and slip table’ later in this EIN).
9.2.4.4 Decoupling
This section gives general guidance on the causes and possible effects of decoupling, together
with advice on how decoupling may be avoided.

9. Reference Data
9.2.4.4.1 How is decoupling caused?

In a vibration test the aim is always to connect the item under test (payload) to the vibrator
as directly as possible. This is done by minimising the length of connection so that resonant
frequencies are kept high, and by ensuring that connections are all linear.
A linear connection is one that, for a reversal in applied load, will deflect as much as
previously but in the opposite direction. A non-linear connection – an example might be a
plate loosely resting on the vibrator – will not show this behaviour. When the vibrator drives
upwards the plate moves with the vibrator, but when the vibrator drives downwards at more
than 1 gn the plate will separate from the vibrator. When the vibrator drives upwards again
the plate will hit the vibrator with a hammer blow effect.
9.2.4.4.2 The effects of decoupling
ly
This effect results in high energy accelerations over a large range of frequencies being input
into both plate and vibrator, which may change the test dramatically. A sine test is normally
at one frequency at any given instant, and not a range.
On
As well as affecting the test, decoupling may also damage both payload and vibrator, as extra
accelerations are input in an uncontrolled manner. High energy accelerations, particularly at
high frequencies, can excite subcomponents of both vibrator armature and payload
sufficiently to cause damage or breakage.
Clearly decoupling is to be avoided. The ‘unbolted’ example just given is trivial and the cure
is obvious, however decoupling can occur less obviously within a test setup. One common
e
way for decoupling to occur is to have an unsupported length in contact with another: if the
plate above is bolted to the flat vibrator armature at its periphery only, then at low
accelerations the system will be linear, as both plate and armature move together. At some
nc
higher acceleration level the centre of the plate will move up as the vibrator drives toward
the plate, but will separate from the armature very slightly when the vibrator drives away,
because of the inertia of the plate. When the vibrator drives toward the plate again a hit will
result: decoupling has occurred.
re
Decoupling can also occur where bolts have been insufficiently torqued down. A lightly
torqued bolt can allow separation to occur at low force levels between the surfaces being
clamped. If these are within the force capability of the vibrator then damage will result.
9.2.4.4.3 Dos and don’ts to avoid decoupling

fe
Do
• Torque all bolts correctly
• Minimise unsupported lengths in contact
Re
• Minimise exposed bolt lengths

• Use full thread engagement (1.5D) with bolts
• Use all the armature fixing holes to attach any payload of fixture
• Where large unsupported lengths are unavoidable, relieve the surfaces between hold
down points so that contact cannot occur
• Have tight flatness tolerances for contacting surfaces
• Have tight parallelism tolerances where needed
Don’t
• Have fixing bolts greater than 100 mm apart on contacting surfaces
• Use bolts without stiff washers – bolt heads will sink into the material being clamped,
lowering the holding force

9. Reference Data
• Run tests without supervision – if decoupling occurs the test must be stopped at once
• Use thin plates – these can deflect
• Use unsymmetrical (unbalanced) fixtures or adaptors
9.2.4.4.4 Guidelines for good practice

When designing and assembling fixture arrangements, always bear in mind the principles
outlined above i.e.
• Symmetry
• Use of thick sections
• Use of all armature fixing holes
ly
• Use of flatness tolerances
• Use of parallelism tolerances
• Use of minimal exposed bolt lengths
On
9.2.4.4.5 Further reading
Fixture design for vibration and shock testing, George Hieber, Tustin Technical Institute Ltd,
California, 1993.
9.2.4.5 Control strategies

This section covers some of the basic ideas and concepts relating to vibration control
e
strategies. It explains the need for control accelerometers and gives guidance on where to
place them.
nc
Nearly all vibration tests cover a frequency range where mechanical resonances occur in a
system comprising the payload, fixturing and vibrator armature. Nearly every vibration test
is controlled in terms of acceleration, relying on the fundamental equation force = mass x
acceleration (f = ma) and assuming that mass remains constant. However under resonant
conditions the effective mass does not remain constant. For this reason poor control can lead
re
to under- or over testing of the payload and damage due to overdriving the armature.
The choice of where to control is thus the most critical part of any vibration test. There are
no universally suitable control positions and the positions chosen can mean the difference
between damaging the vibration equipment or not. Control positioning can also affect
fe
dramatically the accelerations applied the item under test (payload).

The following principles should be borne in mind:
• All mechanical structures have resonances.
Re
• The larger (dimensionally or more massive) a structure, the lower the resonant frequency.
• For increased mass without increased stiffness, the resonant frequency will reduce.
• For increased stiffness without increased mass, the resonant frequency will increase.
• In a free system when a purely axial resonance occurs, the most lively points (those
moving the most) will always be the ends.
9.2.4.5.1 Description of a typical test

A typical vibration test involves three main physical components:
• The vibrator armature.
• The fixture
• The payload (item under test).

9. Reference Data
Consideration must be given to the resonance not of the individual components but of the
entire system which they comprise.
The armature and the payload are normally fixed with no scope for change, but the fixture
can consist of a slip plate or head expander and often a mounting fixture.
If the entire system were rigid and its resonances fell outside the range of the test, all points
on the system would vibrate at the same level and the position of the control accelerometer
would be immaterial.
However for many payloads the size of the fixture in combination with the mass of the
payload leads to resonances within the range of the test.
It is these resonances which cause the difficulty in selecting control positions.
ly
9.2.4.5.2 Choosing control positions
Control accelerometers are needed so as to:
On
• Control the acceleration into the payload
• Ensure the vibrator is not damaged
The most obvious reason for control accelerometers is to limit the acceleration into the
payload. If the payload is large and or the frequency range is high, at some point one or more
resonances will occur. This can be seen as difference in acceleration levels over the fixture.
If only one accelerometer position is used on a test, the control loop only ensures control of
acceleration at this position. If this position coincides with a resonance node (a point at which
e
there is little or no movement), then the rest of the structure could be accelerating a hundred
times or more than the control level. As the location of nodes changes with frequency, finding
nc
a point where they will not occur is difficult. It is for this reason that several accelerometers
positions should be used.
The best area to place accelerometers with least risk of finding a node is at the end of the
system. On a slip table this would be on the end of the plate furthest away from the vibrator.
re
When using even one accelerometer, resonances can be spotted. If a flat sine sweep is
required, then the control acceleration will also be flat. Looking at the drive from the
controller will show the dynamics of the system. This drive is the signal the controller outputs
to the amplifier. A drop in the drive indicates a resonance and a rise in the drive indicates an
anti-resonance. Anti-resonances indicate that the control accelerometer is placed on a node.
fe
The drive signal is directly proportional to the output from the amplifier to the vibrator. The
vibrator will respond to this input from the amplifier to produce force. This follows that if the
drive is high, then the force the vibrator is producing will also be high.
Re
Anti-resonances are the most dangerous to the vibrator, as the force the vibrator will be
producing will be far higher than the simple calculation of force = mass x acceleration.
The drive signal is the most useful piece of information about the vibrator. It demonstrates
how good the control strategy is as well as the force that the vibrator is producing.
The drive signal should not rise above the nominal level for the test if the structure were
rigid. Control positions should be changed or more added if this is the case.
Examples of good and bad drive plots are shown below.

9. Reference Data
ü
v
ly
On
v v
e û û
f f
9.2.4.5.3 Choosing locations for monitoring

nc
It may not be possible to always put a control accelerometer at the end of the system, if this
is not possible, then monitors should be placed there with notching levels set so that damage
to the vibrator does not occur.
9.2.4.5.4 Random vs. sine testing

re
There is a difference between sine and random testing in how the vibration system protects
itself.
Under sine testing the amplifier monitors the voltage and current supplied to the vibrator,
stopping the test if either exceeds pre-set trip levels. Should the test be a high level test and
fe
the control position at a node, the drive power increases past the trip levels and the system
shuts down.
In random testing the amplifier monitors r.m.s. voltage and current in a similar manner.
Re
However if control is at a node and the drive increases around the node, the amplifier will
not shut down as long as the overall voltage and current remain below trip level, even though
the vibrator may producing more force than required.
A further complication is that at the resonant frequency of the armature itself (normally
around 2000 Hz) there is a large amount of ‘free energy’. Little voltage and current is required
to drive the armature at this frequency and it is possible to damage the armature by
overdriving the vibrator (exceeding its limits in both force and acceleration) without causing
amplifier shutdown.
Placing a control accelerometer at the remote end of the system will protect against this
danger as this end moves in a similar manner to the armature at the other end.

9. Reference Data
9.2.4.5.5 Good practice in testing

Following good practice as described below (common for any type of testing, sine, random,
shock etc.) will maximise the life of the equipment:
1. Always fit an accelerometer on the end of the system to either control or, if this is not
possible, monitor with limit set at the maximum theoretical acceleration using f = ma
calculation.
2. Large slip tables may require several control accelerometers at the end as the corner of
the plate will be vibrating at a different level to the centre at higher frequencies.
3. Run low level sine sweeps over the entire testing frequency range to characterise the
fixture and payload. This could be low level random if sine is prohibited. Low level means
ly
approx. –12 dB of full test level.
4. Review the drive to ensure there are no rises past the nominal drive level.
5. Use the results to modify the control strategy if required.
On
6. Look at the out of band energy during random running as this can indicate other problems:
the bandwidth should be at least 1.5 times the highest control frequency. Where this
energy is large or at the same level as the controlled energy, this indicates problems with
the test. Investigate before continuing.
7. Where problems may occur, look at the real time trace of acceleration as this may show
problems not seen in the frequency domain.
e
8. If all looks OK, proceed to the test level.
This will ensure that the vibrator is protected as far as possible against damage. If these
nc
precautions are not taken, immediate damage may not occur, but forcing the vibrator to
provide more than its designed force or acceleration levels will lead to reduced life.
Controllers usually offer a range of control strategies – single point, average, weighted
average, extremal etc. The best from a vibrator protection point of view is extremal but if
re
this is not practical and average or single point is employed, the monitor at the end of the
system must be fitted with a limit. If this end point were included in a two point average,
where the other point drops to zero, the vibrator would have to provide double the force
required by an extremal strategy.
fe
9.2.4.5.6 Summary
Control accelerometers are used to protect the vibrator as well as control the test level.
Use the drive plot to assess the control strategy and protect the vibrator.
Re
Random vibration can mask control problems where sine sweeps wouldn’t run.
Always control or monitor at the end (liveliest) parts of the system.
Consider the whole system not just the item under test.
Do not assume the characteristics of a system, always establish them by investigation.
Ensure that the dynamic characteristics of the system are known before testing at full level.
9.2.4.6 Slip tables

9.2.4.6.1 Mating surfaces
Any mating surfaces should be correctly connected, with no fretting of the surfaces. Surfaces
should be flat and smooth, and bolted together using short bolts at close spacings.

9. Reference Data
Where drive connection is fitted to the armature, ensure that all inserts are used, and the
structure is dynamically rigid to the highest drive frequency.
9.2.4.6.2 Design of jigs and fixtures

Design of jigs should take into account the slip plate overturning moment given in the manual
as exceeding this will cause damage to the bearings. When designing jigs to fit on the slip
plate, try to cover all available bearings as this will give the best overturning moment.
When designing jigs for slip plates, realise that the slip plate is only really stiff in the three
axis, but flexible in the three rotations. Jigs should be designed to add to the stiffness of the
slip plate.
9.2.4.6.3 Attaching jigs and fixtures
ly
Flatness of jigs and fixtures is critical. Uneven or bowed jigs can cause binding of bearings
within the slip plate and rubbing of the slip plate against the granite table base.
On
Fixing bolts should be of the length specified in manuals. Bolts that are too long will damage
the slip plate; bolts that are too short may not fully engage in the insert.

Jig design should take account of the effects of thermal expansion. Different materials when
fastened together and subjected to changes in temperature will induce stress in the
components.
e
Slip tables in thermal chambers are particularly susceptible: bearings can be damaged if jig
bolts are tightened before the slip plate has reached the working temperature of the
chamber.
nc
9.2.4.6.5 Armature connection
Where possible all armature inserts should be used to attach driver bars or fixtures. Using
only a few can cause the inserts to pull out, or the dynamics of the armature to change.
re
9.2.4.7 Operation
9.2.4.7.1 Users of equipment

fe
Only trained personnel should use the equipment. Contact Brüel & Kjær for details of training
courses in vibration testing.
9.2.4.7.2 Equipment manuals

Re
Users should familiarise themselves with the equipment manuals including any special
addendums.
9.2.4.7.3 Before test checks

Do ensure that the vibrator and other equipment is working correctly before starting tests.
9.2.4.7.4 Test failures

Any failure should be recorded and efforts made to analyse its causes before repeating the
test. Doing so will avoid repeated failures caused by the same problem. Where appropriate
pass details of failures to Brüel & Kjær including drive and profile plots.

9. Reference Data
9.2.4.7.5 Fixed frequency tests

The vibrator may not run at full performance during fixed frequency tests as test frequencies
may coincide with vibrator resonances. This may cause failure to achieve the desired test
level and/or damage to the vibrator See also ‘Maximising armature life’ earlier in this EIN.
9.2.4.7.6 System characterisation

To determine the correct control positions for the tests to be run, the system should be
characterised by running low level sine sweeps. Characterisation plots can be kept for future
reference.
9.2.4.7.7 Vibrator specification
ly
The vibrator and other equipment should only be run within specification as detailed in
manuals.
9.2.4.7.8 Test masses
On
The exact mass of the payload and fixture should be known before starting the test. This will
avoid overdriving the vibrator.
9.2.4.7.9 Advice from Brüel & Kjær

Advice about vibration testing is readily available from Brüel & Kjær, who should be consulted
in case of doubt about a specific test.
9.2.5. Maintenance
e
nc
9.2.5.1 Programming of maintenance
Regular checks and maintenance activities should be carried out as recommended in
manuals. Maintenance should always be carried out by suitably trained personnel.
9.2.5.2 Calibration
re
Items such as accelerometers which control test levels should be checked regularly to ensure
that they are calibrated and working correctly.
9.2.5.3 Drive and field cables

fe
All drive and field cable connections should be checked for tightness as loose connections
can inject transients into the test item.
9.2.5.4 Oil and water supplies

Re
To maximise the life of the vibrator, oil and water should be changed at the intervals
recommended in manuals
9.2.5.5 Air supply

The air supply should always be within specification as dirty or wet air can cause the
pneumatic regulators to stick.
9.2.5.6 Replacement parts

To avoid problems caused by stoppages, a stock of spare parts should always be maintained
as recommended in manuals. Brüel & Kjær approved parts should always be used as many
are safety critical and most will affect the performance of the equipment.

9. Reference Data
9.2.5.7 Lifting equipment

Adequate lifting facilities must be available both for mounting payloads and for servicing the
vibrator.
9.2.5.8 Cleanliness
The equipment and all areas surrounding should be kept as clean as possible.
Do always keep the vibrator clean as swarf can damage the top seals, and if pulled into the
vibrator body can cause electrical shorts.
9.2.5.9 Cables
Cables should always be routed so as not to obstruct walkways. No cables should be left
ly
where they can be walked on.
9.2.6. Vibrator and slip table mounting
On
A key element in the design of a vibration testing system is the mounting of the vibrator and
any slip table.
A vibrator or combo may be isolated from the floor by mounting it on air-bags, which offer
the lowest possible isolation frequency (typically 2 Hz).
Alternatively the vibrator and any slip table may be rigidly attached either to the floor or to
a seismic block, which may itself be isolated.
e
9.2.6.1 Air-isolated vibrator
nc
All rigid bodies have six modes of vibration: oscillation in the three linear axes (X, Y, Z) and
rotation in the three rotation axes (XX, YY, ZZ), with the frequency of each mode depending
on the stiffness and the mass or inertia in its axis. Air isolation ensures that there is a rigid
body mode of the vibrator body in the thrust direction at the isolation frequency
A vibrator may be air isolated in two distinct ways:
re
• under the vibrator – the body if base-mounted, the vertical members if trunnion-
mounted.
• close to the centre of rotation – Lin-E-Air isolation
fe
A major advantage of Lin-E-Air isolation is that the vibrator can be used horizontally to drive
a slip table.
Both approaches have the advantage that the vibrator dynamic force is not applied to the
floor (though the static mass of the vibrator, which may be large, must also be considered).
Re
While simple air isolation transmits no dynamic moments to the floor, Lin-E-Air isolation
transmits some moments to the floor, depending on their frequency.
A disadvantage of air isolation is that because only the body of the vibrator reacts to the
thrust force generated, body motion can occur if considerable force is generated at low
frequencies, reducing the available displacement.
With air isolation a large seismic block below the vibrator is not necessary, although an
installation will always benefit from a reasonable size seismic block to absorb vibration
transmitted into the floor due to overturning moments.

9. Reference Data
9.2.6.1.1 Air isolation under the vibrator

As this approach gives no guidance, the six modes of vibration described above will be
determined by the mass and inertia of the vibrator as well as the stiffness and location of the
airbags. All six modes will be low as described above.
This approach relies on reaction against the mass or inertia of the vibrator body, as it is
effectively floating in all axes. Care must be taken to avoid excessive displacement of the
body.
9.2.6.1.2 Lin-E-Air
A Lin-E-Air isolation system comprises airbags as described above which along with the
vibrator body mass dictate the resonant frequency in the thrust axis, and a guidance system
ly
of shafts and ball bushings to restrict the other rigid body modes. This maximises the
frequency of five vibration modes whilst minimising the sixth which is in the axis of thrust
direction. The frequencies of the other modes depend on the vibrator bearings, their
housings and the stiffness of the shaft.
On
Although intended to be as high as possible, the frequencies of these modes will always be
in the frequency range of the vibrator as the mass and inertias are so large.
Any moment applied by the attached payload to the vibrator is transmitted by the vibrator
and Lin-E-Air bearings and vertical supports onto the floor, providing the moment is applied
below the rigid body frequency for its direction. Above this frequency the moment will not
be transmitted to the floor: the system is effectively isolated.
e
If the moment is applied near the rigid body frequency then the resultant amplification may
significantly increase the loading of the bearings. To avoid damaging the bearings, care must
nc
be taken to control motion in the rigid body modes, for instance by monitoring
accelerometers on the vibrator.
If the vibrator is used with a head expander, consideration needs to be given to the effect on
the Lin-E-Air guide shafts of tall payloads with high overturning moments.
re
9.2.6.2 Solid trunnion vibrator

The vibrator is rigidly supported by vertical members which allow the vibrator body to be
rotated from horizontal to vertical and bolted in either configuration; these support
members are fixed to a seismic block.
fe
In theory this approach prevents any body displacement as all forces generated by the
vibrator are transmitted to the seismic block: the thrust force of the vibrator, its static mass
and any dynamic moments applied to it.
Re
In practice the support members are never absolutely rigid through the entire frequency
range, and there will be rigid body modes of the vibrator body due to the stiffness of the
vibrator supports. However these modes will occur at much higher frequencies than with Lin-
E-Air trunnions as the structure is inherently stiffer.
9.2.6.3 Slip tables

For normal payloads, there are two main approaches to operating a vibrator with a slip table:
• air-isolated combo (slip table on the same structure as the vibrator)
• separate slip table mounted on a seismic base
Where payloads have large mass and/or inertia, the vibrator and slip table can be mounted
on a shared seismic block as described in the following section.

9. Reference Data
9.2.6.3.1 Combo
As the combo base is isolated from the floor by airbags, moments applied to the slip plate
are reacted only by the inertia of the base; however for all but the largest payloads this is a
very practical approach.
The largest Brüel & Kjær vibrators such as the V984 and V994, typically used for satellite or
military product testing, are usually installed onto purpose-built seismic blocks as described
below. Where it is impractical to install such a block or the vibration system needs to be
movable, combos based on these vibrators can be supplied, with some performance trade-
off compared with a rigidly mounted system.
9.2.6.3.2 Seismic base slip table
ly
The slip table is supplied on a small seismic base which sits on the floor. It is normally
supported by jacking screws and thus not completely isolated from the floor. As the slip table
is separate from the vibrator, it relies on the mass of the base to react against the moments
applied. The floor between the vibrator and the base needs to be basically sound, but does
On
not necessarily need to be a seismic block.
9.2.6.4 Seismic blocks

Seismic blocks are normally used where payloads have large mass and/or inertia as the block
can be very large and provide a stable base for the payload to react against.
The vibrator and any slip table are mounted together on a massive reinforced block which is
e
normally isolated to separate it from surrounding buildings (including the one housing it), or
may be directly fixed to the bedrock.
nc
The slip table is rigidly mounted to the block and the vibrator mounted on the same block,
either solid mounted or air isolated as described above. In either case as the slip table is rigid
to the block, any moments applied to it will be reacted by the whole block.
Isolating the vibrator puts less force into the block, which therefore need not be as large as
with a solid vibrator, but displacement may be limited at low frequency, high force running.
re
For any installation, but particularly when the vibrator is solid mounted, it is very important
to locate the vibrator over the centre of gravity of the seismic block, to avoid rocking the
block when the vibrator is operated vertically. Any induced rocking of the block may in turn
excite rocking modes in the vibrator or payload.
fe
The block required for a seismic block is usually around ten times the maximum system force;
the block for a V994 system with 3 m slip table would typically be approximately 10 m long x
4.5 m wide x 3 m deep. As many other factors must be considered in the design of the block,
this is best undertaken by a specialist company.
Re
Vibration transmitted through a seismic block can cause problems if sensitive equipment is
to be assembled or installed in the vicinity of the vibration system; its effect on building
structures must be considered, plus health and safety issues from vibration and noise.
Further objections to use of a seismic block are that it may be difficult to install due to site
limitations, ground conditions or cost, and that the fixed mass prevents easy relocation of
the vibration system.
9.2.7. Predictive test methodologies

Keeping a set of reference plots for a vibrator gives a valuable indication of whether there
are any problems about to arise from the vibrator. This can help with planning maintenance
within busy test schedules.

9. Reference Data
It can also indicate which of the many tests you run are causing the most damage to the
vibrator.
All vibrators produce different characterisation plots and as such it is important to keep a
reference set and copies of the same performance throughout the life of the vibrator. When
reviewing the latest plots with reference to the previous ones differences can be looked at
and implications can be drawn.
9.2.7.1 Recording the character of a vibrator

Always use the same equipment set-up. If there are any changes, run the same test with the
old set-up and again with the new, noting any differences due to the control equipment.
• Run the vibrator in the vertical axis.
ly
• Ensure that the vibrator is run from cold.
• Fit a tri-axial accelerometer to the centre insert of the armature.
• Set a profile in the controller for a 5 mm peak to peak constant displacement crossing into
On
a 2 gn constant acceleration sine sweep across the entire frequency range of the vibrator.
• Use peak control with a 1 octave per minute sweep rate.
• Record the drive, control and the cross axis in both directions.
• Define the highest frequency that can be run with that control position, by looking at the
drive and ensuring that the drive does not rise past the nominal level seen at 200Hz.
• Run a higher level sweep at 20% of Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration through the
•
e
frequency range as defined previously.
Record the drive, control, cross axis in both directions and the total harmonic distortion
nc
plotted through the frequency range. Use the same measurement technique for the
analysis of distortion.
Once these plots have been taken they should be kept in a file and repeated at sensible
intervals through the vibrator life. These intervals should be determined by the usage of the
vibrator and the practical level of testing that can be performed. As a guide Brüel & Kjær
re
would recommend taking these plots at monthly periods, or after any significant high force
testing that has occurred.
These plots can reveal several things, mostly about the health of the armature and
suspension. Changes to these plots over time will indicate that these parts are becoming
fe
worn or old, but will not necessarily mean that they need to be changed. The fact that they
are changing will indicate that they need to be monitored and possibly inspected visually.
The speed of change will indicate whether a failure is imminent. Changes tend to happen
slowly to start with and then accelerate just before failure. Armature problems can mean
Re
either a failure in the coil, or within the frame. It is more common for the coil to fail than the
frame.
9.2.7.2 What to look for
9.2.7.2.1 Control plot

That it is flat. If it is not flat then it could indicate there is a control problem. There is very
little that can be determined from the control plot alone.
9.2.7.2.2 Drive plot

That it looks the same as the previous 2g drive plot in level, shape and that any resonant
frequencies are the same.

9. Reference Data
• The most important piece of information is the first resonant frequency seen on the plot.
A record of this frequency should be kept and plotted over time. The variation can then
be readily seen. There is normally an initial change with any unused armature, i.e. the
frequency drops by 2-5%. This then stabilises and there is little change until the armature
starts to fail. Large changes could indicate an imminent failure of the armature.
• The shape should be the same as before. It is an indication of a problem if there are more
‘bumps’ or ‘dips’ on this plot than before. Large changes in combination with a resonant
frequency drop indicate an imminent failure of the armature.
• The basic level should be the same as before. If not it can indicate either a control problem
or loss of field.
9.2.7.2.3 Cross axis plots
ly
This is the most difficult to interpret plot as it will vary with the temperature of the vibrator
suspension. To interpret this you should look at the base level of the cross axis and see that
it is approximately the same as before. Any peaks that occur should be logged in frequency
On
and level and plotted through time. Brüel & Kjær would recommend taking 4 peaks to plot
for any vibrator, normally the highest, but spread through the frequency range, this may
mean you take lower peaks at the lower frequencies. Large changes mean that the
suspension is getting worn and should be visually inspected.
9.2.7.2.4 Distortion plot

Although this is a different measurement to the cross axis, the same way of looking at it
e
occurs. Take the previous plots and look at the base level shape to the curve. Check to make
sure that the new plot matches this. Also check the peaks are not changing primarily in level,
but also in frequency. Changes in the base level or increased peak levels can indicate either
nc
a problem with the armature or the suspension. Refer to the other plots to identify the
problem.
9.2.7.3 Other factors

re
Other factors can cause problems which would look like a failing armature, these are:
• loose accelerometer cables
• de-coupling either under the insert or under the accelerometer.
• Anything loose on the armature, inserts, screws etc.
fe
• Excessive noise pick-up

As with any test procedure over time, consistency is the most important thing, ensuring that
as many things as possible are kept the same.
Re

9. Reference Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
9.3. Calculating Over-turning Moments

9.3.1. The Offset Load Formula
9.3.2. Vertical Operation
9.3.3. Horizontal Operation
9.3.1. The Offset Load Formula

An electrodynamic vibrator is designed to operate in a single axis. The moving part of the vibrator, the
armature assembly, must be guided to maintain the armature coil in the centre of the magnetic air
ly
gap. The guidance system will have low stiffness along the vibration axis, and high stiffness at right
angles to this axis (cross-axially).
Details of the guidance system for vibrator is given in section 5 System Description.
On
Any guidance system will have limitations in the cross-axial direction. Excessive loading in this direction
may cause the armature to rub against the pole pieces and exert destructive forces on the guidance
system.
Two constants can be derived for a vibrator:
A= The maximum turning moment of the armature guidance system
B = The distance from a defined null point to the armature mounting face.
e
These constants can be used in the offset load formula
nc
𝐴𝐴
𝐹𝐹 =
𝐵𝐵 + 𝑋𝑋
where
X = The distance from the mounting face to the payload centre of gravity
re
F = A resultant force applied to the guidance system

Offset load calculations should be made whenever the vibrator is to be used in the horizontal axis. For
vertical use, value A is used as a limit for the maximum moment which may be applied to the armature
assembly.
fe
Values of A and B for the vibrator is given in section 4 ‘Specification’ and should be substituted in actual
calculations for those used in the following examples.
Note: The vibrator limitations detailed in this section do not take into account the possibility of cross-
Re
axial resonances. Resonances can only be determined by effective monitoring of cross-axial

acceleration.
9.3.2. Vertical Operation

Attention to the method of mounting a payload to the vibrator is vital. An unsatisfactory fixture can
cause severe cross-axial forces on the vibrator and subject both vibrator and payload to forces beyond
which they were designed to be tested.

9. Reference Data
Moment Moment
Payload Centre
of Gravity
ly
Alternating
On
Direction of Force
Figure 1 Incorrectly Positioned Payload Causing Turning Moment

Symmetry of mounting is of prime importance. Every effort must be made to position the payload
centre of gravity on the armature axis. If the payload is incorrectly positioned an alternating force of
high magnitude can result:
Assume a vibrator for which A = 45 N m, and B = 0.062 m, giving the following offset load formula:
45
e
𝐹𝐹 =
0.062 + 𝑋𝑋
nc
50mm
Offset
Payload Centre
10 kg Payload of Gravity
re
100mm
fe
Re
Vibrator
Centreline
Figure 2 Vertical Testing Example
A payload of 10 kg, mounted 50 mm offset from the vibrator centre line, is to be accelerated at 5 gn.
The payload centre of gravity is 100 mm above the load mounting face:
Since force = mass x acceleration the moment applied to the armature can be calculated as follows:
Force = 10 x 5 x 9.80665
= 490.3 N

9. Reference Data
Moment = 490.3 x 0.050

= 24.5 Nm
This value should always be lower than the maximum turning moment.
In practice, it is wise to calculate the maximum cross-axial acceleration limit as follows, and to monitor
this during testing:
Maximum allowable moment A = 45 Nm

Effect of offset load (from previous example) = 24.5 Nm
Maximum allowable moment due to cross-axial = 45 - 24.5
acceleration
ly
= 20.5 Nm
Using the offset load formula F F = 𝐴𝐴
On
𝐵𝐵 + 𝑋𝑋
Maximum allowable cross-axial force F F = 20.5
0.062 + 0.1
= 126.5 N
Therefore, maximum cross-axial acceleration = 126.5

10
e = 12.65 m/s² (1.29 gn)
Note: This figure should be used with caution as it assumes a perfectly rigid payload and fixture which
nc
may not be the case in practice. It is preferable to monitor the armature for cross-axial
acceleration, having calculated the maximum allowable acceleration as follows:
Maximum acceleration at payload C of G = 1.29 gn

Distance from C of G to the null point = 62 + 100
re
Maximum acceleration at armature face = 1.29 ∗ 62

62 + 100
= 0.49 gn
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
9.3.3. Horizontal Operation

When a trunnion-mounted vibrator is rotated to the horizontal, the maximum load it can support
under static conditions can be calculated from the offset load formula. This value is also the maximum
load the vibrator can support under dynamic conditions, provided that the payload centre of gravity
aligns with the centre of the armature.
100mm
ly
Vibrator
Centreline
Payload Centre
of Gravity
On
75 kg Payload
Figure 3 Horizontal Testing Example
Example: It is proposed to attach a payload of 75 kg to the horizontally rotated vibrator. The payload
centre of gravity is 100 mm from the armature mounting face. Confirm that the payload will not cause
damage to the suspension system, assuming that the payload centre of gravity is on the same axis as
the vibrator centre line.
F = 𝐴𝐴
e
𝐵𝐵 + 𝑋𝑋
nc
= 45
0.062 + 0.1
= 278 N
Using mass = force / acceleration,
re
M = 𝐹𝐹
𝐴𝐴
= 278
1 ∗ 9.80665
fe
= 28.3kg
Thus the maximum payload the horizontally rotated vibrator can safely support when the centre of
gravity is 100 mm from the armature mounting face is 28.3 kg.
Re
It is therefore NOT safe to test with a 75 kg payload.

If the payload is mounted off-centre, an additional load will be generated in the form of an alternating
moment:

9. Reference Data
100mm
10 kg Payload
Vibrator
Centreline 50mm
Offset
Payload Centre
of Gravity
Figure 4 Horizontal Testing Example 2
ly
This example shows a 10 kg payload with its centre of gravity 100 mm from the armature face and
offset from the vibrator centre line by 50 mm. The payload is to be tested at an acceleration level of 5
gn. Where Fp is the force exerted by the payload and using values B and X from the offset load formula:
On
The moment induced by the overhanging load = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 ∗ (𝐵𝐵 + 𝑋𝑋)
= 10 ∗ 9.80665 ∗ (0.062 + 0.1)
= 15.9 Nm
The moment induced by the 50 mm offset = 10 ∗ 5 ∗ 9.80665 ∗ 0.05

= 24.5 Nm
e
Therefore the total moment = 15.9 + 24.5
nc
= 40.4 Nm
Total allowable moment A = 45 Nm
Maximum allowable moment due to cross-axial = 45 − 40.4

re
acceleration
= 4.6 Nm
This is equivalent to a force of 4.6

fe
0.062 + 0.1
= 28.4 N
Therefore the maximum cross-axial acceleration at the = 28.4

Re
payload centre of gravity is 10

= 2.84 m/s² (0.29 gn
Note: This figure should be used with caution as it assumes a perfectly rigid payload and fixture which
may not be the case in practice. It is preferable to monitor the armature for cross-axial
acceleration, having calculated the maximum allowable acceleration as follows:
Maximum acceleration at payload C of G = 0.29 gn

Distance from C of G to the null point = 62 + 100
Maximum acceleration at armature face = 0.29 ∗ 62
62 + 100
= 0.11 gn

9. Reference Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
9.4. Earthing Advice

When planning and carrying out the installation of a vibration testing system, special attention must
be paid to earthing, mains supply and routing of cables.
This section gives advice on the following issues in relation to systems including an amplifier:
• System earthing
• Mains supply, including the choice of supply isolator and RFI filtering
• Routing of armature drive and field supply cables
• Routing of signal cables (including fibre optic cables)
ly
LDS equipment installed as described in this appendix will comply with the following European
directives where applicable:
Machinery 2006/42/EC
On
Low Voltage 2014/35/EU
EMC 2014/30/EU
9.4.1. Earthing
There are two primary considerations for correctly earthing a vibration test system:
•
e
Safety earth (protective earth)
• RFI earth
nc
9.4.1.1 Safety Earth
Each element of the vibration test system must have a suitably sized, continuous conductor to the
facility safety earth and this conductor must have a low impedance at 50/60 Hz. This is a statutory
requirement for compliance with the Low Voltage Directive and local Health & Safety at Work
re
regulations, and is usually provided by and routed with the 3-phase mains connection.
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
1
1 Equipment (Rear View)
2 Conductive Mesh Buried
Underground in Subsoil
3 Thick Copper Earth Connected to
Mesh
ly
4 Thick Earth Bond to Amplifier
Plinth
On
3
2
e Figure 1 RFI Earth Connection
9.4.1.2 RFI Earth

nc
To ensure compliance with the EMC Directive it is essential for a vibration system to be provided with
a good RFI earth (target impedance of 1 Ω at 150 kHz).
Ideally (for instance in new vibration test facilities) this earth should take the form of a ground mesh
set in the sub-soil beneath the amplifier as shown in Figure 1 above. Where this is not practical (for
re
instance in pre-existing facilities) earth rods may be sunk into the subsoil outside the building but as
near to the amplifier as possible.
In either case, connection between the RFI earth and the system element must be made using multi-
strand RFI ‘rope’ (or similar) or an appropriately sized and profiled copper bar.
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
9.5. Mains Supply Advice
Amplifier
ly
3-phase Isolator RFI Filter
Supply
Conduit
L1
On
L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
E PE
RFI Earth
e Figure 1 Mains Supply and RFI Filter
9.5.1. Supply Isolator

nc
The supply isolator must be connected on the incoming supply as shown in Figure 1 above. With this
arrangement it is physically impossible to mount the isolator on the amplifier as specified in the
Machinery directive; Brüel & Kjaer therefore recommend that the isolator be
re
• fitted adjacent to the equipment.

• easily accessible to the operator
• clearly marked
fe
• lockable in the off position only

The supply current requirement can be calculated as in the following example:
• XPA-88K amplifier
Re
• Maximum input requirement of 76.36 kVA

• 3-phase supply of 415 V
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘∗1000
Maximum line current IL will be 106.2 A, calculated from IL =
√3∗𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
9.5.2. RFI Mains Filter and Associated EMC Compliance

For compliance with the EMC Directive it is necessary to include an a.c RFI filter in the 3-phase supply
to the Amplifier as shown in Figure 1 above.
9.5.2.1 Filter Kit

The filter kit includes supply and earth cable and termination lugs, together with suitable conduit.
Cables are supplied in 3 metre lengths which should be tailored to suit the installation.

9. Reference Data
It is important that all cable provided is used and divided equally between each supply line ie L1, L2
and L3. All earth cables provided must be used.
9.5.2.2 Location of Filter

The RFI filter should ideally be wall-mounted. If this is not possible, the filter can be sited on the floor
providing it has no ventilation holes susceptible to the ingress of fluids or dirt.
Alternative siting of RFI filters or points of cable entry into equipment may only be implemented with
agreement from Bruel & Kjaer.
9.5.2.3 Installation
To ensure compliance with the EMC directive the following points must be observed during installation
ly
and checked during routine maintenance and service repairs.
• It is imperative that all mains supply cables between the amplifier and the RFI filter are completely
enclosed in metal conduit. This conduit must have good galvanic connection and 360° metal-to-
On
metal contact at both ends: to a bracket on the amplifier and to the metal housing of the RFI filter.
• The bracket supplied with the RFI filter kit is plated (not painted) to ensure good electrical
(galvanic) connection with the amplifier plinth and with the conduit protecting the cables to the
filter.
Note: The amplifier plinth is the ground reference plane and must have a very low RFI impedance
connection to earth (see Section 1, ‘RFI earth’).
•
e
The bracket is fitted on the underside of the plinth below the internal mains terminals.
The 2 m conduit supplied with the RFI filter kit has a plastic covering. This should be stripped at
nc
both ends, sufficient to ensure good 360° galvanic contact.
• Good surface-to-surface contact must be maintained between equipment outer panels and cabinet
frame.
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
9.6. Equipment Cabling Advice

9.6.1. Armature Drive and Field Supply Cables
9.6.1.1 Cable Characteristics
9.6.1.2 Routing of Cables
9.6.2. Signal Cables
9.6.2.1 Amplifier Signal
9.6.2.2 System Interlock
9.6.2.4 Installing Cables
ly
9.6.1. Armature Drive and Field Supply Cables
On
9.6.1.1 Cable Characteristics
Armature drive cablesets comprise one or more 7-core 10 mm² cables. The cores, which are tightly
twisted together within an outer sheath, provide three positive, three negative and one earth
connection. The tight bonding minimises the cable inductance (impedance) and therefore high-
frequency losses.
e
Field power supply cables consist of lengths of multi-stran cable, which do not need to be tightly
bonded as do armature cables.
nc
As with all cables, and particularly with the high currents carried by the armature drive cables, some
losses and consequent heat dissipation will occur with both types of cable, which will be proportional
to cable length. For this reason the guidelines given below for routing and installation of these cables
should be followed.

re
CAUTION:
• In order to keep the temperature level of these cables to a minimum, the following
recommendations must be adhered to.
fe
• Failure to comply could result in overheating of the cables with a consequent fire risk.
2 5
1
Re
Figure 1 Routing Vibrator Drive Cables on Cable Figure 2 Routing Vibrator Drive Cables through
Troughs Walls
1 Air Gaps 2 Steel Cable Trough
3 Bulkhead Seal 4 Cables Separated by Bulkhead Seal
5 Cable Duct 6 Wall

9. Reference Data
• Cables should be laid in a suitable steel cable tray designed for the purpose (see Figure 1 above).
• Cables should be individually fixed to the tray, with sufficient space between to ensure good
ventilation around the cables.
• Cables should not be laid on top of each other but tiered in the cable troughing to allow the
maximum circulation of air around the cables as shown in Figure 1 above.
• Cables that pass through a duct or wall should be given special care in that insulation must not be
wrapped around the cable at the entry and exit points to seal the duct.
For applications where cables pass from, for example, a clean room test area to an air conditioned
amplifier room where the cables must be sealed, a special interface bulkhead, made from Tufnol
material, must be fitted as shown in Figure 2 above.
ly
Note: Insulation around the cables at this point will impede cooling and cause a local hot spot in the
cable.
9.6.2. Signal Cables
On
The following considerations should be borne in mind when routing and installing system signal cables.
9.6.2.1 Amplifier Signal

To ensure full EMC compliance, the drive signal to the amplifier should be supplied using triaxial cable.
On XPA-K amplifiers the amplifier terminations are both XLR and BNC connectors with adjacent earth
studs to terminate the outer screen of the triaxial cable. The lowest signal noise will be achieved using
the XLR connection.
e
Most drive signal sources (controllers) have BNC output connectors. It is essential for good EMC
nc
performance that the outer screen of the triaxial cables is bonded to the case of the drive equipment
via the ‘pigtail` provided.
9.6.2.2 System Interlock

All system interlock cables supplied by Bruel & Kjaer are at least 2-core with an outer screen.
re
The inner cores carry the signals while the screen provides protection from RFI interference. It is
essential that the screen is earthed at both ends of the cable.

fe
Switching amplifiers such as XPA-K amplifiers generate high levels of electromagnetic interference that
can affect system signal cables.
Filter units on the DC circuit and 3-phase supplies of LDS amplifiers provide the necessary suppression
Re
to comply with European legislation. However very low levels of radiated RFI signals will occur. All LDS
cables are screened to ensure that no interference from the amplifier or other sources can affect the
signals carried.
Where other cables are introduced into the system it is equally important to ensure that both ends of
the cable screen are taken to a good earth.
It is always good practice to route signal cables away from vibrator drive cables to reduce further the
possibility of any interference. Where signal cables cannot be routed in a separate trench or duct they
should be run in conduit and kept as far away as practical from drive cables.

9. Reference Data
9.6.2.4 Installing Cables

Great care must be taken when installing signal cables to prevent any undue strain on the terminations.
Cables should be carefully routed to allow an excess at each end which should be arranged to avoid
any possibility of the termination being pulled if disturbed.
When routing cables avoid sharp corners that could damage the insulation.
Extra special care is needed where fibre optic cables are used:
• They should not be routed around tight bends as kinking and damage to the cable will occur.
• The fibre optic termination is easily damaged and must not be strained in any way.
• Failure to maintain a secure connection at both ends could result in spurious fault conditions
ly
occurring.
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

9. Reference Data
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

10. Schematics
Table of Contents
10.2. List of Drawings Etc.
ly
This section of the manual, gives drawings and schematics, essential for the safe operation of the
VTS System.
On
10.2. List of Drawings Etc.
Ref Drawing No Rev Title
1. 6009890 2 INTERCONNECTION DRAWING, V8900-XPAK SERIES

2. 6010750 1 OUTLINE, XPA88/128K AMPLIFIER
3. 6010510 1
e
OUTLINE, FAN, V8900, 3~50Hz
4. 6010520 A OUTLINE, FAN, V8900, 3~60Hz
nc
5. 6010730 1 OUTLINE, HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT, V8900, VIBRATOR
6. 6010710 1 OUTLINE, PEDESTAL CONTROL UNIT, V8900
7. 6010760 2 OUTLINE, FAN STARTER UNIT, V8900
re
8. 6010740 1 OUTLINE, V8900, TRUNNION MOUNTED

9. 6009910 2 OUTLINE, HEAD EXPANDER, UHX, 1220SQ, M8
10. 6009920 1 OUTLINE, HEAD EXPANDER, UHX, 1220SQ, M10
fe
11. 6009930 1 OUTLINE, HEAD EXPANDER, UHX, 1220SQ, 3/8UNC

Re
The following Safety Data Sheets are the current issue at the time of printing. For more up to date
copies, please refer to the OEM website detailed in section 4.8.
Company & Product Name Material Type

Shell TELLUS Oil S2 M 68 Hydraulic Fluid (Mineral Oil Based)
Mobil DELV AC 1 SHC 5W-40 Hydraulic Fluid (Synthetic Oil)
3-IN-ONE Multi-Purpose Oil Lubricant (General Purpose)
Henkel Loctite 243 Threadlocking Adhesive (Medium strength)
Henkel Loctite 603 Retaining Compound (High strength)

10. Schematics
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

Re
fe
re
nc
e
On
ly
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FRONT REAR
POWER BAY CONTROL BAY

A
1200 824
ly
On
AIRFLOW AIRFLOW
e
1905
nc
D
re
fe
Re
AIRFLOW
NOTES
1. DETACHABLE FRONT & REAR PANELS 3 PHASE & EARTH SIGNAL ARMATURE &
SHOULD ONLY BE REMOVED WITH THE SUPPLY CABLES INTERLOCK FIELD CABLES
POWER OFF AND BY TRAINED SERVICE CABLES TO VIBRATOR
PERSONNEL
F
2. APPROXIMATE WEGHTS: XPA88K 1100Kg MARK PART (Drg.) No. AND ISSUE No. WHERE SHOWN THUS
XPAK128K 1160Kg Material DESIGNED BY Andy Richardson Bruel & Kjaer VTS LTD
- DATE 21/11/16 ROYSTON, HERTS, ENGLAND
3. JACKING SCREWS TO BE ADJUSTED TO Finish
CHECKED BY Nick Claydon C
OWNS THE COPYRIGHT FOR THIS DRAWING, WHICH IS SUPPLIED IN CONFIDENCE AND
WHICH MAY NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT IS SUPPLIED,
-
ENSURE CASTORS ARE RAISED ABOVE THE UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES mm
DATE 22/11/16 AND MUST NOT BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION, IN WRITING, FROM THE OWNERS.
FLOOR.(REFER TO MANUAL). FOR EXPLANATION OF DIMENSIONS & NOTES ETC SEE BS 8888. PRODUCT XPAK Title
GENERAL TOLERANCES: REMOVE ALL BURRS &

SHARP EDGES.
PROJECT EP0263 OUTLINE, XPA88/128K AMPLIFIER
0 = 1.0 0.00 = 0.25
0.0 = 0.5 ANGLES = 1 MACHINE WHERE MARKED PROJ ENG. Claire Flynn
DRILLED HOLES = 1% OR 0.05 SURFACE FINISH VALUES IN µm
(which ever is greater) WEIGHT(Kg) SEE NOTES Scale Sht: Drg No. Issue
6010750 1
THREADS ARE ISO METRIC,
Iss. ECO No. - DESCRIPTION Eng. DATE Chk'd HOLE POS. 0.25 COARSE SERIES, TOLERANCE
CLASS 6g/6H TO BS 3643. STATUS Released A1 1:5 1 of 1
LDS A1 2DL SHEET - Iss. 3
DO NOT SCALE - IF IN DOUBT ASK Printed Date: 18/07/2017
Re
fe
re
nc
e
On
ly
Re
fe
re
nc
e
On
ly
Re
fe
re
nc
e
On
ly
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1066
510 489
A
460 400
AIR ISOLATION
EMERGENCY STOP REGULATOR
350
410
PNEUMATIC HOSE &
CABLE CONNECTIONS
218
B
ly
On
LOAD SUPPORT
REGULATOR
ICS DISPLAY LOAD SUPPORT

(ARMATURE PRESSURE GAUGE
e
POSITION)
nc
460
re 4 X Ø8.5mm HOLES
fe
360
Re
BOX MOUNTING POSITIONS
MARK PART (Drg.) No. AND ISSUE No. WHERE SHOWN THUS
Material DESIGNED BY William Marsh Bruel & Kjaer VTS LTD
- DATE 15/11/16 ROYSTON, HERTS, ENGLAND
F
Finish OWNS THE COPYRIGHT FOR THIS DRAWING, WHICH IS SUPPLIED IN CONFIDENCE AND
CHECKED BY NJC C WHICH MAY NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT IS SUPPLIED,
- AND MUST NOT BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION, IN WRITING, FROM THE OWNERS.
DATE 21/11/16
UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES mm Title
FOR EXPLANATION OF DIMENSIONS & NOTES ETC SEE BS 8888. PRODUCT V8900
SHARP EDGES.
PROJECT EP0102 OUTLINE, PEDESTAL CONTROL UNIT
0 = 1.0
0.0 = 0.5
0.00 = 0.25
ANGLES = 1
DRILLED HOLES = 1% OR 0.05
MACHINE WHERE MARKED
SURFACE FINISH VALUES IN µm
PROJ ENG. CF V8900
(which ever is greater) WEIGHT(Kg) APPROX. 28kg Scale Sht: Drg No. Issue
6010710 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
315
400
250
A HINGES TO PEDESTAL 363.00
CONTROL UNIT
ly
SAFETY LABELS
On
463.00
500
e
ISOLATION
SWITCH
nc
D MAINS
INPUT
OUTPUT
TO FAN
DOOR
OPEN
re PRODUCT/MODEL/SERIAL No. LABEL
6.5 FOR FIXING TO WALL
fe
CONTROL VOLTAGE 24V DC
INPUT VOLTAGE -3 PHASE 380-480V AC 50-60HZ
Re
INTERNAL BREAKER SET TO 100A

E
OVERLOAD RANGE - AMPS 63-80 SEE MOTOR RATING
AND TABLE BELOW
APPROX. FULL LINE CURRENT

MOTOR HP AT 3 PHASE LINE VOLTAGE
RATING
380V AC 400V AC 415V AC 420V AC 480V AC
GLAND SUPPLIED AS PART 37 KW 50 67.40 64.03 61.72 60.99 53.36
OF CONDUIT IN FAN KIT
100
F
Material DESIGNED BY Kelvin King Bruel & Kjaer VTS LTD
50.5 HOLE FOR MAINS INPUT - ROYSTON, HERTS, ENGLAND
100
DATE 28/11/16
Finish
TO SUIT CUSTOMER SUPPLY

CHECKED BY Nick Claydon OWNS THE COPYRIGHT FOR THIS DRAWING, WHICH IS SUPPLIED IN CONFIDENCE AND
C WHICH MAY NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT IS SUPPLIED,
- AND MUST NOT BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT PERMISSION, IN WRITING, FROM THE OWNERS.
DATE 28/11/16
CABLES AND SUITABLE GLAND FITTED

FOR EXPLANATION OF DIMENSIONS & NOTES ETC SEE BS 8888. PRODUCT V8900
SHARP EDGES.
PROJECT EP0102 OUTLINE, FAN STARTER UNIT, V8900
0 = 1.0 0.00 = 0.25
0.0 = 0.5 ANGLES = 1 MACHINE WHERE MARKED PROJ ENG. Claire Flynn
DRILLED HOLES = 1% OR 0.05 SURFACE FINISH VALUES IN µm
2 ECO VTS9766 - HOLE GRID REF 1E, WAS 6.0 NOW 50.5 KBK 14/12/16 NJC (which ever is greater) WEIGHT(Kg) APPROX 20Kg Scale Sht: Drg No. Issue
6010760 2

(0(5*(1&<6723 /,)7,1*(<(%2/76
),77('72%27+6,'(6 /,)7,1*32,176 5()(5720$18$/
-$&.,1*&(175(6 )256$)(/,)7,1*

$
67$,1/(6667((/,16(5767+5($'('
6((7$%/(%(/2:)2548$17,7(6$1'
326,7,216326,7,21$/72/(5$1&(PP
002581&$9$,/$%/(

$,5*/,'( 237,21
$
% ($57+675$36
$ $
% $ %
$ $
5,*,'),;,1*237,21
/,)7,1*32,176
%
&(175(6
,16(57326,7,216
$ % $ % $ % $ % $

,16(57.,747< 32616
&/
$
&(175(2)0$66
% $ %
$ $
% $ %
%
$ $
%
ly

$
$50$785(7$%/(,16(573$77(51
6&$/(
On
&(175(2)0$66

527$7,21*($5%2; +2/(6
9,%5$725),;,1*6

2))0,16(5766+2:1
&
e
,16(57+(,*+7
$50$785(
7(036(1625
237,21 7(50,1$/&29(5

nc
:$51,1*$1',168758&7,21
57851,1*5$',86 /$%(/6,19$5,286
%2'</2&.('287 326,7,2165()(5720$18$/

2,/,17(5/2&.

6:,7&+9,%5$725
re

' %2'<527$7,2167236
6((127(

9,%5$7252,/
6833/<
fe &(175(2)0$66
9,%5$7252,/
/,1($,5 5(7851
75811,21527$7,21 6863(16,21
%($5,1* 028176

2)) 2))($&+6,'(
075811,21/2&.2876&5(:6
Re
&$%/((175<
-$&.,1*
3$'6
(
21-$&.,1*3$'6

$,5*/,'(&(175(6 237,21 $,5*/,'(&(175(6 237,21
&22/,1*287/(772)$1
PP ,' +26(
127(6
',0(16,2160$5.(' $5(:,7+%2'<,10,'326,7,21
)
+<'5$8/,&32:(581,71276+2:17+,6,6$
6(3$5$7()5((67$1',1*81,75()(5726(3$5$7( 0$5.3$57 'UJ 1R$1',668(1R:+(5(6+2:17+86
287/,1('5$:,1* 0DWHULDO '(6,*1('%< :LOOLDP0DUVK %UXHO .MDHU976/7'
1$ 52<6721+(576(1*/$1'
3('(67$/&21752/81,71276+2:17+,6$6(3$5$7( '$7(
)5((67$1',1*81,772%(326,7,21(':,7+,10(75(6 )LQLVK
&+(&.('%< 1-& &
2:167+(&23<5,*+7)257+,6'5$:,1*:+,&+,66833/,(',1&21),'(1&($1'
:+,&+0$<127%(86(')25$1<385326(27+(57+$1)25:+,&+,7,66833/,('
2)6+$.(5%2'<5()(51726(3$5$7(287/,1('5$:,1* 1$ $1'0867127%(5(352'8&(':,7+2873(50,66,21,1:5,7,1*)5207+(2:1(56
'$7(
81/(6627+(5:,6(67$7('$//',0(16,216$5(,10,//,0(75(6PP 7LWOH
)25(;3/$1$7,212)',0(16,216 127(6(7&6((%6 352'8&7 9
$'-867$%/(527$7,2167236),77('21*($5%2;6,'(2) 5(029($//%8556 352-(&7 (3 287/,1(9/
75811,21 *(1(5$/72/(5$1&(6
6+$53('*(6

$1*/(6
'5,//('+2/(6 25
0$&+,1(:+(5(0$5.('
685)$&(),1,6+9$/8(6,1P
352-(1* &) 75811,2102817('
ZKLFKHYHULVJUHDWHU :(,*+7 .J $3352;NJ 6FDOH 6KW 'UJ1R ,VVXH

7+5($'6$5(,620(75,&
,VV (&21R'(6&5,37,21 (QJ '$7( &KN G +2/(326 &2$56(6(5,(672/(5$1&(
&/$66J+72%6 67$786 5HOHDVHG $ RI
/'6$'/6+((7,VV
'21276&$/(,),1'28%7$6. 3ULQWHG'DWH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1220 SQ
A
100 GRID 60 385
60
100 GRID
B
ly
On
440
C
e
22.5°
nc
D
re
fe
HOLE DETAILS
168 HOLES FITTED WITH M8x1.25
Re
FLUSH INSERTS AS FOLLOWS

4 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 101.6 PCD
E 8 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 152.4 PCD
8 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 203.2 PCD NOTES
8 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 406.4 PCD 1. USABLE FREQUENCY
132 HOLES POSITIONED ON 100 GRID RANGE UP TO 2000Hz
Material DESIGNED BY Gordon Smith
Bruel & Kjaer VTS LTD
MAGNESIUM DATE 22/09/15 ROYSTON, HERTS, ENGLAND
CHECKED BY SRIDHAR GOLI C
- WHICH MAY NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT IS SUPPLIED,
F FOR EXPLANATION OF DIMENSIONS & NOTES ETC SEE BS 8888. PRODUCT ?
SHARP EDGES.
PROJECT EP0259 OUTLINE, HEAD EXPANDER, UHX 1220SQ
0 = 1.0 0.00 = 0.25
0.0 = 0.5 ANGLES = 1
PROJ ENG. M8
2 VTS9540 - DRAWING ANNOTATION AMENDED GWS 08/04/2016 SG (which ever is greater) THREADS ARE ISO METRIC, WEIGHT(Kg) 224Kg Scale Sht: Drg No. Issue
CLASS 6g/6H TO BS 3643. STATUS Released A3 1:10 1 of 1 6009910 2
LDS A3 2DL SHEET - Iss. 3 DO NOT SCALE - IF IN DOUBT ASK Printed Date: 11/04/2016
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1220 SQUARE
A
100 GRID 60 385
60
100 GRID
B
ly
On
440
22.5°
C
e
nc
D
HOLE DETAILS
168 HOLES FITTED WITH STAINLESS STEEL
re
fe
FLUSH INSERTS AS FOLLOWS NOTES
8 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 152.4 PCD 1. PART LIST:- 4063530
Re
8 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 203.2 PCD 2. USABLE FREQUENCY RANGE UP TO 2000Hz

E

132 HOLES POSITIONED ON 101.6 GRID
Material DESIGNED BY Andy Richardson
SHARP EDGES.
PROJECT EP0259 OUTLINE, HEAD EXPANDER,UHX 1220SQ
0 = 1.0
0.0 = 0.5
0.00 = 0.25
ANGLES = 1
PROJ ENG. M10
(which ever is greater) Scale Sht: Drg No. Issue
6009920 1
THREADS ARE ISO METRIC, WEIGHT(Kg) 224Kg
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1220 SQUARE 385

101.6 GRID 60
60
101.6 GRID
B
ly
On
440
C 22.5°
e
nc
D
HOLE DETAILS
168 HOLES FITTED WITH STAINLESS STEEL
re
fe
NOTES
FLUSH INSERTS AS FOLLOWS
4 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 101.6 PCD 1. PART LIST:- 4063540
Re
2. USABLE FREQUENCY RANGE UP TO 2000Hz

E 8 HOLES EQUI-SPACED ON 203.2 PCD
132 HOLES POSITIONED ON 101.6 GRID MARK PART (Drg.) No. AND ISSUE No. WHERE SHOWN THUS
Material DESIGNED BY Andy Richardson
SHARP EDGES.
PROJECT EP0259 OUTLINE, HEAD EXPANDER, UHX, 1220SQ
0 = 1.0
0.0 = 0.5
0.00 = 0.25
ANGLES = 1
PROJ ENG. 3/8 UNC
(which ever is greater) Scale Sht: Drg No. Issue
6009930 1
THREADS ARE ISO METRIC, WEIGHT(Kg) 224Kg
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Regulation 1907/2006/EC
Shell Tellus S2 M 68
Version 1.6 Revision Date 12.10.2015 Print Date 13.10.2015
SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the company/undertaking
1.1 Product identifier

Trade name : Shell Tellus S2 M 68
Product code : 001D7745
1.2 Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
ly
Use of the : Hydraulic oil
Substance/Mixture
Uses advised against :
This product must not be used in applications other than those
On
listed in Section 1 without first seeking the advice of the
supplier.
1.3 Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet

Manufacturer/Supplier : Société des Pétroles Shell
Immeuble les Portes de la Défense
307 Rue D'Estienne D'Orves
Telephone
Telefax
e F-92708 Colombes Cedex
: (+33) 0969366018
: (+33) 0969366030
nc
Email Contact for Safety Data : If you have any enquiries about the content of this SDS
Sheet please email lubricantSDS@shell.com
1.4 Emergency telephone number

: Shell (en France 24/24h): 0800 33 86 86 (+33 4 82 90 75 50)
ORFILA (INRS): + 33 (0)1 45 42 59 59
re
SECTION 2: Hazards identification

fe
2.1 Classification of the substance or mixture

Classification (REGULATION (EC) No 1272/2008)
Re
Not a hazardous substance or mixture.

2.2 Label elements
Labelling (REGULATION (EC) No 1272/2008)

Hazard pictograms : No Hazard Symbol required
Signal word : No signal word
Hazard statements : PHYSICAL HAZARDS:

Not classified as a physical hazard
1 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
according to CLP criteria.

HEALTH HAZARDS:
Not classified as a health hazard under CLP
criteria.
ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS:
Not classified as environmental hazard
according to CLP criteria.
ly
Precautionary statements : Prevention:
No precautionary phrases.
Response:
On
Storage:
Disposal:
2.3 Other hazards

e
This mixture does not contain any REACH registered substances that are assessed to be a PBT or a
vPvB.
Prolonged or repeated skin contact without proper cleaning can clog the pores of the skin resulting in
nc
disorders such as oil acne/folliculitis.
Used oil may contain harmful impurities.
High-pressure injection under the skin may cause serious damage including local necrosis.
Not classified as flammable but will burn.
re
SECTION 3: Composition/information on ingredients

3.2 Mixtures
Chemical nature : Highly refined mineral oils and additives.
The highly refined mineral oil contains <3% (w/w) DMSO-
fe
extract, according to IP346.
: * contains one or more of the following CAS-numbers

(REACH registration numbers): 64742-53-6 (01-2119480375-
34), 64742-54-7 (01-2119484627-25), 64742-55-8 (01-
Re
2119487077-29), 64742-56-9 (01-2119480132-48), 64742-65-

0 (01-2119471299-27), 68037-01-4 (01-2119486452-34),
72623-86-0 (01-2119474878-16), 72623-87-1 (01-
2119474889-13), 8042-47-5 (01-2119487078-27), 848301-69-
9 (01-0000020163-82).
Hazardous components
Chemical Name CAS-No. Classification Concentration
EC-No. (REGULATION [%]
Registration (EC) No
number 1272/2008)
Interchangeable low Asp. Tox.1; H304 0 - 90
2 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
viscosity base oil

(<20,5 cSt @40°C) *
For explanation of abbreviations see section 16.
SECTION 4: First aid measures
ly
4.1 Description of first aid measures
General advice : Not expected to be a health hazard when used under normal
conditions.
On
Protection of first-aiders : When administering first aid, ensure that you are wearing the
appropriate personal protective equipment according to the
incident, injury and surroundings.
If inhaled : No treatment necessary under normal conditions of use.

If symptoms persist, obtain medical advice.
In case of skin contact : Remove contaminated clothing. Flush exposed area with
e water and follow by washing with soap if available.
If persistent irritation occurs, obtain medical attention.
nc
When using high pressure equipment, injection of product
under the skin can occur. If high pressure injuries occur, the
casualty should be sent immediately to a hospital. Do not wait
for symptoms to develop.
Obtain medical attention even in the absence of apparent
wounds.
re
In case of eye contact : Flush eye with copious quantities of water.

If persistent irritation occurs, obtain medical attention.
If swallowed : In general no treatment is necessary unless large quantities

are swallowed, however, get medical advice.
fe
4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
Symptoms : Oil acne/folliculitis signs and symptoms may include formation
of black pustules and spots on the skin of exposed areas.
Re
Ingestion may result in nausea, vomiting and/or diarrhoea.
Local necrosis is evidenced by delayed onset of pain and

tissue damage a few hours following injection.
4.3 Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
Treatment : Notes to doctor/physician:
Treat symptomatically.
High pressure injection injuries require prompt surgical

intervention an d possibly steroid therapy, to minimise tissue
damage and loss of function.
3 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Because entry wounds are small and do not reflect the

seriousness of the underlying damage, surgical exploration to
determine the extent of involvement may be necessary. Local
anaesthetics or hot soaks should be avoided because they
can contribute to swelling, vasospasm and ischaemia. Prompt
surgical decompression, debridement and evacuation of
foreign material should be performed under general
anaesthetics, and wide exploration is essential.
ly
SECTION 5: Firefighting measures
On
5.1 Extinguishing media
Suitable extinguishing media : Foam, water spray or fog. Dry chemical powder, carbon
dioxide, sand or earth may be used for small fires only.
Unsuitable extinguishing : Do not use water in a jet.
media
5.2 Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture
Specific hazards during : Hazardous combustion products may include: A complex
firefighting
e mixture of airborne solid and liquid particulates and gases
(smoke). Carbon monoxide may be evolved if incomplete
combustion occurs. Unidentified organic and inorganic
nc
compounds.
5.3 Advice for firefighters
Special protective equipment : Proper protective equipment including chemical resistant
for firefighters gloves are to be worn; chemical resistant suit is indicated if
large contact with spilled product is expected. Self-Contained
re
Breathing Apparatus must be worn when approaching a fire in

a confined space. Select fire fighter's clothing approved to
relevant Standards (e.g. Europe: EN469).
Specific extinguishing : Use extinguishing measures that are appropriate to local
methods circumstances and the surrounding environment.
fe
SECTION 6: Accidental release measures

Re
6.1 Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures

Personal precautions : 6.1.1 For non emergency personnel:
Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
6.1.2 For emergency responders:
Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
6.2 Environmental precautions

Environmental precautions : Use appropriate containment to avoid environmental
4 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
contamination. Prevent from spreading or entering drains,

ditches or rivers by using sand, earth, or other appropriate
barriers.
Local authorities should be advised if significant spillages

cannot be contained.
ly
6.3 Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up
Methods for cleaning up : Slippery when spilt. Avoid accidents, clean up immediately.
Prevent from spreading by making a barrier with sand, earth
On
or other containment material.
Reclaim liquid directly or in an absorbent.
Soak up residue with an absorbent such as clay, sand or other
suitable material and dispose of properly.
6.4 Reference to other sections

For guidance on selection of personal protective equipment see Chapter 8 of this Safety Data Sheet.,
For guidance on disposal of spilled material see Chapter 13 of this Safety Data Sheet.
e
SECTION 7: Handling and storage
nc
General Precautions : Use local exhaust ventilation if there is risk of inhalation of
vapours, mists or aerosols.
Use the information in this data sheet as input to a risk
assessment of local circumstances to help determine
appropriate controls for safe handling, storage and disposal of
this material.
re
7.1 Precautions for safe handling

Advice on safe handling : Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin.
Avoid inhaling vapour and/or mists.
When handling product in drums, safety footwear should be
fe
worn and proper handling equipment should be used.

Properly dispose of any contaminated rags or cleaning
materials in order to prevent fires.
Product Transfer : This material has the potential to be a static accumulator.

Re
Proper grounding and bonding procedures should be used

during all bulk transfer operations.
7.2 Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities

Other data : Keep container tightly closed and in a cool, well-ventilated
place. Use properly labeled and closable containers.
Store at ambient temperature.
Refer to section 15 for any additional specific legislation

covering the packaging and storage of this product.
5 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Packaging material : Suitable material: For containers or container linings, use mild
steel or high density polyethylene.
Unsuitable material: PVC.
Container Advice : Polyethylene containers should not be exposed to high

temperatures because of possible risk of distortion.
ly
7.3 Specific end use(s)
Specific use(s) : Not applicable
On
SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection
8.1 Control parameters
Occupational Exposure Limits
Value type (Form

Components
Oil mist, mineral

e
CAS-No.
of exposure)
TWA
Control parameters
5 mg/m3
Basis
US. ACGIH
Threshold
nc
Limit Values
Biological occupational exposure limits

No biological limit allocated.
re
Monitoring Methods
Monitoring of the concentration of substances in the breathing zone of workers or in the general
workplace may be required to confirm compliance with an OEL and adequacy of exposure controls.
For some substances biological monitoring may also be appropriate.
Validated exposure measurement methods should be applied by a competent person and samples
fe
analysed by an accredited laboratory.

Examples of sources of recommended exposure measurement methods are given below or contact
the supplier. Further national methods may be available.
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), USA: Manual of Analytical Methods
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/
Re
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), USA: Sampling and Analytical Methods
http://www.osha.gov/
Health and Safety Executive (HSE), UK: Methods for the Determination of Hazardous Substances
http://www.hse.gov.uk/
Institut für Arbeitsschutz Deutschen Gesetzlichen Unfallversicherung (IFA) , Germany
http://www.dguv.de/inhalt/index.jsp
L'Institut National de Recherche et de Securité, (INRS), France http://www.inrs.fr/accueil
8.2 Exposure controls

Engineering measuresThe level of protection and types of controls necessary will vary depending
upon potential exposure conditions. Select controls based on a risk assessment of local
6 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
circumstances. Appropriate measures include:

Adequate ventilation to control airborne concentrations.
Where material is heated, sprayed or mist formed, there is greater potential for airborne
concentrations to be generated.
General Information:
Define procedures for safe handling and maintenance of controls.
ly
Educate and train workers in the hazards and control measures relevant to normal activities
associated with this product.
Ensure appropriate selection, testing and maintenance of equipment used to control exposure, e.g.
personal protective equipment, local exhaust ventilation.
Drain down system prior to equipment break-in or maintenance.
On
Retain drain downs in sealed storage pending disposal or subsequent recycle.
Always observe good personal hygiene measures, such as washing hands after handling the material
and before eating, drinking, and/or smoking. Routinely wash work clothing and protective equipment
to remove contaminants. Discard contaminated clothing and footwear that cannot be cleaned.
Practice good housekeeping.
Personal protective equipment
The provided information is made in consideration of the PPE directive (Council Directive
e
89/686/EEC) and the CEN European Committee for Standardisation (CEN) standards.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) should meet recommended national standards. Check with
PPE suppliers.
nc
Eye protection : If material is handled such that it could be splashed into eyes,
protective eyewear is recommended.
Approved to EU Standard EN166.
re
Hand protection
Remarks : Where hand contact with the product may occur the use of
fe
gloves approved to relevant standards (e.g. Europe: EN374,

US: F739) made from the following materials may provide
suitable chemical protection. PVC, neoprene or nitrile rubber
gloves Suitability and durability of a glove is dependent on
usage, e.g. frequency and duration of contact, chemical
Re
resistance of glove material, dexterity. Always seek advice

from glove suppliers. Contaminated gloves should be
replaced. Personal hygiene is a key element of effective hand
care. Gloves must only be worn on clean hands. After using
gloves, hands should be washed and dried thoroughly.
Application of a non-perfumed moisturizer is recommended.
For continuous contact we recommend gloves with

breakthrough time of more than 240 minutes with preference
for > 480 minutes where suitable gloves can be identified. For
short-term/splash protection we recommend the same, but
recognize that suitable gloves offering this level of protection
may not be available and in this case a lower breakthrough
7 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
time maybe acceptable so long as appropriate maintenance

and replacement regimes are followed. Glove thickness is not
a good predictor of glove resistance to a chemical as it is
dependent on the exact composition of the glove material.
Glove thickness should be typically greater than 0.35 mm
depending on the glove make and model.
Skin and body protection : Skin protection is not ordinarily required beyond standard
ly
work clothes.
It is good practice to wear chemical resistant gloves.
Respiratory protection : No respiratory protection is ordinarily required under normal
On
conditions of use.
In accordance with good industrial hygiene practices,
precautions should be taken to avoid breathing of material.
If engineering controls do not maintain airborne
concentrations to a level which is adequate to protect worker
health, select respiratory protection equipment suitable for the
specific conditions of use and meeting relevant legislation.
Check with respiratory protective equipment suppliers.
e Where air-filtering respirators are suitable, select an
appropriate combination of mask and filter.
Select a filter suitable for combined particulate/organic gases
and vapours [Type A/Type P boiling point > 65°C (149°F)]
nc
meeting EN14387 and EN143.
Thermal hazards : Not applicable

re
Environmental exposure controls

General advice : Take appropriate measures to fulfill the requirements of
fe
relevant environmental protection legislation. Avoid

contamination of the environment by following advice given in
Chapter 6. If necessary, prevent undissolved material from
being discharged to waste water. Waste water should be
treated in a municipal or industrial waste water treatment plant
before discharge to surface water.
Re
Local guidelines on emission limits for volatile substances

must be observed for the discharge of exhaust air containing
vapour.
SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties
9.1 Information on basic physical and chemical properties

Appearance : Liquid at room temperature.
Colour : amber
8 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Odour : Slight hydrocarbon

Odour Threshold : Data not available
pH : Not applicable
pour point : -24 °CMethod: ISO 3016
Initial boiling point and boiling : > 280 °Cestimated value(s)
ly
range
Flash point : 235 °C
Method: ISO 2592
On
Evaporation rate : Data not available
Flammability (solid, gas) : Data not available
Upper explosion limit : Typical 10 %(V)
Lower explosion limit e : Typical 1 %(V)
Vapour pressure : < 0,5 Pa (20 °C)

estimated value(s)
nc
Relative vapour density : > 1estimated value(s)
Relative density : 0,886 (15 °C)
Density : 886 kg/m3 (15,0 °C)

Method: ISO 12185
re
Solubility(ies)
Water solubility : negligible
Solubility in other solvents : Data not available
fe
Partition coefficient: n- : Pow: > 6(based on information on similar products)

octanol/water
Auto-ignition temperature : >
Re
320 °C
Viscosity
Viscosity, dynamic : Data not available
Viscosity, kinematic : 68 mm2/s (40,0 °C)
Method: ASTM D445
1040 mm2/s (0 °C)

Method: ASTM D445
9 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
8,6 mm2/s (100 °C)

Method: ASTM D445
Explosive properties : Not classified
Oxidizing properties : Data not available
ly
9.2 Other information
Conductivity : This material is not expected to be a static accumulator.
On
Decomposition temperature : Data not available
SECTION 10: Stability and reactivity
10.1 Reactivity
The product does not pose any further reactivity hazards in addition to those listed in the following
sub-paragraph.
10.2 Chemical stability
e
nc
Stable.
No hazardous reaction is expected when handled and stored according to provisions
10.3 Possibility of hazardous reactions
Hazardous reactions : Reacts with strong oxidising agents.
re
10.4 Conditions to avoid

Conditions to avoid : Extremes of temperature and direct sunlight.
10.5 Incompatible materials

fe
Materials to avoid : Strong oxidising agents.
10.6 Hazardous decomposition products

Hazardous decomposition : Hazardous decomposition products are not expected to form
products during normal storage.
Re
SECTION 11: Toxicological information

11.1 Information on toxicological effects
Basis for assessment : Information given is based on data on the components and
the toxicology of similar products.Unless indicated otherwise,
the data presented is representative of the product as a
whole, rather than for individual component(s).
10 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Information on likely routes of : Skin and eye contact are the primary routes of exposure
exposure although exposure may occur following accidental ingestion.
Acute toxicity
Product:
Acute oral toxicity : LD50 rat: > 5.000 mg/kg
ly
Remarks: Expected to be of low toxicity:
Acute inhalation toxicity : Remarks: Not considered to be an inhalation hazard under

normal conditions of use.
On
Acute dermal toxicity : LD50 Rabbit: > 5.000 mg/kg
Remarks: Expected to be of low toxicity:
Skin corrosion/irritation
Product:
e
Remarks: Expected to be slightly irritating., Prolonged or repeated skin contact without proper
cleaning can clog the pores of the skin resulting in disorders such as oil acne/folliculitis.
nc
Serious eye damage/eye irritation
Product:
Remarks: Expected to be slightly irritating.
re
Respiratory or skin sensitisation

Product:
Remarks: For respiratory and skin sensitisation:, Not expected to be a sensitiser.
fe
Germ cell mutagenicity

Product:
: Remarks: Not considered a mutagenic hazard.
Re
Carcinogenicity
Product:
Remarks: Not expected to be carcinogenic.
Remarks: Product contains mineral oils of types shown to be non-carcinogenic in animal skin-
painting studies., Highly refined mineral oils are not classified as carcinogenic by the
International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC).
11 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Material GHS/CLP Carcinogenicity Classification

Highly refined mineral oil No carcinogenicity classification.
Reproductive toxicity
ly
Product:
:
Remarks: Not expected to impair fertility., Not expected to be
On
a developmental toxicant.
STOT - single exposure

Product:
Remarks: Not expected to be a hazard.
STOT - repeated exposure

Product:
e
nc
Remarks: Not expected to be a hazard.
Aspiration toxicity
Product:
Not considered an aspiration hazard.
re
Further information
Product:
fe
Remarks: Used oils may contain harmful impurities that have accumulated during use. The
concentration of such impurities will depend on use and they may present risks to health and the
environment on disposal., ALL used oil should be handled with caution and skin contact avoided
as far as possible.
Re
Remarks: High pressure injection of product into the skin may lead to local necrosis if the
product is not surgically removed.
Remarks: Slightly irritating to respiratory system.
Remarks: Classifications by other authorities under varying regulatory frameworks may exist.
Summary on evaluation of the CMR properties

Germ cell mutagenicity- : This product does not meet the criteria for classification in
Assessment categories 1A/1B.
12 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Carcinogenicity - : This product does not meet the criteria for classification in
Reproductive toxicity - : This product does not meet the criteria for classification in
ly
SECTION 12: Ecological information
On
12.1 Toxicity
Basis for assessment : Ecotoxicological data have not been determined specifically
for this product.
Information given is based on a knowledge of the components
and the ecotoxicology of similar products.
Unless indicated otherwise, the data presented is
e representative of the product as a whole, rather than for
individual component(s).(LL/EL/IL50 expressed as the
nominal amount of product required to prepare aqueous test
nc
extract).
Product:
Toxicity to fish (Acute : Remarks: Expected to be practically non toxic:
toxicity) LL/EL/IL50 > 100 mg/l
Toxicity to crustacean (Acute : Remarks: Expected to be practically non toxic:

re
toxicity) LL/EL/IL50 > 100 mg/l
Toxicity to algae/aquatic : Remarks: Expected to be practically non toxic:

plants (Acute toxicity) LL/EL/IL50 > 100 mg/l
fe
Toxicity to fish (Chronic : Remarks: Data not available

toxicity)
Toxicity to crustacean : Remarks: Data not available
(Chronic toxicity)
Toxicity to microorganisms :
Re
(Acute toxicity) Remarks: Data not available
12.2 Persistence and degradability

Product:
Biodegradability : Remarks: Expected to be not readily biodegradable., Major
constituents are expected to be inherently biodegradable, but
contains components that may persist in the environment.
13 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
12.3 Bioaccumulative potential

Product:
Bioaccumulation : Remarks: Contains components with the potential to
bioaccumulate.
Partition coefficient: n- : Pow: > 6Remarks: (based on information on similar products)

octanol/water
ly
12.4 Mobility in soil
Product:
Mobility : Remarks: Liquid under most environmental conditions., If it
On
enters soil, it will adsorb to soil particles and will not be
mobile.
Remarks: Floats on water.
12.5 Results of PBT and vPvB assessment
Product:
Assessment : This mixture does not contain any REACH registered
substances that are assessed to be a PBT or a vPvB.
12.6 Other adverse effects
Product:
e
nc
Additional ecological : Product is a mixture of non-volatile components, which are not
information expected to be released to air in any significant quantities.,
Not expected to have ozone depletion potential,
photochemical ozone creation potential or global warming
potential.
Poorly soluble mixture., May cause physical fouling of aquatic
re
organisms.
Mineral oil is not expected to cause any chronic effects to
aquatic organisms at concentrations less than 1 mg/l.
fe
SECTION 13: Disposal considerations
13.1 Waste treatment methods

Re
Product : Waste product should not be allowed to contaminate soil or

ground water, or be disposed of into the environment.
Waste, spills or used product is dangerous waste.
Disposal should be in accordance with applicable regional,

national, and local laws and regulations.
Local regulations may be more stringent than regional or
national requirements and must be complied with.
Contaminated packaging : Dispose in accordance with prevailing regulations, preferably

to a recognized collector or contractor. The competence of
the collector or contractor should be established beforehand.
14 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Disposal should be in accordance with applicable regional,

national, and local laws and regulations.
Local legislation
Waste catalogue : EU Waste Disposal Code (EWC):
Waste Code : 13 01 10*
ly
Remarks : Classification of waste is always the responsibility of the end
user.
On
SECTION 14: Transport information
14.1 UN number
ADN : Not regulated as a dangerous good
ADR : Not regulated as a dangerous good
RID : Not regulated as a dangerous good
IMDG : Not regulated as a dangerous good
IATA
14.2 Proper shipping name
e : Not regulated as a dangerous good

nc
IATA : Not regulated as a dangerous good
14.3 Transport hazard class
re

fe
14.4 Packing group

CDNI Inland Water Waste : NST 3411 Mineral Lubricating Oils
Agreement
Re

14.5 Environmental hazards
14.6 Special precautions for user
Remarks : Special Precautions: Refer to Chapter 7, Handling & Storage,
for special precautions which a user needs to be aware of or
15 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
needs to comply with in connection with transport.
14.7 Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code
Pollution category : Not applicable
Ship type : Not applicable
Product name : Not applicable
Special precautions : Not applicable
ly
Additional Information : MARPOL Annex 1 rules apply for bulk shipments by sea.
On
SECTION 15: Regulatory information
15.1 Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture
REACH - List of substances subject to authorisation : Product is not subject to
(Annex XIV) Authorisation under REACH.
Occupational Illnesses (R- : 36

461-3, France)
e
Volatile organic compounds : 0%
nc
Other regulations : The following regulatory information is not intended to be
comprehensive and does not exempt the end user of the
product to refer to all official documents to determine its
obligations.
re
According type of product and quantity stored, check for

applicability of Code of environment: art. R511-9 -
Nomenclature of classified facilities.
Labour code : Exposure forbidden to certain works/products to

fe
- Young people under 16 years old : art. D4153-25 - Young

people under 18 years old : art. D4153-26, D4153-27 -
Pregnant or breast-feeding women : art. D4152-10, D4152-11
- Fixed term-contract or temporary staff : art. D4154-1,
D4154-2
Re
Social security code - Article L.461-6, Appendix A, no. 601-15.

Labour code - Intensified medical supervision: Articles
R.4624-18 and R.4624-19, decree 2012-135 of 30.01.2012.
The components of this product are reported in the following inventories:

EINECS : All components listed or polymer exempt.
TSCA : All components listed.
15.2 Chemical Safety Assessment
16 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
No Chemical Safety Assessment has been carried out for this substance/mixture by the supplier.
SECTION 16: Other information

,
Full text of H-Statements
ly
H304 May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways.
Full text of other abbreviations

Asp. Tox. Aspiration hazard
On
Abbreviations and Acronyms : The standard abbreviations and acronyms used in this
document can be looked up in reference literature (e.g.
scientific dictionaries) and/or websites.
ACGIH = American Conference of Governmental Industrial

Hygienists
ADR = European Agreement concerning the International
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road
AICS = Australian Inventory of Chemical Substances
e ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials
BEL = Biological exposure limits
BTEX = Benzene, Toluene, Ethylbenzene, Xylenes
nc
CAS = Chemical Abstracts Service
CEFIC = European Chemical Industry Council
CLP = Classification Packaging and Labelling
COC = Cleveland Open-Cup
DIN = Deutsches Institut fur Normung
DMEL = Derived Minimal Effect Level
re
DNEL = Derived No Effect Level

DSL = Canada Domestic Substance List
EC = European Commission
EC50 = Effective Concentration fifty
ECETOC = European Center on Ecotoxicology and
fe
Toxicology Of Chemicals
ECHA = European Chemicals Agency
EINECS = The European Inventory of Existing Commercial
Chemical Substances
EL50 = Effective Loading fifty
Re
ENCS = Japanese Existing and New Chemical Substances

Inventory
EWC = European Waste Code
GHS = Globally Harmonised System of Classification and
Labelling of Chemicals
IARC = International Agency for Research on Cancer
IATA = International Air Transport Association
IC50 = Inhibitory Concentration fifty
IL50 = Inhibitory Level fifty
IMDG = International Maritime Dangerous Goods
INV = Chinese Chemicals Inventory
IP346 = Institute of Petroleum test method N° 346 for the
17 / 18 800001016006
FR
SAFETY DATA SHEET
determination of polycyclic aromatics DMSO-extractables

KECI = Korea Existing Chemicals Inventory
LC50 = Lethal Concentration fifty
LD50 = Lethal Dose fifty per cent.
LL/EL/IL = Lethal Loading/Effective Loading/Inhibitory loading
LL50 = Lethal Loading fifty
MARPOL = International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution From Ships
ly
NOEC/NOEL = No Observed Effect Concentration / No
Observed Effect Level
OE_HPV = Occupational Exposure - High Production Volume
PBT = Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic
PICCS = Philippine Inventory of Chemicals and Chemical
On
Substances
PNEC = Predicted No Effect Concentration
REACH = Registration Evaluation And Authorisation Of
Chemicals
RID = Regulations Relating to International Carriage of
Dangerous Goods by Rail
SKIN_DES = Skin Designation
STEL = Short term exposure limit
e TRA = Targeted Risk Assessment
TSCA = US Toxic Substances Control Act
TWA = Time-Weighted Average
vPvB = very Persistent and very Bioaccumulative
nc
Further information
Other information : No Exposure Scenario annex is attached to this safety data
sheet as it is a non-classified mixture containing no hazardous
re
substances.
Under Article 31 of REACH, a SDS is not required for this

product. Therefore, this SDS has been created on a voluntary
basis to pass on potentially relevant information required
fe
under Article 32.
A vertical bar (|) in the left margin indicates an amendment

from the previous version.
Re
This information is based on our current knowledge and is intended to describe the product for the
purposes of health, safety and environmental requirements only. It should not therefore be
construed as guaranteeing any specific property of the product.
18 / 18 800001016006
FR
Product Name: MOBIL DELVAC 1 SHC 5W-40
Revision Date: 23 Oct 2014
Page 1 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SAFETY DATA SHEET

SECTION 1 IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE / MIXTURE AND OF THE
COMPANY / UNDERTAKING
ly
As of the revision date above, this (M)SDS meets the regulations in the United Kingdom & Ireland.
1.1. PRODUCT IDENTIFIER

On
Product Description: Synthetic Base Stocks and Additives
Product Code: 201520101010, 400198, 441428-60
1.2. RELEVANT IDENTIFIED USES OF THE SUBSTANCE OR MIXTURE AND USES ADVISED AGAINST
Intended Use: Diesel engine oil
e
Uses advised against: None unless specified elsewhere in this SDS.
1.3. DETAILS OF THE SUPPLIER OF THE SAFETY DATA SHEET

nc
Supplier: EXXONMOBIL MARINE LIMITED
EXXONMOBIL HOUSE
MAILPOINT 31, ERMYN WAY
KT22 8UX LEATHERHEAD
United Kingdom
re
Supplier General Contact: +44 1372 222 000

E-Mail: sds.uk@exxonmobil.com
fe
1.4. EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBER

24 Hour Environmental / Health Emergency +44 (0)23 80891558
Telephone:
Re
SECTION 2 HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
2.1. CLASSIFICATION OF SUBSTANCE OR MIXTURE
Classification according to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008
Not Classified
Page 2 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Classification according to EU Directive 67/548/EEC / 1999/45 EC
Not Classified
2.2. LABEL ELEMENTS
No Label elements according to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008
ly
2.3. OTHER HAZARDS
On
Physical / Chemical Hazards:
No significant hazards.
Health Hazards:
High-pressure injection under skin may cause serious damage. Excessive exposure may result in eye, skin, or
respiratory irritation.
Environmental Hazards:
e
No significant hazards. Material does not meet the criteria for PBT or vPvB in accordance with REACH Annex
XIII.
nc
SECTION 3 COMPOSITION / INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
3.1. SUBSTANCES Not Applicable. This material is regulated as a mixture.

re
3.2. MIXTURES
This material is defined as a mixture.

fe
Reportable hazardous substance(s) complying with the classification criteria and/or with an exposure limit
(OEL)
Name CAS# EC# Registration# Concentration* GHS/CLP
classification
Paraffin oils (petroleum), catalytic de-waxed 64742-71-8 265-176-5 01-2119485040- 20 - < 30% Asp. Tox. 1 H304
light 48
Re
ZINC ALKYL DITHIOPHOSPHATE 113706-15-3 NE 1 - < 2.5% Skin Irrit. 2 H315,

Eye Dam. 1 H318,
[Acute Tox. 5 H303],
[Aquatic Acute 2 H401],
Aquatic Chronic 2 H411
Note - any classification in brackets is a GHS building block that was not adopted by the EU in the CLP regulation (No 1272/2008)
and therefore is not applicable in the EU or in non-EU countries which have implemented the CLP regulation and is shown for
informational purposes only.
Name CAS# EC# Registration# DSD Symbols/Risk

Concentration* Phrases
ZINC ALKYL DITHIOPHOSPHATE 113706-15-3 NE 1 - < 2.5% Xi;R38, Xi;R41,
N;R51/53
Page 3 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
* All concentrations are percent by weight unless ingredient is a gas. Gas concentrations are in percent by volume.
Note: See (M)SDS Section 16 for full text of the R-Phrases. See (M)SDS Section 16 for full text of hazard
statements.
ly
SECTION 4 FIRST AID MEASURES
4.1. DESCRIPTION OF FIRST AID MEASURES
On
INHALATION
Remove from further exposure. For those providing assistance, avoid exposure to yourself or others. Use
adequate respiratory protection. If respiratory irritation, dizziness, nausea, or unconsciousness occurs, seek
immediate medical assistance. If breathing has stopped, assist ventilation with a mechanical device or use
mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.
SKIN CONTACT
e
Wash contact areas with soap and water. If product is injected into or under the skin, or into any part of the
body, regardless of the appearance of the wound or its size, the individual should be evaluated immediately by
a physician as a surgical emergency. Even though initial symptoms from high pressure injection may be
nc
minimal or absent, early surgical treatment within the first few hours may significantly reduce the ultimate extent
of injury.
EYE CONTACT
Flush thoroughly with water. If irritation occurs, get medical assistance.
re
INGESTION
First aid is normally not required. Seek medical attention if discomfort occurs.
4.2. MOST IMPORTANT SYMPTOMS AND EFFECTS, BOTH ACUTE AND DELAYED
Local necrosis as evidenced by delayed onset of pain and tissue damage a few hours after injection.
fe
4.3. INDICATION OF ANY IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION AND SPECIAL TREATMENT NEEDED
The need to have special means for providing specific and immediate medical treatment available in the
workplace is not expected.
Re
SECTION 5 FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
5.1. EXTINGUISHING MEDIA

Suitable Extinguishing Media: Use water fog, foam, dry chemical or carbon dioxide (CO2) to extinguish
flames.
Unsuitable Extinguishing Media: Straight streams of water
5.2. SPECIAL HAZARDS ARISING FROM THE SUBSTANCE OR MIXTURE

Hazardous Combustion Products: Oxides of carbon, Smoke, Fume, Sulphur oxides, Incomplete
combustion products, Aldehydes
Page 4 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.3. ADVICE FOR FIRE FIGHTERS
Fire Fighting Instructions: Evacuate area. Prevent run-off from fire control or dilution from entering
streams, sewers or drinking water supply. Fire-fighters should use standard protective equipment and in
enclosed spaces, self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Use water spray to cool fire exposed surfaces
and to protect personnel.
FLAMMABILITY PROPERTIES
Flash Point [Method]: 225°C (437°F) [ASTM D-92]
ly
Upper/Lower Flammable Limits (Approximate volume % in air): UEL: 7.0 LEL: 0.9 [Estimated]
Autoignition Temperature: No data available
On
SECTION 6 ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
6.1. PERSONAL PRECAUTIONS, PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT AND EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES
In the event of a spill or accidental release, notify relevant authorities in accordance with all applicable
regulations.
PROTECTIVE MEASURES
e
Avoid contact with spilled material. See Section 5 for fire fighting information. See the Hazard
Identification Section for Significant Hazards. See Section 4 for First Aid Advice. See Section 8 for
nc
advice on the minimum requirements for personal protective equipment. Additional protective measures
may be necessary, depending on the specific circumstances and/or the expert judgment of the emergency
responders.
For emergency responders: Respiratory protection: respiratory protection will be necessary only in special
cases, e.g., formation of mists. Half-face or full-face respirator with filter(s) for dust/organic vapor or Self
re
Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) can be used depending on the size of spill and potential level of
exposure. If the exposure cannot be completely characterized or an oxygen deficient atmosphere is
possible or anticipated, SCBA is recommended. Work gloves that are resistant to hydrocarbons are
recommended. Gloves made of polyvinyl acetate (PVA) are not water-resistant and are not suitable for
emergency use. Chemical goggles are recommended if splashes or contact with eyes is possible. Small
fe
spills: normal antistatic work clothes are usually adequate. Large spills: full body suit of chemical resistant,
antistatic material is recommended.
6.2. ENVIRONMENTAL PRECAUTIONS

Large Spills: Dyke far ahead of liquid spill for later recovery and disposal. Prevent entry into waterways,
Re
sewers, basements or confined areas.
6.3. METHODS AND MATERIAL FOR CONTAINMENT AND CLEANING UP

Land Spill: Stop leak if you can do so without risk. Recover by pumping or with suitable absorbent.
Water Spill: Stop leak if you can do so without risk. Confine the spill immediately with booms. Warn other
shipping. Remove from the surface by skimming or with suitable absorbents. Seek the advice of a specialist
before using dispersants.
Water spill and land spill recommendations are based on the most likely spill scenario for this material;
however, geographic conditions, wind, temperature, (and in the case of a water spill) wave and current direction
and speed may greatly influence the appropriate action to be taken. For this reason, local experts should be
consulted. Note: Local regulations may prescribe or limit action to be taken.
Page 5 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.4. REFERENCES TO OTHER SECTIONS

See Sections 8 and 13.
SECTION 7 HANDLING AND STORAGE
7.1. PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING
ly
Avoid contact with used product. Prevent small spills and leakage to avoid slip hazard. Material can
accumulate static charges which may cause an electrical spark (ignition source). When the material is handled
in bulk, an electrical spark could ignite any flammable vapors from liquids or residues that may be present (e.g.,
during switch-loading operations). Use proper bonding and/or earthing procedures. However, bonding and
earthing may not eliminate the hazard from static accumulation. Consult local applicable standards for
On
guidance. Additional references include American Petroleum Institute 2003 (Protection Against Ignitions
Arising out of Static, Lightning and Stray Currents) or National Fire Protection Agency 77 (Recommended
Practice on Static Electricity) or CENELEC CLC/TR 50404 (Electrostatics - Code of practice for the avoidance
of hazards due to static electricity).
Static Accumulator: This material is a static accumulator.
7.2. CONDITIONS FOR SAFE STORAGE, INCLUDING ANY INCOMPATIBILITIES
e
The container choice, for example storage vessel, may effect static accumulation and dissipation. Do not
store in open or unlabelled containers. Keep away from incompatible materials.
nc
7.3. SPECIFIC END USES: Section 1 informs about identified end-uses. No industrial or sector specific guidance
available.
SECTION 8 EXPOSURE CONTROLS / PERSONAL PROTECTION

re
8.1. CONTROL PARAMETERS
EXPOSURE LIMIT VALUES

fe
Exposure limits/standards (Note: Exposure limits are not additive)
Substance Name Form Limit/Standard Note Source

Paraffin oils (petroleum), catalytic Mist. TWA 5 mg/m3 ACGIH
de-waxed light
Re
Exposure limits/standards for materials that can be formed when handling this product: When mists/aerosols
can occur the following is recommended: 5 mg/m³ - ACGIH TLV (inhalable fraction).
Note: Information about recommended monitoring procedures can be obtained from the relevant
agency(ies)/institute(s):
UK Health and Safety Executive (HSE)
DERIVED NO EFFECT LEVEL (DNEL)/DERIVED MINIMAL EFFECT LEVEL (DMEL)

Page 6 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Worker
Substance Name Dermal Inhalation
Paraffin oils (petroleum), catalytic NA 5.4 mg/m3 DNEL, Chronic
de-waxed light Exposure, Local Effects
Consumer
Substance Name Dermal Inhalation Oral
ly
Paraffin oils (petroleum), catalytic NA 1.2 mg/m3 DNEL, Chronic NA
de-waxed light Exposure, Local Effects
On
Note: The Derived No Effect Level (DNEL) is an estimated safe level of exposure that is derived from toxicity data in
accord with specific guidance within the European REACH regulation. The DNEL may differ from an Occupational
Exposure Limit (OEL) for the same chemical. OELs may be recommended by an individual company, a governmental
regulatory body or an expert organization, such as the Scientific Committee for Occupational Exposure Limits (SCOEL)
or the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). OELs are considered to be safe exposure
levels for a typical worker in an occupational setting for an 8-hour work shift, 40 hour work week, as a time weighted
average (TWA) or a 15 minute short-term exposure limit (STEL). While also considered to be protective of health, OELs
are derived by a process different from that of REACH.
PREDICTED NO EFFECT CONCENTRATION (PNEC)

e
nc
Substance Name Aqua Aqua Aqua Sewage Sediment Soil Oral
(fresh (marine (intermittent treatment (secondary
water) water) release) plant poisoning)
Paraffin oils NA NA NA NA NA NA 9.33 mg / kg
(petroleum), catalytic (food)
re
de-waxed light
fe
8.2. EXPOSURE CONTROLS
ENGINEERING CONTROLS
The level of protection and types of controls necessary will vary depending upon potential exposure conditions.
Re
Control measures to consider:

No special requirements under ordinary conditions of use and with adequate ventilation.
PERSONAL PROTECTION
Personal protective equipment selections vary based on potential exposure conditions such as applications,
handling practices, concentration and ventilation. Information on the selection of protective equipment for use
with this material, as provided below, is based upon intended, normal usage.
Respiratory Protection: If engineering controls do not maintain airborne contaminant concentrations at a

level which is adequate to protect worker health, an approved respirator may be appropriate. Respirator
selection, use, and maintenance must be in accordance with regulatory requirements, if applicable. Types of
respirators to be considered for this material include:
Page 7 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
No special requirements under ordinary conditions of use and with adequate ventilation.
For high airborne concentrations, use an approved supplied-air respirator, operated in positive pressure mode.
Supplied air respirators with an escape bottle may be appropriate when oxygen levels are inadequate,
gas/vapour warning properties are poor, or if air purifying filter capacity/rating may be exceeded.
Hand Protection: Any specific glove information provided is based on published literature and glove
manufacturer data. Glove suitability and breakthrough time will differ depending on the specific use conditions.
ly
Contact the glove manufacturer for specific advice on glove selection and breakthrough times for your use
conditions. Inspect and replace worn or damaged gloves. The types of gloves to be considered for this material
include:
No protection is ordinarily required under normal conditions of use.
On
Eye Protection: If contact is likely, safety glasses with side shields are recommended.
Skin and Body Protection: Any specific clothing information provided is based on published literature or
manufacturer data. The types of clothing to be considered for this material include:
No skin protection is ordinarily required under normal conditions of use. In accordance with good
industrial hygiene practices, precautions should be taken to avoid skin contact.
e
Specific Hygiene Measures: Always observe good personal hygiene measures, such as washing after
handling the material and before eating, drinking, and/or smoking. Routinely wash work clothing and protective
equipment to remove contaminants. Discard contaminated clothing and footwear that cannot be cleaned.
nc
Practice good housekeeping.
re
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
Comply with applicable environmental regulations limiting discharge to air, water and
soil. Protect the environment by applying appropriate control measures to prevent or limit
emissions.
fe
SECTION 9 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Re
Note: Physical and chemical properties are provided for safety, health and environmental considerations only
and may not fully represent product specifications. Contact the Supplier for additional information.
9.1. INFORMATION ON BASIC PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Physical State: Liquid

Colour: Brown
Odour: Characteristic
Odour Threshold: No data available
pH: Not technically feasible
Melting Point: Not technically feasible
Freezing Point: No data available
Initial Boiling Point / and Boiling Range: No data available
Page 8 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Flash Point [Method]: 225°C (437°F) [ASTM D-92]
Evaporation Rate (n-butyl acetate = 1): No data available
Flammability (Solid, Gas): Not technically feasible
Upper/Lower Flammable Limits (Approximate volume % in air): UEL: 7.0 LEL: 0.9 [Estimated]
Vapour Pressure: [N/D at 20ºC] [test method unavailable]
Vapour Density (Air = 1): No data available
Relative Density (at 15 °C): 0.9 [test method unavailable]
Solubility(ies): water Negligible
ly
Partition coefficient (n-Octanol/Water Partition Coefficient): No data available
Autoignition Temperature: No data available
Decomposition Temperature: No data available
Viscosity: 84 cSt (84 mm2/sec) at 40ºC | 14.5 cSt (14.5 mm2/sec) at 100°C [ASTM D 445]
On
Explosive Properties: None
Oxidizing Properties: None
9.2. OTHER INFORMATION
Pour Point: -45°C (-49°F) [ASTM D97]
SECTION 10
e STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
nc
10.1. REACTIVITY: See sub-sections below.
10.2. CHEMICAL STABILITY: Material is stable under normal conditions.
10.3. POSSIBILITY OF HAZARDOUS REACTIONS: Hazardous polymerization will not occur.

re
10.4. CONDITIONS TO AVOID: Excessive heat. High energy sources of ignition.
10.5. INCOMPATIBLE MATERIALS: Strong oxidisers

fe
10.6. HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION PRODUCTS: Material does not decompose at ambient temperatures.
SECTION 11 TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Re
11.1. INFORMATION ON TOXICOLOGICAL EFFECTS
Hazard Class Conclusion / Remarks

Inhalation
Acute Toxicity: No end point data for Minimally Toxic. Based on assessment of the components.
material.
Irritation: No end point data for material. Negligible hazard at ambient/normal handling temperatures.
Ingestion
material.
Skin
material.
Page 9 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Skin Corrosion/Irritation: No end point data Negligible irritation to skin at ambient temperatures. Based on
for material. assessment of the components.
Eye
Serious Eye Damage/Irritation: No end point May cause mild, short-lasting discomfort to eyes. Based on
data for material. assessment of the components.
Sensitisation
Respiratory Sensitization: No end point data Not expected to be a respiratory sensitizer.
for material.
ly
Skin Sensitization: No end point data for Not expected to be a skin sensitizer. Based on assessment of the
material. components.
Aspiration: Data available. Not expected to be an aspiration hazard. Based on
physico-chemical properties of the material.
On
Germ Cell Mutagenicity: No end point data Not expected to be a germ cell mutagen. Based on assessment of
for material. the components.
Carcinogenicity: No end point data for Not expected to cause cancer. Based on assessment of the
material. components.
Reproductive Toxicity: No end point data Not expected to be a reproductive toxicant. Based on assessment
for material. of the components.
Lactation: No end point data for material. Not expected to cause harm to breast-fed children.
Specific Target Organ Toxicity (STOT)
Single Exposure: No end point data for Not expected to cause organ damage from a single exposure.
material.
material.
e
Repeated Exposure: No end point data for Not expected to cause organ damage from prolonged or repeated
exposure. Based on assessment of the components.
nc
OTHER INFORMATION
For the product itself:
Diesel engine oils: Not carcinogenic in animals tests. Used and unused diesel engine oils did not produce any
carcinogenic effects in chronic mouse skin painting studies. Oils that are used in gasoline engines may become
re
hazardous and display the following properties: Carcinogenic in animal tests. Caused mutations in vitro. Possible
allergen and photoallergen. Contains polycyclic aromatic compounds (PAC) from combustion products of gasoline
and/or thermal degradation products.
Contains:
fe
Synthetic base oils: Not expected to cause significant health effects under conditions of normal use, based on
laboratory studies with the same or similar materials. Not mutagenic or genotoxic. Not sensitising in test animals and
humans.
Re
SECTION 12 ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION

The information given is based on data available for the material, the components of the material, and similar materials.
12.1. TOXICITY
Material -- Not expected to be harmful to aquatic organisms.
12.2. PERSISTENCE AND DEGRADABILITY Not determined.
12.3. BIOACCUMULATIVE POTENTIAL Not determined.

Page 10 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12.4. MOBILITY IN SOIL

Base oil component -- Low solubility and floats and is expected to migrate from water to the land.
Expected to partition to sediment and wastewater solids.
12.5. PERSISTENCE, BIOACCUMULATION AND TOXICITY FOR SUBSTANCE(S)

This product is not, or does not contain, a substance that is a PBT or a vPvB.
ly
12.6. OTHER ADVERSE EFFECTS
No adverse effects are expected.
On
SECTION 13 DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
e
Disposal recommendations based on material as supplied. Disposal must be in accordance with current applicable
laws and regulations, and material characteristics at time of disposal.
nc
13.1. WASTE TREATMENT METHODS
Product is suitable for burning in an enclosed controlled burner for fuel value or disposal by supervised
incineration at very high temperatures to prevent formation of undesirable combustion products. Protect the
environment. Dispose of used oil at designated sites. Minimize skin contact. Do not mix used oils with solvents,
brake fluids or coolants.
re
REGULATORY DISPOSAL INFORMATION
European Waste Code: 13 02 06*
NOTE: These codes are assigned based upon the most common uses for this material and may not reflect
fe
contaminants resulting from actual use. Waste producers need to assess the actual process used when
generating the waste and its contaminants in order to assign the proper waste disposal code(s).
This material is considered as hazardous waste pursuant to Directive 91/689/EEC on hazardous waste, and
subject to the provisions of that Directive unless Article 1(5) of that Directive applies.
Re
Empty Container Warning Empty Container Warning (where applicable): Empty containers may contain residue and
can be dangerous. Do not attempt to refill or clean containers without proper instructions. Empty drums should be
completely drained and safely stored until appropriately reconditioned or disposed. Empty containers should be taken
for recycling, recovery, or disposal through suitably qualified or licensed contractor and in accordance with
governmental regulations. DO NOT PRESSURISE, CUT, WELD, BRAZE, SOLDER, DRILL, GRIND, OR EXPOSE
SUCH CONTAINERS TO HEAT, FLAME, SPARKS, STATIC ELECTRICITY, OR OTHER SOURCES OF IGNITION.
THEY MAY EXPLODE AND CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
SECTION 14 TRANSPORT INFORMATION
LAND (ADR/RID): 14.1-14.6 Not Regulated for Land Transport

Page 11 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
INLAND WATERWAYS (ADNR/ADN): 14.1-14.6 Not Regulated for Inland Waterways Transport
SEA (IMDG): 14.1-14.6 Not Regulated for Sea Transport according to IMDG-Code
ly
SEA (MARPOL 73/78 Convention - Annex II):
14.7. Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code
On
Not classified according to Annex II
AIR (IATA): 14.1-14.6 Not Regulated for Air Transport
SECTION 15 REGULATORY INFORMATION
e
REGULATORY STATUS AND APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS
nc
Listed or exempt from listing/notification on the following chemical inventories: AICS, DSL, ENCS,
IECSC, KECI, PICCS, TSCA
re
15.1. SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS/LEGISLATION SPECIFIC FOR THE

SUBSTANCE OR MIXTURE
Applicable EU Directives and Regulations:

fe
1907/2006 [... on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals ... and
amendments thereto]
689/2008/EC [....concerning the export and import of dangerous substances and amendments
thereto]
1272/2008 [on classification, labelling and packaging of substances and mixtures.. and
Re
amendments thereto]
Refer to the relevant EU/national regulation for details of any actions or restrictions required by the above
Regulation(s)/Directive(s).
15.2. CHEMICAL SAFETY ASSESSMENT
REACH Information: A Chemical Safety Assessment has been carried out for one or more substances present in the
Page 12 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
material.
SECTION 16 OTHER INFORMATION
ly
REFERENCES: Sources of information used in preparing this SDS included one or more of the following: results
from in house or supplier toxicology studies, CONCAWE Product Dossiers, publications from other trade associations,
such as the EU Hydrocarbon Solvents REACH Consortium, U.S. HPV Program Robust Summaries, the EU IUCLID
Data Base, U.S. NTP publications, and other sources, as appropriate.
On
List of abbreviations and acronyms that could be (but not necessarily are) used in this safety data sheet:
Acronym Full text
N/A Not applicable
N/D Not determined
NE Not established
VOC Volatile Organic Compound
AICS Australian Inventory of Chemical Substances
AIHA WEEL
ASTM
DSL
e
American Industrial Hygiene Association Workplace Environmental Exposure Limits
ASTM International, originally known as the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Domestic Substance List (Canada)
nc
EINECS European Inventory of Existing Commercial Substances
ELINCS European List of Notified Chemical Substances
ENCS Existing and new Chemical Substances (Japanese inventory)
IECSC Inventory of Existing Chemical Substances in China
KECI Korean Existing Chemicals Inventory
NDSL Non-Domestic Substances List (Canada)
NZIoC New Zealand Inventory of Chemicals
re
PICCS Philippine Inventory of Chemicals and Chemical Substances

TLV Threshold Limit Value (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists)
TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act (U.S. inventory)
UVCB Substances of Unknown or Variable composition, Complex reaction products or Biological materials
LC Lethal Concentration
LD Lethal Dose
fe
LL Lethal Loading
EC Effective Concentration
EL Effective Loading
NOEC No Observable Effect Concentration
NOELR No Observable Effect Loading Rate
Re
KEY TO THE RISK CODES CONTAINED IN SECTION 2 AND 3 OF THIS DOCUMENT (for information only):
R38; Irritating to skin.
R41; Risk of serious damage to eyes.
R51/53; Toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.
KEY TO THE H-CODES CONTAINED IN SECTION 3 OF THIS DOCUMENT (for information only):
[Acute Tox. 5 H303]: May be harmful if swallowed; Acute Tox Oral, Cat 5
Asp. Tox. 1 H304: May be fatal if swallowed and enters airways; Aspiration, Cat 1
Skin Irrit. 2 H315: Causes skin irritation; Skin Corr/Irritation, Cat 2
Eye Dam. 1 H318: Causes serious eye damage; Serious Eye Damage/Irr, Cat 1
[Aquatic Acute 2 H401]: Toxic to aquatic life; Acute Env Tox, Cat 2
Page 13 of 13
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Aquatic Chronic 2 H411: Toxic to aquatic life with long lasting effects; Chronic Env Tox, Cat 2
THIS SAFETY DATA SHEET CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING REVISIONS:

Revision Changes:
Section 06: Protective Measures information was modified.
Section 05: Hazardous Combustion Products information was modified.
Section 15: EU Inventory Requirements - Header information was modified.
ly
Section 16: RCode Key information was modified.
Composition: Component Table for REACH information was modified.
Composition: Component Table information was modified.
Section 09: Vapour Pressure information was modified.
On
Section 16: HCode Key information was modified.
Section 08: Exposure Limits Table information was modified.
Section 11 Substance Toxicology table information was deleted.
Section 11 Substance Name - Header information was deleted.
Section 11 Acute Toxicity data - Header information was deleted.
Section 11 Substance Toxicity table - Header information was deleted.
e
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------
The information and recommendations contained herein are, to the best of ExxonMobil's knowledge and belief, accurate
nc
and reliable as of the date issued. You can contact ExxonMobil to insure that this document is the most current
available from ExxonMobil. The information and recommendations are offered for the user's consideration and
examination. It is the user's responsibility to satisfy itself that the product is suitable for the intended use. If buyer
repackages this product, it is the user's responsibility to insure proper health, safety and other necessary information is
included with and/or on the container. Appropriate warnings and safe-handling procedures should be provided to
handlers and users. Alteration of this document is strictly prohibited. Except to the extent required by law,
re
re-publication or retransmission of this document, in whole or in part, is not permitted. The term, "ExxonMobil" is used
for convenience, and may include any one or more of ExxonMobil Chemical Company, Exxon Mobil Corporation, or any
affiliates in which they directly or indirectly hold any interest.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------
fe
Internal Use Only

MHC: 0B, 0B, 0, 0, 0, 0 PPEC: A
DGN: 2003602QGB (1021003)

Re
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------
ANNEX
Annex not required for this material.
Page 1 of 10
Safety data sheet according to Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006, Annex II
Revised on / Version: 10.07.2015 / 0002
Replaces revision of / Version: 12.02.2014 / 0001
Valid from: 10.07.2015
PDF print date: 23.07.2015
3-IN-ONE ®Multi-Purpose Oil - [Liquid]
Safety data sheet

according to Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006, Annex II
1.1 Product identifier
ly
1.2 Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture:
Lubricant
Uses advised against:
On
No information available at present.
1.3 Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet

WD-40 Company Limited, PO Box 440, Kiln Farm, Milton Keynes, MK11 3LF, United Kingdom
Phone: +44 (0) 1908 555400, Fax: +44 (0) 1908 266900
www.wd40.co.uk
P.R. Rielly Limited KarKraft House, Kilbarrack Industrial Estate, Kilbarrack, Dublin 5, Ireland
Phone: 01-832 0006, Fax: 01-832 0016
web@team.ie
e
Qualified person's e-mail address: info@chemical-check.de, k.schnurbusch@chemical-check.de Please DO NOT use for
nc
requesting Safety Data Sheets.
1.4 Emergency telephone number

Emergency information services / official advisory body:
re
National Poisons Information Centre, Beaumont Hospital, Dublin 9, Ireland, Tel.:

(+353) 01 809 2166 (Public Poisons Info Line, 8am-10pm, 7 days a week)
(+353) 01 837 9964 or 01 809 2566 (Info for Healthcare Professionals ONLY, 24 h)
Telephone number of the company in case of emergencies:
+49 (0) 700 / 24 112 112 (WDC)
fe
2.1 Classification of the substance or mixture

Re
Classification according to Regulation (EC) 1272/2008 (CLP)

The mixture is not classified as dangerous in the terms of the Regulation (EC) 1272/2008 (CLP).
2.2 Label elements

Labeling according to Regulation (EC) 1272/2008 (CLP)
Not applicable
2.3 Other hazards
The mixture does not contain any vPvB substance (vPvB = very persistent, very bioaccumulative) or is not included under XIII of
the regulation (EC) 1907/2006.
The mixture does not contain any PBT substance (PBT = persistent, bioaccumulative, toxic) or is not included under XIII of the
regulation (EC) 1907/2006.
Product can compose a film on the water surface, which can prevent oxygen exchange.
Hazardous to drinking water, on escape of even small quantities.
3.1 Substance
Page 2 of 10
n.a.
3.2 Mixture
--
Registration number (REACH) --
Index -
EINECS, ELINCS, NLP -
CAS -
content %
Classification according to Regulation (EC) 1272/2008 (CLP) ---
ly
4.1 Description of first aid measures

Inhalation
On
Remove person from danger area.
Supply person with fresh air and consult doctor according to symptoms.
Skin contact
Remove polluted, soaked clothing immediately, wash thoroughly with plenty of water and soap, in case of irritation of the skin
(flare), consult a doctor.
Unsuitable cleaning product:
Solvent
Thinners
Eye contact
Remove contact lenses.
e
Wash thoroughly for several minutes using copious water. Seek medical help if necessary.
Ingestion
nc
Rinse the mouth thoroughly with water.
Do not induce vomiting. Consult doctor immediately.
4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
If applicable delayed symptoms and effects can be found in section 11 and the absorption route in section 4.1.
The following may occur:
Irritation of the eyes
re
With long-term contact:

Drying of the skin.
Dermatitis (skin inflammation)
Oil acne
On vapour formation:
Irritation of the respiratory tract
fe
Ingestion:
Gastrointestinal disturbances
Nausea
Vomiting
Danger of aspiration
Chemical pneumonitis (condition similar to pneumonia)
Re
In certain cases, the symptoms of poisoning may only appear after an extended period / after several hours.
4.3 Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
n.c.
5.1 Extinguishing media

Suitable extinguishing media
CO2
Foam
Dry extinguisher
Unsuitable extinguishing media
High volume water jet
5.2 Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture
In case of fire the following can develop:
Oxides of carbon
Oxides of nitrogen
Oxides of sulphur
Toxic pyrolysis products.
Page 3 of 10
Flammable vapour/air mixtures

5.3 Advice for firefighters
In case of fire and/or explosion do not breathe fumes.
Protective respirator with independent air supply.
According to size of fire
Full protection, if necessary
Cool container at risk with water.
Dispose of contaminated extinction water according to official regulations.
ly
6.1 Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures
Ensure sufficient supply of air.
Avoid formation of oil mist.
Avoid contact with eyes or skin.
On
If applicable, caution - risk of slipping
6.2 Environmental precautions
If leakage occurs, dam up.
Resolve leaks if this possible without risk.
Prevent from entering drainage system.
Prevent surface and ground-water infiltration, as well as ground penetration.
If accidental entry into drainage system occurs, inform responsible authorities.
6.3 Methods and material for containment and cleaning up
Soak up with absorbent material (e.g. universal binding agent, sand, diatomaceous earth, sawdust) and dispose of according to
Section 13.
Oil binder
e
Do not wash away with water or watery cleaning agents.
6.4 Reference to other sections
nc
For personal protective equipment see Section 8 and for disposal instructions see Section 13.
In addition to information given in this section, relevant information can also be found in section 8 and 6.1.
re
7.1 Precautions for safe handling

7.1.1 General recommendations
Avoid formation of oil mist.
Ensure good ventilation.
Keep away from sources of ignition - Do not smoke.
Do not heat to temperatures close to flash point.
fe
Avoid contact with eyes.

Avoid long lasting or intensive contact with skin.
Do not carry cleaning cloths soaked in product in trouser pockets.
Eating, drinking, smoking, as well as food-storage, is prohibited in work-room.
Observe directions on label and instructions for use.
Re
7.1.2 Notes on general hygiene measures at the workplace

General hygiene measures for the handling of chemicals are applicable.
Wash hands before breaks and at end of work.
Keep away from food, drink and animal feedingstuffs.
Remove contaminated clothing and protective equipment before entering areas in which food is consumed.
7.2 Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities
Not to be stored in gangways or stair wells.
Store product closed and only in original packing.
Impermeable floor.
Protect against moisture and store closed.
Protect from direct sunlight and warming.
7.3 Specific end use(s)
8.1 Control parameters
Chemical Name Oil mist, mineral Content %:

Page 4 of 10
WEL-TWA: 5 mg/m3 (ACGIH) WEL-STEL: 10 mg/m3 (ACGIH) ---

Monitoring procedures: - Draeger - Oil 10/a-P (67 28 371)
- Draeger - Oil Mist 1/a (67 33 031)
BMGV: --- Other information: ---
Chemical Name Oil mist, mineral Content %:
OELV-8h: 0,2 mg/m3 (Mineral oil, used in metal OELV-15min: --- ---
working (inhalable)), 5 mg/m3 (Mineral oil, pure,
highly & severely refined (inhalable))
Monitoring procedures: - Draeger - Oil 10/a-P (67 28 371)
- Draeger - Oil Mist 1/a (67 33 031)
BLV: --- Other information: ---
ly
WEL-TWA = Workplace Exposure Limit - Long-term exposure limit (8-hour TWA (= time weighted average) reference period)
EH40. AGW = "Arbeitsplatzgrenzwert" (workplace limit value, Germany). | WEL-STEL = Workplace Exposure Limit - Short-term
exposure limit (15-minute reference period). | BMGV = Biological monitoring guidance value EH40. BGW = "Biologischer Grenzwert"
On
(biological limit value, Germany) | Other information: Sen = Capable of causing occupational asthma. Sk = Can be absorbed
through skin. Carc = Capable of causing cancer and/or heritable genetic damage.
** = The exposure limit for this substance is repealed through the TRGS 900 (Germany) of January 2006 with the goal of revision.
OELV-8h = Occupational Exposure Limit Value (8-hour reference period). (IFV) = Inhalable Fraction and Vapour. (I) = Inhalable
Fraction. (R) = Respirable Fraction. | OELV-15min = Occupational Exposure Limit Value (15-minute reference period). (IFV) =
Inhalable Fraction and Vapour. (I) = Inhalable Fraction. (R) = Respirable Fraction. | BLV = Biological limit value | Other information:
Carc1A, Carc1B = carcinogenic substance, Cat. 1A or 1B. Muta1A, Muta1B = mutagenic substance, Cat. 1A or 1B. Repr1A, Repr1B
= Substances known to be toxic for reproduction, Cat. 1A or 1B. Sk = can be absorbed through skin. Asphx = asphyxiant. Sen =
Respiratory sensitizer. BOELV = Binding Occupational Exposure Limit Values. IOELV = Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit
Values.
8.2 Exposure controls

e
nc
8.2.1 Appropriate engineering controls
Ensure good ventilation. This can be achieved by local suction or general air extraction.
If this is insufficient to maintain the concentration under the WEL or AGW values, suitable breathing protection should be worn.
Applies only if maximum permissible exposure values are listed here.
8.2.2 Individual protection measures, such as personal protective equipment

re

Wash hands before breaks and at end of work.
Keep away from food, drink and animal feedingstuffs.
Remove contaminated clothing and protective equipment before entering areas in which food is consumed.
fe
Eye/face protection:
Tight fitting protective goggles (EN 166) with side protection, with danger of projections.
Skin protection - Hand protection:

Protective gloves, oil resistant (EN 374)
If applicable
Re
Protective Neoprene® / polychloroprene gloves (EN 374).

Protective nitrile gloves (EN 374)
Minimum layer thickness in mm:
>= 0,4
Permeation time (penetration time) in minutes:
>= 480
The breakthrough times determined in accordance with EN 374 Part 3 were not obtained under practical conditions.
The recommended maximum wearing time is 50% of breakthrough time.
Protective PVC gloves (EN 374)
Protective hand cream recommended.
Skin protection - Other:

Protective working garments (e.g. safety shoes EN ISO 20345, long-sleeved protective working garments)
Respiratory protection:
Normally not necessary.
With oil mist formation:
Filter A2 P2 (EN 14387), code colour brown, white
Observe wearing time limitations for respiratory protection equipment.
Thermal hazards:
Page 5 of 10
If applicable, these are included in the individual protective measures (eye/face protection, skin protection, respiratory protection).
Additional information on hand protection - No tests have been performed.

In the case of mixtures, the selection has been made according to the knowledge available and the information about the contents.
Selection of materials derived from glove manufacturer's indications.
Final selection of glove material must be made taking the breakthrough times, permeation rates and degradation into account.
Selection of a suitable glove depends not only on the material but also on other quality characteristics and varies from
manufacturer to manufacturer.
In the case of mixtures, the resistance of glove materials cannot be predicted and must therefore be tested before use.
The exact breakthrough time of the glove material can be requested from the protective glove manufacturer and must be observed.
8.2.3 Environmental exposure controls
ly
On
9.1 Information on basic physical and chemical properties
Physical state: Liquid
Colour: According to specification
Odour: Characteristic
Odour threshold: Not determined
pH-value: Not determined
Melting point/freezing point: Not determined
Initial boiling point and boiling range: Not determined
Flash point: ~150 °C
Evaporation rate:
Flammability (solid, gas):
Lower explosive limit:
e Not determined
Not determined
Not determined
Upper explosive limit: Not determined
nc
Vapour pressure: Not determined
Vapour density (air = 1): Not determined
Density: 0,905 g/ml (15°C)
Bulk density: Not determined
Solubility(ies): Not determined
Water solubility: Insoluble
re
Partition coefficient (n-octanol/water): Not determined

Auto-ignition temperature: Not determined
Decomposition temperature: Not determined
Viscosity: >7 mm2/s (40°C)
Explosive properties: Not determined
Oxidising properties: Not determined
fe
9.2 Other information

Miscibility: Not determined
Fat solubility / solvent: Not determined
Conductivity: Not determined
Surface tension: Not determined
Re
Solvents content: Not determined
10.1 Reactivity
See also Subsection 10.2 to 10.6.
The product has not been tested.
10.2 Chemical stability
Stable with proper storage and handling.
10.3 Possibility of hazardous reactions
No decomposition if used as intended.
10.4 Conditions to avoid
See also section 7.
Heating, open flame, ignition sources
Protect from humidity.
10.5 Incompatible materials
See also section 7.
Page 6 of 10
Avoid contact with strong oxidizing agents.

10.6 Hazardous decomposition products
See also section 5.2
No decomposition when used as directed.
Possibly more information on health effects, see Section 2.1 (classification).
ly
Toxicity / effect Endpoi Value Unit Organism Test method Notes
nt
Acute toxicity, by oral route: n.d.a.
Acute toxicity, by dermal n.d.a.
route:
On
Acute toxicity, by inhalation: n.d.a.
Skin corrosion/irritation: n.d.a.
Serious eye n.d.a.
damage/irritation:
Respiratory or skin n.d.a.
sensitisation:
Germ cell mutagenicity: n.d.a.
Carcinogenicity: n.d.a.
Reproductive toxicity: n.d.a.
Specific target organ toxicity -
single exposure (STOT-SE):
Specific target organ toxicity -
e n.d.a.
n.d.a.
repeated exposure (STOT-
nc
RE):
Aspiration hazard: n.d.a.
Symptoms: n.d.a.
Other information: Classification
according to calculation
procedure.
re
Possibly more information on environmental effects, see Section 2.1 (classification).

fe
Toxicity / effect Endpoint Time Value Unit Organism Test method Notes
Toxicity to fish: n.d.a.
Toxicity to daphnia: n.d.a.
Toxicity to algae: n.d.a.
Persistence and Not readily
Re
degradability: biodegradable Isolate

as much as possible
with an oil separator.
Bioaccumulative Concentration in
potential: organisms possible.
Mobility in soil: n.d.a.
Results of PBT and n.d.a.
vPvB assessment
Other adverse effects: n.d.a.
Other information: According to the
recipe, contains no
AOX.
13.1 Waste treatment methods

For the substance / mixture / residual amounts
Soaked polluted cloths, paper or other organic materials represent a fire hazard and should be controlled, collected and disposed
of.
Page 7 of 10
EC disposal code no.:

The waste codes are recommendations based on the scheduled use of this product.
Owing to the user's specific conditions for use and disposal, other waste codes may be
allocated under certain circumstances. (2014/955/EU)
13 02 05 mineral-based non-chlorinated engine, gear and lubricating oils
Recommendation:
Sewage disposal shall be discouraged.
Pay attention to local and national official regulations.
E.g. dispose at suitable refuse site.
E.g. suitable incineration plant.
For contaminated packing material
ly
Pay attention to local and national official regulations.
15 01 01 paper and cardboard packaging
15 01 02 plastic packaging
15 01 04 metallic packaging
Empty container completely.
On
Uncontaminated packaging can be recycled.
Dispose of packaging that cannot be cleaned in the same manner as the substance.
General statements
UN number: n.a.
Transport by road/by rail (ADR/RID)
UN proper shipping name:
Transport hazard class(es):
Packing group:
e n.a.
n.a.
Classification code: n.a.
nc
LQ (ADR 2015): n.a.
Environmental hazards: Not applicable
Tunnel restriction code:
Transport by sea (IMDG-code)
Transport hazard class(es): n.a.
re
Packing group: n.a.

Marine Pollutant: n.a
Transport by air (IATA)
Transport hazard class(es): n.a.
fe
Packing group: n.a.

Special precautions for user
Unless specified otherwise, general measures for safe transport must be followed.
Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL and the IBC Code
Re
Non-dangerous material according to Transport Regulations.
15.1 Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture
For classification and labelling see Section 2.
Observe restrictions:
Directive 2010/75/EU (VOC): < 0,1 %
15.2 Chemical safety assessment
A chemical safety assessment is not provided for mixtures.
EUF0013
Revised sections: 1 - 16
Classification and processes used to derive the classification of the mixture in accordance with
the ordinance (EG) 1272/2008 (CLP):
Page 8 of 10
Not applicable
The following phrases represent the posted Hazard Class and Risk Category Code (GHS/CLP) of the product and the constituents
(specified in Section 2 and 3).
Any abbreviations and acronyms used in this document:
AC Article Categories
ly
acc., acc. to according, according to
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
ADR Accord européen relatif au transport international des marchandises Dangereuses par Route (= European Agreement
concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road)
On
AOEL Acceptable Operator Exposure Level
AOX Adsorbable organic halogen compounds
approx. approximately
Art., Art. no. Article number
ATE Acute Toxicity Estimate according to Regulation (EC) 1272/2008 (CLP)
BAM Bundesanstalt für Materialforschung und -prüfung (Federal Institute for Materials Research and Testing, Germany)
BAuA Bundesanstalt für Arbeitsschutz und Arbeitsmedizin (= Federal Institute for Occupational Health and Safety, Germany)
BCF Bioconcentration factor
BGV Berufsgenossenschaftliche Vorschrift (= Accident Prevention Regulation)
BHT Butylhydroxytoluol (= 2,6-Di-t-butyl-4-methyl-phenol)
BOD Biochemical oxygen demand

e
BMGV Biological monitoring guidance value (EH40, UK)
BSEF Bromine Science and Environmental Forum

bw body weight
nc
CAS Chemical Abstracts Service
CEC Coordinating European Council for the Development of Performance Tests for Fuels, Lubricants and Other Fluids
CESIO Comité Européen des Agents de Surface et de leurs Intermédiaires Organiques
CIPAC Collaborative International Pesticides Analytical Council
CLP Classification, Labelling and Packaging (REGULATION (EC) No 1272/2008 on classification, labelling and packaging of
substances and mixtures)
re
CMR carcinogenic, mutagenic, reproductive toxic

COD Chemical oxygen demand
CTFA Cosmetic, Toiletry, and Fragrance Association
DMEL Derived Minimum Effect Level
DNEL Derived No Effect Level
DOC Dissolved organic carbon
fe
DT50 Dwell Time - 50% reduction of start concentration

DVS Deutscher Verband für Schweißen und verwandte Verfahren e.V. (= German Association for Welding and Allied Processes)
dw dry weight
e.g. for example (abbreviation of Latin 'exempli gratia'), for instance
EC European Community
ECHA European Chemicals Agency
Re
EEA European Economic Area

EEC European Economic Community
EINECS European Inventory of Existing Commercial Chemical Substances
ELINCS European List of Notified Chemical Substances
EN European Norms
EPA United States Environmental Protection Agency (United States of America)
ERC Environmental Release Categories
ES Exposure scenario
etc. et cetera
EU European Union
EWC European Waste Catalogue
Fax. Fax number
gen. general
GHS Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals
GWP Global warming potential
HET-CAM Hen's Egg Test - Chorionallantoic Membrane
HGWP Halocarbon Global Warming Potential
IARC International Agency for Research on Cancer
IATA International Air Transport Association
IBC Intermediate Bulk Container
IBC (Code) International Bulk Chemical (Code)
Page 9 of 10
IC Inhibitory concentration
IMDG-code International Maritime Code for Dangerous Goods
incl. including, inclusive
IUCLID International Uniform ChemicaL Information Database
LC lethal concentration
LC50 lethal concentration 50 percent kill
LCLo lowest published lethal concentration
LD Lethal Dose of a chemical
LD50 Lethal Dose, 50% kill
LDLo Lethal Dose Low
LOAELLowest Observed Adverse Effect Level
ly
LOEC Lowest Observed Effect Concentration
LOEL Lowest Observed Effect Level
LQ Limited Quantities
MARPOL International Convention for the Prevention of Marine Pollution from Ships
n.a. not applicable
On
n.av. not available
n.c. not checked
n.d.a. no data available
NIOSH National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (United States of America)
NOAEC No Observed Adverse Effective Concentration
NOAEL No Observed Adverse Effect Level
NOEC No Observed Effect Concentration
NOEL No Observed Effect Level
ODP Ozone Depletion Potential
OECD Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
org. organic
PAH polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon
e
PBT persistent, bioaccumulative and toxic
nc
PC Chemical product category
PE Polyethylene
PNEC Predicted No Effect Concentration
POCP Photochemical ozone creation potential
ppm parts per million
PROC Process category
PTFE Polytetrafluorethylene
re
REACH Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REGULATION (EC) No 1907/2006
concerning the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals)
REACH-IT List-No. 9xx-xxx-x No. is automatically assigned, e.g. to pre-registrations without a CAS No. or other numerical
identifier. List Numbers do not have any legal significance, rather they are purely technical identifiers for processing a submission
via REACH-IT.
RID Règlement concernant le transport International ferroviaire de marchandises Dangereuses (= Regulation concerning the
fe
International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Rail)

SADT Self-Accelerating Decomposition Temperature
SAR Structure Activity Relationship
SU Sector of use
SVHC Substances of Very High Concern
Re
Tel. Telephone
ThOD Theoretical oxygen demand
TOC Total organic carbon
TRGS Technische Regeln für Gefahrstoffe (=Technical Regulations for Hazardous Substances)
UN RTDG United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods
VbF Verordnung über brennbare Flüssigkeiten (= Regulation for flammable liquids (Austria))
VOC Volatile organic compounds
vPvB very persistent and very bioaccumulative
WEL-TWA, WEL-STEL WEL-TWA = Workplace Exposure Limit - Long-term exposure limit (8-hour TWA (= time weighted
average) reference period), WEL-STEL = Workplace Exposure Limit - Short-term exposure limit (15-minute reference period)
(EH40, UK).
WHO World Health Organization
wwt wet weight
The statements made here should describe the product with regard to the necessary safety precautions - they are
not meant to guarantee definite characteristics - but they are based on our present up-to-date knowledge.
No responsibility.
These statements were made by:
Chemical Check GmbH, Chemical Check Platz 1-7, D-32839 Steinheim, Tel.: +49 5233 94 17 0, Fax:
+49 5233 94 17 90
© by Chemical Check GmbH Gefahrstoffberatung. The copying or changing of this document
Page 10 of 10
is forbidden except with consent of the Chemical Check GmbH Gefahrstoffberatung.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
Safety Data Sheet according to Regulation (EC) No1907/2006
Page 1 of 12
SDS No. : 153494
V003.6
LOCTITE 243 known as Loctite 243 (Old) Revision: 25.07.2014
printing date: 16.05.2016
ly
1.1. Product identifier
On
LOCTITE 243 known as Loctite 243 (Old)
Contains:
Maleic acid
1.2. Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Intended use:
Adhesive
1.3. Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet

Henkel Ltd
Wood Lane End
HP2 4RQ
e
Hemel Hempstead
nc
Great Britain
Phone: +44 1442 278000

Fax-no.: +44 1442 278071
ua-productsafety.uk@uk.henkel.com
re
1.4. Emergency telephone number

24 Hours Emergency Tel: +44 (0)1442 278497
fe

2.1. Classification of the substance or mixture
Classification (CLP):
Skin sensitizer Category 1
Re
H317 May cause an allergic skin reaction.
Classification (DPD):
Sensitizing
R43 May cause sensitisation by skin contact.
2.2. Label elements
Label elements (CLP):
Hazard pictogram:
MSDS-No.: 153494 LOCTITE 243 known as Loctite 243 (Old) Page 2 of 12
V003.6
Signal word: Warning
Hazard statement: H317 May cause an allergic skin reaction.
Precautionary statement: P101 If medical advice is needed, have product container or label at hand.
P102 Keep out of reach of children.
Precautionary statement: P280 Wear protective gloves.

Prevention
Precautionary statement: P333+P313 If skin irritation or rash occurs: Get medical advice/attention.
Response
ly
Precautionary statement: P501 Dispose of contents/container to an appropriate treatment and disposal facility in
Disposal accordance with applicable laws and regulations, and product characteristics at time of
disposal.
On
Label elements (DPD):
Xi - Irritant
e
nc
re
Risk phrases:
Safety phrases:
S24 Avoid contact with skin.
S37 Wear suitable gloves.
fe
Additional labeling:
For consumer use only: S2 Keep out of the reach of children.
S46 If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately and show this container or label.
Re
Contains:
Maleic acid
2.3. Other hazards

None if used properly.

General chemical description:
Product based on polyethylene glycol dimethacrylate.
V003.6
Declaration of the ingredients according to CLP (EC) No 1272/2008:
Hazardous components EC Number content Classification

CAS-No. REACH-Reg No.
Cumene hydroperoxide 201-254-7 >= 0,1- < 1 % Acute toxicity 4; Dermal
80-15-9 H312
Specific target organ toxicity - repeated
exposure 2
H373
Acute toxicity 4; Oral
H302
Organic peroxides E
H242
Acute toxicity 3; Inhalation
H331
Skin corrosion 1B
ly
H314
Chronic hazards to the aquatic environment 2
H411
Maleic acid 203-742-5 >= 0,1- < 1 % Acute toxicity 4; Oral
On
110-16-7 01-2119488705-25 H302
Acute toxicity 4; Dermal
H312
Skin irritation 2
H315
Skin sensitizer 1
H317
Serious eye irritation 2
H319
Specific target organ toxicity - single
exposure 3
e
Acetic acid, 2-phenylhydrazide 204-055-3 >= 0,1- < 1 %
H335
Acute toxicity 3; Oral

nc
114-83-0 H301
Acute toxicity 4; Dermal
H312
Skin irritation 2; Dermal
H315
H319
re
H332
exposure 3; Inhalation
H335
Carcinogenicity 2
H351
fe
1,4-Naphthalenedione 204-977-6 >= 0,01- < 0,1 % Acute toxicity 3; Oral

130-15-4 H301
Skin irritation 2; Dermal
H315
Skin sensitizer 1; Dermal
Re
H317
H319
H330
exposure 3; Inhalation
H335
Acute hazards to the aquatic environment 1
H400
Chronic hazards to the aquatic environment 1
H410
M factor: 10
For full text of the H - statements and other abbreviations see section 16 "Other information".
Substances without classification may have community workplace exposure limits available.
V003.6
Declaration of ingredients according to DPD (EC) No 1999/45:

Cumene hydroperoxide 201-254-7 >= 0,1 - < 1 % T - Toxic; R23
80-15-9 Xn - Harmful; R21/22, R48/20/22
C - Corrosive; R34
O - Oxidizing; R7
N - Dangerous for the environment; R51/53
Maleic acid 203-742-5 >= 0,1 - < 1 % Xn - Harmful; R21/22
110-16-7 01-2119488705-25 Xi - Irritant; R36/37/38, R43
Cumene 202-704-5 >= 0,1 - < 2,5 % R10

98-82-8 Xn - Harmful; R65
Xi - Irritant; R37
ly
1,4-Naphthalenedione 204-977-6 >= 0,01 - <= 0,1 % T+ - Very toxic; R25, R26
130-15-4 Xi - Irritant; R36/37/38, R43
For full text of the R-Phrases indicated by codes see section 16 'Other Information'.
On

4.1. Description of first aid measures
Inhalation:
Move to fresh air. If symptoms persist, seek medical advice.
Skin contact:
e
Rinse with running water and soap.
Obtain medical attention if irritation persists.
nc
Eye contact:
Rinse immediately with plenty of running water (for 10 minutes), seek medical attention from a specialist.
Ingestion:
Rinse mouth, drink 1-2 glasses of water, do not induce vomiting, consult a doctor.
re
4.2. Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
SKIN: Rash, Urticaria.
Prolonged or repeated contact may cause eye irritation.

fe
4.3. Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
See section: Description of first aid measures
Re
5.1. Extinguishing media

Suitable extinguishing media:
Carbon dioxide, foam, powder
Fine water spray
Extinguishing media which must not be used for safety reasons:

None known
5.2. Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture

In the event of a fire, carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2) can be released.
In case of fire, keep containers cool with water spray.
5.3. Advice for firefighters
Wear self-contained breathing apparatus and full protective clothing, such as turn-out gear.
V003.6
6.1. Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures

Avoid skin and eye contact.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
6.2. Environmental precautions

Do not let product enter drains.
6.3. Methods and material for containment and cleaning up

For small spills wipe up with paper towel and place in container for disposal.
For large spills absorb onto inert absorbent material and place in sealed container for disposal.
ly
6.4. Reference to other sections
See advice in section 8
On
7.1. Precautions for safe handling
Use only in well-ventilated areas.
Prolonged or repeated skin contact should be avoided to minimise any risk of sensitisation.
Hygiene measures:
Good industrial hygiene practices should be observed.
Do not eat, drink or smoke while working.
Wash hands before work breaks and after finishing work.
e
7.2. Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities
Ensure good ventilation/extraction.
nc
Store in original containers at 8-21°C (46.4-69.8°F) and do not return residual materials to containers as contamination may
reduce the shelf life of the bulk product.
Do not store together with food or other consumables (coffee, tea, tobacco, etc.).
7.3. Specific end use(s)

Adhesive
re

fe
8.1. Control parameters
Valid for
Great Britain
Re
Ingredient ppm mg/m3 Type Category Remarks

PROPANE-1,2-DIOL, PARTICULATES 10 Time Weighted Average EH40 WEL
57-55-6 (TWA):
PROPANE-1,2-DIOL, TOTAL VAPOUR 150 474 Time Weighted Average EH40 WEL
AND PARTICULATES (TWA):
57-55-6
CUMENE 50 250 Short Term Exposure EH40 WEL
98-82-8 Limit (STEL):
CUMENE Skin designation: Can be absorbed through the EH40 WEL
98-82-8 skin.
CUMENE 25 125 Time Weighted Average EH40 WEL
98-82-8 (TWA):
CUMENE 50 250 Short Term Exposure Indicative ECTLV
CUMENE 20 100 Time Weighted Average Indicative ECTLV
98-82-8 (TWA):
V003.6
Predicted No-Effect Concentration (PNEC):
Name on list Environmental Exposure Value Remarks

Compartment period
mg/l ppm mg/kg others
Maleic acid aqua 0,074 mg/L
110-16-7 (freshwater)
Maleic acid aqua 0,744 mg/L
110-16-7 (intermittent
releases)
Maleic acid sediment 0,0624
110-16-7 (freshwater) mg/kg
Maleic acid STP 3,33 mg/L
110-16-7
ly
Derived No-Effect Level (DNEL):
Name on list Application Route of Health Effect Exposure Value Remarks
On
Area Exposure Time
Maleic acid worker Dermal Acute/short term 0,55 mg/cm2
110-16-7 exposure - local
effects
Maleic acid worker Dermal Long term 0,04 mg/cm2
effects
Maleic acid worker Dermal Acute/short term 58 mg/kg bw/day
110-16-7 exposure -
systemic effects
Maleic acid
110-16-7
e worker Dermal Long term
exposure -
systemic effects
3,3 mg/kg bw/day
nc
Biological Exposure Indices:
None
8.2. Exposure controls:

re
Engineering controls:
Ensure good ventilation/extraction.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
An approved mask or respirator fitted with an organic vapour cartridge should be worn if the product is used in a poorly
fe
ventilated area
Filter type: A
Hand protection:
Chemical-resistant protective gloves (EN 374).
Re
Suitable materials for short-term contact or splashes (recommended: at least protection index 2, corresponding to > 30
minutes permeation time as per EN 374):
nitrile rubber (NBR; >= 0.4 mm thickness)
Suitable materials for longer, direct contact (recommended: protection index 6, corresponding to > 480 minutes permeation
time as per EN 374):
This information is based on literature references and on information provided by glove manufacturers, or is derived by
analogy with similar substances. Please note that in practice the working life of chemical-resistant protective gloves may be
considerably shorter than the permeation time determined in accordance with EN 374 as a result of the many influencing
factors (e.g. temperature). If signs of wear and tear are noticed then the gloves should be replaced.
Eye protection:
Safety glasses with sideshields or chemical safety goggles should be worn if there is a risk of splashing.
Skin protection:
Wear suitable protective clothing.
V003.6

9.1. Information on basic physical and chemical properties
Appearance liquid
Liquid
blue
Odor characteristic
Odour threshold No data available / Not applicable
pH not applicable
pH 6,5 - 8,5
(25 °C (77 °F))
Initial boiling point > 149 °C (> 300.2 °F)
ly
Flash point > 93 °C (> 199.4 °F); Tagliabue closed cup
Decomposition temperature No data available / Not applicable
Vapour pressure 0,133 mbar
(27,0 °C (80.6 °F))
Vapour pressure < 300 mbar
On
(50 °C (122 °F))
Density 1,08 g/cm3
(20 °C (68 °F))
Bulk density No data available / Not applicable
Viscosity No data available / Not applicable
Viscosity (kinematic) No data available / Not applicable
Explosive properties No data available / Not applicable
Solubility (qualitative) Partially soluble
(23 °C (73.4 °F); Solvent: Water)
Solidification temperature
Melting point
Flammability
e No data available / Not applicable
No data available / Not applicable
Auto-ignition temperature No data available / Not applicable
nc
Explosive limits No data available / Not applicable
Partition coefficient: n-octanol/water No data available / Not applicable
Evaporation rate No data available / Not applicable
Vapor density No data available / Not applicable
Oxidising properties No data available / Not applicable
re
9.2. Other information

fe
10.1. Reactivity
Reaction with strong acids.
Reacts with strong oxidants.
10.2. Chemical stability

Re
Stable under recommended storage conditions.
10.3. Possibility of hazardous reactions

See section reactivity
10.4. Conditions to avoid

Stable under normal conditions of storage and use.
10.5. Incompatible materials

10.6. Hazardous decomposition products

carbon oxides.
V003.6

11.1. Information on toxicological effects
General toxicological information:

The mixture is classified based on the available hazard information for the ingredients as defined in the classification criteria
for mixtures for each hazard class or differentiation in Annex I to Regulation 1272/2008/EC. Relevant available
health/ecological information for the substances listed under Section 3 is provided in the following.
Oral toxicity:
May cause irritation to the digestive tract.
ly
Inhalative toxicity:
May cause irritation to respiratory system.
Eye irritation:
On
Prolonged or repeated contact may cause eye irritation.
Sensitizing:
May cause an allergic skin reaction.
Acute oral toxicity:
Hazardous components Value Value Route of Exposure Species Method

CAS-No.
Cumene hydroperoxide
80-15-9
type
LD50
e 550 mg/kg
application
oral
time
rat
Maleic acid LD50 708 mg/kg oral rat

nc
110-16-7
Acute dermal toxicity:

CAS-No. type application time
re
Maleic acid LD50 1.560 mg/kg dermal rabbit

110-16-7
Skin corrosion/irritation:
Hazardous components Result Exposure Species Method

fe
CAS-No. time
Cumene hydroperoxide corrosive rabbit Draize Test
80-15-9
Germ cell mutagenicity:

Re
Hazardous components Result Type of study / Metabolic Species Method

CAS-No. Route of activation /
administration Exposure time
Cumene hydroperoxide positive bacterial reverse without OECD Guideline 471
80-15-9 mutation assay (e.g (Bacterial Reverse Mutation
Ames test) Assay)
Cumene hydroperoxide negative dermal mouse
80-15-9
Repeated dose toxicity
Hazardous components Result Route of Exposure time / Species Method

CAS-No. application Frequency of
treatment
Cumene hydroperoxide inhalation: 6 h/d 5 d/w rat
80-15-9 aerosol
V003.6

General ecological information:
The mixture is classified based on the available hazard information for the ingredients as defined in the classification criteria
for mixtures for each hazard class or differentiation in Annex I to Regulation 1272/2008/EC. Relevant available
12.1. Toxicity
Ecotoxicity:
Do not empty into drains / surface water / ground water.
Hazardous components Value Value Acute Exposure Species Method
ly
CAS-No. type Toxicity time
Study
Cumene hydroperoxide LC50 3,9 mg/l Fish 96 h Oncorhynchus mykiss OECD Guideline
80-15-9 203 (Fish, Acute
Toxicity Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide EC50 18 mg/l Daphnia 48 h Daphnia magna OECD Guideline
On
80-15-9 202 (Daphnia sp.
Acute
Immobilisation
Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide ErC50 3,1 mg/l Algae 72 h Pseudokirchnerella subcapitata OECD Guideline
80-15-9 201 (Alga, Growth
Inhibition Test)
Maleic acid LC50 > 245 mg/l Fish 48 h Leuciscus idus DIN 38412-15
110-16-7
Maleic acid EC50 42,81 mg/l Daphnia 48 h Daphnia magna OECD Guideline
110-16-7
e 202 (Daphnia sp.
Acute
Immobilisation
Test)
nc
1,4-Naphthalenedione EC50 0,011 mg/l Algae 72 h Dunaliella bioculata OECD Guideline
130-15-4 201 (Alga, Growth
Inhibition Test)
12.2. Persistence and degradability

re
Persistence and Biodegradability:

The product is not biodegradable.
Hazardous components Result Route of Degradability Method

CAS-No. application
Cumene hydroperoxide no data 0% OECD Guideline 301 B (Ready
fe
80-15-9 Biodegradability: CO2 Evolution

Test)
Maleic acid readily biodegradable aerobic 97,08 % OECD Guideline 301 B (Ready
Test)
1,4-Naphthalenedione no data 0 - 60 % OECD 301 A - F
Re
130-15-4
12.3. Bioaccumulative potential / 12.4. Mobility in soil
Mobility:
Cured adhesives are immobile.
Bioaccumulative potential:
No data available for the product.
Hazardous components LogKow Bioconcentration Exposure Species Temperature Method

CAS-No. factor (BCF) time
V003.6
Cumene hydroperoxide 9,1 calculation OECD Guideline 305

80-15-9 (Bioconcentration: Flow-
through Fish Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide 2,16
80-15-9
Maleic acid -1,3 20 °C OECD Guideline 107
110-16-7 (Partition Coefficient (n-
octanol / water), Shake
Flask Method)
Acetic acid, 2- 0,74
phenylhydrazide
114-83-0
1,4-Naphthalenedione 1,71
130-15-4
ly
12.5. Results of PBT and vPvB assessment
Hazardous components PBT/vPvB

CAS-No.
Maleic acid Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
On
110-16-7 Bioaccumulative (vPvB) criteria.
12.6. Other adverse effects
No data available.
e SECTION 13: Disposal considerations

13.1. Waste treatment methods
Product disposal:
Dispose of in accordance with local and national regulations.
Contribution of this product to waste is very insignificant in comparison to article in which it is used
nc
Disposal of uncleaned packages:
After use, tubes, cartons and bottles containing residual product should be disposed of as chemically contaminated waste in
an authorised legal land fill site or incinerated.
Disposal must be made according to official regulations.
re
Waste code
08 04 09 waste adhesives and sealants containing organic solvents and other dangerous substances
fe
Re
V003.6

14.1. UN number
Not hazardous according to RID, ADR, ADNR, IMDG, IATA-DGR.
14.2. UN proper shipping name
14.3. Transport hazard class(es)
ly
14.4. Packaging group
14.5. Environmental hazards
On
14.6. Special precautions for user
14.7. Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code
e
not applicable
nc
15.1. Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture
VOC content < 3,00 %
(1999/13/EC)
re
15.2. Chemical safety assessment

A chemical safety assessment has not been carried out.
fe
Re
V003.6

The labelling of the product is indicated in Section 2. The full text
of all abbreviations indicated by codes in this safety data sheet are as follows:
R10 Flammable.
R21/22 Harmful in contact with skin and if swallowed.
R23 Toxic by inhalation.
R25 Toxic if swallowed.
R26 Very toxic by inhalation.
R34 Causes burns.
R36/37/38 Irritating to eyes, respiratory system and skin.
R37 Irritating to respiratory system.
R48/20/22 Harmful: danger of serious damage to health by prolonged exposure through inhalation and if swallowed.
ly
R50/53 Very toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.
R51/53 Toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.
R65 Harmful: may cause lung damage if swallowed.
R7 May cause fire.
H242 Heating may cause a fire.
On
H301 Toxic if swallowed.
H302 Harmful if swallowed.
H312 Harmful in contact with skin.
H314 Causes severe skin burns and eye damage.
H315 Causes skin irritation.
H319 Causes serious eye irritation.
H330 Fatal if inhaled.
H331 Toxic if inhaled.
H332 Harmful if inhaled.
e
H335 May cause respiratory irritation.
H351 Suspected of causing cancer.
H373 May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure.
nc
H400 Very toxic to aquatic life.
H410 Very toxic to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
H411 Toxic to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
re
Further information:
This information is based on our current level of knowledge and relates to the product in the state in which it is delivered. It is
intended to describe our products from the point of view of safety requirements and is not intended to guarantee any
particular properties.
fe
Re
Safety Data Sheet according to (EC) No 1907/2006
Page 1 of 18
SDS No. : 153475
V009.0
LOCTITE 603 Revision: 11.03.2016
printing date: 17.05.2016
Replaces version from: 30.07.2015
ly
1.1. Product identifier
On
LOCTITE 603
Contains:
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate
Acrylic acid
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl dimethacrylate
Acetic acid, 2-phenylhydrazide
1.2. Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against
Intended use:
Anaerobic Sealant
e
nc
1.3. Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet
Henkel Ltd
Wood Lane End
HP2 4RQ Hemel Hempstead
Great Britain
re
Phone: +44 1442 278000

Fax-no.: +44 1442 278071
ua-productsafety.uk@uk.henkel.com
fe
1.4. Emergency telephone number

24 Hours Emergency Tel: +44 (0)1442 278497

Re
2.1. Classification of the substance or mixture
Classification (CLP):
Skin corrosion/irritation Category 2
Skin sensitizer Category 1
Serious eye damage Category 1
H318 Causes serious eye damage.
Specific target organ toxicity - single exposure Category 3
Target organ: respiratory tract irritation
Chronic hazards to the aquatic environment Category 3
H412 Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
MSDS-No.: 153475 LOCTITE 603 Page 2 of 18
V009.0
2.2. Label elements
Label elements (CLP):
Hazard pictogram:
Signal word: Danger
Hazard statement: H315 Causes skin irritation.
ly
H412 Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
On
Precautionary statement: ***For consumer use only: P101 If medical advice is needed, have product container or
label at hand. P102 Keep out of reach of children. P501 Dispose of waste and residues in
accordance with local authority requirements***
Precautionary statement: P261 Avoid breathing vapours.

Prevention P273 Avoid release to the environment.
P280 Wear protective gloves/eye protection.
Precautionary statement:
Response
e P305+P351+P338 IF IN EYES: Rinse cautiously with water for several minutes. Remove
contact lenses, if present and easy to do. Continue rinsing.
P302+P352 IF ON SKIN: Wash with plenty of water.
nc
P333+P313 If skin irritation or rash occurs: Get medical advice/attention.
2.3. Other hazards

Non corrosive to skin in accordance with the in vitro test method, B40 skin corrosion - Human skin model assay, equivalent to
test method OECD 431 or based on analogy to similar products tested.
re
Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very Bioaccumulative (vPvB) criteria.

3.2. Mixtures
fe
General chemical description:

Anaerobic Sealant
Re
V009.0
Declaration of the ingredients according to CLP (EC) No 1272/2008:

4-t-Butylcyclohexyl methacrylate 256-277-5 25- 50 % STOT SE 3
46729-07-1 H335
Skin Irrit. 2
H315
Eye Irrit. 2
H319
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate 214-711-0 10- 20 % Skin Sens. 1B

1189-08-8 01-2119969461-31 H317
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate 248-666-3 5- < 10 % Skin Sens. 1

27813-02-1 01-2119490226-37 H317
ly
Eye Irrit. 2
H319
Acrylic acid 201-177-9 5- < 10 % Flam. Liq. 3

79-10-7 01-2119452449-31
On
H226
Acute Tox. 4; Oral
H302
Acute Tox. 4; Dermal
H312
Skin Corr. 1A
H314
Acute Tox. 4; Inhalation
H332
STOT SE 3
H335
e Aquatic Acute 1
H400
Aquatic Chronic 2
H411
nc
Octylphenol ethoxylate 0,25- < 2,5 % Acute Tox. 4; Oral
9036-19-5 H302
Eye Dam. 1
H318
Aquatic Chronic 2
H411
re
=====
EU. REACH Candidate List of Substances of
Very High Concern for Authorization
(SVHC)
Cumene hydroperoxide 201-254-7 0,1- < 1 % Acute Tox. 4; Dermal

fe
80-15-9 H312
STOT RE 2
H373
Acute Tox. 4; Oral
H302
Org. Perox. E
H242
Re

H331
Aquatic Chronic 2
H411
Skin Corr. 1B
H314
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl dimethacrylate 203-652-6 0,1- < 1 % Skin Sens. 1B

109-16-0 01-2119969287-21 H317
Methacrylic acid 201-204-4 0,1- < 1 % Acute Tox. 4; Oral

79-41-4 01-2119463884-26 H302
Acute Tox. 3; Dermal
H311
H332
Skin Corr. 1A
H314
Acetic acid, 2-phenylhydrazide 204-055-3 0,1- < 1 % Acute Tox. 3; Oral
114-83-0 H301
Skin Irrit. 2
V009.0
H315
Skin Sens. 1
H317
Eye Irrit. 2
H319
STOT SE 3; Inhalation
H335
Carc. 2
H351
For full text of the H - statements and other abbreviations see section 16 "Other information".
ly
4.1. Description of first aid measures
On
Inhalation:
Move to fresh air. If symptoms persist, seek medical advice.
Skin contact:
Rinse with running water and soap.
Seek medical advice.
Eye contact:
Rinse immediately with plenty of running water (for 10 minutes). Seek medical attention if necessary.
Ingestion:
e
Rinse out mouth, drink 1-2 glasses of water, do not induce vomiting.
nc
Seek medical advice.
4.2. Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed
SKIN: Redness, inflammation.
SKIN: Rash, Urticaria.

re
RESPIRATORY: Irritation, coughing, shortness of breath, chest tightness.
After eye contact: Corrosive, may cause permanent damage to eyes (impairment of vision).
fe
4.3. Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed
See section: Description of first aid measures

Re
5.1. Extinguishing media

Suitable extinguishing media:
Carbon dioxide, foam, powder
Extinguishing media which must not be used for safety reasons:

None known
5.2. Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture

Oxides of carbon, oxides of nitrogen, irritating organic vapors.
Sulphur oxides
5.3. Advice for firefighters

Wear self-contained breathing apparatus and full protective clothing, such as turn-out gear.
Additional information:
In case of fire, keep containers cool with water spray.
V009.0
6.1. Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures

6.2. Environmental precautions

Do not let product enter drains.
6.3. Methods and material for containment and cleaning up

For small spills wipe up with paper towel and place in container for disposal.
For large spills absorb onto inert absorbent material and place in sealed container for disposal.
6.4. Reference to other sections
ly
See advice in section 8
On
7.1. Precautions for safe handling
Prolonged or repeated skin contact should be avoided to minimise any risk of sensitisation.
Hygiene measures:
Good industrial hygiene practices should be observed.
Do not eat, drink or smoke while working.
Wash hands before work breaks and after finishing work.
e
7.2. Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities
Store in original containers at 8-21°C (46.4-69.8°F) and do not return residual materials to containers as contamination may
reduce the shelf life of the bulk product.
nc
7.3. Specific end use(s)
Anaerobic Sealant
re
fe
Re
V009.0
8.1. Control parameters
Valid for
Great Britain
Ingredient [Regulated substance] ppm mg/m3 Value type Short term exposure limit Regulatory list
category / Remarks
Methacrylic acid 40 143 Short Term Exposure EH40 WEL
ly
[METHACRYLIC ACID]
Methacrylic acid 20 72 Time Weighted Average EH40 WEL
79-41-4 (TWA):
[METHACRYLIC ACID]
Cumene 50 250 Short Term Exposure EH40 WEL
On
[CUMENE]
Cumene Skin designation: Can be absorbed through the EH40 WEL
98-82-8 skin.
[CUMENE]
Cumene 25 125 Time Weighted Average EH40 WEL
98-82-8 (TWA):
[CUMENE]
Cumene 50 250 Short Term Exposure Indicative ECTLV
[CUMENE]
Cumene
98-82-8
[CUMENE]
e 20 100 Time Weighted Average
(TWA):
Indicative ECTLV
nc
Valid for
Ireland
Ingredient [Regulated substance] ppm mg/m3 Value type Short term exposure limit Regulatory list
re
category / Remarks
Acrylic acid 2 6 Time Weighted Average IR_OEL
79-10-7 (TWA):
[ACRYLIC ACID]
Methacrylic acid 20 70 Time Weighted Average IR_OEL
79-41-4 (TWA):
fe
[METHACRYLIC ACID]
Methacrylic acid 40 140 Short Term Exposure IR_OEL
[METHACRYLIC ACID]
Cumene 20 100 Time Weighted Average Indicative OELV IR_OEL
98-82-8 (TWA):
Re
[ISOPROPYL BENZENE]
Cumene 50 250 Short Term Exposure Indicative OELV IR_OEL
[ISOPROPYL BENZENE]
Cumene Skin designation: Can be absorbed through the IR_OEL
98-82-8 skin.
[ISOPROPYL BENZENE]
Cumene 50 250 Short Term Exposure Indicative ECTLV
[CUMENE]
Cumene 20 100 Time Weighted Average Indicative ECTLV
98-82-8 (TWA):
[CUMENE]
V009.0
Predicted No-Effect Concentration (PNEC):
Name on list Environmental Exposure Value Remarks

Compartment period
mg/l ppm mg/kg others
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- aqua 0,904 mg/L
1,2-diol (freshwater)
27813-02-1
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- aqua (marine 0,904 mg/L
1,2-diol water)
27813-02-1
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- sewage 10 mg/L
1,2-diol treatment plant
27813-02-1 (STP)
ly
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- aqua 0,972 mg/L
1,2-diol (intermittent
27813-02-1 releases)
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- sediment 6,28 mg/kg
1,2-diol (freshwater)
27813-02-1
On
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- sediment 6,28 mg/kg
1,2-diol (marine water)
27813-02-1
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- soil 0,727
1,2-diol mg/kg
27813-02-1
Acrylic acid aqua 0,003 mg/L
79-10-7 (freshwater)
Acrylic acid aqua (marine 0,0003 mg/L
79-10-7 water)
Acrylic acid
79-10-7
e aqua
(intermittent
releases)
0,0013 mg/L
Acrylic acid sewage 0,9 mg/L

nc
79-10-7 treatment plant
(STP)
Acrylic acid sediment 0,0236
79-10-7 (freshwater) mg/kg
Acrylic acid sediment 0,00236
79-10-7 (marine water) mg/kg
Acrylic acid soil 1 mg/kg
re
79-10-7
Acrylic acid oral 0,0023
79-10-7 mg/kg
Acrylic acid Predator 0,03 g/kg
79-10-7
fe
Re
V009.0
Derived No-Effect Level (DNEL):
Name on list Application Route of Health Effect Exposure Value Remarks

Area Exposure Time
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate Workers inhalation Long term 14,5 mg/m3
1189-08-8 exposure -
systemic effects
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate Workers dermal Long term 4,2 mg/kg bw/day
1189-08-8 exposure -
systemic effects
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- Workers dermal Long term 4,2 mg/kg bw/day
1,2-diol exposure -
27813-02-1 systemic effects
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- Workers Inhalation Long term 14,7 mg/m3
ly
1,2-diol exposure -
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- general dermal Long term 2,5 mg/kg bw/day
1,2-diol population exposure -
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- general Inhalation Long term 8,8 mg/m3
On
Methacrylic acid, monoester with propane- general oral Long term 2,5 mg/kg bw/day
Acrylic acid Workers inhalation Long term 30 mg/m3
effects
Acrylic acid Workers inhalation Acute/short term 30 mg/m3
Acrylic acid
79-10-7
e Workers dermal
effects
Acute/short term
exposure - local
1 mg/cm2
effects
nc
Acrylic acid general dermal Acute/short term 1 mg/cm2
79-10-7 population exposure - local
effects
Acrylic acid general inhalation Acute/short term 3,6 mg/m3
effects
Acrylic acid general inhalation Long term 3,6 mg/m3
re

effects
Biological Exposure Indices:

None
fe
8.2. Exposure controls:
Re
An approved mask or respirator fitted with an organic vapour cartridge should be worn if the product is used in a poorly
ventilated area
Filter type: A
V009.0
Hand protection:
Chemical-resistant protective gloves (EN 374).
Suitable materials for short-term contact or splashes (recommended: at least protection index 2, corresponding to > 30 minutes
permeation time as per EN 374):
Suitable materials for longer, direct contact (recommended: protection index 6, corresponding to > 480 minutes permeation time
as per EN 374):
This information is based on literature references and on information provided by glove manufacturers, or is derived by analogy
with similar substances. Please note that in practice the working life of chemical-resistant protective gloves may be considerably
shorter than the permeation time determined in accordance with EN 374 as a result of the many influencing factors (e.g.
temperature). If signs of wear and tear are noticed then the gloves should be replaced.
ly
Eye protection:
Wear protective glasses.
Protective eye equipment should conform to EN166.
On
Skin protection:
Wear suitable protective clothing.
Protective clothing should conform to EN 14605 for liquid splashes or to EN 13982 for dusts.
Advices to personal protection equipment:
The information provided on personal protective equipment is for guidance purposes only. A full risk assessment should be
conducted prior to using this product to determine the appropriate personal protective equipment to suit local conditions.
Personal protective equipment should conform to the relevant EN standard.
eSECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties
nc
9.1. Information on basic physical and chemical properties
Appearance liquid
green
Odor characteristic
Odour threshold No data available / Not applicable
re
pH No data available / Not applicable

Initial boiling point > 149 °C (> 300.2 °F)
Flash point > 100,00 °C (> 212 °F); Tagliabue closed cup
Decomposition temperature No data available / Not applicable
fe
Vapour pressure
(27,0 °C (80.6 °F))
Vapour pressure < 300 mbar
(50 °C (122 °F))
Density 1,07 g/cm3
()
Re
Bulk density No data available / Not applicable

Viscosity No data available / Not applicable
Viscosity (kinematic) No data available / Not applicable
Explosive properties No data available / Not applicable
Solubility (qualitative) Slight
(Solvent: Water)
Solidification temperature No data available / Not applicable
Melting point No data available / Not applicable
Flammability No data available / Not applicable
Auto-ignition temperature No data available / Not applicable
Explosive limits No data available / Not applicable
Partition coefficient: n-octanol/water No data available / Not applicable
Evaporation rate No data available / Not applicable
Vapor density No data available / Not applicable
Oxidising properties No data available / Not applicable
9.2. Other information

V009.0

10.1. Reactivity
Reaction with strong acids.
Reacts with strong oxidants.
10.2. Chemical stability

Stable under recommended storage conditions.
10.3. Possibility of hazardous reactions

See section reactivity
ly
10.4. Conditions to avoid
Stable
10.5. Incompatible materials

On
10.6. Hazardous decomposition products
None if used for intended purpose.

11.1. Information on toxicological effects
e
General toxicological information:
The mixture is classified based on the available hazard information for the ingredients as defined in the classification criteria for
mixtures for each hazard class or differentiation in Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008. Relevant available
nc
STOT-single exposure:
May cause respiratory irritation.
Oral toxicity:
re
May cause irritation to the digestive tract.
Skin irritation:
Causes skin irritation.
Non corrosive to skin in accordance with the in vitro test method, B40 skin corrosion - Human skin model assay, equivalent to
fe
test method OECD 431 or based on analogy to similar products tested.
Eye irritation:
Causes serious eye damage.
Re
Sensitizing:
May cause an allergic skin reaction.
V009.0
Acute oral toxicity:

4-t-Butylcyclohexyl LD50 > 2.000 mg/kg oral rat
methacrylate
46729-07-1
1-Methyltrimethylene LD50 > 5.000 mg/kg oral rat
dimethacrylate
1189-08-8
Hydroxypropyl LD50 > 2.000 mg/kg oral rat OECD Guideline 401 (Acute
methacrylate Oral Toxicity)
27813-02-1
Acrylic acid LD50 1.500 mg/kg oral rat BASF Test
79-10-7
ly
Cumene hydroperoxide LD50 550 mg/kg oral rat
80-15-9
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl LD50 10.837 mg/kg oral rat
dimethacrylate
109-16-0
On
Methacrylic acid LD50 1.320 mg/kg oral rat OECD Guideline 401 (Acute
79-41-4 Oral Toxicity)
Acute inhalative toxicity:

Acrylic acid LC50 > 5,1 mg/l Vapor. 4h rat OECD Guideline 403 (Acute
79-10-7 Inhalation Toxicity)
Acrylic acid Acute 11 mg/l vapour Expert judgement
79-10-7
Methacrylic acid LC50

e
toxicity
estimate
(ATE)
> 3,6 mg/l aerosol 4h rat OECD Guideline 403 (Acute
nc
79-41-4 Inhalation Toxicity)
Acute dermal toxicity:

1-Methyltrimethylene LD50 > 3.000 mg/kg dermal rabbit
re
dimethacrylate
1189-08-8
Hydroxypropyl LD50 > 5.000 mg/kg dermal rabbit
methacrylate
27813-02-1
Acrylic acid Acute 1.100 mg/kg dermal Expert judgement
fe
79-10-7 toxicity
estimate
(ATE)
Acrylic acid LD50 > 2.000 mg/kg rabbit OECD Guideline 402 (Acute
79-10-7 Dermal Toxicity)
Methacrylic acid Acute 500 mg/kg dermal Expert judgement
79-41-4 toxicity
Re
estimate
(ATE)
Methacrylic acid LD50 500 - 1.000 rabbit Dermal Toxicity Screening
79-41-4 mg/kg
Skin corrosion/irritation:

CAS-No. time
Acrylic acid highly corrosive 3 min rabbit OECD Guideline 404 (Acute
79-10-7 Dermal Irritation / Corrosion)
Cumene hydroperoxide corrosive rabbit Draize Test
80-15-9
Methacrylic acid Category 1A (corrosive) 4h rabbit OECD Guideline 404 (Acute
79-41-4 Dermal Irritation / Corrosion)
V009.0
Serious eye damage/irritation:

CAS-No. time
Acrylic acid corrosive 21 d rabbit BASF Test
79-10-7
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl slightly irritating 24 h rabbit OECD Guideline 405 (Acute
dimethacrylate Eye Irritation / Corrosion)
109-16-0
Methacrylic acid Category I rabbit Draize Test
79-41-4
Respiratory or skin sensitization:
ly
Hazardous components Result Test type Species Method
CAS-No.
1-Methyltrimethylene sensitising Mouse mouse OECD Guideline 429 (Skin
dimethacrylate local Sensitisation: Local Lymph
1189-08-8 lymphnod Node Assay)
On
e assay
(LLNA)
Acrylic acid not sensitising Skin guinea pig
79-10-7 painting
test
Methacrylic acid not sensitising Buehler guinea pig OECD Guideline 406 (Skin
79-41-4 test Sensitisation)
Germ cell mutagenicity: e

Hazardous components Result Type of study / Metabolic Species Method
CAS-No. Route of activation /
administration Exposure time
Acrylic acid negative bacterial reverse with and without
nc
79-10-7 mutation assay (e.g
Ames test)
Cumene hydroperoxide positive bacterial reverse without OECD Guideline 471
Ames test) Assay)
Cumene hydroperoxide negative dermal mouse
80-15-9
re
Methacrylic acid negative bacterial reverse with and without OECD Guideline 471
Ames test) Assay)
Methacrylic acid negative inhalation mouse OECD Guideline 478 (Genetic
79-41-4 Toxicology: Rodent Dominant
Lethal Test)
fe
Repeated dose toxicity
Hazardous components Result Route of Exposure time / Species Method

CAS-No. application Frequency of
treatment
Re
Cumene hydroperoxide inhalation: 6 h/d5 d/w rat

80-15-9 aerosol

General ecological information:
The mixture is classified based on the available hazard information for the ingredients as defined in the classification criteria for
mixtures for each hazard class or differentiation in Annex I to Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008. Relevant available
12.1. Toxicity
Ecotoxicity:
Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
V009.0
Hazardous components Value Value Acute Exposure Species Method

CAS-No. type Toxicity time
Study
1-Methyltrimethylene LC50 32,5 mg/l Fish 48 h DIN 38412-15
dimethacrylate
1189-08-8
1-Methyltrimethylene EC50 9,79 mg/l Algae 72 h Desmodesmus subspicatus OECD Guideline
dimethacrylate 201 (Alga, Growth
1189-08-8 Inhibition Test)
NOEC 2,11 mg/l Algae 72 h Desmodesmus subspicatus OECD Guideline
201 (Alga, Growth
Inhibition Test)
1-Methyltrimethylene NOEC 20 mg/l Bacteria 28 d activated sludge, domestic not specified
dimethacrylate
1189-08-8
1-Methyltrimethylene NOEC 5,09 mg/l chronic 21 d Daphnia magna OECD 211
ly
dimethacrylate Daphnia (Daphnia magna,
1189-08-8 Reproduction Test)
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate LC50 493 mg/l Fish 48 h Leuciscus idus melanotus DIN 38412-15
27813-02-1
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate EC50 > 130 mg/l Daphnia 48 h Daphnia magna OECD Guideline
On
27813-02-1 202 (Daphnia sp.
Acute
Immobilisation
Test)
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate EC10 1.140 mg/l Bacteria 16 h
27813-02-1
Acrylic acid LC50 27 mg/l Fish 96 h Salmo gairdneri (new name: EPA OTS
79-10-7 Oncorhynchus mykiss) 797.1400 (Fish
Acute Toxicity
Test)
Acrylic acid EC10 0,03 mg/l Algae 72 h Scenedesmus subspicatus (new OECD Guideline
79-10-7
e
EC50 0,13 mg/l Algae 72 h
name: Desmodesmus
subspicatus)
201 (Alga, Growth
Inhibition Test)
Scenedesmus subspicatus (new OECD Guideline
name: Desmodesmus 201 (Alga, Growth
nc
subspicatus) Inhibition Test)
Acrylic acid EC10 41 mg/l Bacteria 16 h
79-10-7
Acrylic acid NOEC 19 mg/l chronic 21 d Daphnia magna EPA OTS
79-10-7 Daphnia 797.1330 (Daphnid
Chronic Toxicity
Test)
re
Cumene hydroperoxide LC50 3,9 mg/l Fish 96 h Oncorhynchus mykiss OECD Guideline
80-15-9 203 (Fish, Acute
Toxicity Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide EC50 18 mg/l Daphnia 48 h Daphnia magna OECD Guideline
80-15-9 202 (Daphnia sp.
Acute
Immobilisation
fe
Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide ErC50 3,1 mg/l Algae 72 h Pseudokirchnerella subcapitata OECD Guideline
80-15-9 201 (Alga, Growth
Inhibition Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide EC10 70 mg/l Bacteria 30 min
80-15-9
Re
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl LC50 16,4 mg/l Fish 96 h OECD Guideline

dimethacrylate 203 (Fish, Acute
109-16-0 Toxicity Test)
Methacrylic acid LC50 85 mg/l Fish 96 h Salmo gairdneri (new name: EPA OTS
79-41-4 Oncorhynchus mykiss) 797.1400 (Fish
Acute Toxicity
Test)
Methacrylic acid EC50 > 130 mg/l Daphnia 48 h Daphnia magna EPA OTS
79-41-4 797.1300 (Aquatic
Invertebrate Acute
Toxicity Test,
Freshwater
Daphnids)
Methacrylic acid NOEC 8,2 mg/l Algae 72 h Selenastrum capricornutum OECD Guideline
79-41-4 (new name: Pseudokirchnerella 201 (Alga, Growth
subcapitata) Inhibition Test)
EC50 45 mg/l Algae 72 h Selenastrum capricornutum OECD Guideline
(new name: Pseudokirchnerella 201 (Alga, Growth
subcapitata) Inhibition Test)
Methacrylic acid EC10 100 mg/l Bacteria 17 h
79-41-4
V009.0
12.2. Persistence and degradability
Persistence and Biodegradability:

Hazardous components Result Route of Degradability Method

CAS-No. application
1-Methyltrimethylene readily biodegradable aerobic 84 % OECD Guideline 310 (Ready
dimethacrylate BiodegradabilityCO2 in Sealed
1189-08-8 Vessels (Headspace Test)
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate readily biodegradable aerobic 94,2 % OECD Guideline 301 E (Ready
27813-02-1 biodegradability: Modified OECD
Screening Test)
Acrylic acid readily biodegradable aerobic 81 % OECD Guideline 301 D (Ready
ly
79-10-7 Biodegradability: Closed Bottle
Test)
inherently biodegradable aerobic 100 % OECD Guideline 302 B (Inherent
biodegradability: Zahn-
Wellens/EMPA Test)
Cumene hydroperoxide no data 0% OECD Guideline 301 B (Ready
On
Test)
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl readily biodegradable 85 % OECD Guideline 301 B (Ready
dimethacrylate Biodegradability: CO2 Evolution
109-16-0 Test)
Methacrylic acid inherently biodegradable aerobic 100 % OECD Guideline 302 B (Inherent
79-41-4 biodegradability: Zahn-
Wellens/EMPA Test)
readily biodegradable aerobic 86 % OECD Guideline 301 D (Ready
Biodegradability: Closed Bottle
e
12.3. Bioaccumulative potential / 12.4. Mobility in soil
Test)
nc
Mobility:
Cured adhesives are immobile.
Bioaccumulative potential:
re
Hazardous components LogKow Bioconcentration Exposure Species Temperature Method

CAS-No. factor (BCF) time
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate 0,97
27813-02-1
Acrylic acid 3,16
79-10-7
Acrylic acid 0,46 25 °C OECD Guideline 107
fe

Flask Method)
Cumene hydroperoxide 9,1 calculation OECD Guideline 305
80-15-9 (Bioconcentration: Flow-
through Fish Test)
Re
Cumene hydroperoxide 2,16

80-15-9
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl 1,88
dimethacrylate
109-16-0
Methacrylic acid 0,93 22 °C OECD Guideline 107
Flask Method)
Acetic acid, 2- 0,74
phenylhydrazide
114-83-0
12.5. Results of PBT and vPvB assessment
Hazardous components PBT/vPvB

CAS-No.
V009.0
4-t-Butylcyclohexyl methacrylate Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
Acrylic acid Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
2,2'-Ethylenedioxydiethyl dimethacrylate Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
Methacrylic acid Not fulfilling Persistent, Bioaccumulative and Toxic (PBT), very Persistent and very
12.6. Other adverse effects
No data available.
ly
On
13.1. Waste treatment methods
Product disposal:
Dispose of in accordance with local and national regulations.
Disposal of uncleaned packages:

After use, tubes, cartons and bottles containing residual product should be disposed of as chemically contaminated waste in an
authorised legal land fill site or incinerated.
Disposal must be made according to official regulations.
Waste code
e
08 04 09 waste adhesives and sealants containing organic solvents and other dangerous substances
nc
14.1. UN number
re
Not hazardous according to RID, ADR, ADN, IMDG, IATA-DGR.
14.2. UN proper shipping name

fe
14.3. Transport hazard class(es)
14.4. Packing group

Re
14.5. Environmental hazards
14.6. Special precautions for user
14.7. Transport in bulk according to Annex II of Marpol and the IBC Code
not applicable
V009.0
15.1. Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture
VOC content <3%
(2010/75/EC)
15.2. Chemical safety assessment

A chemical safety assessment has not been carried out.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re
V009.0

The labelling of the product is indicated in Section 2. The full text
of all abbreviations indicated by codes in this safety data sheet are as follows:
H226 Flammable liquid and vapor.
H242 Heating may cause a fire.
H301 Toxic if swallowed.
H302 Harmful if swallowed.
H311 Toxic in contact with skin.
H312 Harmful in contact with skin.
H314 Causes severe skin burns and eye damage.
ly
H319 Causes serious eye irritation.
H331 Toxic if inhaled.
H332 Harmful if inhaled.
H351 Suspected of causing cancer.
On
H373 May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure.
H400 Very toxic to aquatic life.
H411 Toxic to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
Further information:
This information is based on our current level of knowledge and relates to the product in the state in which it is delivered. It is
intended to describe our products from the point of view of safety requirements and is not intended to guarantee any particular
properties.
Label elements (DPD):

e
nc
Xi - Irritant
re
fe
Risk phrases:
R37/38 Irritating to respiratory system and skin.
R41 Risk of serious damage to eyes.
Re

R52/53 Harmful to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.
Safety phrases:
S24/25 Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
S26 In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice.
S28 After contact with skin, wash immediately with plenty of water and soap.
S37/39 Wear suitable gloves and eye/face protection.
S51 Use only in well-ventilated areas.
Additional labeling:
For consumer use only: S2 Keep out of the reach of children.
S46 If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately and show this container or label.
Contains:
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate,
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate
V009.0
Contains:
1-Methyltrimethylene dimethacrylate,
Hydroxypropyl methacrylate,
Acrylic acid
Relevant changes in this safety data sheet are indicated by vertical lines at the left margin in the body of this document.
Corresponding text is displayed in a different color on shadowed fields.
ly
On
e
nc
re
fe
Re

V8900 - System Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

V8900 - System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

To Table of Contents

SYSTEM USER MANUAL

Brüel & Kjær VTS Intranet

Jarman Way, Royston, SG8 5BQ

e This is the English Original Version

Brüel & Kjær VTS Ltd

02 19/07/2017 Updated to include further changes to the Pedestal Clive Twinley

0000-3005290-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0000-3005290-UM-EN-02

0000-3005290-UM-EN-02 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

1.2. Contact Details

Local Contact Details

Service and Repair

1.3. Symbols Used in the Document

Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0100-ALL-UM-EN-01

WARNING: HIGH NOISE LEVEL

• Advice on limit of danger zone.

1.4. Declaration of Conformity

Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0100-ALL-UM-EN-01

0100-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2017 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

2.5.13. Low Frequency Fields Risks and Hazards

2.5.16. Lifting Hazards

2.6. Emergency Stop

Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0200-ALL-UM-EN-01

0200-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

2.1. Purpose of the Section

Acronym or Headline Description

Protective Conductor Terminal

Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0200-ALL-UM-EN-01

WARNING: HIGH NOISE LEVEL

WARNING: MAGNETIC FLUX

The machine should not be used for any other purpose.

2.5. Risks and Hazards

0200-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

2.5.1. Noise Risks and Hazards

2.5.2. Personnel Risks and Hazards

equipment, either at normal working levels or at high level, etc.

working on the equipment.

Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0200-ALL-UM-EN-01

2.5.2.1 Manual Handling

2.5.2.2 Working at Height.

when the equipment is mounted on a seismic base in a pit.

2.5.2.3 Anti-Static Precautions

0200-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

WARNING: SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENTS

Ensure regular cleaning of the air filters.

• At altitudes exceeding 1000m, this equipment must be operated at

2.5.4. Mechanical Risks and Hazards

2.5.5. Electrical Risks and Hazards

present immediately after isolation.

• Within the EU, refer to the latest issue of the: -

2.5.5.2 BS7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations

area during installation or maintenance unless under direct supervision of a

touching. Always prove circuits are “dead” with proprietary equipment

• Remember that voltage sources from other equipment may be present in

Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0200-ALL-UM-EN-01

WARNING: MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES

0200-ALL-UM-EN-01 Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved

2.5.6. Pneumatic Risks and Hazards

2.5.7. Hydraulic Risks and Hazards

2.5.8. Water Risks and Hazards

Copyright © 2016 Brüel & Kjær . All Rights Reserved 0200-ALL-UM-EN-01

2.5.9. Temperature Risks and Hazards

2.5.10. Blower Outlet Risks and Hazards (Air-cooled vibrators)